Nortel Networks | User manual | Circuit Card Description and Installation

Title page

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Nortel Communication Server 1000 Release 4.5

Circuit Card

Description and Installation

Document Number: 553-3001-211

Document Release: Standard 3.00

Date: August 2005

Year Publish FCC TM

Copyright © Nortel Networks Limited 2005

All Rights Reserved

Produced in Canada

Information is subject to change without notice. Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes in design or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant.

Nortel, Nortel (Logo), the Globemark, This is the Way, This is Nortel (Design mark), SL-1, Meridian 1, and

Succession are trademarks of Nortel Networks.

4

Page 3 of 906

Revision history

August 2005

Standard 3.00. This document is up-issued to support Communication

Server 1000 Release 4.5.

September 2004

Standard 2.00. This document is up-issued for Communication Server 1000

Release 4.0.

October 2003

Standard 1.00. This document is a new NTP for Succession 3.0. It was created to support a restructuring of the Documentation Library, which resulted in the merging of multiple legacy NTPs. This new document consolidates information previously contained in the following legacy documents, now retired:

• Line Cards: Description (553-3001-105)

• Trunk Cards: Description (553-3001-106)

• Serial Data Interface Cards: Description (553-3001-107)

• NT7D16 Data Access Card: Description and operation (553-3001-191)

• Multi-purpose Serial Data Link: Description (553-3001-195)

• Circuit Cards: Installation and Testing (553-3001-211)

• Option 11C and 11C mini Technical Reference Guide (553-3011-100)

(Content from Option 11C and 11C mini Technical Reference Guide

(553-3011-100) also appears in Telephones and Consoles: Description,

Installation, and Operation (553-3001-367).)

• Circuit Card Reference (553-3023-211)

Circuit Card Description and Installation

Page 4 of 906

Revision history

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

18

Page 5 of 906

Contents

LIst of procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19

About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21

Subject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Applicable systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Intended audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Conventions .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Related information .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Line cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Trunk cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Circuit card installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

79

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Card slots — Large System .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Circuit card installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Installing a circuit card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86


Page 6 of 906

Contents

Acceptance tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Conference cards .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Digitone receiver cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Line cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Multifrequency sender cards .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Multifrequency signaling cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Network cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Trunk cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Tone and digit switch cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Option settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Circuit card grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

NT5D12AA Dual DTI/PRI (DDP) card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

NT5D2101/NT9D1102 Core/Network module backplane .. . . . . . . . . 117

NT6D68 Core module backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

NT6D80 Multi-purpose Serial Data Link card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

NT8D17 Conference/TDS card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

NT8D21 Ringing Generator AC .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

NT8D22 System Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

NT8D72 Primary Rate Interface card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

QPC71 E&M/DX Signaling and Paging Trunk cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Contents

Page 7 of 906

QPC414 Network card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

QPC441 3-Port Extender cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

QPC559, QPC560 Loop Signaling Trunk cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

QPC528 CO/FX/WATS Trunk cards .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

QPC471 Clock Controller card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

QPC525, QPC526, QPC527, QPC777 CO Trunk card .. . . . . . . . . . . . 145

QPC550 Direct Inward Dial Trunk card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

QPC551 Radio Paging Trunk card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

QPC595 Digitone Receiver cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

QPC577, QPC596 Digitone Receiver daughterboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

QPC720 Primary Rate Interface card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

QPC775 Clock Controller card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

QPC841 4-Port Serial Data Interface card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station

Analog Line card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Physical description .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Electrical specifications .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Connector pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Configuring the OPS analog line card .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183




Page 8 of 906

Contents

Front panel connector pin assignments .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1

Interface cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Functional description .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Installation and configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1

Interface cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249




Installation and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) . . . . . . . 313

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313




Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Contents

Page 9 of 906

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319



Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

MFC signaling .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

MFE signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Sender and receiver mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

NT6D70 SILC Line card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379



NT6D71 UILC Line card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385




Page 10 of 906

Contents

NT6D80 MSDL card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389



Engineering guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Replacing MSDL cards .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Symptoms and actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

System disabled actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

NT7D16 Data Access card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

Content list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

Controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Dialing operations .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Keyboard dialing .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

Hayes dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

System database requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500

Power supply .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

Installing the Data Access card .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

Port configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

Backplane pinout and signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514

Configuring the Data Access card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

Connecting Apple Macintosh to the DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Contents

Page 11 of 906

Upgrading systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards . . . . . . . . 527

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527




Digital line interface specifications .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537


Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541

NT8D03 Analog Line card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting

Line card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547




Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565



Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573




Page 12 of 906

Contents

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627



Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641



Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664

NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface

Paddle Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667




Configuring the SDI paddle board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface

Paddle Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681




Configuring the QSDI paddle board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Contents

Page 13 of 906

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692

NTAG26 XMFR card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695


NTAK02 SDI/DCH card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701

NTAK02 SDI/DCH card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701

NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709



Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715

NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721



Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724

NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard . . . . . . . 735

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735




Page 14 of 906

Contents

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745



Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752

NTAK93 D-channel Handler

Interface daughterboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763



NTBK22 MISP card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769



NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773



Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778

NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Contents

Page 15 of 906


Download operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789

NTCK16 Generic Central Office

Trunk cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791



Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794



Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807

NTDK20 Small System

Controller card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811

Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814

100BaseT IP daughterboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815

PC card interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818

Security device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819

SDI ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820

Conferencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820

MG 1000S/Expansion card slot assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821

NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825




Page 16 of 906

Contents

Software description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831

Hardware description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831

Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831

NTVQ01xx Media Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839


Hardware architecture .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841


Survivability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843

NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845



QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data

Interface card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851




Configuring the ESDI card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867

QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card . . . . . . . 869

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869




553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Contents

Page 17 of 906

Configuring the QSDI card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882

The TDS/DTR card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886

Appendix A: LAPB Data Link Control protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901

Frame structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902

LAPB balanced class of procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903

Commands and responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904

Description of procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905


Page 18 of 906

Contents

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

20

Page 19 of 906

LIst of procedures

Procedure 1

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Procedure 2

Testing conference cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Procedure 3

Testing digitone receiver cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Procedure 4

Testing line cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Procedure 5

Testing multifrequency sender cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Procedure 6

Testing multifrequency signaling cards . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Procedure 7

Testing network cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Procedure 8

Testing a trunk card using a maintenance telephone . 96

Procedure 9

Testing a trunk card using a system terminal . . . . . . . 96

Procedure 10

Testing tone and digit switch cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97


Page 20 of 906

LIst of procedures

Procedure 11

Connecting to the MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Procedure 12

Connecting two or more lineside T1 cards to the

MMI terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Procedure 13

Connecting two or more LEIs to the MMI terminal . . . 279

Procedure 14

Installing the NT5D97 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Procedure 15

Removing the NT5D97 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Procedure 16

Installing the MSDL card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Procedure 17

Cabling the MSDL card to the PRI card . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Procedure 18

Cabling the MSDL card to the I/O panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Procedure 19

Replacing an MSDL card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

26

Page 21 of 906

About this document

This document is a global document. Contact your system supplier or your

Nortel representative to verify that the hardware and software described are supported in your area.

Subject

This document outlines the functions, specifications, applications, and operation of the various circuit cards.

Note 1: Line cards – This information is intended to be used as a guide when connecting the line cards to customer-provided station equipment.

Note 2: Trunk cards – This information is intended to be used as a guide when connecting the trunk cards to customer-provided equipment and central office trunk facilities.

Note 3: MSDL card – This card provides multiple interface types with four full-duplex serial I/O ports that can be independently configured for various operations. Peripheral software downloaded to the MSDL controls functionality for each port.

Note 4: Synchronous operation is permitted on all MSDL ports. Port 0 can be configured as an asynchronous Serial Data Interface (SDI).

For detailed procedures for removing a specific circuit card and installing a replacement, see Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1:

Large System Maintenance (553-3021-500).

For a description of all administration programs and maintenance programs, see the Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311). For


Page 22 of 906

About this document information about system messages, see the Software Input/Output: System

Messages (553-3001-411).

Note on legacy products and releases

This NTP contains information about systems, components, and features that are compatible with Nortel Communication Server 1000 Release 4.5 software. For more information on legacy products and releases, click the

Technical Documentation link under Support & Training on the Nortel

home page: www.nortel.com

Applicable systems

This document applies to the following systems:

• Communication Server 1000S (CS 1000S)

• Communication Server 1000M Chassis (CS 1000M Chassis)

• Communication Server 1000M Cabinet (CS 1000M Cabinet)

• Communication Server 1000M Half Group (CS 1000M HG)

• Communication Server 1000M Single Group (CS 1000M SG)

• Communication Server 1000M Multi Group (CS 1000M MG)

• Communication Server 1000E (CS 1000E)

• Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis

• Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet

• Meridian 1 PBX 51C


• Meridian 1 PBX 81


Note: When upgrading software, memory upgrades may be required on the Signaling Server, the Call Server, or both.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

About this document

Page 23 of 906

System migration

When particular Meridian 1 systems are upgraded to run CS 1000

Release 4.5 software and configured to include a Signaling Server, they

become CS 1000M systems. Table 1 lists each Meridian 1 system that

supports an upgrade path to a CS 1000M system.

Table 1

Meridian 1 systems to CS 1000M systems

This Meridian 1 system...

Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis

Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet

Meridian 1 PBX 51C

Meridian 1 PBX 61C

Meridian 1 PBX 81

Meridian 1 PBX 81C

Maps to this CS 1000M system

CS 1000M Chassis

CS 1000M Cabinet

CS 1000M Half Group

CS 1000M Single Group

CS 1000M Multi Group

CS 1000M Multi Group

For more information, see one or more of the following NTPs:

•

Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1: Small System Upgrade

Procedures (553-3011-258)

•

Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1: Large System Upgrade

Procedures (553-3021-258)

• Communication Server 1000S: Upgrade Procedures (553-3031-258)

• Communication Server 1000E: Upgrade Procedures (553-3041-258)

Intended audience

This document is intended for individuals responsible for maintaining

Internet Enabled systems.


Page 24 of 906

About this document

Conventions

Terminology

In this document, the following systems are referred to generically as

“system”:

• Communication Server 1000S (CS 1000S)

• Communication Server 1000M (CS 1000M)

• Communication Server 1000E (CS 1000E)

• Meridian 1

The following systems are referred to generically as “Small System”:

• Communication Server 1000M Chassis (CS 1000M Chassis)

• Communication Server 1000M Cabinet (CS 1000M Cabinet)

• Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis

• Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet

The following systems are referred to generically as “Large System”:

• Communication Server 1000M Half Group (CS 1000M HG)

• Communication Server 1000M Single Group (CS 1000M SG)

• Communication Server 1000M Multi Group (CS 1000M MG)



• Meridian 1 PBX 81


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

About this document

Page 25 of 906

Related information

This section lists information sources that relate to this document.

NTPs

The following NTPs are referenced in this document:

• Meridian Link ISDN/AP General Guide (553-2901-100)

• Spares Planning (553-3001-153)

• Equipment Identification (553-3001-154)

• Transmission Parameters (553-3001-182)

• System Management (553-3001-300)

• Features and Services (553-3001-306)

• Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311)

• Telephones and Consoles: Description, Installation, and Operation

(553-3001-367)

• Software Input/Output: System Messages (553-3001-411)

• Software Input/Output: Maintenance (553-3001-511)

•

Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1: Large System Planning

and Engineering (553-3021-120)

•

Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1: Large System

Installation and Configuration (553-3021-210)

•


Maintenance (553-3021-500)

• Communication Server 1000S: Installation and Configuration

(553-3031-210)

• Meridian Link description (553-3201-110)

Online

To access Nortel documentation online, click the Technical Documentation link under Support & Training on the Nortel home page: www.nortel.com


Page 26 of 906

About this document

CD-ROM

To obtain Nortel documentation on CD-ROM, contact your Nortel customer representative.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

78

Page 27 of 906

Overview

Contents

This section contains information on the following topics:

Line cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Analog line interface units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Digital line interface units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Analog line call operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Digital line call operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Lineside T1 call operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Voice frequency audio level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Off-premise line protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Line protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Line protection grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Line and telephone components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Trunk cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Host interface bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Trunk interface unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76


Page 28 of 906

Overview

Line cards

The following line cards are designed using the Intelligent Peripheral

Equipment (IPE) architecture and are recommended for use in all new system designs.

Each of the line cards was designed to fit a specific system need. Table 2 lists

the line card characteristics.

Table 2

Line card characteristics

Part

Number Description Lines

NT1R20

NT5D11

Off-premise station analog line card

8

Lineside T1 Interface card

24

NT5D33/34 Lineside E1 Interface card

30

NT8D02 Digital Line card

(16 voice/16 data)

16

NT8D09 Analog Message

Waiting Line card

16

Line

Type

Analog

T1

Message

Waiting

Interrupted dial tone

None

E1 None

Yes

Yes

Digital

Analog

Message waiting signal forwarded to digital phone for display

No

Lamp No

Supervised

Analog

Lines

Yes

Architecture

IPE

IPE

IPE

IPE

IPE

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Overview

Page 29 of 906

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

The NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line card is an intelligent eight-channel analog line card designed to be used with 2-wire analog terminal equipment such as analog (500/2500-type) telephones and analog modems. Each line has integral hazardous and surge voltage protection to protect the system from damage due to lightning strikes and accidental power line connections. This card is normally used whenever the phone lines have to leave the building in which the switch is installed. The OPS line card supports message waiting notification by interrupting the dial tone when the receiver is first picked up. It also provides battery reversal answer and disconnect analog line supervision and hook flash disconnect analog line supervision features.

NT5D11 lineside T1 interface card

The NT5D11 lineside T1 Interface card is an intelligent 24-channel digital line card that is used to connect the switch to T1 compatible terminal equipment on the lineside. T1 compatible terminal equipment includes voice mail systems, channel banks containing FXS cards, and key systems such as the Nortel Norstar. The lineside T1 card differs from trunk T1 cards in that it supports terminal equipment features such as hook-flash, transfer, hold, and conference. It emulates an analog line card to the system software.

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface card

The NT5D33/34 Lineside E1 Interface card is an intelligent 30-channel digital line card that is used to connect the switch to E1 compatible terminal equipment on the lineside. E1 compatible terminal equipment includes voice mail systems. The lineside E1 card emulates an analog line card to the system software.

NT8D02 digital line card

The NT8D02 Digital Line card is an intelligent 16-channel digital line card that provides voice and data communication links between a CS 1000S,

CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 switch and modular digital telephones. Each of the 16 channels support voice-only or simultaneous voice and data service over a single twisted pair of standard telephone wire.


Page 30 of 906

Overview

NT8D09 analog message waiting line card

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card is an intelligent 16-channel analog line card designed to be used with 2-wire terminal equipment such as analog (500/2500-type) telephones, modems, and key systems. This card can also provide a high-voltage, low-current signal on the Tip and Ring pair of each line to light the message waiting lamp on phones equipped with that feature.

Installation

This section provides a high-level description of how to install and test line cards.

IPE line cards can be installed in any slot of the NT8D37 IPE module.

Figure 1 shows where an IPE line card can be installed in an NT8D37 IPE

module.

Figure 1

IPE line cards shown installed in an NT8D37 IPE module

PE Module IPE

Intelligent line cards

Intelligent trunk cards

BRSC



BRSC

PE Pwr Sup Rng Gen

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Cont 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Intelligent

Peripheral Equipment

Superloop

Shelf

553-3092

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Overview

Page 31 of 906

When installing line cards, follow these general procedures:

• Configure the jumpers and switches on the line card (if any) to meet system needs.

• Install the line card into the selected slot.

• Install the cable that connects the backplane connector on the IPE module to the module I/O panel.

• Connect a 25-pair cable from the module I/O panel connector to the Main

Distribution Frame (MDF).

• Connect the line card output to the selected terminal equipment at the

MDF.

• Configure the individual line interface unit using the Analog (500/

2500-type) Telephone Administration program LD 10 for analog line interface units and Multi-line Telephone Administration program LD 11 for digital line interface units.

Once these steps have been completed, the terminal equipment is ready for use.

Operation

This section describes how line cards fit into the CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and

Meridian 1 architecture, the busses that carry signals to and from the line cards, and how they connect to terminal equipment. These differences are

summarized in Table 3 on page 32

.

Host interface bus

Cards based on the IPE bus have a built-in microcontroller. The IPE microcontroller is used to do the following:

• perform local diagnostics (self-test)


Page 32 of 906

Overview

• configure the card according to instructions issued by the system

• report back to the system information such as card identification (type, vintage, and serial number), firmware version, and programmed configuration status)

Table 3

IPE module architecture

Parameter

Card Dimensions

Network Interface

Communication Interface

Microcontroller

Peripheral

Interface card

Network Interface card

Modules

IPE

31.75 x 25.4 x 2.2 cm.

(12.5 x10.0 x 0.875 in.)

DS-30X Loops card LAN Link

8031 / 8051 Family

NT8D01 Controller card

NT8D04 Superloop Network card

NT8D37 IPE module

Intelligent Peripheral Equipment

IPE line cards all have a similar architecture. Figure 2 on page 34 shows a

typical IPE line card architecture. The various line cards differ only in the number and types of line interface units.

The switch communicates with IPE modules over two separate interfaces.

Voice and signaling data are sent and received over DS-30X loops, and maintenance data is sent over a separate asynchronous communication link called the card LAN link.

Signaling data is information directly related to the operation of the telephone line. Some examples of signaling commands include:

• off-hook/on-hook

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Overview

Page 33 of 906

• ringing signal on/off

• message waiting lamp on/off

Maintenance data is data relating to the configuration and operation of the

IPE card, and is carried on the card LAN link. Some examples of maintenance data include:

• polling

• reporting of self-test status

• CP initiated card reset

• reporting of card ID (card type and hardware vintage)

• reporting of firmware version

• downloading line interface unit parameters

• reporting of line interface unit configuration

• enabling/disabling of the DS-30X network loop bus

• reporting of card status or T1 link status


Page 34 of 906

Overview

Figure 2

Typical IPE analog line card architecture

Input/output interface control

PCM

Codec

Line

Interface

Unit

Tip

Ring

Front panel

LED

Microcontroller

Backplane

Card slot address

Async card

LAN link

Card LAN interface

Controller card

Tx PCM

Rx PCM

5.12 MHz clock

1 kHz frame sync

DS-30X interface

Address/ data bus

PCM

Codec

Signaling and status

Line signaling interface

Control

Control logic

Power supplies

Line

Interface

Unit

Line interface unit power

Tip

Ring

553-6150

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Overview

Page 35 of 906

DS-30X loops

The line interfaces provided by the line cards connect to conventional 2-wire

(tip and ring) line facilities. IPE analog line cards convert the incoming analog voice and signaling information to digital form and route it to the Call

Server over DS-30X network loops. Conversely, digital voice and signaling information from the Call Server is sent over DS-30X network loops to the analog line cards where it is converted to analog form and applied to the line facility.

IPE digital line cards receive the data from the digital phone terminal as

512 kHz Time Compressed Multiplexed (TCM) data. The digital line card converts that data to a format compatible with the DS-30X loop and transmits it in the next available timeslot. When a word is received from the DS-30X loop, the digital line card converts it to the TCM format and transmits it to the digital phone terminal over the digital line facility.

A separate dedicated DS-30X network loop is extended between each IPE line/trunk card and the controller cards within an IPE module. A DS-30X network loop is composed of two synchronous serial data buses. One bus transports in the Transmit (Tx) direction towards the line facility and the other in the Receive (Rx) direction towards the CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and

Meridian 1.

Each bus has 32 channels for Pulse Code Modulated (PCM) voice data. Each

channel consists of a 10-bit word. See Figure 3 on page 36

. Eight of the 10 bits are for PCM data, one bit is the call signaling bit, and the last bit is a data valid bit. The eight-bit PCM portion of a channel is called a timeslot. The

DS-30X loop is clocked at 2.56 Mbps (one-half the 5.12 MHz clock frequency supplied by the controller card). Thus, the timeslot repetition rate for a single channel is 8 kHz. The controller card also supplies a locally generated 1 kHz frame sync signal for channel synchronization.

Signaling data is transmitted to and from the line cards using the call signaling bit within the 10-bit channel. When the line card detects a condition that the switch needs to know about, it creates a 24-bit signaling word. This word is shifted out on the signaling bit for the associated channel one bit at a time during 24 successive DS-30X frames. Conversely, when the switch sends signaling data to the line card, it is sent as a 24-bit word divided among 24 successive DS-30X frames.


Page 36 of 906

Overview

Figure 3

DS-30X loop data format

DS-30X loop data words

Frame sync

29 30 31 0 1 2 3 4

5.12 MHz

2.56 MHz

Frame sync

DS-30X loop data bits

W31DV W0B7 W0B6 W0B5 W0B4 W0B3 W0B2 W0B1 W0B0 W0SB W0DV W1B7

SB = SIGNALING BIT DV = DATA VALID

553-6151

DS-30Y network loops extend between controller cards and superloop network cards in the Common Equipment (CE). They function in a manner

similar to DS-30X loops. See Figure 5 on page 41 .

A DS-30Y loop carries the PCM timeslot traffic of a DS-30X loop. Four

DS-30Y network loops form a superloop with a capacity of 128 channels (120 usable timeslots). See Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1:

Large System Planning and Engineering (553-3021-120) for more information on superloops.

Card LAN link

Maintenance communication is the exchange of control and status data between IPE line or trunk cards and the Call Server by way of the NT8D01

Controller card. Maintenance data is transported through the card LAN link.

This link is composed of two asynchronous serial buses (called the Async

card LAN link in Figure 2 on page 34 ). The output bus is used by the system

controller for output of control data to the line card. The input bus is used by the system controller for input of line card status data.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Overview

Page 37 of 906

A card LAN link bus is common to all of the line/trunk card slots within an

IPE module. This bus is arranged in a master/slave configuration where the controller card is the master and all other cards are slaves. The module backplane provides each line/trunk card slot with a unique hardwired slot address. This slot address enables a slave card to respond when addressed by the controller card. The controller card communicates with only one slave at a time.

In normal operation, the controller card continually scans (polls) all of the slave cards connected to the card LAN to monitor their presence and operational status. The slave card sends replies to the controller on the input bus along with its card slot address for identification. In its reply, the slave informs the controller if any change in card status has taken place. The controller can then prompt the slave for specific information. Slaves only respond when prompted by the controller; they do not initiate exchange of control or status data on their own.

When an IPE line card is first plugged into the backplane, it runs a self-test.

When the self-test is completed, a properly functioning card responds to the next controller card poll with the self-test status. The controller then queries for card identification and other status information. The controller then downloads all applicable configuration data to the line card, initializes it, and puts it into an operational mode.

Analog line interface units

Once the 8-bit digital voice signal has been received by the analog line card, it must be converted back into an analog signal, filtered, converted from a

4-wire transmission path to a 2-wire transmission path, and driven onto the analog telephone line.

Figure 4 on page 38

shows a typical example of the logic that performs these functions. Each part of the analog line interface unit is discussed in the following section.


Page 38 of 906

Overview

Figure 4

Typical analog line interface unit block diagram

DS-30X or

SL-1 network loop

Tx PCM

Rx PCM

CODEC

Variable gain filters

Balancing Network

2-wire to

4-wire conversion

Impedance matching transformer

Line interface and protection

Tip

Ring

Off-hook

Ringing

Off-hook detector

Ring voltage

Ringing circuit

Message waiting circuit

–150V dc

553-6153

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Overview

Page 39 of 906

Coder/Decoder circuit

The Coder/Decoder (CODEC) performs Analog to Digital (A/D) and Digital to Analog (D/A) conversion of the line analog voiceband signal to and from a digital PCM signal. This signal can be coded and decoded using either the

A-Law or the µ-Law companding algorithm.

On some analog line cards, the decoding algorithm depends of the type of

CODEC installed when the board is built. On others, it is an option selected using a software overlay.

Variable gain filters

Audio signals received from the analog phone line are passed through a low-pass A/D monolithic filter that limits the frequency spread of the input signal to a nominal 200 to 3400 Hz bandwidth. The audio signal is then applied to the input of the CODEC. Audio signals coming from the CODEC are passed through a low-pass A/D monolithic filter that integrates the amplitude modulated pulses coming from the CODEC, and then filters and amplifies the result. On some of the line cards, the gain of these filters can be programmed by the system controller. This allows the system to make up for line losses according to the loss plan.

Balancing network

Depending on the card type, the balancing network provides a 600 ¾, 900 ¾,

3COM or 3CM2 impedance matching network. It also converts the 2-wire transmission path (tip and ring) to a 4-wire transmission path (Rx/ground and

Tx/ground). The balancing network is usually a transformer/analog (hybrid) circuit combination, but can also be a monolithic Subscriber Line Interface

Circuit (SLIC) on the newer line cards.

Line interface and foreign voltage protection

The line interface unit connects the balancing network to the telephone tip and ring pairs. The off-premise line card (NT1R20) has circuitry that protects the line card from foreign voltage surges caused by accidental power line connections and lightning surges. This protection is necessary if the telephone line leaves the building where the switch is installed.

The line interface unit has a relay that applies the ringing voltage onto the

phone line. See Figure 4 on page 38 . The RSYNC signal from the 20 Hz


Page 40 of 906

Overview

(nominal) ringing voltage power supply is used to prevent switching of the relay during the current peak. This eliminates switching glitches and extends the life of the switching relay.

The off-hook detection circuit monitors the current draw on the phone line.

When the current draw exceeds a preset value, the circuit generates an off-hook signal that is transmitted back to the system controller.

The message waiting circuit on message waiting line cards monitors the status of the message waiting signal and applies –150 V dc power to the tip lead when activated. This voltage is used to light the message waiting lamps on phones that are equipped with that feature. The high voltage supply is automatically disconnected when the phone goes off-hook. Newer line cards can sense when the message waiting lamp is not working and can report that information back to the system controller.

Digital line interface units

The NT8D02 digital line card provides voice and data communication links between a switch and modular digital telephones. These lines carry multiplexed PCM voice, data and signaling information as Time

Compression Multiplexed (TCM) loops. Each TCM loop can be connected to a Nortel “Meridian Modular Digital” telephone.

The digital line interface card contains one or more digital line interface units.

See Figure 5 on page 41 . Each digital line interface unit contains a Digital

Line Interface Circuit (DLIC). The purpose of each DLIC is to demultiplex data from the DS-30X Tx channel into integrated voice and data bitstreams and transmit those bitstreams as Bi-Polar Return to Zero, Alternate Mark

Inversion (BPRZ-AMI) data to the TCM loop. It also does the opposite: receives BPRZ-AMI bitstreams from the TCM loop and multiplexes the integrated voice and data bitstream onto the DS-30X Rx channel.

The 4-wire to 2-wire conversion circuit converts the 2-wire tip and ring leads into a 4-wire (Tx and ground and RX and ground) signal that is compatible with the digital line interface circuit.

TCM loop interfaces

Each digital phone line terminates on the digital line card at a TCM loop interface circuit. The circuit provides transformer coupling and foreign

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Figure 5

Digital line interface unit block diagram

DS-30X loop

Tx PCM

Rx PCM

Digital line interface circuit

1 kHz frame sync

4-wire to

2-wire conversion

Overview

Page 41 of 906

TCM loop interface and protection

Tip

Ring

±15 V dc power supply

553-6154 voltage protection between the TCM loop and the digital line interface circuit.

It also provides power for the digital telephone.

To prevent undesirable side effects from occurring when the TCM loop interface cannot provide the proper signals on the digital phone line, the system controller can remove the ±15 V dc power supply from the TCM loop interface. This happens when either the card gets a command from the

NT8D01 Controller card to shut down the channel, or when the digital line card detects a loss of the 1 KHz frame synchronization signal.

Each TCM loop interface circuit can service loops up to 3500 ft. in length when using 24 gauge wire. The circuit allows for a maximum ac signal loss of 15.5 dB at 256 KHz and a maximum DC loop resistance of 210 ohms.

Signaling

The digital line interface units also contain signaling and control circuits that establish, monitor, and take down call connections. These circuits work with


Page 42 of 906

Overview the system controller to operate the digital line interface circuits during calls.

The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the controller and return incoming call status information to the controller over the DS-30X network loop.

Analog line call operation

The applications, features, and signalling arrangements for each line interface unit are configured in software and implemented on the card through software download messages. When an analog line interface unit is idle, it provides a voltage near ground on the tip lead and a voltage near –48 V dc on the ring lead to the near-end station. (The near-end station is the telephone or device that is connected to the analog line card by the tip and ring leads.) An on-hook telephone presents a high impedance toward the line interface unit on the card.

Incoming calls

Incoming calls to a telephone that is connected to an analog line card can originate either from stations that are local (served by the PBX), or remote

(served through the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)). The alerting signal to a telephone is 20 Hz (nominal) ringing. When an incoming call is answered by the near-end station going off-hook, a low-resistance dc loop is placed across the tip and ring leads (towards the analog line card) and

ringing is tripped. See Figure 6 on page 43 .

Outgoing calls

For outgoing calls from the near-end station, a line interface unit is seized when the station goes off-hook, placing a low-resistance loop across the tip

and ring leads towards the analog line card. See Figure 7 on page 44 . When

the card detects the low-resistance loop, it prepares to receive digits. When the system is ready to receive digits, it returns dial tone. Outward address signaling is then applied from the near-end station in the form of loop

(interrupting) dial pulses or DTMF tones.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Overview

Page 43 of 906

Figure 6

Call connection sequence – near-end station receiving call

Near-end station

Far-end station through

PSTN

System

State

Line card unit idle

Signal/direction

Ground on tip/ battery on ring

Highresistance loop

Remarks

No battery current drawn.

Alert

Ringing

Low-resistance loop

Far-end station goes off hook and addresses (dials up) near-end station.

The system receives the incoming call on a trunk and determines that the call is for a specific unit terminal number

(TN) and assigns message timeslots.

The system applies 20 Hz ringing to ring lead.

Near-end station goes off hook.

Near-end station off hook

(2-way voice connection)

The system detects increase in loop current, trips ringing, and cuts call through to near-end station.

Near-end station on hook

Line card unit idle

High-resistance loop


Highresistance loop

If near-end station hangs up first, the following occurs: Line card detects drop in loop current. CPU removes timeslot assignments.

Line card unit is ready for the next call.

Far-end station on hook

Line card unit idle



Highresistance loop

If far-end station hangs up first, the following occurs: The system detects disconnect signaling from trunk. CPU removes timeslot assignments. Person at near-end station recognizes end of call and hangs up.


553-AAA1113


Page 44 of 906

Overview

Figure 7

Call connection sequence – near-end originating call

Near-end station

Far-end station through

PSTN

System

State

Line card unit idle



Highresistance loop

Remarks


Call request

Outpulsing


Low-resistance loop

Dial tone

Near-end station goes off hook. Battery current is drawn causing detection of off-hook state.

CPU determines unit terminal number (TN) and assigns message timeslots.

Dial tone is applied to the near-end station from the system.

Addressing signals

Dial tone

Near-end station dials number (loop pulsing or

DTMF tones).

The system detects start of dialing and removes dial tone.

Ringback (or busy)

The system decodes addressing, routes call, and supplies ringback tone to near-end station if farend station is on hook. (Busy tone supplied if far-end station is busy.)

When call is answered, ringback tone is removed , and call is cut through to far-end station.

Line card unit idle




Highresistance loop

If near-end station hangs up first, the following occurs: Line card detects drop in loop current.

CPU removes timeslot assignments.



Line card unit idle



Highresistance loop

If far-end station hangs up first, the following occurs: The system detects disconnect signaling from trunk. CPU removes timeslot assignments.

Person at near-end station recognizes end of call and hangs up.


553-AAA1114

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Overview

Page 45 of 906

Message waiting

Line cards that are equipped with the message waiting feature receive notification that a message is waiting across the Card LAN link (IPE cards).

On cards that drive a message waiting light, the light is turned on by connecting the ring side of the telephone line to the –150 V dc power supply.

When the line card senses that the telephone has gone off-hook, it removes the –150 V dc voltage until the telephone goes back on-hook. Line cards that use an interrupted dial tone to indicate message waiting do nothing until the receiver is picked up. The line card then interrupts the dial tone at a regular interval to indicate that a message is waiting.

In both cases, the message waiting indication will continue until the user checks his or her messages. At that time, the system will cancel the message waiting indication by sending another message across the Card LAN link or network loop.

Analog line supervision

Analog line supervision features are used to extend the answer supervision and disconnect supervision signals when the line card is connected to an intelligent terminal device (Key system or intelligent pay phone). Two types of analog line supervision are provided:

• battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision

• hook flash disconnect supervision

Battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision

Battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision is only used for calls that originate from the terminal device. It provides both far-end answer supervision and far-end disconnect supervision signals to the terminal device.

In an intelligent pay phone application, these signals provide the information necessary to accurately compute toll charges.

In the idle state, and during dialing and ringing at the far end, the line card provides a ground signal on the tip lead and battery on the ring lead. See

Figure 8 on page 47 . When the far-end answers, these polarities are reversed.

The reversed battery connection is maintained as long as the call is established. When the far-end disconnects, the system sends a message that


Page 46 of 906

Overview causes the line card to revert the battery and ground signals to the normal state to signal that the call is complete.

Hook Flash disconnect supervision

Hook flash disconnect supervision is only used for incoming calls that

terminate at the terminal device (typically a Key system). See Figure 9 on page 48

. The disconnect signal is indicated by the removal of the ground connection to the tip lead for a specific length of time. The length of time is programmed in LD10, and ranges from a minimum of 10 milliseconds to a maximum of 2.55 seconds. See Software Input/Output: Administration

(553-3001-311) for more information.

Digital line call operation

Digital line call operation is controlled entirely by use of messages between the digital telephone and the system. These messages are carried across the

TCM loop interface. There is no call connection sequence similar to the one used for analog telephone line operation.

Lineside T1 call operation

The lineside T1 card’s call operation is performed differently depending on whether the T1 link is configured to process calls in loop start mode or ground start mode. Configuration is performed through dip switch settings on the lineside T1 card.

The lineside T1 card performs calls processing separately on each of its 24 channels. Signaling is performed using the “A/B robbed bit” signaling standard for T1 communication.

A/B robbed bit signaling simulates standard analog signaling by sending a meaningful combination of ones and zeros across the line that correlates to the electrical impulses that standard analog signaling sends. For example, to represent that an analog line interface unit is idle, the analog line card provides a ground on the tip lead and –48Vdc on the ring lead. The lineside

T1 card accomplishes the same result by sending its A bit as 0 (translated as ground on the tip lead) and its B bit as 1 (translated as –48V dc on the ring lead). However, measuring the voltage of the ring lead on the T1 line would not return –48V dc, since actual electrical impulses are not being sent.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Figure 8

Battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision sequence

Overview

Page 47 of 906

Far-end station

System

Line card

Near-end station

State Signal/direction Remarks

Line card unit idle

Call request

Outpulsing



Highresistance loop


Low-resistance loop

Near-end station goes off hook. Battery current is drawn causing detection of off-hook state. The system determines unit terminal number (TN) and assigns message timeslots.

Dial tone

Dial tone is applied to the near-end station from the system.

Addressing signals

Near-end station dials number (loop pulsing or DTMF tones).

Dial tone removed

The system detects start of dialing and removes dial tone.

Ringback (or busy)

Battery on tip/ ground on ring

Lowresistance loop

The system decodes addressing, routes call, and supplies ringback tone to near-end station if far-end station is on hook. (Busy tone supplied if far-end station is busy.)

When call is answered (either absolute or assumed answer, as programmed), ringback tone is removed, call is cut through to far-end station, and battery is reversed to near-end station for duration of call.




Line card unit idle

Highresistance loop

Highresistance loop

If near-end station hangs up first, a high-resistance loop is presented to the system.

The system detects drop in loop current, removes timeslot assignments, sends disconnect signal to far-end station, and restores normal ground/battery polarity to the nearend station. Line card unit is then ready for the next call.


Line card unit idle



Lowresistance loop

Highresistance loop

If far-end station hangs up first, the system detects disconnect signalling from the far end, removes timeslot assignments, and restores normal ground/battery polarity to the near-end station.

Near-end station detects battery reversal and goes on hook. Line card unit is then ready for the next call.

Note 1: Battery reversal signalling is a supervisory feature that is only used when the near-end station originates the call.

553-AAA1115


Page 48 of 906

Overview

Figure 9

Hook flash disconnect supervision sequence

System

Line card

Far-end station

Near-end station

State

Line card unit idle

Call request

Alert

Near-end station off hook


Signal/direction Remarks


Highresistance loop


Far-end station goes off hook and addresses

(dials up) near-end station. The system receives the incoming call and determines that the call is for a specific unit terminal number

(TN) and assigns message timeslots.

Ringing

The system applies 20 Hz ringing to the ring lead.

Low-resistance loop


Lowresistance loop

Near-end station goes off hook.

The system detects increase in loop current, trips ringing, and cuts call through to near-end station.

Far-end station

on hook

Tip open/ battery on ring



Line card unit idle


Lowresistance loop

Highresistance loop

Highresistance loop

When the far-end station hangs up, the following happens: The system detects disconnect signalling from the far end, removes the timeslot assignments, and sends a hook flash (tip removed from ground) to the near-end station.

The near-end station responds by going on hook, presenting a high-resistance loop to the system.

At the end of the hook-flash interval, the system returns the tip to ground. The line card unit is then ready for the next call. (Note 2)

Note 1: Hook-flash signalling is a supervisory feature that is only used when the far-end station originates and terminates the call. If the far-end station originates the call but the near-end hangs up first, a hook flash is not sent.

Note 2: If the end of the hook-flash interval occurs before the near-end station goes on hook, the system waits until the near-end station does so before placing the line card unit in the idle state.

553-AAA1116

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Overview

Page 49 of 906

Call operation will be described by categorizing the operation into the following main states:

• Idle (on-hook)

• Incoming calls

• Outgoing calls

• Calls disconnected by the CO

• Calls disconnected by the telephone

Loop Start Mode

In Loop Start mode , the A and B bits have the following meaning:

Transmit from LTI:A bit = 0 (tip ground on)

B bit = Ringing (0=on, 1=off)

Receive to LTI: A bit = Loop (0=open, 1=closed)

B bit = 1 (no ring ground)

When a T1 channel is idle, the lineside T1 card simulates a ground on the tip lead and –48Vdc on the ring lead to the terminal equipment by setting its transmit A bit to 0 and transmit B bit to 1. Accordingly, an on-hook channel on the terminal equipment simulates an open loop toward the lineside T1 card, causing the lineside T1 card’s receive bits to be set to A = 0 and receive

B = 1.

Incoming calls

Incoming calls to terminal equipment attached to the lineside T1 card can originate either from stations that are local (served by the PBX), or remote

(served through the PSTN). To provide the ringing signal to a telephone the lineside T1 card simulates an additional 90V on the ring lead to the terminal equipment by alternating the transmit B bit between 0 and 1 (0 during ring on,

1 during ring off). When an incoming call is answered by the terminal equipment going off-hook, the terminal equipment simulates tripping the ringing and shutting off ringing, causing the lineside T1 card’s receive A bit to be changed from 0 to 1.


Page 50 of 906

Overview

Outgoing calls

During outgoing calls from the terminal equipment, a channel is seized when the station goes off-hook. This simulates a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads toward the lineside T1 card, causing the lineside T1’s receive

A bit to be changed from 0 to 1. This bit change prepares the lineside T1 to receive digits. Outward address signaling is then applied from the terminal equipment in the form of DTMF tones or loop (interrupting) dial pulses that are signaled by the receive A bit pulsing between 1 and 0.

Call disconnect from far end (PSTN, private network or local

Station)

When a call is in process, the central office may disconnect the call from the

CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1. If the lineside T1 port has been configured with the supervised analog line (SAL) feature, the lineside T1 card will respond to the distant end disconnect message by momentarily changing its transmit A bit to 1 and then returning it to 0. The duration of time that the transmit A bit remains at 1 before returning to 0 depends upon the setting that was configured using the SAL. If the terminal equipment is capable of detecting distant end disconnect, it will respond by changing the lineside T1 card's receive A bit to 0 (open loop).The call is now terminated and the interface is in the idle (on-hook) state.

For the lineside T1 card to support distant end disconnect in loop start mode, the following configuration parameters must exist:

• The Supervised Analog Line (SAL) feature must be configured for each lineside T1 port.

Note: By default, the SAL feature opens the tip side for 750 m/s in loop start operation. This is configurable in 10 m/s increments.

• For outgoing trunk calls, the trunk facility must provide far end disconnect supervision.

• In order to detect distant end disconnect for calls originating on the lineside T1 card, the battery reversal feature within the SAL software must be enabled. Enabling the battery reversal feature will not provide battery reversal indication but will only provide a momentary interruption of the tip ground by asserting the A bit to 1 for the specified duration.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Overview

Page 51 of 906

• In order to detect distant end disconnect for calls terminating on the lineside T1 card, the hook flash feature within the SAL software must be enabled.

• In order to detect distant end disconnect for calls originating and terminating on the lineside T1 card, both the battery reversal and hook flash features must be enabled within the SAL software.

Call disconnect from lineside T1 terminal equipment

Alternatively, while a call is in process, the terminal equipment may disconnect by going on-hook. The terminal equipment detects no loop current and sends signaling to the lineside T1 card that causes its receive A bit to change from 1 to 0. The call is now released.

Table 4 outlines the lineside T1’s A and B bit settings in each state of call

processing.

Table 4

Loop Start Call Processing A/B Bit Settings (Part 1 of 2)

Transmit Receive

State

Idle

Incoming Calls:

• Idle

• Ringing is applied from lineside T1 card

• Terminal equipment goes off-hook

• Lineside T1 card stops ringing

Outgoing Calls:

• Idle

• Terminal equipment goes off-hook

Call Disconnect from far end:

0

0

0

0

0

0

A

0

B

1

1

1/0

1/0

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

A

0

1

1

B

1

1

1

1

1


Page 52 of 906

Overview

Table 4

Loop Start Call Processing A/B Bit Settings (Part 2 of 2)

State

• Steady state (call in progress)

• Far end disconnects by dropping loop current and lineside T1 card changes Transmit A bit to 1 momentarily.

• Terminal equipment responds causing Receive A bit to change to 0.

• Lineside T1 responds by changing its Transmit A bit to 0. Call is terminated and set to idle state.

Call disconnect from terminal equipment:


• Terminal equipment goes on-hook causing the Receive A bit to change to 0. Call is terminated and set to idle state.

0

0

Transmit

A

0

1

B

1

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

Receive

A

1

1

B

1

1

0

0

1

0

1

1

1

1

Ground Start Mode

In ground start mode, the A and B bits have the following meaning:

Transmit from LTI:A bit = Tip ground (0=grounded, 1=not grounded)

B bit = Ringing (0=on, 1=off)

Receive to LTI: A bit = Loop (0=open, 1=closed)

B bit = Ring ground (0=grounded, 1=not grounded)

When a T1 channel is idle, the lineside T1 card simulates a ground on the tip lead and -48V dc on the ring lead to the terminal equipment by setting the transmit A bit to 1 and transmit B bit to 1. Accordingly, an on-hook telephone simulates an open loop toward the lineside T1 card, causing the lineside T1 card’s receive bits to be set to A = 0 and B = 1.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Overview

Page 53 of 906

Incoming Calls

Incoming calls to terminal equipment that is connected to the lineside T1 card can originate either from stations that are local (served by the PBX), or remote (served through the public switched telephone network). To provide the ringing signal to the terminal equipment the lineside T1 card simulates the

90V ring signal on the ring lead by alternating the transmit B bit between 0 and 1 (0 during ring on, 1 during ring off), and ground on the tip lead by setting the transmit A bit to 0. When an incoming call is answered (by the terminal equipment going off-hook), the terminal equipment simulates tripping the ringing and shutting off ringing by causing the lineside T1’s receive A bit to change from 0 to 1. The lineside T1 card responds to this message by simulating loop closure by holding the transmit B bit constant at 1.

Outgoing Calls

During outgoing calls from the terminal equipment, a channel is seized when the terminal equipment goes off-hook, simulating a ground to the ring lead toward the lineside T1 card by causing the lineside T1’s receive B bit to change from 1 to 0. In turn, the lineside T1 card simulates grounding its tip lead by changing the transmit A bit to 0. The terminal equipment responds to this message by removing the ring ground (lineside T1’s receive B bit is changed to 1) and simulating open loop at the terminal equipment (lineside

T1’s receive A bit is changed to 0).

Call disconnect from far end (PSTN, private network or local station

While a call is in process, the far end might disconnect the call. If the lineside

T1 port has been configured with the Supervised Analog Line (SAL) feature, the lineside T1 will respond to the distant end disconnect message by opening tip ground. This causes the lineside T1 card to change the transmit A bit to 1.

When the terminal equipment sees the transmit A bit go to 1, it responds by simulating open loop causing the lineside T1’s receive A bit to change to 0.

The call is terminated and the interface is once again in the idle condition.

For the lineside T1 card to support distant end disconnect in ground start mode, the following configuration parameters must exist:

• The Supervised Analog Line (SAL) feature must be configured for each lineside T1 port.


Page 54 of 906

Overview

Note: By default, the SAL feature opens the tip side for 750 m/s in loop start operation. This is configurable in 10 m/s increments.

• In order to detect distant end disconnect for calls originating on the lineside T1 card, the “battery reversal” feature within the SAL software must be enabled. Enabling the “battery reversal” feature will not provide battery reversal indication when a call is answered; it will only provide battery reversal indication when a call is disconnected.

• In order to detect distant end disconnect for calls terminating on the lineside T1 card, the “hook flash” feature within the SAL software must be enabled.

• In order to detect distant end disconnect for calls originating and terminating on the lineside T1 card, both the “battery reversal” and “hook flash” features within the SAL software must be enabled.

Call disconnect from lineside T1 terminal equipment

Alternatively, while a call is in process, the terminal equipment may disconnect by going on-hook, causing the lineside T1’s receive A bit to change to 0. The lineside T1 card responds to this message by simulating the removal of ground from the tip by changing its transmit A bit to 1. The call is now terminated and the interface is once again in the idle condition.

Table 5 outlines the lineside T1’s A and B bit settings in each state of call

processing.

Table 5

Ground Start Call Processing A/B Bit Settings (Part 1 of 2)

Transmit Receive

State

Idle

Incoming Calls (to terminal equipment):

• Idle

• Ringing is applied from lineside T1 card by simulating ground on tip lead and ringing on ring lead.

1

0

A

1

B

1

1

0/1

0

0

A

0

1

1

B

1

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Overview

Page 55 of 906

Table 5

Ground Start Call Processing A/B Bit Settings (Part 2 of 2)

State

• Terminal equipment goes off-hook by simulating ground on tip lead and ringing on ring lead.

Outgoing Calls (from terminal equipment):

• Idle

• Terminal equipment goes off-hook.

• The lineside T1 simulates grounding its tip lead

• Terminal equipment opens ring ground and closes loop

Call Disconnect from far end:


• The lineside T1 ungrounds tip

• Terminal equipment opens loop current

Call disconnect from terminal equipment:


• Terminal equipment goes open loop current

• Lineside T1 card opens tip ground

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

Transmit

A

0

B

0/1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

Receive

A

1

B

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

1

Ground Start Restrictions

If the lineside T1 card is used in ground start mode, certain restrictions should be considered. Because the system treats the lineside T1 card as a standard loop start analog line card, the ground start operation of the lineside T1 card has operational limitations compared to typical ground start interface equipment relating to start of dialing, distant end disconnect and glare

potential.


Page 56 of 906

Overview

Distant end disconnect restrictions

If the SAL feature is not available in the CS 1000 Release 4.5 software, the lineside T1 card is not capable of indicating to the Customer Premise

Equipment (CPE) when a call has been terminated by the distant end. In this case, the lineside T1 card will continue to provide a grounded tip indication

(A=0) to the CPE until it detects an open loop indication (A=0) from the CPE, at which time it will provide an open tip indication (A=1). Therefore, without

SAL software, the lineside T1 card is not capable of initiating the termination of a call to the CPE.

With the SAL software configured for each lineside T1 line, the lineside T1 card will provide an open tip indication to the CPE when it receives an indication of supervised analog line from the system. This provides normal ground start protocol call termination.

Glare restrictions

In telephone lines or trunks, glare occurs when a call origination attempt results in the answering of a terminating call that is being presented by the far end simultaneously with the call origination attempt by the near end.

The lineside T1 detects presentation of a terminating call (outgoing to lineside

T1 terminal equipment) by detecting ringing voltage. If application of the ringing voltage is delayed due to traffic volume and ringing generator capacity overload, the lineside T1 ground start operation cannot connect the tip side to ground to indicate the line has been seized by the system.

In ground start mode, glare conditions need to be considered if both incoming and outgoing calls to the Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) are going to be encountered. If the system and the CPE simultaneously attempt to use a lineside T1 line, the system will complete the call termination. It does not back down and allow the CPE to complete the call origination, as in normal ground start operation.

If both incoming and outgoing calls are to be handled through the lineside T1 interface, separate channels should be configured in the system and the CPE for each call direction. This eliminates the possibility of glare conditions on call origination.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Overview

Page 57 of 906

Voice frequency audio level

The digital pad for lineside T1 card audio level is fixed for all types of call connection (0 dB insertion loss in both directions), and differs from the analog line. Audio level adjustments, if required, must be made in the lineside

T1 terminal equipment.

Off-premise line protection

Off-premise applications are installations where the telephone lines are extended outside the building where the PBX system is housed, but the lines are not connected to public access facilities. This application is commonly referred to as a “campus installation.”

In off-premise applications, special protection devices and grounding are required to protect PBX and telephone components from any abnormal conditions, such as lightning strikes and power line crosses.

The NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Line card has built-in protection against lightning strikes and power line crosses. These should be the preferred cards for an off-premise application. Other cards can be used when external line protectors are installed.

When using the lineside T1 card for an off-premise or network application, external line protectors must be installed. Install an isolated type Channel

Service Unit (CSU) as part of the terminal equipment, to provide the necessary isolation and outside line protection. The CSU should be an FCC part 68 or CSA certified unit.

Line protectors

Line protectors are voltage-absorbing devices that are installed at the cross-connect terminals at both the main building and the remote building.

The use of line protectors will ensure that system and telephone components are not damaged from accidental voltages that are within the limit of the capacity of the protection device. Absolute protection from lightning strikes and other stray voltages cannot be guaranteed, but the use of line protection devices significantly reduces the possibility of damage.


Page 58 of 906

Overview

Nortel has tested line protection devices from three manufacturers. See

Table 6. Each manufacturer offers devices for protection of digital as well as

analog telephone lines.

Table 6

Line protection device ordering information

Device order code

Analog

Line

UP2S-235

Digital

Line

UP2S-75

6AP

ESP-200

6DP

ESP-050

Manufacturer

ITW Linx Communication

201 Scott Street

Elk Grove Village, IL 60007

(708) 952-8844 or (800) 336-5469

Oneac Corporation

27944 North Bradley Road

Libertyville, IL 60048-9700

(800) 553-7166 or (800) 327-8801 x555

EDCO Inc. of Florida

1805 N.E. 19th Avenue

P.O. Box 1778

Ocala, FL 34478

(904) 732-3029 or (800) 648-4076

These devices are compatible with 66 type M1-50 split blocks or equivalent.

Consult the device manufacturer if more specific compatibility information is required.

Line protection grounding

In conjunction with line protectors, proper system (PBX) grounding is essential to minimize equipment damage. Nortel recommends following the

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Overview

Page 59 of 906

grounding connection requirements as described in System installation

(553-3001-210). This requirement includes connecting the ground for the protection devices to the approved building earth ground reference. Any variances to these grounding requirements could limit the functionality of the protection device.

Line and telephone components

Because testing of the line protectors was limited to the line cards and telephones shown below, only these components should be used for off-premise installations.

Telephones

• Meridian Modular Telephones (digital)

• Meridian Digital Telephones

• Standard analog (500/2500-type) telephones

Line cards

• NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Line card

• NT8D02 Digital Line card

• NT8D03 Analog Line card

Trunk cards

The following trunk cards are designed using the IPE architecture, and are recommended for use in all new system designs.


Page 60 of 906

Overview

Each of the trunk cards was designed to fit a specific system need. Use

Table 7 to help select the trunk card that will best meet system needs.

Table 7

Trunk card characteristics

Part

Number Description Trunks Trunk Types Architecture

NT8D14

NT8D15

Universal Trunk card

E&M Trunk card

8

4

CO/FX/WATS trunks*, direct inward dial trunks,

TIE trunks,

Loop Dial Repeating trunks

Recorded Announcement trunks,

Paging trunks

2-wire E&M trunks,

4-wire E&M trunks,

4-wire DX trunks,

Paging trunks

IPE

IPE

NTCK16 Generic Central Office

Trunk card

8 CO trunks

* Central office (CO), Foreign Exchange (FX), and Wide Area Telephone Service (WATS) trunks.

IPE

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card is an intelligent four-channel trunk card that is designed to be used in a variety of applications. It supports the following five trunk types:

• Central office (CO), Foreign Exchange (FEX), and Wide Area

Telephone Service (WATS) trunks

• Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunks

• TIE trunks: two-way Loop Dial Repeating (LDR) and two-way loop

Outgoing Automatic Incoming Dial (OAID)

• Recorded Announcement (RAN) trunks

• Paging (PAG) trunks

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Overview

Page 61 of 906

The universal trunk card also supports Music, Automatic Wake Up, and

Direct Inward System Access (DISA) features.

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card

The NT8D15 E&M Trunk card is an intelligent four-channel trunk card that is designed to be used when connecting to the following types of trunks:

• 2-wire E&M Type I signaling trunks

• 4-wire E&M trunks with:

— Type I or Type II signaling

— Duplex (DX) signaling

• Paging (PAG) trunks

The trunk type and function can be configured on a per port basis. Dialing outpulsing is provided on the card. Make and break ratios are defined in software and downloaded by software commands.

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk card

The NTCK16 generic central office trunk cards support up to eight analog central office trunks. They can be installed in any IPE slot that supports IPE.

The cards are available with or without the Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) feature. The cards are also available in numerous countries.

Installation

This section provides a high-level description of how to install and test trunk cards.

IPE trunk cards can be installed in any IPE slot of the NT8D37 IPE module.

Figure 10 on page 62 shows where an IPE trunk card can be installed in an

NT8D37 IPE module.

When installing trunk cards, these general procedures should be used:

1

Configure the jumpers and switches on the trunk card (if any) to meet the system needs.

2

Install the trunk card into the selected slot.


Page 62 of 906

Overview

Figure 10

IPE trunk cards installed in an NT8D37 IPE module

PE Module IPE



BRSC



BRSC

PE Pwr Sup Rng Gen

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Cont 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Intelligent

Peripheral Equipment

Superloop

Shelf

553-6321

3

Install the cable that connects the backplane connector on the IPE module to the module I/O panel.

4

Connect a 25-pair cable from the module I/O panel connector to the Main

Distribution Frame (MDF).

5

Connect the trunk card output to the selected terminal equipment at the

MDF.

6

Configure the individual trunk interface unit using the Trunk

Administration program (LD 14) and the Trunk Route Administration program (LD 16).

Once these steps have been completed, the trunk card is ready for use.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Overview

Page 63 of 906

Operation

This section describes how trunk cards fit into the CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and

Meridian 1 architecture, the buses that carry signals to and from the trunk

cards, and how they connect to terminal equipment. See Table 8 for IPE

parameters.

Host interface bus

Cards based on the IPE bus have a built-in microcontroller. The IPE microcontroller is used for the following:

• to perform local diagnostics (self-test)

• to configure the card according to instructions issued by the system processor

• to report back to the system processor information such as card identification (type, vintage, and serial number), firmware version, and programmed configuration status.

Table 8

Differences between IPE parameters

Parameter

Card Dimensions

Network Interface

Communication Interface

Microcontroller

Peripheral Interface card

Network Interface card

Modules

IPE

31.75 x 25.4 x 2.2 cm. (12.5 x10.0 x 0.875 in.)

DS-30X Loops card LAN Link

8031



NT8D37 IPE module

Intelligent Peripheral Equipment

IPE trunk cards all have a similar architecture. Figure 11 on page 64 shows a

typical IPE trunk card architecture. The various trunk cards differ only in the number and types of trunk interface units.


Page 64 of 906

Overview

Figure 11

Typical IPE trunk card architecture


PCM

Codec

Trunk

Interface

Unit

Tip

Ring

Front panel

LED

Microcontroller

Backplane

Card slot address

Async card

LAN link


Controller card

Tx PCM

Rx PCM

5.12 MHz clock

1 kHz frame sync


Address/ data bus

PCM

Codec


Trunk signaling interface

Control

Control logic

Power Supplies

Trunk

Interface

Unit

Trunk interface unit power

Tip

Ring

553-6156

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Overview

Page 65 of 906

The switch communicates with IPE modules over two separate interfaces.

Voice and signaling data are sent and received over DS-30X loops and maintenance data is sent over a separate asynchronous communication link called the card LAN link.

Signaling data is information directly related to the operation of the telephone line. Some examples of signaling commands are as follows:

• off hook/on hook

• ringing signal on/off

• message waiting lamp on/off

Maintenance data is data relating to the configuration and operation of the

IPE card, and is carried on the card LAN link. Some examples of maintenance data are as follows:

• polling


• CPU initiated card reset



• downloading trunk interface unit configuration

• reporting of trunk interface unit configuration

• enabling/disabling of the DS-30X network loop bus

• reporting of card status


Page 66 of 906

Overview

DS-30X loops

The interfaces provided by the line and trunk cards connect to conventional

2-wire (tip and ring) line facilities. IPE analog line and trunk cards convert the incoming analog voice and signaling information to digital form, and route it to the Common Equipment (CE) CPU over DS-30X network loops.

Conversely, digital voice and signaling information from the CPU is sent over

DS-30X network loops to the analog line and trunk cards where it is converted to analog form and applied to the line or trunk facility.

IPE digital line cards receive the data from the digital phone terminal as

512 kHz Time Compressed Multiplexed (TCM) data. The digital line card converts that data to a format compatible with the DS-30X loop, and transmits it in the next available timeslot. When a word is received from the DS-30X loop, the digital line card converts it to the TCM format and transmits it to the digital phone terminal over the digital line facility.

A separate dedicated DS-30X network loop is extended between each IPE line/trunk card and the controller cards within an IPE module (or the controller circuits on a network/DTR card in a CE module). A DS-30X network loop is composed of two synchronous serial data buses. One bus transports in the transmit (Tx) direction toward the line facility and the other in the receive (Rx) direction toward the common equipment.

Each bus has 32 channels for pulse code modulated (PCM) voice data. Each

channel consists of a 10-bit word. See Figure 12 on page 67

.

Eight of the 10 bits are for PCM data, one bit is the call signaling bit, and the last bit is a data valid bit. The 8-bit PCM portion of a channel is called a

timeslot. The DS-30X loop is clocked at 2.56 Mbps (one-half the 5.12 MHz clock frequency supplied by the controller card). Thus, the timeslot repetition rate for a single channel is 8 kHz. The controller card also supplies a locally generated 1 kHz frame sync signal for channel synchronization.

Signaling data is transmitted to and from the line cards using the call signaling bit within the 10-bit channel. When the line card detects a condition that the switch needs to know about, it creates a 24-bit signaling word. This word is shifted out on the signaling bit for the associated channel one bit at a time during 24 successive DS-30X frames. Conversely, when the switch sends

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Overview

Page 67 of 906

Figure 12

DS-30X loop data format

DS-30X loop data words

Frame sync

29 30 31 0 1 2 3 4

5.12 MHz

2.56 MHz

Frame sync

DS-30X loop data bits

W31DV W0B7 W0B6 W0B5 W0B4 W0B3 W0B2 W0B1 W0B0 W0SB W0DV W1B7

SB = SIGNALING BIT DV = DATA VALID

553-6151 signaling data to the line card, it is sent as a 24-bit word divided among 24 successive DS-30X frames.

DS-30Y network loops extend between controller cards and superloop network cards in the common equipment, and function in a manner similar to

DS-30X loops. See Figure 13 on page 68

.

Essentially, a DS-30Y loop carries the PCM timeslot traffic of a DS-30X loop. Four DS-30Y network loops form a superloop with a capacity of 128 channels (120 usable timeslots).

See Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1: Large System Planning

and Engineering (553-3021-120) for more information on superloops.

Card LAN link

Maintenance communication is the exchange of control and status data between IPE line or trunk cards and the CE CPU by way of the NT8D01

Controller Card. Maintenance data is transported via the card LAN link. This


Page 68 of 906

Overview

Figure 13

Network connections to IPE modules

Common

Equipment

(Network)

NT8D37 IPE Module

NT8D04

Superloop

Network

Card

DS-30Y loop

NT8D01

Controller

Card

DS-30X

NT8D14

Universal

Trunk Card

NT8D15

E&M

Trunk Card

NT8D13 PE Module

QPC414

Network

Card

Large

System

Network loop

QPC659

Dual-Loop

Peripheral

Buffer Card

QPC71 E&M

Signaling and

Paging Trunk Card

QPC74 Recorded

Announcement

Trunk Card

QPC250

Release Link

Trunk Card

QPC449

Loop Signaling

Trunk Card

553-6158

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Overview

Page 69 of 906

link is composed of two asynchronous serial buses (called the Async card

LAN link in Figure 11 on page 64

). The output bus is used by the controller for output of control data to the trunk card. The input bus is used by the controller for input of trunk card status data.

A card LAN link bus is common to all of the line/trunk card slots within an

IPE module (or IPE section of a CE module). This bus is arranged in a master/ slave configuration where the controller card is the master and all other cards are slaves. The module backplane provides each line/trunk card slot with a unique hardwired slot address. This slot address enables a slave card to respond when addressed by the controller card. The controller card communicates with only one slave at a time.

In normal operation, the controller card continually scans (polls) all of the slave cards connected to the card LAN to monitor their presence and operational status. The slave card sends replies to the controller on the input bus along with its card slot address for identification. In this reply, the slave informs the controller if any change in card status has taken place. The controller can then prompt the slave for specific information. Slaves only respond when prompted by the controller; they do not initiate exchange of control or status data on their own.

When an IPE line or trunk card is first plugged into the backplane, it runs a self-test. When the self test is completed, a properly functioning card responds to the next controller card poll with the self-test status. The controller then queries for card identification and other status information.

The controller then downloads all applicable configuration data to the line/ trunk card, initializes it, and puts it into an operational mode.

The network card regularly polls the IPE cards during TS0 to see if any of them has a message to be sent. When an IPE card has a message waiting it responds to the poll by sending a series of 1s during the next five successive timeslot 0s. The network card responds by sending a “message send enable” message (all 1s). The IPE card replies by sending 1, 1, 1, 0, and then the message in successive timeslot 0s.

Trunk interface unit

Once the 8-bit digital voice signal has been received by the trunk card, it must be converted back into an analog signal, filtered, and driven onto the analog


Page 70 of 906

Overview trunk line through an impedance matching and balance network. The trunk interface also includes the logic necessary to place outgoing call signaling onto the trunk, or the logic to connect to special services such as recorded announcement and paging equipment.

Figure 14 shows a typical example of the logic that performs these functions.

Each part of the trunk interface unit is discussed in the following section.

Figure 14

Typical trunk interface unit block diagram

DS-30X

Network loop

CODEC

Variable gain filters

2-wire to

4-wire conversion and balance network

Isolation transformer

Interface

(protection)

Tip

Ring

TS0

Signaling logic

Signaling leads

(E&M,

DX, etc.)

553-6159

Coder/Decoder circuit

The coder/decoder (codec) performs Analog to Digital (A/D) and Digital to

Analog (D/A) conversion of the line analog voiceband signal to and from a digital PCM signal. This signal can be coded and decoded using either the

A-Law or the µ-Law companding algorithm. On some trunk cards the decoding algorithm depends of the type of codec installed when the board is built. On others, it is an option selected using a software overlay.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Overview

Page 71 of 906

Variable gain filters

Audio signals received from the analog phone trunk are passed through a low-pass A/D monolithic filter that limits the frequency spread of the input signal to a nominal 200–3400 Hz bandwidth. The audio signal is then applied to the input of the codec. Audio signals coming from the CODEC are passed through a low-pass A/D monolithic filter that integrates the amplitude modulated pulses coming from the CODEC, and then filters and amplifies the result.

On some of the trunk cards, the gain of these filters can be programmed by the system controller. This allows the system to make up for line losses according to the loss plan.

Balancing network

Depending on the card type, the balancing network is capable of providing either a 600 ohm or a 900 ohm (or both) impedance matching network. It also converts the 2-wire transmission path (tip and ring) to a 4-wire transmission path (Rx/ground and Tx/ground). The balancing network is a transformer/ analog (hybrid) circuit combination.

Signaling circuits

Signaling circuits are relays that place outgoing call signaling onto the trunk.

Signal detection circuits monitor the incoming call signaling.

Control signals

Control signals and logic are provided when the trunk is going to be connected to special services such as recorded announcement and paging equipment.


Page 72 of 906

Overview

Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards

The NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board provides four bidirectional asynchronous serial ports for the system processor, and the QPC841 QSDI card also provides four. Any device that conforms to the RS-232-C serial communication standard can be connected to these serial ports.

The QPC513 ESDI card provides two fully synchronous serial ports for the system processor. The ESDI card communicates using the Link Access

Procedure Balanced (LAP-B) synchronous communication protocol.

The electrical interface uses either standard RS-232-C signals or a special high-speed interface that combines the high-speed differential interface of the

RS-422-A standard with the handshake signals of the RS-232-C standard.

The RS-232-C interface is normally used when data rates are less than 19.2

Kbps, and the cable length is less than 15.24 m (50 ft). The high-speed interface is used when the signal rates are greater than 19.2 kbps (up to 64 kbps) and/or when the cable length is greater than 15.24 m (50 ft).

Table 9 shows compatibility between the three SDI cards and the various

switch options.

Table 9

Serial data interface cards

Card

NT8D41BA

QPC841

Ports

4

4

Port types

RS-232-C asynchronous

RS-232-C asynchronous

Compatible System Options

51C, 61C

X

X

QPC513 2 RS-232-C synchronous or high-speed synchronous*

X

*

See the section on the QPC513 card in this manual for details on the high-speed interface

81C

X

X

X

The NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board does not have a front panel. It mounts to the rear of the backplane in the NT5D21 Core/Network module, and does

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Overview

Page 73 of 906

not consume a module slot. The RS-232-C connections are brought out through special cables to the backplane I/O panel.

The QPC841 Quad SDI card and the QPC513 Enhanced SDI card mount in standard backplane slots, and their serial interface connectors are located on the card front panels. A list of the modules that they can be mounted in is given in the following sections on the individual cards.

Uses

Examples of asynchronous devices that can be connected to the system processor using the NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board and the QPC841 Quad

SDI card are:

• an administration and maintenance terminal

• a background terminal for use in a hotel/motel

• the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature

• the Call Detail Recording (CDR) feature

Examples of synchronous devices that can be connected to the system processor using the QPC513 Enhanced SDI card are:

• a host computer (DEC, Tandem, for example) using the Meridian Link communication program

• the Meridian Mail voice-mail option

Features

The NT8D41 QSDI paddle board and the QPC841 QSDI card provide the following features:

• asynchronous serial data interface ports, each supporting

— RS-232-C interface

— 8–bit ASCII data with parity and stop bit

— Asynchronous, start-stop operation

— Data rates of 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, and 9600 baud


Page 74 of 906

Overview

— Data terminal equipment (DTE) emulation mode

— Data communication equipment (DCE) emulation mode

• enable/disable switch and LED

• input/output (I/O) device address selectable by on-board switches.

The QPC513 ESDI card provides these features:

• fully synchronous serial data interface ports, each supporting

— RS-232-C or modified RS-422-A interface

— LAPB subset of the HDLC synchronous protocol

— Data rates of 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 48000, 56000, and

64000 baud

— Data terminal equipment (DTE) emulation mode

— Data communication equipment (DCE) emulation mode

• enable/disable switch and LED

• input/output (I/O) device address selectable by on-board switches.

Specifications

This section lists the specifications shared by all of the SDI cards. See the appropriate section in this document for information specific to any particular card.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Overview

Page 75 of 906

Power consumption

The SDI cards obtain their power directly from the module backplane. Power

consumption for each of the cards is shown in Table 10.

Table 10


Maximum power consumption

Voltage

+5 VDC ±5%

+12 VDC ±5%

–12 VDC ±5%

NT8D41BA

1.0 Amp

100 mA

100 mA

QPC513

3.0 Amp

50 mA

50 mA

QPC841

1.5 Amp

100 mA

100 mA

Environmental

The SDI cards operate without degradation under the conditions listed in

Table 11.

Table 11

Environmental specifications

Specification

Ambient temperature

Operation

0° to 50°C;

(32° to 122°F)

5% to 95%

Storage

–55° to +70°C;

(–58° to 158°F)

0% to 95% Relative humidity

(non-condensing)

Altitude 3500m;

(11000 ft)

15000m;

(50000 ft)

Electrostatic discharge

The SDI cards meet the requirements of the IEC 801-2, clause 8.0 procedure.

They can withstand a direct discharge of ±5 to ±20 kV without being damaged.


Page 76 of 906

Overview

Electromagnetic interference

The CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 systems meet the requirements of

FCC Part 15 and CSA C108.8 electromagnetic interference (EMI) standards as a class “A” computing device. To accomplish this, the SDI cables must exit the module through EMI filters on the I/O panel.

Reliability

The Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) for all SDI cards is 55 years at

40°C and 29 years at 55°C.

Installation

To use a serial data interface card in a CS 1000S, CS 1000M, or Meridian 1 system, first install the card in the system, and then configure the system software to recognize it. These steps are discussed in the following sections.

Instructions for cabling the serial data interface cards to the various system consoles and peripherals are found in Communication Server 1000M and

Meridian 1: Large System Installation and Configuration (553-3021-210).

Configuring the system software

Once an SDI card has been installed in the system, the system software needs to be configured to recognize it. This is done using the Configuration Record program LD 17. Instructions for the Configuration Record program are found in Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311).

Maintenance

The following maintenance programs are used to maintain individual SDI asynchronous ports. The program used depends on the application of the port.

• LD 37 Input/Output Diagnostics – Used for system terminal, printer, background terminal ports, and system monitor status.

• LD 42 Call Detail Recording (CDR) Diagnostic – For checking CDR links and CDR system terminals.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Overview

Page 77 of 906

The following maintenance program is used to maintain individual SDI synchronous ports.

• LD 48 Link Diagnostic – For checking Automatic Call Distribution

(ACD) and Meridian Link ports.

Instructions for running the various maintenance programs are found in

Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311). System messages are interpreted in Software Input/Output: System Messages (553-3001-411).


Page 78 of 906

Overview

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

88

Page 79 of 906

Circuit card installation

Contents


Card slots — Large System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Circuit card installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Installing a circuit card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Card slots — Large System

The following table in this chapter identifies card slot compatibility in the following modules:

• NT4N41 Core/Network module required for CS 1000M SG,

CS 1000M MG, Meridian 1 PBX 61C Call Processor (CP) PII, CP PIV, and Meridian 1 PBX 81C

• NT4N46 Core/Network module required for CS 1000M MG and Option

81C CP PII, CP PIV

• NT6D60 Core/Network module required for the CS 1000M MG and

Option 81C only

• NT8D35 Network module required for CS 1000M MG and Meridian 1

PBX 81C

• NT8D37 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) module required for CS 1000M HG, CS 1000M SG, CS 1000M MG, Meridian 1

Option 51, Meridian 1 PBX 61C, and Meridian 1 PBX 81C


Page 80 of 906

Circuit card installation

Circuit card installation

Table 12

Large System card slots (Part 1 of 4)

Component

A0786611 Call Processor Pentium II

® card

A0810486 Call Processor Pentium II

NT1P61 Fiber Superloop Network card

NT1P62 Fiber Peripheral Controller card

NT1R52 Remote Carrier Interface

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station

NT4D18 Hybrid Bus Terminator

NT4D19 and NT423 Hybrid Bus Terminator

NT4D20 and NT422 Hybrid Bus Terminator

NT4N43 Multi-Medium DIsk Unit

NT4N64 Call Processor Pentium II card

NT4N64 Call Processor Pentium II card

NT4N39 Call Processor Pentium IV card

NT4N39 Call Processor Pentium IV card

NT4N65 cPCI

®

Core to Network Interface card

NT4N66 cPCI Core to Network Interface Transition card

NT4N67 System Utility card

NT4N68 System Utility Transition card

NT5D11 and

NT5D14 Line side T1 Line card

NT5D12AA Dual DTI/PRI card

NT5D61 Input/Output Disk Unit with CD-ROM

(MMDU)

Large System

81C Core/Net: “CP”

81C Core/Net: “CP”

Core/Net: 0–7

IPE: “Contr”

IPE: “Contr”

IPE: any slot but “Contr”

Core/Net: between 11 and 12



81C Core/Net:

61C Core/Net: CP PII

81C Core/Net: CP PII

61C Core/Net: CP PIV

81C Core/Net: CP PIV

81C Core/Net: c9–c12

81C Core/Net cPCI Core backplane: 9–12

81C Core/Net: c15

81C Core/Net cPCI Core backplane:


Core/Net: 0–7

61C Core/Net: 17, 18 and 19

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 81 of 906

Table 12


Component

NT5K02 Analog Line card

NT5K07 Universal Trunk card

NT5K17 Direct Dial Inward Trunk card

NT5K18 Central Office Trunk card

NT5K19 E&M Trunk card

NT5K35 D-channel Handler Interface

NT5K36 Direct Inward/Direct Outward Dial Trunk card






NT5K84 Direct Inward Dial Trunk card



NT5K96 Analog Line card


NT5K20 Extended Tone Detector

NT6D65 Core to Network Interface

NT6D66 Call Processor card

NT6D70

S/T Interface Line card

Large System






Core/Net: 0-7

Net: 5-12













61C Core/Net: 12

61C Core/Net: 15 and 16



Page 82 of 906


Table 12


Component

NT6D71

U Interface Line card

NT6D72

Basic Rate Signal Concentrator card

NT6D73

Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling Processor card

NT6D80 MSDL

NT7D16 Data Access card

NT7R51 Local Carrier Interface


NT8D02 Digital Line card


NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card

NT8D16 Digitone Receiver card

NT8D17 Conference/TDS card

NT8D41 Dual Port Serial Data Interface card

NT9D19 Call Processor card

NTAG03 Central Office Trunk card

NTAG04 Central Office/Direct Inward Dial Trunk card

NTAG36 Nortel Integrated Recorded Announcer

NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel daughterboard

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk card

Large System



Core/Net: 0–7

Core/Net: 0–7


Core/Net: 0–7

IPE: “Contr”


Core/Net: 0–7

Net: 5-12





Core/Net: 0–7

Serial Port back of Core/Net module

61C Core/Net: 15 and 16




Connects to DDP card


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 83 of 906

Table 12


Component

NTCK43AA Primary Rate Interface card

NTRB33 FIber Junctor Interface card

NTRE39 Optical Cable Management card

QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card

QPC71 E&M/DX Trunk card

QPC414 Network card

QPC441 3-Port Extender card

QPC471 Clock Controller card

QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card

QPC578 Integrated Services Digital Line card

QPC659 Dual Loop Peripheral Buffer card

QPC720 Primary Rate Interface card

QPC775 Clock Controller

Large System

Core/Net: 0-7

Net: 5-11, 13-14

For 81C: Core/Net: 8 and 9, Net module: 2 and 3

For 81C: Net module: the slot to the right side of 14, the slot to the left of the 3PE in slot 1

Core/Net: 10

Net: 4


Core/Net: 0–7

Net: 5-12

Core/Net: 11

Net: 1

61C Core/Net: 9

Net: 5 -12

For 81C, use NT8D35 Net slot 13; in QSD39 shelf, use Net slot 2; in QSD40 shelf, use slot 13

Core/Net: 9, 13


IPE: “DLB”

Core/Net: 0–7

Net: 5–11, 13–14

61C Core/Net: slot 14.

For 81C use NT8D35 Net slot 13; in QSD39 shelf, use Net slot 2; in QSD40 shelf, use slot 13.

IPE: any slot but “Contr” QPC789 16-Port 500/2500 Message Waiting Line card

QPC841 4-Port Serial Data Interface card Core/Net: 0-7


Page 84 of 906


Precautions

To avoid personal injury and equipment damage, review the following guidelines before handling system equipment.

WARNING

Module covers are not hinged; do not let go of the covers.

Lift covers away from the module and set them out of your work area.

WARNING

Circuit cards may contain a lithium battery. There is a danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced.

Do not replace components on any circuit card; you must replace the entire card.

Dispose of circuit cards according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

To avoid damage to circuit cards from static discharge, wear a properly connected antistatic wrist strap when you work on system equipment. If a wrist strap is not available, regularly touch one of the bare metal strips in a

module to discharge static. Figure 15 on page 85 shows the recommended

connection points for the wrist strap and the bare metal strips you should touch.

Handle circuit cards as follows:

• Unpack or handle cards away from electric motors, transformers, or similar machinery.

• Handle cards by the edges only. Do not touch the contacts or components.

• Set cards on a protective antistatic bag. If an antistatic bag is not available, hand-hold the card, or set it in a card cage unseated from the connectors.

• Store cards in protective packing. Do not stack cards on top of each other unless they are packaged.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 85 of 906

• Keep cards installed in the system as much as possible to avoid dirty contacts and unnecessary wear.

• Store cards in a cool, dry, dust-free area.

Figure 15

Static discharge points

Wrist strap connection point

Module rear

Bare metal strip

Power supply slot

Wrist strap connection point

Module front

Bare metal strip

553-5000

During repair and maintenance procedures do the following:

• Turn off the circuit breaker or switch for a module power supply before the power supply is removed or inserted.

• In AC-powered systems, capacitors in the power supply must discharge.

Wait five full minutes between turning off the circuit breaker and removing the power supply from the module.

• Software disable cards, if applicable, before they are removed or inserted.


Page 86 of 906


• Hardware disable cards, whenever there is an enable/disable switch, before they are removed or inserted.

• Return defective or heavily contaminated cards to a repair center. Do not try to repair or clean them.

Installing a circuit card

This procedure provides detailed installation instructions for circuit cards.

DANGER

To avoid personal injury and equipment damage, read all

of the guidelines in “Circuit card installation” on page 80

before you begin installation and follow all guidelines throughout the procedure.

Procedure 1

Installation

1

Open the protective carton and remove the circuit card from the antistatic bag. Return the antistatic bag to the carton and store it for future use.

2

Inspect the card components, faceplate, locking devices, and connectors for damage. If damaged, tag the card with a description of the problem and package it for return to a repair center.

3

Refer to the work order to determine the module and slot location for the card.

4

If there is an enable/disable (Enb/Dis) switch on the faceplate, set it to Dis.

5

If there are option switches or jumpers on the card, set them according to

the work order (see “Option settings” on page 101

).

CAUTION

System Failure

Incorrectly set switches on common equipment circuit cards may cause a system failure.

6

Squeeze the ends of the locking devices on the card and pull the tabs

away from the latch posts and faceplate (see Figure 16).

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Figure 16

Installing the circuit card in the card cage

Card locking device

Tab

Latch post


Page 87 of 906

Edge of card cage

Card guides

553-5002

7

Insert the card into the card aligning guides in the card cage. Gently push the card into the slot until you feel resistance. The tip of the locking device

must be behind the edge of the card cage (see Figure 16).

8

Lock the card into position by simultaneously pushing the ends of the locking devices against the faceplate.

Note: When IPE cards are installed, the red LED on the faceplate remains lit for two to five seconds as a self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit until the card is configured and enabled in software, then the LED goes out. If the LED does not follow the pattern described or operates in any other manner (such as continually flashing or remaining weakly lit), replace the card.


Page 88 of 906


9

If there is an enable/disable switch, set it to Enb.

Note: Do not enable the switch on an NT8D04 Superloop Network card or QPC414 Network card until network loop cables are installed.

10 If you are adding a voice, conference, or tone and digit loop, press the manual initialize (Man Int) button on the NT5D03 or the NT5D10 Call

Processor if the card is associated with the active Call Processor:

Note: An initialization causes a momentary interruption in call processing.

11 If you are installing the card in a working system, refer to the work order and the Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311) to add the required office data to the system memory.

12 Go to the appropriate test procedure in “Acceptance tests” on page 89 .

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

100

Page 89 of 906

Acceptance tests

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Conference cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Digitone receiver cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Line cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Multifrequency sender cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Multifrequency signaling cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Network cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Trunk cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Tone and digit switch cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Introduction

Test procedures for most circuit cards require that internal and external cabling be installed. See the appropriate installation document for your system and Telephones and Consoles: Description, Installation, and

Operation (553-3001-367) for cabling procedures.


Page 90 of 906

Acceptance tests

Conference cards

Procedure 2

Testing conference cards

Use this procedure to test a conference card or to test the conference function of an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card.

1

Log into the system:

LOGI (password)

2

Request the status of a loop on the conference card:

LD 38

STAT loop

Conference status is formatted as follows:

CNFC n DSBL n BUSY

“n” represents the number of conference groups disabled and busy

CHAN n DSBL n BUSY

“n” represents the number of channels disabled and busy

UNEQ

card is not equipped in the system

DSBL

card is disabled in software

3

If the conference card loop is disabled, enable it.

For an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card, enter:

ENLX loop

(the conference loop is the odd loop of the conference/TDS loop pair)

Note: The conference/TDS card is not enabled automatically when it is inserted. You must enable the card with the command ENLX. (This command is used in LD 34 and LD 46 to address even loops and in LD 38 to address odd loops.) Enabling the loops with the command ENLL does not enable the hardware for the card.

For other than an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card, enter:

ENLL loop

(the conference loop must be an even loop for cards other than the

NT8D17)

If the system response is other than OK, see the Software Input/Output:

Administration (553-3001-311) to analyze the messages.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Acceptance tests

Page 91 of 906

4

Test the conference loop for channel, group, and switching faults:

CNFC loop

If the conference loop passes the tests, the output is OK.



5

Prepare the system for a manual conference call on a specified loop:

CNFC MAN loop c

Where “c” is the manual conference group (1-15)

A manual conference test is performed by stepping through conference channels and groups, listening for noise that indicates a faulty card.

The manual conference test can be performed through a system terminal or BCS maintenance telephone. If commands are entered from a maintenance telephone, this telephone automatically becomes part of the manual conference call.

Only one manual conference call is allowed at one time. A manual conference consists of only two telephones, where one telephone acts as a signal source while the other acts as a listening monitor.

After you enter the CNFC command, any two telephones (one may already be the maintenance telephone) dialing the special service prefix code (SPRE) and the digits 93 will enter the manual conference call. The prime directory number (PDN) indicator, if equipped, will light on each telephone.

Going on-hook takes the telephone out of the manual conference call, and the test must be restarted.

See LD 38 in the Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311) for more detailed information on using this command.

6

Test various channels and conference groups audibly with the command

CNFC STEP

When stepping through channels and groups, a clicking followed by silence is normal. Any distortion or other noises indicates a faulty card.

Once the CNFC STEP command has been entered, entering C on the system terminal or maintenance telephone steps through the conference channels. Entering G steps through the conference groups. There are 15 channels per group and 15 groups per conference card.

Entering an asterisk (*) and END stops the test.


Page 92 of 906

Acceptance tests

Again, see “LD 38” in the Software Input/Output: Maintenance

(553-3001-511) for detailed information on using this command.

7

End the session in LD 38:

****

End of Procedure

Digitone receiver cards

Procedure 3

Testing digitone receiver cards

Use this procedure to test a Digitone receiver (DTR) card, a DTR daughterboard, or the DTR function on the NT8D18 Network/DTR card.

Note: The DTR daughterboard connected to a QPC659 Dual Loop

Peripheral Buffer card cannot be assigned when the IPE shelf is used in single loop mode.

1


LOGI (password)

2

See if the Digitone receiver to be tested is disabled:

LD 34

STAT

The system responds with the terminal number (TN), or numbers, of any disabled Digitone receivers.

3

If the Digitone receiver is disabled, enable it:

ENLR l s c uloop, shelf, card, and unit numbers

4

Test the Digitone receiver:

DTR l s c uloop, shelf, card, and unit numbers



5


****


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Acceptance tests

Page 93 of 906

Line cards

Procedure 4

Testing line cards

Use this procedure to test a line card.

1


LOGI (password)

2

Perform a network memory test, continuity test, and signaling test on a specific loop and shelf:

LD 30

SHLF l sloop and shelf numbers



3

For a line card on a superloop, perform a signaling test on a specific card or unit:

UNTT l s c loop, shelf, and card numbers

For the NT8D02 Digital Line card, enter:

UNTT l s c u

loop, shelf, card, and unit numbers



4


****



Page 94 of 906

Acceptance tests

Multifrequency sender cards

Procedure 5

Testing multifrequency sender cards

Use this procedure to test a multifrequency sender (MFS) card or the MFS function of an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card.

1


LOGI (password)

2

Test and enable an MFS loop:

LD 46

MFS loop

(on the NT8D17 Conference/TDS card, the TDS/MFS loop is the even loop of the conference/TDS loop pair)




3

Access the system from a maintenance telephone; then enter:

LD 46

Give the system approximately 20 seconds to load the program.

See “Communicating with the Meridian 1” in the Software Input/Output:

Administration (553-3001-311) for details on accessing the system from a maintenance telephone.

4

Obtain 10-second bursts of digits 1 to 9, 0, and 11 to 15 (in that order) for all digits on the specified loop:

TONE loop ALL

Each burst should sound different. If the bursts do not sound different, replace the card.

5


****


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Acceptance tests

Page 95 of 906

Multifrequency signaling cards

Procedure 6

Testing multifrequency signaling cards

Use this procedure to test a multifrequency signaling card.

1


LOGI (password)

2

Test and enable the specified unit:

LD 54

ATST l s c u


If the system response is other than OK, see the Software Input/

Output: Administration (553-3001-311) to analyze the messages.

3


****


Network cards

Procedure 7

Testing network cards

Use this procedure to test a network card.

1


LOGI (password)

2

Perform a network memory test, continuity test, and signaling test:

LD 30

LOOP loop

can be a specific loop number or ALL

If ALL is specified, all enabled loops (except attendant console loops) and all shelves on each loop are tested.

If only one loop is being tested and it is disabled, enter ENLL loop to enable and test a network card associated with the specified loop. (This command cannot enable network cards disabled by LD 32.)




Page 96 of 906

Acceptance tests

3


****


Trunk cards

Use the following procedures to test a trunk card.

Procedure 8

Testing a trunk card using a maintenance telephone

1

Access the system from a maintenance telephone.


Administration (553-3001-311) for details on accessing the system from a maintenance telephone.

2

Test the trunk unit:

LD 36

TRK l s c u


3

If the maintenance telephone is hooked up to a monitor and the system response is other than OK, see the Software Input/Output: Administration

(553-3001-311) to analyze the messages.


Procedure 9

Testing a trunk card using a system terminal

1


LOGI (password)

2

Enter:

LD 36

3

To test a trunk from a remote test center, seize a central office (CO) monitor trunk:

CALL

or

CALL l s c u

Seize the automatic number identification (ANI) trunk:

TRK l s c u


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Acceptance tests

Page 97 of 906

When you see the DN? prompt, enter the directory number (DN) you want the system to dial.



4


****

5

Test an automatically identified outward dialing (AIOD) trunk card:

LD 41

AIOD l s c

loop, shelf, and card numbers



6


****


Tone and digit switch cards

Procedure 10

Testing tone and digit switch cards

Use this procedure to test a tone and digit switch (TDS) card or to test the TDS function of an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card.

1


LOGI (password)

2

Obtain a list of terminal numbers (TNs) for disabled TDS cards:

LD 34

STAD

3

If the TDS loop to be tested is disabled, enable it.

For an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card, enter:

ENLX loop

(the TDS/MFS loop is the even loop of the conference/TDS loop pair)



Page 98 of 906

Acceptance tests

For other than an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card, enter:

ENLL loop

4

Test the TDS loop:

TDS loop



5


****

6

Using a maintenance telephone, log into the system.


Administration (553-3001-311) for details on accessing the system using a maintenance telephone.

7

From the maintenance telephone, enter:

LD#34##

To test outpulsers and channels for the TDS loop, see Table 13 on page 98 for a sample of the input commands used with the maintenance

telephone. See the Software Input/Output: Administration

(553-3001-311) for all tones that can be tested.

8

Exit LD 34 from the maintenance telephone:

****


Table 13

TDS tone tests

Input command

Dial pad equivalent

BSY#loop##

C##

DIA#loop##

OVF#loop##

RBK#loop##

279#loop##

2##

342#loop##

683#loop##

725#loop##

Description

Provides busy tone from TDS loop specified.

Removes any active tone.

Provides dial tone from TDS loop specified.

Provides overflow tone from TDS loop specified.

Provides ringback tone from TDS loop specified.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Acceptance tests

Page 99 of 906

Table 13

TDS tone tests

RNG#loop##

****

764#loop## Provides ring tone from TDS loop specified.

Exits TDS test program.


Page 100 of 906

Acceptance tests

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

156

Page 101 of 906

Option settings

Contents


Circuit card grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

General purpose switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

NT5D2101/NT9D1102 Core/Network module backplane . . . . . . . . . . 117

NT6D68 Core module backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

NT6D80 Multi-purpose Serial Data Link card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

NT8D17 Conference/TDS card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

NT8D21 Ringing Generator AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

NT8D22 System Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

NT8D72 Primary Rate Interface card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

QPC71 E&M/DX Signaling and Paging Trunk cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

QPC414 Network card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

QPC441 3-Port Extender cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

QPC559, QPC560 Loop Signaling Trunk cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141


Page 102 of 906

Option settings

QPC528 CO/FX/WATS Trunk cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

QPC471 Clock Controller card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

QPC525, QPC526, QPC527, QPC777 CO Trunk card . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

QPC550 Direct Inward Dial Trunk card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

QPC551 Radio Paging Trunk card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

QPC595 Digitone Receiver cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

QPC577, QPC596 Digitone Receiver daughterboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

QPC720 Primary Rate Interface card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

QPC775 Clock Controller card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

QPC841 4-Port Serial Data Interface card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Circuit card grid

Some circuit cards contain option switches or jumpers, or both, that define specific functions. A switch or jumper can be identified by an alphanumeric coordinate (such as D29) that indicates a location on the card, or by a switch

number (such as SW2) printed on the circuit board (see Figure 17). Positions

on a switch (for example, positions 1, 2, 3, and 4 on SW2) are labeled on the switch block.

On a circuit card:

• ON may be indicated by the word “on,” the word “up,” the word

“closed,” the number “1,” an arrow pointing up, or a solid dot (•).

• OFF may be indicated by the word “down,” the word “open,” the number

“0,” or an arrow pointing down.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Figure 17

Circuit card grid

Option settings

Page 103 of 906

Throughout this document, if neither ON nor OFF is given (there is a blank space) for a position on a switch, that position may be set to either ON or OFF because it has no function for the option described.

ON

S4

(switch 4 at coordinate

B11)

Positions

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ON

S8

(switch 8 at coordinate

F30)

553-5491


Page 104 of 906

Option settings

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card

Table 14 lists option settings for the NT1R20 Off-Premise Station analog

card.

Table 14

OPS analog line card configuration (Part 1 of 3)

Application On-premise station (ONS) Off-premise station (OPS)

Class of Service

(CLS) (Note 1)

ONP OPX

Loop resistance

(ohms)

Jumper strap setting (Note 6)

0–460

Both JX.0 and JX.1 off

0–2300 (Note 2)


Note 1: Configured in the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program (LD 10).

Note 2: The maximum signaling range supported by the OPS analog line card is 2300 ohms.

Note 3: Loss of untreated (no gain devices) metallic line facility. Upper loss limits correspond to loop resistance ranges for 26 AWG wire.

Note 4: Default software impedance settings are:

ONP CLS OPX CLS

TIMP:

600 ohms 600 ohms

BIMP:

600 ohms 3COM2

Note: Gain treatment, such as a voice frequency repeater (VFR) is required to limit the actual

OPS loop loss to 4.5 dB, maximum. VFR treatment of metallic loops having untreated loss greater than 15 dB (equivalent to a maximum signaling range of 2300 ohms on 26 AWG wire) is not recommended.

Note: Jumper strap settings JX.0 and JX.1 apply to all eight units; “X” indicates the unit number, 0–7. “Off” indicates that a jumper strap is not installed across both pins on a jumper block. Store unused straps on the OPS analog line card by installing them on a single jumper pin as shown below:

Jumper pin

Jumper strap

Jumper block

553-5924

Both JX.0 and JX.1 on

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Option settings

Page 105 of 906

Table 14



Class of Service

(CLS) (Note 1)

Loop loss (dB)

(Note 3)

0–1.5

ONP

>1.5–2.5 >2.5–3.0 0–1.5

OPX

>1.5–2.5 >2.5–4.5 >4.5–15

TIMP

(Notes 1, 4)

600 ohms

600 ohms

600 ohms

600 ohms

600 ohms

600 ohms

600 ohms





ONP CLS OPX CLS

TIMP:

600 ohms 600 ohms

BIMP:

600 ohms 3COM2




Jumper pin

Jumper strap

Jumper block

553-5924


Page 106 of 906

Option settings

Table 14



Class of Service

(CLS) (Note 1)

BIMP

(Notes 1, 4)

600 ohms

ONP

3COM1 3COM2 600 ohms

3COM1

OPX

3COM2 3COM2

Gain treatment

(Note 5)

No Yes





ONP CLS OPX CLS

TIMP:

600 ohms 600 ohms

BIMP:

600 ohms 3COM2




Jumper pin

Jumper strap

Jumper block

553-5924

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Option settings

Page 107 of 906

NT5D12AA Dual DTI/PRI (DDP) card

Switch setting tables for this card are listed in subsections according to their function. Bold font designates factory (default) settings.

General purpose switches

Use switch set SW9 for Trunk 0; use switch set SW15 for Trunk 1

(see Table 15).

Table 15

General purpose switch settings

Switch

1

2

3

4

Description

Framing Mode

Yellow Alarm Method

Zero Code Suppression Mode

Unused

SW9/SW15 switch setting

off - ESF on - SF off - FDL on - Digit2 off - B8ZS on - AMI off

Trunk interface switches

A switch provides selection of T1 transmission. Use switch SW4 for Trunk 0;

use switch SW10 for Trunk 1 (see Table 16).

Table 16

Trunk interface transmission mode switch settings

Description

For future use

T1

SW4/SW10 switch setting

off on


Page 108 of 906

Option settings

A set of three switches provides selection of dB values. Use SW5, SW6, and

SW7 for Trunk 0; use SW11, SW12, and SW13 for Trunk 1 (see Table 17).

Table 17

Trunk interface line build out switch settings

Switch Setting

Description

0 dB

7.5 dB

15 dB

SW5/SW11

off on on

SW6/SW12

off on off

SW7/SW13

off off on

A set of four DIP switches provides selection among three values for receiver

impedance. Use SW8 for Trunk 0; use SW14 for Trunk 1 (see Table 18).

Table 18

Trunk interface impedance switch settings

Description

75

Ω

100

Ω

120

Ω off on off

SW8/SW14 Switch Settings

off off off on off off off on on

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

2

3

4

Trunk 0 Receive

Trunk 1 Transmit

Trunk 1 Receive

Option settings

Page 109 of 906

Ring ground switches

A set of four DIP switches selects which Ring lines are connected to ground

(see Table 19).

Table 19

Ring ground switch settings

Switch

1

Description

Trunk 0 Transmit

S2 switch setting

off - Ring line is not grounded on- Ring line is grounded off - Ring line is not grounded on - Ring line is grounded off - Ring line is not grounded on - Ring line is grounded off - Ring line is not grounded on - Ring line is grounded


Page 110 of 906

Option settings

DCH mode and address select switches

One switch selects an on-board NTBK51AA D-Channel daughterboard and an external MSDL/DCHI card. Four other switches provide the

daughterboard address (see Table 20).

Table 20

DCH mode and address select switch settings

Switch Description

1-4

5-7

8

D-Channel daughterboard

Address

For future use

External DCH or Onboard

DDCH

S3 Switch Setting

See the next table.

off off - MSDL or DCHI card on - Onboard DDCH daughterboard

Table 21

NTBK51AA daughterboard address select switch settings (Part 1 of 2)

Device Address

1

0

2

3

4

1

2

7

8

5

6 off on off on off on off on off off off on on off off on on off

Switch Setting

off on on on off off off on off off off off off off off off off on

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Option settings

Page 111 of 906

Table 21


Device Address

1

Switch Setting

9

10

11

12 on off on off off on on off off off off on on on on on

13

14 on off off on on on on on

15 on on on on

Note 1: The maximum number of DCHI, MSDL, and DDCH devices in the system is 16.

The Device Addresses are equivalent to the MSDL DNUM designations. For programming information on the MSDL, refer to NTP Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311) guide.

Note 2: Device address 0 is commonly assigned to the System Monitor.

Illustrations of switch locations and settings

Figure 18 on page 112 displays functional areas for switches on the

NT5D12AA DDP card.


Page 112 of 906

Option settings

Figure 18

Switch functions and areas

DDP

Faceplate

J5

Port 0 Port 1

S9

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

General Purpose Switches

S15

S8

Receiver

Impedence

S14

S7

Line

S13

J6

Build Out

S6

S5

S2

1 2 3 4

S4

Transmission

Switches

Mode

S3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DCH Mode and Address Select

S12

S11

S10

553-7308

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Option settings

Page 113 of 906

Figure 19 displays default settings for switches on the NT5D12AA DDP

card.

Figure 19

Switch default settings

J5

o n

1 2 3 4 o n

1 2 3 4

J6

o n

1 2 3 4 o n

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

553-7309


Page 114 of 906

Option settings

NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC

Tables 22 through 27 list option settings for the NT6D42 Ringing Generator.

Table 22

NT6D42 recommended options for North American and British Telecom

Application

North America

Ringing frequency

20 Hz

Ringing voltage

86 V ac

Ringing output

Low impedance

British Telecom 25 Hz 80 V ac

Jumper locations

P5

High voltage message waiting

P4

No high voltage message waiting

Low impedance

Table 23

NT6D42 jumper locations P4 and P5

High voltage message waiting

Disable

Enable

Note: One jumper must be installed.

Table 24

NT6D42 jumper location J7

Ringing output

Low impedance (normal)

High impedance (Australia)

Pin location

Jumper in P4

Jumper in P5

Jumper location J7

Connect pins 1 and 2

Connect pins 2 and 3

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Option settings

Page 115 of 906

Table 25

NT6D42 SW1

Ringing frequency (Hz)

20

25

50

Table 26

NT6D42CB SW2

Ringing voltage

86 V ac

86 V ac

80 V ac

80 V ac

75 V ac

75 V ac

70 V ac

70 V ac

Message waiting voltage

–120 V dc

–150 V dc

–120 V dc

–150 V dc

–120 V dc

–150 V dc

–120 V dc

–150 V dc

1

on off off off off off off on

Position SW1

1

2

3

2

off on on off off off off off

SW2

3

off off off on on off off off

4

on off on off on off on off


Page 116 of 906

Option settings

Table 27

NT6D42CC SW2

Ringing voltage

86 V ac

86 V ac

80 V ac

80 V ac

75 V ac

75 V ac

70 V ac

70 V ac

Message waiting voltage

–100 V dc

–150 V dc

–100 V dc

–150 V dc

–100 V dc

–150 V dc

–100 V dc

–150 V dc

1

on off off off off off off on

2

off on on off off off off off

SW2

3

off off off on on off off off

4


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Option settings

Page 117 of 906

NT5D2101/NT9D1102 Core/Network module backplane

Table 28

NT5D2101/NT9D1102 Core/Network module backplane

Jumper

Location

(between slots) Core/Network 1 Core/Network 0

JB1 14/15 Jumper plug not installed Plug installed

Note: Berg jumper is located at the bottom of the primary side of the backplane. (This is inside the card cage assembly.)

NT6D68 Core module backplane

Table 29

NT6D68 Core module backplane

Jumper

Location

(between slots) Core 1 Core 0

JB4

JB3

JB2

JB1

9 / 10

10 / 11

11 / 12

12 / 13

Jumper plug not installed

Plug installed

Plug installed

Plug installed

Plug installed

Plug installed

Plug installed

Plug installed

Note: Berg jumpers are located along the bottom of the primary side of the backplane. (This is inside the card cage assembly.)


Page 118 of 906

Option settings

NT6D80 Multi-purpose Serial Data Link card

Table 30

NT6D80 Multi-purpose Serial Data Link card

RS-232-D DTE or DCE*

RS-422-A DTE (terminal)

RS-422-A DCE (modem)

Port 0—SW4

all off all off all on

Port 1—SW3

Port 0—SW8

all off all on all off

Port 1—SW7


RS-422-A DTE

RS-422-A DCE


RS-422-A DTE

RS-422-A DCE all off all off all on

Port 2—SW2

all off all off all on

Port 3—SW1


Port 2—SW6


Port 3—SW5


RS-422-A DTE

RS-422-A DCE all off all off all on all off all on all off

* RS-232-D DTE and DCE modes are software configured. RS-422-A DTE and DEC modes are switch configured.

Note: The device number for the MSDL card is configured in LD17 at the prompt DNUM. You must also set the device number, using switches S9 and S10, on the MSDL card. S9 designates ones and S10 designates tens. To set the device number as 14, for example, set S10 to 1 and

S9 to 4.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Option settings

Page 119 of 906


Tables 31 through 35 list option settings for the NT8D14 Universal Trunk

card.

Table 31

NT8D14 vintage AA jumper strap settings

Modes

Central Office (CO)

2-way tie trunk (loop dial repeat)

2-way tie trunk (outgoing/incoming dial)

Recorded announcement (RAN)

Paging trunk

Japan CO/DID operation

DID operation: loop length > = 2000 ¾

DID operation: loop length < 2000 ¾

Note 1: off = no strap present.

Note 2: Locations (J1, J2) apply to all eight units.

Location

J1, J2

J1, J2

J1, J2

J1, J2

J1, J2

J1, J2

J1, J2

J1, J2

Jumper strap

off off off on off off off off


Page 120 of 906

Option settings

Table 32

NT8D14 vintages BA/BB jumper strap settings—factory standard

Jumper strap settings

Trunk types

Loop length

J1.X

Off

J2.X

Off

J3.X

1–2

J4.X

1–2 CO/FX/WATS

2-way tie (LDR)

2-way tie (OAID)

Zero–1524 m (5000 ft)

DID

RAN: continuous operation mode

Paging

Zero–600 ohms

Not applicable: RAN and paging trunks should not leave the building.

Note: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.X apply to all eight units; “X” indicates the unit number, 0–7. “Off” indicates that no jumper strap is installed on a jumper block. Store unused straps on the universal trunk card by installing them on a single jumper pin as shown below:

Jumper pin

Jumper strap

Jumper block

553-5924

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Option settings

Page 121 of 906

Table 33

NT8D14 vintages BA/BB jumper strap settings—extended range


Trunk types

Loop length

J1.X

Off

J2.X

Off

J3.X

1–2

J4.X

2–3 CO/FX/WATS

2-way tie (LDR)

2-way tie (OAID)

> 1524 m (5000 ft)

DID

RAN: pulse start or level start modes

> 600 ohms

Not applicable: RAN trunks should not leave the building.

On

Off

On

Off

1–2

2–3

2–3

1–2

Note: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.X apply to all eight units; “X” indicates the unit number, 0–7. “Off” indicates that no jumper strap is installed on a jumper block.

Table 34

NT8D14 vintages BA/BB trunk types—termination impedance and balance network

(Part 1 of 2)

Balance network for loop lengths (Note 2)

Trunk types

Terminating impedance

(Note 1)

Zero–915 m

(zero–3000 ft)

600 ohms

915–1524 m

(3000–5000 ft)

3COM1

> 1524 m

(> 5000 ft)

3COM2 CO/FX/WATS 600 or 900 ohms

2-way tie (LDR) 600 or 900 ohms

600 ohms 3COM1 3COM2

Note 1: The terminating impedance of each trunk unit is software selectable in LD 14 and should match the nominal impedance of the connecting equipment.

Note 2: The balance network of each trunk unit is software selectable between resistive 600 or

900 ohms or 3COM and is jumper selectable between 3COM1 and 3COM2.


Page 122 of 906

Option settings

Table 34

NT8D14 vintages BA/BB trunk types—termination impedance and balance network

(Part 2 of 2)


Trunk types


(Note 1)

Zero–915 m

(zero–3000 ft)

600 ohms

915–1524 m

(3000–5000 ft)

3COM1

> 1524 m

(> 5000 ft)

3COM2 2-way tie (OAID) 600 or 900 ohms

DID (loop < 600 ohms)

600 or 900 ohms

DID (loop Š 600 ohms)


600 or 900 ohms

600 or 900 ohms

600 ohms

600 ohms

600 or 900 ohms

3COM1

N/A

N/A

3COM2

3COM2

N/A

Paging 600 ohms 600 ohms N/A N/A



900 ohms or 3COM and is jumper selectable between 3COM1 and 3COM2.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Option settings

Page 123 of 906

Table 35

NT8D14 vintages BA/BB cable loop resistance and loss

Cable length

915 m (3000 ft)

1524 m (5000 ft)

2225 m (7300 ft)

3566 m (11700 ft)

5639 m (18500 ft)

Cable loop resistance (ohms)

Cable loop loss (dB)

(non-loaded at 1kHz)

22 AWG 24 AWG 26 AWG 22 AWG 24 AWG 26 AWG

97

162

236

379

600

155

260

378

607

960

251

417

609

977

1544

0.9

1.6

2.3

3.7

5.9

1.2

2.0

3.0

4.8

7.6

1.5

2.5

3.7

6.0

9.4


Page 124 of 906

Option settings


Table 36


2-wire trunk

Mode of operation (Note 2)

4-wire trunk

DX tip & ring pair

Jumper

(Note 1) Type I Paging Type I Type II

M—rcv

M—xmt

E—rcv

M—xmt

J1.X

J2.X

J3.X

J4.X

J5.X

J6.X

J7.X

J8.X

J9.X

off on off off off off off off

Pins 2–3 off on

(Note 3) off off off off off off

Pins 2–3 off on off off off off off off

Pins 2–3 off on off off off off off off

Pins 2–3

Pins 1–2 off

(Note 4)

Pins 2–3

(Note 4) on on on

Pins 1–2

Pins 2–3 off

(Note 4)

Pins 1–2

(Note 4) on on on

Pins 1–2

Note 1: Jumper strap settings J1.X through J9.X apply to all 4 units; “X” indicates the unit number, 0–3.

Note 2: Off indicates that no jumper strap is installed on a jumper block.

Note 3: Paging trunk mode is not zone selectable.

Note 4: Jumper strap installed in this location only if external loop resistance exceeds 2500 ohms.

Note 5: Dot next to the jumper block indicates pin 1.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Option settings

Page 125 of 906

NT8D17 Conference/TDS card

Switch and jumper settings are used to select the companding law and to change the conference attenuation PAD levels. These PAD levels are used if prompt CPAD = 1 in LD97. The J1 connector on the faceplate is reserved for future use.

You can enable or disable a warning tone for conference calls. When the option is enabled, the tone lets callers know they are entering a conference call. The switch for this option is preset to disable the warning tone.

Companding law

µ-law (North America), A-law

Special cases

Jumper at J3

connect pins 2 and 3 connect pins 1 and 2

SW2 (see Note)

Attenuation levels 1 2 3

10.2 db

8.5 db

6 db

6 db

4.5 db

3 db

0 db on on off off on on off on off on off on off on

0 db off off off

Note: Set position 4 to ON to disable the warning tone option. When the warning tone is enabled, select the warning tone level as shown below.

Level

24 db

30 db

Jumper at J2 connect pins 1 and 2 connect pins 2 and 3 on on on on off off off


Page 126 of 906

Option settings

NT8D21 Ringing Generator AC

Frequency

20 Hz

25 Hz

25 Hz

25 Hz

50 Hz

50 Hz

Amplitude

86 V ac

70 V ac

80 V ac

86 V ac

70 V ac

80 V ac

P1

open open open open

1–4

7–10

3–6

9–12

Settings

P2

open

1–4

7–10

3–6

9–12

2–5

8–11 open open open open open

P3

2–5

8–11 open open

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Option settings

Page 127 of 906

NT8D22 System Monitor

The master system monitor, located in the column with CP 0, must be numbered 0. Slave system monitors are numbered from 1 to 63.

For examples of system monitor option settings in basic configurations, see

“Sample settings for NT8D22 System Monitors.”


Page 128 of 906

Option settings

Configure the system monitor in Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE) columns as slaves. There is no serial connection between RPE columns.

Table 37

NT8D22 SW1

SW1 function

Not used

Meridian 1 columns only

Position 1 is OFF (Meridian 1 columns only)

Not used

Position 1 is ON, master column contains CP:master slaves

DC-powered system

AC-powered system

PFTU is activated by this column due to over-temperature

PFTU is not activated by this column


Not used

Not used


Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Meridian 1 columns only

Position

1

on off

2

off off on off

3

on off

4

on off

5

off on off

6

off on off

7 8

on on off off on off on off

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

SW3 indication

CTA

1

on off

Option settings

Page 129 of 906

Table 38

NT8D22 SW2

Position

4 5 SW2 indication

Master system monitor

Slave system monitor

Not used

All other operation

For master, indicates total number of slaves

For each slave, indicates the slave address

Table 39

NT8D22 SW3

1

on off

2

on off

3 6 7 8

Configure 3–8 according to the Table 40 on page 130 .

Configure 3–8 according to the Table 41 on page 131 .

Position

2 3 4

CTR

FAIL

MAJOR master slave master slave master slave master slave on off on off on off


Page 130 of 906

Option settings

Table 40

NT8D22 settings for total number of slaves—SW2 on master

How many slave units

28

29

30

31

24

25

26

27

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

11

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

Switch position

3 4 5 6 7 8

on on on on on on on on on on on off on on on on off on on on on on off off on on on off on on on on on off on off on on on off off on on on on off off off on on off on on on on on off on on off on on off on off on on on off on off off on on off off on on on on off off on off on on off off off on on on off off off off on off on on on on on off on on on off on off on on off on on off on on off off on off on off on on on off on off on off on off on off off on on off on off off off on off off on on on on off off on on off on off off on off on on off off on off off on off off off on on on off off off on off on off off off off on on off off off off off

How many slave units

60

61

62

63

56

57

58

59

52

53

54

55

48

49

50

51

44

45

46

47

40

41

42

43

36

37

38

39

32

33

34

35

Switch position

3 4 5 6 7 8

off on on on on on off on on on on off off on on on off on off on on on off off off on on off on on off on on off on off off on on off off on off on on off off off off on off on on on off on off on on off off on off on off on off on off on off off off on off off on on off on off off on off off on off off off on off on off off off off off off on on on on off off on on on off off off on on off on off off on on off off off off on off on on off off on off on off off off on off off on off off on off off off off off off on on on off off off on on off off off off on off on off off off on off off off off off off on on off off off off on off off off off off off on off off off off off off

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Option settings

Page 131 of 906

Slave unit address

29

30

31

32

25

26

27

28

21

22

23

24

17

18

19

20

13

14

15

16

9

10

11

12

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

Table 41

NT8D22 slave address—SW2 on slave

Position

3 4 5 6 7 8

on on on on on off on on on on off on on on on on off off on on on off on on on on on off on off on on on off off on on on on off off off on on off on on on on on off on on off on on off on off on on on off on off off on on off off on on on on off off on off on on off off off on on on off off off off on off on on on on on off on on on off on off on on off on on off on on off off on off on off on on on off on off on off on off on off off on on off on off off off on off off on on on on off off on on off on off off on off on on off off on off off on off off off on on on off off off on off on off off off off on on off off off off off off on on on on on

Slave unit address

61

62

63

57

58

59

60

53

54

55

56

49

50

51

52

45

46

47

48

41

42

43

44

37

38

39

40

33

34

35

36

Position

3 4 5 6 7 8

off on on on on off off on on on off on off on on on off off off on on off on on off on on off on off off on on off off on off on on off off off off on off on on on off on off on on off off on off on off on off on off on off off off on off off on on off on off off on off off on off off off on off on off off off off off off on on on on off off on on on off off off on on off on off off on on off off off off on off on on off off on off on off off off on off off on off off on off off off off off off on on on off off off on on off off off off on off on off off off on off off off off off off on on off off off off on off off off off off off on off off off off off off


Page 132 of 906

Option settings

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

Baud rate

Switches SW13, SW10, SW11, and SW12 determine the baud rate for ports

1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively. See the configuration for these switches in

Table 42.

Table 42

QSDI paddle board baud rate switch settings

Baud rate

150

300

600

1,200

2,400

4,800

9,600

19,200*

Baud Clock

(kHz)

2.40

4.80

9.60

19.20

38.40

76.80

153.60

307.20

1

on on on on on on on on

SW13 (port 1), SW10 (port 2),

SW11 (port 3), SW12 (port 4)

2

off on off on off on off on

3

on off off on on off off on

4

off off off on on on on off

*

For future use.

Address

Switch SW15 or SW16 and logic on the card always address the four UARTs using a pair of addresses: 0 and 1, 2 and 3 through 14 and 15. The

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Option settings

Page 133 of 906

configurations for both switches are shown in Table 43. To avoid system

problems, switches SW15 and SW16 must not be configured identically.

Table 43

QSDI paddle board address switch settings

SW15 Port 1 Port 2 Switch settings

SW16

Device pair addresses

Port 3 Port 4

10

12

6

8

14

0

2

4

11

13

7

9

15

1

3

5

1*

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

3

off off off off off off off off

2

+

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

5


4


7


6

off on on on on off off off

8


*

To enable ports 1 and 2, set SW15 position 1 to ON. To enable ports 3 and 4, set SW16 position 1 to ON.

+

For each X, the setting for this switch makes no difference, because it is not used.

DTE/DCE mode

Each serial port can be configured to connect to a terminal (DTE equipment) or a modem (DCE equipment). Instructions for configuring the DTE/DCE switches SW2, SW3, SW4, SW5, SW6, SW7, SW8, and SW9 are shown in

Table 44.

Example: Port 1 is changed from DTE to DCE by reversing every switch position on SW3 and SW2; i.e., switches that were off for DTE are turned on for DCE, and switches that were on for DTE are turned off for DCE.


Page 134 of 906

Option settings

Table 44

QSDI paddle board DTE/DCE mode switch settings

Port 1 — SW 3

Mode

DTE (terminal)

DCE (modem)

DTE (terminal)

DCE (modem)

DTE (terminal)

DCE (modem)

DTE (terminal)

DCE (modem)

Port 1 —SW 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

on on on off on off off on off on off on off off off on off on on off on off on off

Port 2 — SW 5 Port 2 — SW4 on on on off on off off on off on off on off off off on off on on off on off on off

Port 3 — SW 7 Port 3— SW 6 on on on off on off off on off on off on off off off on off on on off on off on off

Port 4 — SW 9 Port 4 — SW 8 on on on off on off off on off on off on off off off on off on on off on off on off

NT8D72 Primary Rate Interface card

The NT8D72 Primary Rate Interface card allows the configuration of interface impedance by way of DIP switches.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Option settings

Page 135 of 906

Figure 20

NT8D72 DIP switch settings

NT8D72AA, NT8D72AB

75 ohm switch setting

OFF

ON

1 2

S1 S2 or

120 ohm switch setting (default)

OFF

1 2

S1 S2

ON

NT8D72BA

75 ohm switch setting

OFF

ON

1 2

S1 S2 or

120 ohm switch setting (default)

OFF

1 2

S1 S2

ON

553-7463


Page 136 of 906

Option settings

QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card

Options (minimum vintage N)

NT5D21 Core/Network module

NT8D35 Network module

Plug location

F13

QPC71 E&M/DX Signaling and Paging Trunk cards

Unit 0 E35 switch Unit 1 E5 switch

Application

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

E&M

Paging

DX 2-wire

(conductor loop <

2.5 K ¾)

DX 2-wire

(conductor loop >

2.5 K ¾)

DX 4-wire

(conductor loop <

2.5 K ¾)

DX 4-wire

(conductor loop >

2.5 K ¾) off off off on off off on off off off off on off off on off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off on on off off off on off on on on off off off on off on on on on on off on off on on on on on off on off on off off off off on on off on off off off off on on off on off off on on on on off on off off on on on on off on

Note: DX trunks must be balanced correctly. If the loop is <2.5 K ¾, far-end balancing is standard. If the loop is >2.5 K ¾, far end balancing requires standard plus 2.5 K ¾. To connect

PBX to PBX, switches should be arranged for loops to be >2.5 K ¾ at one end and <2.5 K ¾ at the other. Apply similar treatment when connecting to Pulse QPJ69 trunks.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Option settings

Page 137 of 906

QPC414 Network card

Application

Pin connection

J3/S2 and J4/S1

T-1 facilities (including PRI/DTI),* channel service unit connect pins 1 and 2

(pin 1 is next to the white dot)

Note 1: Possible jumper locations for vintage B (for different styles/series):

J3—E11 or H11

J4—H17 or E7

S1 and S2—E33

Note 2: Possible jumper locations for vintage A (for different styles/series). These cards do not have the option selection and can only be used in the option A setting:

J3—H5 or E11

J4—H17 or E7

S1 and S2—E33

Note 3: Connectors and loop relations:

Even loop: J1 faceplate connector, jumper at J4 or S1

Odd loop: J2 faceplate connector, jumper at J3 or S2


Page 138 of 906

Option settings

QPC441 3-Port Extender cards

For CS 1000M SG and Multi Group systems, QPC441 vintage F or later must be used in all modules.

Table 45

QPC441 3PE card installed in the NT4N41CP PII Core/Net modules

Jumper Settings:

Set Jumper RN27 at E35 to “A”.

Switch Settings

Module D20 switch position

NT4N41 CP Core/Net modules only

1 2 3

Core/Net 0

(Shelf 0)

Core/Net 1

(Shelf 1)

Group 0

Group 1

Group 2

Group 3

Group 4

Group 5

Group 6

Group 7

Group 0

Group 1

Group 2

Group 3

Group 4

Group 5

Group 6

Group 7 off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on

4 5 6 7 8

off off off on on on on on off on off on off off on off off on off on on on off off on off on off off off on on on on on off off off off on off on on on off off off on on on off off on off off off off on off off on off on off off off off on off off off off off on off off off off off off

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Option settings

Page 139 of 906

Table 46

QPC441 3PE card installed in the NT5D21 modules

Jumper Settings:

Set Jumper RN27 at E35 to “A”.

Switch Settings

Module D20 switch position

1 2 3 4 5 6

NT5D21 (Option 61C)

Core/Network 0

Core/Network 1

NT5D21 (Option 81C)

Core/Net 0

(Shelf 0)

Core/Net 1

(Shelf 1)

Group 0

Group 1

Group 2

Group 3

Group 4

Group 5

Group 6

Group 7

Group 0

Group 1

Group 2

Group 3

Group 4

Group 5

Group 6

Group 7 off off on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on off off off off off off off off off

off off off off off off off on on on on off off on on on on off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off on on on on off off off off on on on on on on off off on on off off on on off off on on off off

7

on on

8

on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off off off off off off off off off on on on on on on on on


Page 140 of 906

Option settings

Table 47

QPC441 3PE card installed in the NT8D35 module

Jumper Settings: Set Jumper RN27 at E35 to “A”.

Switch Settings

0

1

Modules

Option 81, 81C (Note 1)

Shelf Group

5

6

3

4

7

1

2

7

0

5

6

3

4

0

1

2

1

off

2

on

D20 switch position

3

on

4

on

5 6 7 8

on on on on on on off on on off on on on off off on off on on on off on off on off off on on off off off on on on on off on on off off on off on off on off off off off on on off off on off off off off on off off off off off

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Option settings

Page 141 of 906

QPC559, QPC560 Loop Signaling Trunk cards

Table 48 and Table 49 on page 142

list option settings for loop signaling trunk cards.

Table 48

QPC559, QPC560 single density

1 2

Single density—Unit 0/1

F30/F8 switch

3 4 5 6 Application

Outgoing ANI only: loop pulsing battery and ground pulsing

Other than outgoing ANI

600 ¾ resistive impedance

3-component complex impedance off off on off off off off off on off off off off on on

Jumpers (QPC560) Units 0/1/2/3

connect pins 1 and 2 connect pins 2 and 3 off off off


Page 142 of 906

Option settings

Table 49

QPC559, QPC560 double density

Application

Outgoing ANI only: loop pulsing battery and ground pulsing

Other than outgoing ANI


3-component complex impedance

1

Double density—Unit 0/1/2/3

H17/H3/A17/A3 switch

2 3 4 5 6

off off on off off off off off on off off off off on on

Jumpers (QPC560) Units 0/1/2/3

connect pins 1 and 2 connect pins 2 and 3 off off off

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Option settings

Page 143 of 906

QPC528 CO/FX/WATS Trunk cards

Table 50 lists switch and jumper settings for options available.

Table 50

QPC528 Trunk cards switch and jumper settings

Switch position:

Switch position:

Switch Settings

Switch S1 (location A23)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 on off on off on off on off

Unit 0, Switch S2 (Location E29)

Unit 1, Switch S3 (Location E9)

Unit 2, Switch S4 (Location A28)

Unit 3, Switch S5 (Location A10)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Trunk type:

Loop start

Ground start

Metering:

Second pair (M, MM) or

Third wire, battery on M or

Third wire, ground on M


3-component complex impedance off off on on off on off on on on off off

Jumper: off off off on on off

Jumper Settings

Unit 0 jumper (Location E27)

Unit 1 jumper (Location E11)

Unit 2 jumper (Location D29)

Unit 3 jumper (Location D9)

Unit 0

Jumper

Unit 1

Jumper

Unit 2

Jumper

Unit 3

Jumper

Pin 1 to 2 Pin 1 to 2 Pin 1 to 2 Pin 1 to 2

Pin 2 to 3 Pin 2 to 3 Pin 2 to 3 Pin 2 to 3

9 10 off off off off


Page 144 of 906

Option settings

QPC471 Clock Controller card

Table 51 lists option settings for the QPC471 Clock Controller card.

Table 51

QPC471 vintage H

SW1 SW2 SW4

System 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

61C

81

81C

81C with Fiber Network on on on on off off off off off on * off off off off off off off off off on * on off off off off off off off ** on * on off off off off off off off ** on *

*Cable length between the J3 faceplate connectors:

0–4.3 m (0–14 ft)

4.6–6.1 m (15–20 ft)

6.4–10.1 m (21–33 ft)

10.4–15.2 m (34–50 ft) off off on on off on off on

*

If there is only one Clock Controller card in the system, set to OFF. If there are two Clock Controller cards, determine the total cable length between the J3 connectors (no single cable can exceed 25 ft.) and set these two switch positions for this cable length, as shown above. The maximum total (combined) length is 50 ft. Set the switches on both cards to the same settings.

** Set to ON for clock controller 0. Set to OFF for clock controller 1.

Note: FNF based-systems the total clock path length is equal to the length of the NTRC49 cable used to connect between the two clock controller cards.

*

*

*

*

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Option settings

Page 145 of 906

QPC525, QPC526, QPC527, QPC777 CO Trunk card

Application

Zero ohm outpulsing

Standard outpulsing

Ground start

Loop start

Loop start, automatic guard detection

PPM daughterboard not installed

PPM daughterboard installed

Battery on M operation

Ground on M operation

Second pair M&MM

Switches at E29/E9/A29/A11 Units 0/1/2/3

1 2

on off off on

3 4

on on off off off on

5

on off

6 7 8

off off off off on off off off off off on off off off off off

Note 1: There is no ground start signalling for QPC777 CO trunk cards.

Always select loop start signalling for QPC777 CO trunk cards.

Note 2: On QPC777 CO trunk cards, the pads are in for short line lengths and the pads are out for long line lengths.


Page 146 of 906

Option settings

QPC550 Direct Inward Dial Trunk card

Tables 52 through 56 give the option settings for the QPC550 DID Trunk

card.

Table 52

QPC550 vintages A and B—real/complex balance impedance selection

Device location

F31

F24

F16

F11

Device designation

S4.0

S4.1

S4.2

S4.3

Switch number

1

1

1

1

Unit number

2

3

0

1

Impedance type

Real

on on on on

Complex

off off off off

Table 53

QPC550 vintage A—600/900 Ohm impedance selection

Device location


G29(a) S3.0

Unit number

0

G29(b)

G8(a)

G8(b)

S3.1

S3.2

S3.3

1

2

3

Switch number

Impedance

(ohms)

600

900

600

900

600

900

600

900

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

off on on off off on on off on off off on on off off on off on on off off on on off on off off on on off off on off on on off off on on off on off off on on off off on off on on off off on on off on off off on on off off on

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Option settings

Page 147 of 906

Table 54

QPC550 vintage A—software/hardware control for 2dB pad

Device location

F38

F1


S1

S2

Unit number

0

1

0

1

Switch number

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

S/W

off on on off off on on off

2 dB pad control

H/W

(pad in)


(pad out)


Table 55

QPC550 vintage B—attenuation level control

Switch number

Device location


Unit number

D39

D1

S2.0/1

S2.2/3

0

1

2

3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

on on on on on off off on on off on off off off off off

2 dB option

on off on off


Page 148 of 906

Option settings

Table 56

QPC550 vintage B—software control for 2dB pad

Device location

F38

F1


S1.0/1

S1.2/3

Unit number

1

0

3

2

Switch number

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

2 dB pad control

H/W

(pad in)


(pad out)


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Option settings

Page 149 of 906

QPC551 Radio Paging Trunk card

Signal duration on the 18-pair faceplate

Binary value (.1 second)

1

1

2

2

3

4

S1 (F33)

4 5 6

8 16 32

Note: This switch determines the length of time a signal stays on the 18-pair data bus. The time is set in binary to the nearest tenth second. For example, to keep data on the bus for 5 seconds, the switch settings total 50 by closing S1.2, S1.5, and S1.6.

Signal duration and pause time

S2 (G33)

Binary value (.1 second)

1

1

2

2

3

4

4

8

5

16

6

32

7

64

Note: This switch determines the time data must stay on the 18-pair data bus plus the pause time between the removal of data and the reappearance of subsequent data. The time is set in binary to the nearest tenth second. For example, to keep data on the bus for 5 seconds and have a pause time of 3.2 seconds, the switch settings should total 82 by closing S2.2, S2.5, and S2.7.

Application

1 2 Address

S3 (E2) S4 (F2)

Unit 0, Unit 1

3 4 5 6 Address 3 4 5 6

Paging single on multiple off

0

1

2

3 off on off on off off on on off off off off off off off off

8

9

10

11 off on off on off off on on off off off off on on on on

Timer* enabled disabled on off 6

7

4

5 on on off on off on on on on on on on off off off off

12

13

14

15 on on off on off off on on on on on on

* When enabled, this switch prevents a signal from being sent from a paging unit until 5 seconds have elapsed since the beginning of the previous signal on that same unit.

S5 (E38)

Unit 0

S6 (D1)

Unit 1

on on on on

Impedance termination

Real

Complex

1 on off


Page 150 of 906

Option settings

QPC595 Digitone Receiver cards

12 DTMF tones

16 DTMF tones

Location

E9

E9

Connection

Center to E3

Center to E2

QPC577, QPC596 Digitone Receiver daughterboards

16/12 tone options jumper Jumper at P1

16 tone (4 x 4) connect pins 1 and 2

12 tone (3 x 4) connect pins 2 and 3

Note: When a DTR daughterboard is installed, check YES on the faceplate of the QPC659 Dual

Loop Peripheral Buffer.

QPC720 Primary Rate Interface card

Table 57

QPC720 Primary Rate Interface card (Part 1 of 2)

Switch S2 settings To repeater facility To cross-connect point

5 on

2, 4, 6 on

0–45 m

(0–150 ft)

46–135 m

(151–450 ft)

0–30 m

(0–100 ft)

31–100 m

(101–355 ft)

Note 1: All positions on S2 (location B22) are OFF except as shown under the column labeled

“Switch S2 settings.”

Note 2: Framing format, line encoding, and method of yellow alarm are selectable for both DTI and PRI in LD17 with the DLOP, LCMT, and YALM prompts. All SW3 switch positions should be

OFF.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Option settings

Page 151 of 906

Table 57

QPC720 Primary Rate Interface card (Part 2 of 2)

Switch S2 settings

1, 3, 7 on

To repeater facility

136–225 m

(451–750 ft)

Switch 3 option for DTI with ESF

To cross-connect point

101–200 m

(356–655 ft)

SW3-1 on = extended superframe format (ESF) off = superframe format (SF)

Note 1: All positions on S2 (location B22) are OFF except as shown under the column labeled

“Switch S2 settings.”

Note 2: Framing format, line encoding, and method of yellow alarm are selectable for both DTI and PRI in LD17 with the DLOP, LCMT, and YALM prompts. All SW3 switch positions should be

OFF.


Page 152 of 906

Option settings

QPC775 Clock Controller card

Tables 58 and 59 give option settings for the QPC775 Clock Controller

card.

Table 58

QPC775 (before vintage E) switch settings

System

CS 1000M MG

CS 1000M SG

SW2 SW3 SW4

1 2

off off on on

3

off on

4 1

off off on off

2 3

off off off off

4

off off

1 2

on on on on

3

on on

4

on on

Table 59

QPC775 vintage E switch settings

SW1 SW2 SW4

System 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

CS 1000M SG

CS 1000M MG on on on off on off on off off off off off off off off off off

**

*Cable length between the J3 faceplate connectors: on on

*

*

*

*

0–4.3 m (0–14 ft)

4.6–6.1 m (15–20 ft)

6.4–10.1 m (21–33 ft)

10.4–15.2 m (34–50 ft) off off on on off on off on

*

If there is only one Clock Controller card in the system, set to OFF. If there are two Clock Controller cards, determine the total cable length between the J3 connectors (no single cable can exceed 25 ft.) and set these two switch positions for this cable length, as shown above. The maximum total (combined) length is 50 ft. Set the switches on both cards to the same settings.

** Set to ON for clock controller 0. Set to OFF for clock controller 1.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Option settings

Page 153 of 906

QPC841 4-Port Serial Data Interface card

Tables 60 through 62 list option settings for the QPC841 4-Port SDI card.

Table 60

QPC841 port 1 and 2 address selection

Device number

SW14

Port 1 Port 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

4

6

0

2

5

7

1

3 off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off on on on on

8

10

12

14

9

11

13

15 off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off on on off off

Note 1: On SW16, positions 1, 2, 3, and 4 must be OFF.

Note 2: To avoid address conflicts, SW14 and SW15 can never have identical setting.

Note 3: To disable ports 1 and 2, set SW14 position 1 to ON.

on on off off

8



Page 154 of 906

Option settings

Device number SW15

Port 3 Port 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

10

12

6

8

0

2

4

1

3

5

7

9

11

13 off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off on on on on off off off

14 15 off off off off off off off


Note 2: To avoid address conflicts, SW14 and SW15 can never have identical setting.

Note 3: To disable ports 3 and 4, set SW15 position 1 to ON.

on on off off on on off

Table 61

QPC841 baud rate

150

300

600

1200

2400

4800

9600

Baud rate 1

Port 1 SW10

2 3 4

Port 2 SW11 Port 3 SW12 Port 4 SW13

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

off off on on off off on on off off on on off off on on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off off off on off off off on off off off on off off off on off on on off off on on off off on on off off on on off off off on off off off on off off off on off off off on off off on off off off on off off off on off off off on off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off

8


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Option settings

Page 155 of 906

Table 62

QPC841 DTE or DCE selection

Mode Port 1—SW8

DTE (terminal)

DCE (modem)

NT1P61 (Fiber)

DTE

DCE

NT1P61 (Fiber)

DTE

DCE

DTE

DCE

Port 1—SW9

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

on on on on on on off off off off off off off on off off off off off on off off off off on on on off on off on off on on on on

Port 2—SW6 Port 2—SW7

on on on on on on off off off off off off off off off off off off on on on on on on on off off on off off on off off off on on


on on on on on on off off off off off off off off off off off off on on on on on on


on on on on on on off off off off off off off off off off off off on on on on on on


Page 156 of 906

Option settings

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

182

Page 157 of 906

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station

Analog Line card

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158


Electrical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168


Configuring the OPS analog line card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Introduction

The NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) analog line card is an intelligent eight-channel analog line card designed to be used with 2-wire analog terminal equipment such as analog (500/2500-type) telephones and analog modems.

The NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) analog line card provides eight full-duplex analog telephone line interfaces. Each line has integral hazardous and surge voltage protection to protect the system from damage due to lightning strikes and accidental power line connections. This card is normally


Page 158 of 906

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card used whenever the phone lines have to leave the building in which the switch is installed.

The NT1R20 OPS analog line card provides:

• line supervision

• hookflash

• battery reversal

Each unit is independently configured by software control in the Analog (500/

2500 type) Telephone Administration program LD 10.

You can install this card in any IPE slot.

Physical description

The line interface and common multiplexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board.

The OPS analog line card connects to the IPE backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. A 25-pair amphenol connector below the card is cabled to the cross connect terminal (also called the Main Distribution Frame (MDF)).

Telephone lines from station equipment cross connect to the OPS analog line card at the cross connect using a wiring plan similar to trunk cards.

Self Test

The faceplate of the NT1R20 OPS analog line card is equipped with a red

LED. When an OPS analog line card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to five seconds while the self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in software; then the LED goes out. If the LED continues to flash or

remains weakly lit, replace the card. See Figure 21 on page 159

.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

Page 159 of 906

Figure 21

OPS analog line card – faceplate

Card lock latch

OPS

Anlg LC

LED

S

This symbol indicates that field-selectable jumper strap settings are located on this card

Card lock latch

NT1R20

Rlse 0x

553-6190


Page 160 of 906


Functional description

This functional description of the NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) analog line card is divided into two parts. First, a description of the card’s control, signaling, and power interfaces is given, followed by a description of how the

card itself functions. See Figure 22.

Figure 22

OPS analog line card – block diagram

Line interface units 0–3


Power supplies

+8.5 V dc

Reg

PCM

Codec

Analog hybrid

XFMR

Signaling relays

(ringing, battery reversal)

Loop current/ dialpulse detect

Tip

Ring

Analog telephone lines

Front panel

LED

Microcontroller

Backplane

Card slot address

Async card

LAN link


Controller card

Tx PCM

Rx PCM

5.12 MHz clock

1 kHz frame sync


Address/ data bus


Codec

PCM Analog hybrid

XFMR

Signaling relays



Tip

Ring



Control logic


±15 V dc analog power

+ 5 V dc analog hybrid

– 48 V dc battery

Ringing

Rsync


+ 5 V dc logic power

553-6193

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 161 of 906

Card interfaces

Voice and signaling interfaces

The eight line interfaces provided by the NT1R20 OPS analog line card connect to conventional, 2-wire (tip and ring), analog line facilities. Incoming analog voice and signaling information from a line facility is converted by the

OPS analog line card to digital form and routed to the CPU over DS-30 network loops. Conversely, digital voice and signaling information from the

CPU is sent over DS-30 network loops to the OPS analog line card where it is converted to analog form and applied to the line facility.

The OPS analog line card uses only eight of the 30 available timeslots for its eight line interfaces. The OPS analog line card can be configured in software to format PCM data in the µ-law or A-law conventions.

Maintenance communication

Maintenance communication is the exchange of control and status data between line or trunk cards and the CPU. Maintenance data is transported through the card LAN link.

The card LAN link supports the following functions on the NT1R20 OPS analog line card:

• polling


• CPU initiated card reset



• reporting of line interface unit configuration

• enabling/disabling of the DS-30X network loop busy

• reporting of card status

Power interface

Power is provided to the NT1R20 OPS analog line card by the NTAK78 ac/dc or NTAK72 DC power supply.


Page 162 of 906


Line interface units

The NT1R20 OPS analog line card contains eight independently configurable interface units. Relays are provided in each unit to apply ringing onto the line.

Signal detection circuits monitor on-hook/off-hook signaling. Two codecs are provided for performing Analog/Digital (A/D) and Digital/Analog (D/A) conversion of analog voiceband signals to digital PCM signals.

Each codec supports four interface units and contains switchable pads for control of transmission loss on a per unit basis. The following features are common to all units on the card:

• OPS or ONS service configurable on a per unit basis

• terminating impedance (600 or 900 ohms) selectable on a per unit basis

• standard or complex balance impedance (600 or 900 ohms, 3COM1 or

3COM2) selectable on a per unit basis

• loopback of PCM signals over DS-30X network loop for diagnostic purposes

Signaling and control

This portion of the card provides circuits that establish, supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work with the CPU to operate line interface circuits during calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the CPU and return incoming call status information over the

DS-30X network loop.

Card control functions

Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN interface, and signaling and control circuits on the NT1R20 OPS analog line card.

Microcontroller

The NT1R20 OPS analog line card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card. The microcontroller controls the following:

• reporting to the CPU through the card LAN link:

— card identification (card type, vintage, and serial number)

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 163 of 906

— firmware version

— self-test status

— programmed configuration status

• receipt and implementation of card configuration:

— programming of the codecs

— enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card

— programming of input/output interface control circuits for administration of line interface unit operation

— maintenance diagnostics

— transmission loss levels


Maintenance data is exchanged with the CPU over a dedicated asynchronous serial network called the Card LAN link. The Card LAN link is described in

the section “Intelligent Peripheral Equipment” on page 32 .

The NT1R20 OPS analog line card has the capability of providing an interrupted dial tone to indicate that a message is waiting or that call forwarding is enabled. The line card (optionally) receives messages stating that these conditions exist over the Card LAN Interface and interrupts the dial tone when either of these conditions are detected.

Software service changes

Individual line interface units on the NT1R20 OPS analog line card are configured to either OPS (for OPS application) or On-premises Station

(ONS) (for ONS application) Class of Service (CLS) in the Analog (500/

2500-type) Telephone Administration program LD 10. See Table 63.

LD 10 is also used to select unit terminating impedance and balance network impedance at the TIMP and BIMP prompts, respectively.

The message waiting interrupted dial tone and call forward reminder tone features are enabled by entering data into the customer data block using

LD 15.


Page 164 of 906


See Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311) for LD 10 service change instructions.

Table 63

OPS analog line card configuration


Class of service

Loop resistance

Jumper strap setting b

Loop loss dB c

ONS

0 - 460 ohm

Both JX. 0 and JX 1 off

OPS

0 - 2300 ohm

Both JX. 0 and JX.

1 off

0-1.5

>1.5-2.

5

Both JX. 0 and JX.

>2.5-4.

5

1 on

>4.5-15 0-1.5

>1.5-2.

5

>2.5-3.

0

TIMP

BIMP

600 ohm

600 ohm

600 ohm

3COM

600 ohm

3CM2

600 ohm

600 ohm

600 ohm

3COM

600 ohm

3CM2

600 ohm

3CM2

Gain treatment e

No Yes

a. Configured in the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program (LD 10).

b. Jumper strap settings JX 0 and JX. 1 apply to all eight units; “X” indicates the unit number,

0-7. “OFF” indicates that a jumper strap is not installed across both pins on a jumper block.

Store unused straps on the OPS analog line card by installing them on a single jumper pin.

c. Loss of untreated (no gain devices) metallic line facility. Upper loss limits correspond to loop resistance ranges for 26 AWG wire.

d. Default software impedance settings are:

ONS CLSOPS CLS

TIMP:600 ohm600 ohm

BIMP:600 ohm3COM2

e. Gain treatment, such as a voice frequency repeater (VFR) is required to limit the actual OPS loop loss to 4.5 dB, maximum. VFR treatment of metallic loops having untreated loss greater than 15dB (equivalent to a maximum signaling range of 2300 ohm on 26 AWG wire) is not recommended.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 165 of 906

Port-to-port loss configuration

The loss plan for the NT1R20 OPS analog line card determines port-to-port loss for connections between an OPS analog line card unit (port) and other ports.

The transmission properties of each line unit are characterized by the OPS or

ONS class of service assigned in the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone

Administration program LD 10.

The OPS analog line card provides transmission loss switching for control of end-to-end connection loss. Control of loss is a major element in controlling transmission performance parameters such as received volume, echo, noise, and crosstalk. The loss plan for the OPS analog line card determines port-to-port loss for connections between an OPS analog line card unit (port) and other IPE ports. LD 97 is used to configure systems for port-to-port loss.

See Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311) for LD 97 service change instructions.

Electrical specifications

This section lists the electrical characteristics of the NT1R20 OPS analog line card.

Circuit power

The +8.5 V dc input is regulated down to +5 V dc for use by the digital logic circuits. All other power to the card is used by the line interface circuits.

The ±15.0 V dc inputs to the card are used to power the analog circuits. The

+5 V dc from the module power supply is used for the analog hybrid. The

–48.0 V dc input is for the telephone battery. Ringing power for telephones is

86 Vrms ac at 20 Hz on –48 V dc. The Rsync signal is used to switch the

20 Hz ringing on and off at the zero cross-over point to lengthen the life of the switching circuits.


Page 166 of 906


Analog line interface

Table 64 lists the electrical characteristics of NT1R20 OPS analog line card

line interface units.

Table 64

OPS analog line card – electrical characteristics

Characteristic

Terminal impedance (TIMP)

Balance impedance (BIMP)

DC signaling loop length (max)

Battery supply voltage

Minimum detected loop current

Ground potential difference

Line leakage

AC induction rejection

Specification

600 or 900 ohms

600 or 900 ohms, 3COM, or 3CM2

2300 ohm loop (including resistance of telephone) with nominal battery of

–48 V dc

–42 to –52.5 V dc

16 mA

± 3 V

> 30k ohms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground

10 V rms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 167 of 906

Power requirements

Table 65 shows the maximum power consumed by the card from each system

power supply.

Table 65

OPS analog line card – power requirements

Voltage

±15.0 V dc

+8.5 V dc

+5.0 V dc

–48.0 V dc

Tolerance

± 5%

± 2%

± 5%

± 5%

Current (max.)

150 mA

200 mA

100 mA

350 mA

Foreign and surge voltage protection

The NT1R20 OPS analog line card meets UL-1489 and CS03 over-voltage

(power cross) specifications and FCC Part 68 requirements for hazardous and surge voltage limits.

Ringer limitations

The OPS line card supports up to three NE-C4A (3 REN) ringers on each line

for either ONS or OPS applications. See Table 66.

Table 66

OPS analog line card – ringer limitations (Part 1 of 2)

ONS Loop Range

0–10 ohms

> 10–460 ohms

3

2

Maximum Number of

Ringers (REN)


Page 168 of 906


Table 66

OPS analog line card – ringer limitations (Part 2 of 2)

OPS Loop Range

0 – 10 ohms

> 10 – 900 ohms

> 900 – 2300 ohms

3

2

1

Maximum Number of

Ringers (REN)


Table 67 shows the environmental specifications of the OPS analog line

card.

Table 67

OPS analog line card – environmental specifications

Parameter

Operating temperature

Operating humidity

Storage temperature

Specifications

0° to +60° C (+32 to +140° F), ambient

5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)

–40° to +70° C (–40° to +158° F)

Operation

The applications, features, and signaling arrangements for each unit on the

NT1R20 OPS analog line card are assigned through LD 10 and/or jumper strap settings on the card.

The operation of each unit is configured in software and implemented in the card through software download messages. When the NT1R20 OPS analog line card unit is idle, it provides a ground on the tip lead and –48 V dc on the ring lead. The on-hook telephone presents a high impedance toward the line interface unit on the card.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Incoming call Ringing


Page 169 of 906

Incoming calls

Incoming calls to a telephone connected to the NT1R20 OPS analog line card originate from stations that can be local (served by the PBX) or remote

(served through the public switched telephone network). The alerting signal to telephones is 20 Hz (nominal) ringing. When an incoming call is answered, ringing is tripped as the telephone goes off-hook, placing a low-resistance dc loop across the tip and ring leads toward the OPS analog line card. (see

Table 68).

Table 68

Call connection sequence—near-end station receiving call (Part 1 of 2)

State

Signal / Direction

Far-end / Near-end

Line card unit idle Group on tip, battery on ring

High resistance loop

Remarks


Far-end station goes off-hook and addresses (dials-up) the near-end station. The system receives the incoming call on a trunk and determine the TN.

The system applies 20 Hz ringing to ring lead.

Near-end station off-hook

Low resistance loop

Two-way voice connection

Near end station hangs up first




The system detects increase in loop current, tips ringing, and put call through to near-end station.

If near end station hangs-up first, the line card detects the drop in loop current.



Page 170 of 906


Table 68


State

Far end station hangs up first

Line card unit idle




Ground on tip/battery on ring


Remarks

If the far-end hangs-up first, the system detects disconnect signalling from the trunk. The person at the near-end recognizes the end of the call and hangs-up.


Outgoing calls

For outgoing calls from a telephone, a line unit is seized when the telephone goes off-hook, placing a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads

towards the NT1R20 OPS analog line card (see Table 69 on page 170 ). When

the card detects the low-resistance loop, it prepares to receive digits. When the system is ready to receive digits, it returns a dial tone. Outward address signaling is then applied from the telephone in the form of loop (interrupting) dial pulses or DTMF tones.

Table 69


State





Call request Low resistance loop

Dial Tone

Remarks


Near-end station goes off-hook.

Battery current is drawn, causing detection of off-hook state.

Dial tone is applied to the near end station from the system.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 171 of 906

Table 69


State

Outpulsing



Addressing signals

Remarks

Near-end station dials number (loop pulsing or DTMF tones).

Two-way voice connection

Near-end station hangs-up first

Ringback (or busy)


The system detects start of dialing and remove dial tone.

The system decodes addressing, route calls, and supply ringback tone to near-end station if far-end is on-hook.

(Busy tone is supplied if far-end is off-hook).

When call is answered, ringback tone is removed, and call is put through to far-end station.

If near end station hangs-up first, the line card detects the drop in loop current.




Far end station hangs up first


Line card unit idle Ground on tip/battery on ring


If the far-end hangs-up first, the system detects disconnect signalling from the trunk. The person at the near-end recognizes the end of the call and hangs-up.



Page 172 of 906


Connector pin assignments

The OPS analog line card brings the eight analog telephone lines to the IPE backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. The backplane is cabled to the input/output (I/O) panel on the rear of the module, which is then connected to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) by 25-pair cables.

Telephone lines from station equipment cross connect to the OPS analog line card at the MDF using a wiring plan similar to that used for trunk cards. A

typical connection example is shown in Figure 23 on page 173

, and a list of

the connections to the analog line card is shown in Table 70. See

Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1: Large System Installation

and Configuration (553-3021-210) for more detailed I/O panel connector information and wire assignments for each tip/ring pair.

Table 70

OPS analog line card – backplane pinouts

Backplane

Connector

Pin

12A

13A

14A

15A

16A

17A

18A

19A

Signal

Unit 0, Ring

Unit 1, Ring

Unit 2, Ring

Unit 3, Ring

Unit 4, Ring

Unit 5, Ring

Unit 6, Ring

Unit 7, Ring

Backplane

Connector

Pin

12B

13B

14B

15B

16B

17B

18B

19B

Signal

Unit 0, Tip

Unit 1, Tip

Unit 2, Tip

Unit 3, Tip

Unit 4, Tip

Unit 5, Tip

Unit 6, Tip

Unit 7, Tip

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 173 of 906

Figure 23

OPS analog line card – typical cross connection example

OPS or ONS telephone connections

System

NT8D37

IPE Module

NT1R20

Off-premise

Station

Line Card

Slot 0

Unit 0

Unit 1

Unit 2

Module

I/O Panel

Connector

A

0T

0R

1T

1R

2T

2R

(W-BL)

(BL-W)

(W-O)

(O-W)

(W-G)

(G-W)

(W-BR)

(BR-W)

(W-S)

(S-W)

(R-BL)

(BL-R)

2

28

3

29

4

26

1

27

30

5

31

6

Unit 3

Cross-connect

Part of

25-pair cable

MDF

Tip

Ring

NC

Tip

Ring

NC

Tip

Ring

NC

Unit 7

Note: Actual pin numbers may vary depending on the vintage of the card cage and the slot where the card is installed.

553-AAA1117


Page 174 of 906


Configuring the OPS analog line card

The line type, terminating impedance, and balance network configuration for each unit on the card is selected by software service change entries at the system terminal and by jumper strap settings on the card.


Each line interface unit on the card is equipped with two jumper blocks that are used to select the proper loop current depending upon loop length. See

Table 71.

For units connected to loops of 460 to 2300 ohms, both jumper blocks for that unit must have jumper blocks installed. For loops that are 460 ohms or less,

jumper blocks are not installed. Figure 24 on page 176 shows the location of

the jumper blocks on the OPS analog line card.

Table 71

OPS analog line card – configuration (Part 1 of 2)


Class of Service

(CLS) (Note 1)

Loop resistance

(ohms)

Jumper strap setting (Note 6)

Loop loss (dB)

(Note 3)

TIMP

(Notes 1, 4)

BIMP

(Notes 1, 4)

ONP

600 ohms

600 ohms

OPX

0–2300 (Note 2)


0–1.5 >0–3.0


Both JX.0 and JX.1 on

>2.5–3.0 0–1.5 >1.5–2.5 >2.5–4.5 >4.5–15

600 ohms

600 ohms

0–460

600 ohms

3COM

600 ohms

3CM2

600 ohms

3COM

600 ohms

3CM2

600 ohms

3CM2

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 175 of 906

Table 71

OPS analog line card – configuration (Part 2 of 2)


Gain treatment

(Note 5)

No Yes

Note 1: Configured in the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program LD 10.



Note 4: The following are the default software impedance settings:

Termination Impedance (TIMP):

Balanced Impedance (BIMP):

ONP CLS OPX CLS

600 ohms 600 ohms

600 ohms 3CM2

Note 5: Gain treatment, such as a Voice Frequency Repeater (VFR) is required to limit the actual OPS loop loss to 4.5 dB, maximum. VFR treatment of metallic loops having untreated loss greater than 15 dB (equivalent to a maximum signaling range of 2300 ohms on 26 AWG wire) is not recommended.

Note 6: Jumper strap settings JX.0 and JX.1 apply to all eight units; “X” indicates the unit number, 0 – 7. “Off” indicates that a jumper strap is not installed across both pins on a jumper block. Store unused straps on the OPS analog line card by installing them on a single jumper.

Before the appropriate balance network can be selected, the loop length between the near-end and the far-end station must be known. To assist in

determining loop length, “Port-to-port loss” on page 180 describes some

typical resistance and loss values for the most common cable lengths for comparison with values obtained from actual measurements.

Application

Off-premise station application

The NT1R20 OPS analog line card is designed primarily to provide an interface for off-premise station lines. An OPS line serves a terminal – usually a telephone – remote from the PBX either within the same serving area as the


Page 176 of 906


Figure 24

OPS analog line card – jumper block locations

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

553-6191


Page 177 of 906

local office, or through a distant office. The line is not switched at these offices; however, depending on the facilities used, the local office serving the

OPS station can provide line functions such as battery and ringing. Facilities are generally provided by the local exchange carrier (usually, OPS pairs are in the same cable as the PBX-CO trunks). The traditional OPS scenario

configuration is shown in Figure 25 on page 178

.

Note: Do not confuse OPS service with Off-Premise Extension (OPX) service. OPX service is the provision of an extension to a main subscriber loop bridged onto the loop at the serving CO or PBX. Do not confuse

CLS OPS (assigned in the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone

Administration program LD 10) with OPX, which denotes Off-Premise

Extension service.


Page 178 of 906


Figure 25

Traditional OPS application configuration

CO trunk card port

System

OPS analog line card port

Public

Network

0–3.5 dB

Local

CO

4.5 dB maximum

Non-switched thru connections

Distant

CO

OPS line facility

OPS termination

7.0 dB total maximum

553-AAA1118

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 179 of 906

Other applications

The operating range and built-in protection provisions of the NT1R20 OPS analog line card make it suitable for applications which are variants on the

traditional configuration shown in Figure 25 on page 178 . Examples of such

applications are:

• a PBX in a central building serving stations in other buildings in the vicinity, such as in an industrial park, often called a campus environment.

Facilities can be provided by the local exchange carrier or can be privately owned. Protection could be required.

• termination to other than a telephone, such as to a fax machine or a key telephone system.

• individual circuits on the NT1R20 OPS analog line card can also be configured as On-Premise Station (ONS) ports in LD 10:

— to have ONS service with hazardous and surge voltage protection

(not available on other analog line cards)

— to use otherwise idle NT1R20 OPS analog line card ports

Transmission considerations

The transmission performance of OPS lines depends on the following factors:

• the port-to-port loss for connections between OPS ports and other ports

• the transmission parameters of the facilities between the OPS port and the off-premise station or termination

• the electrical and acoustic transmission characteristics of the termination

These factors must be considered when planning applications using the

NT1R20 OPS analog line card. They are important when considering configurations other than the traditional OPS application as shown in

Figure 25 on page 178 . The following provides basic transmission planning

guidelines for various OPS applications.


Page 180 of 906


Port-to-port loss

Loss is inserted between OPS analog line card ports and other ports in accordance with the loss plan. This plan determines the port-to-port loss for each call.

When a port is configured for CLS OPS, loss is programmed into the OPS analog line card on a call-by-call basis. When configured for CLS ONS, an

OPS analog line card port is programmed to a value that is fixed for all calls.

The loss in the other port involved in the call can vary on a call-by-call basis to achieve the total loss scheduled by the plan.

For satisfactory transmission performance, particularly on connections between the public network and an OPS termination, it is recommended that facilities conform to the following:

• Total 1 kHz loss from the local serving CO to the OPS terminal should not exceed 7.0 dB. The total loss in the facility between the PBX and the

terminal must not exceed 4.5 dB. See Figure 25 on page 178 .

The following requirements are based on historic Inserted Connection

Loss (ICL) objectives:

— PBX – CO trunk: 5 dB with gain; 0 – 4.0 dB without gain

— OPS line: 4.0 dB with gain; 0 – 4.5 dB without gain

Economic and technological changes have led to modifications of these objectives. But since the loss provisions in the PBX for OPS are constrained by regulatory requirements as well as industry standards, they are not designed to compensate for modified ICL designs in the connecting facilities.

• Nortel recommends that the attenuation distortion (frequency response) of the OPS facility be within ±3.0 dB over the frequency range from 300 to 3000 Hz. It is desirable that this bandwidth extend from 200 to 3200

Hz.

• The terminating impedance of the facility at the OPS port be approximately that of 600 ohms cable.

If the OPS line facility loss is greater than 4.5 dB but does not exceed 15 dB, line treatment using a switched-gain Voice Frequency Repeater (VFR) will extend the voice range.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 181 of 906

The overall range achievable on an OPS line facility is limited by the signaling range (2300 ohms loop including telephone resistance). The signaling range is unaffected by gain treatment; thus, gain treatment can be used to extend the voice range to the limit of the signaling range. For example, on 26 AWG wire, the signaling range of 2300 ohms corresponds to an untreated metallic loop loss of 15 dB. Gain treatment (such as a VFR) with

10.5 dB of gain would maintain the OPS service loss objective of 4.5 dB while extending the voice range to the full limit of the signaling range.

15.0 dB (loss corresponding to the maximum signaling range)

– 4.5 dB (OPS service loss objective)

= 10.5 dB (required gain treatment)

The use of dial long line units to extend signaling range of OPS analog line cards beyond 15 dB is not recommended.

Termination transmission characteristics

The loss plan for OPS connections is designed so that a connection with an

OPS termination provides satisfactory end-to-end listener volume when the

OPS termination is a standard telephone. The listener volume at the distant end depends on the OPS termination transmit loudness characteristics; the volume at the OPS termination end depends on the OPS termination receive loudness characteristics.

A feature of many (though not all) standard telephones is that the loudness increases with decreased current. Thus, as the line (PBX to OPS termination) facility gets longer and loss increases, the increased loudness of the telephone somewhat compensates for the higher loss, assuming direct current feed from the PBX with constant voltage at the feeding bridge. However, this compensation is not available when:

• the termination is a non-compensating telephone

• the OPS port is served by a line card using a constant-current feeding bridge

• the OPS termination is to telephones behind a local switch providing local current feed, such as a fax machine or a key telephone system


Page 182 of 906


OPS line terminations with loudness characteristics designed for other applications can also impact transmission performance. For example, wireless portables loudness characteristics are selected for connections to switching systems for wireless communication systems; if used in an OPS arrangement without consideration for these characteristics, the result could be a significant deviation from optimum loudness performance.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

192

Page 183 of 906

NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183



Front panel connector pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Introduction

The NT4N39AA Call Processor Pentium IV (CP PIV) Large System processor card is introduced for CS 1000 Release 4.5. It features the following:

• a PCI-based design that is compatible with current CP PII architecture

• an Intel Pentium processor

• two Compact Flash (CF) sockets (one on-board and one hot-swappable on the faceplate). The on-board CF is referred to as the Fixed Media Disk

(FMD), and the faceplate CF is referred to as the Removable Media Disk

(RMD). See Figure 26 on page 185 and Figure 27 on page 186 .

• 512 MBytes of Double Data Rate (DDR) memory


The NT4N39AA card measures 23 cm by 16 cm (9,2 in. by 6.3 in.). See

Figure 26 on page 185 and Figure 27 on page 186 .


Page 184 of 906

NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card

The CP PIV front panel is equipped with an EMC gasket and two ejector/ injector handles. A reset button and two double LED packages (four LEDs in total) are placed at the front panel as well. The front panel features the following:

• stacked dual standard DB9 Serial ports

• USB Connector

• stacked dual RJ-45 Ethernet ports with LEDs

• power good LED

• LEDs indication for activity on Compact flashes and secondary IDE interface

• reset Switch

• INI switch

• front panel handle part# 3688785, 3688784 (replacement for customer suggested parts 3686134, 3686135 which are now obsolete)

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Figure 26

CP PIV card (front)


Page 185 of 906

Lan 1

COM 1

Lan 2

COM 2


Page 186 of 906


Figure 27

CP PIV card (side)

512 MBytes DDR memory

Rear

Fixed

Media

Drive (FMD)

CPU

Removable Media Drive (RMD)

Front


The card employs an Intel Pentium Processor as the central processing unit.

The internal core clock frequency reaches from 600MHz to1.1GHz. The processor is manufactured in 0.09 um process technology and provides 32 KB of on die data and instruction cache as well as 1 MB of on die L2 cache running at core clock frequency. The processor is a mobile processor with a

478 pin FCBGA package with a maximum junction temperature of 100 °C.

Processor power dissipation must not exceed 12 W.

The front side bus runs at 400 MHz and uses an AGTL+ signaling technology. The quad pumped data interface (data running at 4*100 MHz =

400 MHz) is 64 bit wide providing a total bandwidth of 3.2 GBytes/s. The

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 187 of 906

double pumped address bus (addresses running at 2*100 MHz = 200 MHz) is

32 bit wide supporting an address range of up to 4 GBytes. The processor voltage specification is compliant with IMVP IV specification.

Memory

CP PIV memory uses DDR SDRAM technology. The CP PIV provides a maximum of two GBytes using two vertical DIMM sockets to install off-the-shelf DIMM modules. CP PIV only supports DDR SDRAM DIMM memory with a supply voltage of +2.5V.

The memory data path is 72-bit wide. The Intel 855GME Host Bridge supports 128 MByte, 256 MByte and 512 Mbyte SDRAM technologies with a maximum ROW page size of 16 Kbytes and CAS latency of 2 or 2.5. The maximum height of the DIMM modules possible on CP PIV is one inch or

25.4 mm.

The DDR interface runs at 100 MHz synchronously to the front side bus frequency. The SPD (Serial Presents Detect) -SROM available on DIMM modules provide all necessary information (speed, size, and type) to the boot-up software. The SPD-SROM can be read via SMBUS connected to the

Intel Hance Rapids South Bridge.

Front panel connector pin assignments

COM1 and COM2 ports

The physical interface for the COM1 and COM2 ports to the front panel is through a stacked dual Male DB9 Connector. The corresponding pin details are shown in Table 72.

Table 72

COM1 and COM2 pin assignments

2

3

Pin number

1

Pin name

DCD

RXD

TXD


Page 188 of 906


Table 72

COM1 and COM2 pin assignments

6

7

4

5

8

9

DTR

GND

DSR

RTS

CTS

RI

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 189 of 906

USB port

The physical interface for the USB port to the front panel is through a standard USB connector. The corresponding Pin details are shown in

Table 73.

Table 73

USB connector pin outs

2

3

Pin number Pin name

1

USB VCC

4

USB-

USB+

USB GND

10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports

The physical interface for the two 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports to the front panel is through a stacked dual RJ 45 connector with magnetics and

LEDs. The corresponding pin details are shown in Table 74.

Table 74

Ethernet connector pin outs

6

7

4

5

8

2

3

Pin number Pin name

1

AX+

AX-

BX+

CX+

CX-

BX-

DX+

DX-


Page 190 of 906


Front panel LED indicators

The CP PIV card has a total of five LEDS on the front panel which are 15 KV

ESD protected and can be controlled via CPLD. Table 75 explains the function of each LED.

Author’s note:

Are there 5 or 4?

Table 75

Front panel LED functionality

LED

LED1

LED2

LED3

LED4

Color

Green

Green

Green

Green

Functionality

Power ON LED

Secondary IDE HD activity

Compact Flash activity

Compact Flash activity

Off

Off

Off

Off

Default

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 191 of 906

ITP connector (25 PIN, Debug Only)

Figure 28

ITP connector pin outs

P13

P15

P17

P19

P21

P23

P25

Pin

P1

P3

P5

P7

P9

P11

GND

BPM0N

Signal Name

BPM1N

BPM2N

BPM3N

BPM4N

BPM5N

ITP_CPURSTN

TCK

CLK

CLKN

BPM5N

GND

P10

P12

P14

P16

P2

P4

P6

P8

P18

P20

P22

P24

Pin

GND

NC

RESETN

GND

TDI

TMS

TRSTN

TCK

NC

GND

PWR

TDO

Signal Name

Post 80 Debug LEDs (Optional)

CP PIV has post 80 debug LEDs to assist in debugging the board and solving boot related problems. Using a GPCS from Super I/O X-bus, data lines are latched using latch 74F374. These help identify Post 80 codes. This feature is available only in debug boards.


Page 192 of 906


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

248

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1

Interface cards

Page 193 of 906

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193




Installation and configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Introduction

This section describes the two lineside T1 interface cards:

• NT5D11 – applicable for Large Systems only

• NT5D14 – applicable for Small Systems only

Note: Unless otherwise stated, the information in this section applies to both the NT5D11 and NT5D14 lineside T1 interface cards.

The NT5D11 lineside T1 Interface card is an intelligent 24-channel digital line card that is used to connect the switch to T1 compatible terminal equipment on the lineside. T1 compatible terminal equipment includes voice


Page 194 of 906

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards mail systems, channel banks containing FXS cards, and key systems such as the Nortel Norstar. The lineside T1 card differs from trunk T1 cards in that it supports terminal equipment features such as hookflash, transfer, hold, and conference.

This card occupies two card slots in the main or expansion cabinets. The lineside T1 card can be installed in the system’s main cabinet or one of the expansion cabinets (there are no limitations on the number of cards that can be installed in the Cabinet system).

The lineside T1 card emulates an analog line card to the system software; therefore, each channel is independently configurable by software control in

LD 10. The lineside T1 card also comes equipped with a Man-Machine

Interface (MMI) maintenance program. This feature provides diagnostic information regarding the status of the T1 link.


The lineside T1 card mounts into any two consecutive IPE slots. The card consists of a motherboard and a daughterboard. The motherboard circuitry is contained on a standard 31.75 by 25.40 cm. (12.5 by 10.0 in) printed circuit board. The daughterboard is contained on a 5.08 by 15.24 cm (2.0 by 6.0 in) printed circuit board and mounts to the motherboard on six standoffs.

Card connections

The lineside T1 card uses the NT8D81AA Tip and Ring cable to connect from the IPE backplane to the 25-pair amphenol connector on the IPE I/O input/ output (I/O) panel. The I/O panel connector then connects directly to a T1 line, external alarm, and an MMI terminal or modem using the NT5D13AA lineside T1 I/O cable available from Nortel.

Faceplate

The faceplate of the card is twice as wide as the other standard analog and digital line cards, and occupies two card slots. It comes equipped with four

LED indicators. See Figure 29 on page 195 .

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Page 195 of 906

Figure 29

Lineside T1 card faceplate

Card lock latch

LTI

Card status LED

S

Warning LEDs

Card lock latch

YEL ALM

RED ALM

MAINT

NT5D11

Rlse 0x

This symbol indicates that field-selectable switch settings are located on this card

553-6478


Page 196 of 906


In general, the LEDs operate as shown in Table 76.

Table 76

NT5D14AA Lineside T1 faceplate LEDs

LED State Definition

STATUS

RED

YEL

MAINT

On (Red)

Off

On (Red)

Off

On (Yellow)

Off

On (Red)

Off

The NT5D14AA card either failed its self-test or it hasn’t yet been configured in software.

The card is in an active state.

A red alarm has been detected from the T1 link.

(This includes, but is not limited to: not receiving a signal, the signal has exceeded bit error thresholds or frame slip thresholds.)

No red alarm exists.

A yellow alarm state has been detected from the terminal equipment side of the T1 link. If the terminal equipment detects a red alarm condition, it may send a yellow alarm signal to the lineside T1 card

(this depends on whether or not your terminal equipment supports this feature).

No yellow alarm.

The card detects whether tests are being run or that alarms have been disabled through the

Man-Machine Interface. The LED will remain lit until these conditions are no longer detected.

The lineside T1 card is fully operational.

The

STATUS

LED indicates that the lineside T1 card has successfully passed its self test, and is functional. When the card is installed, this LED remains lit for two to five seconds as the self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in software, the LED goes out. If the LED flashes continuously, or remains weakly lit, replace the card.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 197 of 906

Note: Note: The STATUS LED indicates the enabled/disabled status of both card slots of the lineside T1 card simultaneously. To properly enable the card, both the motherboard and the daughterboard slots must be enabled. The STATUS LED will turn off as soon as either one of the lineside T1 card slots have been enabled. No LED operation will be observed when the second card slot is enabled. To properly disable the card, both card slots must be disabled. The LED will not turn on until both card slots have been disabled.

The

RED ALARM

LED indicates that the lineside T1 card has detected an alarm condition from the T1 link. Alarm conditions can include such conditions as not receiving a signal or the signal has exceeded bit error

thresholds or frame slip thresholds. See “Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software” on page 225 for information on T1 link maintenance.

If one of these alarm conditions is detected, this red LED will light. Yellow alarm indication is sent to the far-end as long as the near-end remains in a red alarm condition. Depending on how the Man-Machine Interface (MMI) is configured, this LED remains lit until the following actions occur:

• If the “Self-Clearing” function has been enabled in the MMI, the LED clears the alarm when the alarm condition is no longer detected. This is the factory default.

• If the “Self-Clearing” function has not been enabled or it has been subsequently disabled in the MMI, the LED will stay lit until the command “Clear Alarm” has been typed in the MMI, even though the carrier automatically returned to service when the alarm condition was no longer detected.

The

YELLOW ALARM

LED indicates that the lineside T1 card has detected a yellow alarm signal from the terminal equipment side of the T1 link. See the

“Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software” on page 225 for

information on T1 link maintenance. If the terminal equipment detects a red alarm condition, such as not receiving a signal or the signal has exceeded bit error thresholds or frame slip thresholds, it can send a yellow alarm signal to the lineside T1 card, depending on whether or not the terminal equipment supports this feature. If a yellow alarm signal is detected, this LED will light.

The

MAINT

LED indicates if the lineside T1 card is fully operational because of certain maintenance commands being issued through the MMI. See


Page 198 of 906


“Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software” on page 225 for

information on T1 link maintenance. If the card detects that tests are being run or that alarms have been disabled through the MMI, this LED will light and will remain lit until these conditions are no longer detected, then it will turn off.


Figure 30 shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the

lineside T1 card. Each of these functions is described on the following pages.

Figure 30

Lineside T1 card – block diagram

Front panel

LEDs

Microcontroller

Backplane

Card slot addresses

Async card

LAN link


T1 Interface

(One for all

24 channels)

Controller card

Tx PCM


Rx PCM

Digital

Gain/Loss

Pads

Mux

Seq.


Man/Machine Interface

External Alarm Interface

T1 Tx Tip

T1 Tx Ring

T1 Rx Tip

T1 Rx Ring

Backplane

Common

Peripheral

Equipment connector

Power supplies

Slot 1

Motherboard

(16 channels)

+8.5 V dc

Reg

Slot 2

Daughterboard

(8 channels)


553-6476

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 199 of 906

The lineside T1 card is an IPE line card that provides a cost-effective all-digital connection between T1 compatible terminal equipment (such as voice mail systems, voice response units, and trading turrets) and the system.

The terminal equipment is assured access to analog (500/2500-type) telephone type line functionality such as hook flash, SPRE codes and ringback tones generated from the switch. Usually, the lineside T1 card eliminates the need for channel bank type equipment normally placed between the switch and the terminal equipment. This provides a more robust and reliable end-to-end connection. The lineside T1 card supports line supervision features such as loop and ground start protocols. It can also be used in an off-premise arrangement where analog (500/2500-type) telephones are extended over T1 with the use of channel bank equipment.

The lineside T1 interface offers significant improvement over the previous alternatives. For example, if a digital trunk connection were used, such as with the DTI/PRI interface card, lineside functionality would not be supported. Previously, the only way to achieve the lineside functionality was to use analog ports and channel bank equipment. No channel bank equipment is required, resulting in a more robust and reliable connection.

The lineside T1 interface offers a number of benefits when used to connect to third-party applications equipment:

• It is a more cost-effective alternative for connection because it eliminates the need for expensive channel bank equipment.

• The lineside T1 supports powerful T1 monitoring and diagnostic capability.

• Overall costs for customer applications can also be reduced because the

T1-compatible IPE is often more attractively priced than the analog-port alternatives.

The lineside T1 card is compatible with all IPE based systems and standard public or private DSX-1 type carrier facilities. Using A/B robbed bit signaling, it supports D4 or ESF channel framing formats as well as AMI or

B8ZS coding. Because it uses standard PCM in standard T1 timeslots, existing T1 test equipment remains compatible for diagnostic and fault isolation purposes.


Page 200 of 906


Card interfaces

The lineside T1 card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops through the DS-30X Interfaces circuits and maintenance data over the card

LAN link.

T1 interface circuit

The lineside T1 card contains one T1 line interface circuit which provides 24 individually configurable voice interfaces to one T1 link in 24 different time slots. The circuit demultiplexes the 2.56 Mbps DS-30X Tx signaling bitstreams from the DS-30X network loop and converts it into 1.544 mHz T1

Tx signaling bitstreams onto the T1 link. It also does the opposite, receiving

Rx signaling bitstreams from the T1 link and transmitting Rx signaling bitstreams onto the DS-30X network loop.

The T1 interface circuit performs the following:

• Provides an industry standard DSX-1 (0 to 655 ft./200 meters) interface.

• Converts DS-30X signaling protocol into FXO A and B robbed bit signaling protocol.

• Provides switch-selectable transmission and reception of T1 signaling messages over a T1 link in either loop or ground start mode.


The lineside T1 card also contains signaling and control circuits that establish, supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work with the system controller to operate the T1 line interface circuit during calls.

The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the controller and return incoming call status information to the controller over the DS-30X network loop.


Control functions are provided by a microcontroller and a Card LAN link on the lineside T1 card. A sanity timer is provided to automatically reset the card if the microcontroller stops functioning for any reason.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 201 of 906

Microcontrollers

The lineside T1 card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card. The microcontroller controls the following:

• reporting to the CPU via the card LAN link:

— card identification (card type, vintage, serial number)


— self-test results

— programmed unit parameter status


— control of the T1 line interface


— programming of loop interface control circuits for administration of channel operation


• interface with the line card circuit:

— converts on/off-hook, and ringer control messages from the DS-30X loop into A/B bit manipulations for each time slot in the T1 data stream, using robbed bit signaling.

• the front panel LED when the card is enabled or disabled by instructions from the NT8D01 controller card.


Maintenance data is exchanged with the CPU over a dedicated asynchronous serial network called the Card LAN link.

Sanity timer

The lineside T1 card also contains a sanity timer that resets the microcontroller in the event of a loss of program control. The microcontroller must service the sanity timer every 1.2 seconds. If the timer is not properly serviced, it times out and causes the microcontroller to be hardware reset.


Page 202 of 906


Man-Machine Interface

The lineside T1 card provides an optional Man-Machine Interface (MMI) that is primarily used for T1 link performance monitoring and problem diagnosis.

The MMI provides alarm notification, T1 link performance reporting and fault isolation testing. The interface is accessed through connections from the

I/O panel to a terminal or modem.

The MMI is an optional feature since all T1 configuration settings are performed through dip switch settings or preconfigured factory default settings.


T1 channel specifications

Table 77 provides specifications for the 24 T1channels. Each characteristic is

configured by dip switches.

Table 77

Lineside T1 card – line interface unit electrical characteristics

Characteristics

Framing

Coding

Signaling

Distance to Customer Premise

Equipment (CPE) or Channel

Service Unit

Description

ESF or D4

AMI or B8ZS

Loop or ground start A/B robbed-bit

0-199.6 meters (0–655 feet)

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 203 of 906


The lineside T1 card requires +15 V, –15 V, and +5 V from the backplane.

One NT8D06 IPE Power Supply AC or NT6D40 IPE Power Supply DC can

supply power to a maximum of eight lineside T1 cards. See Table 78.

Table 78

Lineside T1 card – power required

Voltage

+ 5.0 V dc

+15.0 V dc

–15.0 V dc

Current (max.)

1.6 Amp

150 mA.

150 mA.

Foreign and surge voltage protections

In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided on the lineside T1 card. It does have protection against accidental shorts to –52 V dc analog lines.

When the card is used to service off-premise terminal equipment through the public telephone network, install a Channel Service Unit (CSU) as part of the terminal equipment to provide external line protection.


Page 204 of 906



Table 79 lists the environmental specifications of the lineside T1 card.

Table 79

Lineside T1 card – environmental specifications

Parameter

Operating temperature-normal

Operating temperature-short term

Operating humidity-normal

Operating humidity-short term

Storage temperature

Storage humidity

Specifications

15° to +30° C (+59° to 86°F), ambient

10° to +45° C (+50° to 113°F), ambient

20% to 55% RH (non-condensing)


–50° to +70° C (–58° to 158°F), ambient


Installation and configuration

Installation and configuration of the lineside T1 card consists of six basic steps:

1

Configure the dip switches on the lineside T1 card for the environment.

2

Install the lineside T1 card into the selected card slots in the IPE shelf.

3

Cable from the I/O panel to the Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) or

CSU, MMI terminal or modem (optional), external alarm (optional), and other lineside T1 cards for daisy chaining use of MMI terminal

(optional).

4

Configure the MMI terminal.

5

Configure the lineside T1 card through the system software and verify self-test results.

6

Verify initial T1 operation and configure MMI (optional).

Steps 1-5 are explained in this section. Step 6 is covered in “Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software” on page 225 .

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 205 of 906

Dip switch settings

Begin the installation and configuration of the lineside T1 card by selecting the proper dip switch settings for the environment. The lineside T1 card contains two dip switches, each containing eight switch positions. They are located in the upper right corner of the motherboard circuit card as shown in

Figure 31 on page 206 . The configuration for these switches are shown in

Tables 80 through 83.

When the line-side T1 card is oriented as shown in Figure 31 on page 206 , the

dip switches are ON when they are up, and OFF when they are down. The dip switch settings configure the card for the following parameters:

MMI port speed selection

This dip switch setting selects the appropriate baud rate for the terminal or modem (if any) that is connected to the MMI.

Line Supervisory Signaling protocol

As described in “Lineside T1 call operation” on page 46 , the lineside T1 card

is capable of supporting loop start or ground start call processing modes.

Make the selection for this dip switch position based on what type of line signaling the CPE equipment supports.

Address of lineside T1 card to the MMI

The address of the lineside T1 card to the MMI is made up of two components:

• The address of the card within the shelf

• The address of the shelf in which the card resides

These two addresses are combined to create a unique address for the card. The

MMI reads the address of the card within the shelf from the card firmware; however the address of the shelf must be set by this dip switch.

The shelf address dip switch can be from 0 – 15. 16 is the maximum number of lineside T1 IPE shelves (a maximum of 64 lineside T1 cards) capable of daisy chaining to a single MMI terminal. For ease, it is recommended that this address be set the same as the address of the peripheral controller identifier in


Page 206 of 906


Figure 31

Lineside T1 card – T1 protocol dip switch locations

dip switches

553-6479

LD 97 for type: XPE. However, this is not mandatory, and, since the dip switch is limited to 16, this will not always be possible.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 207 of 906

T1 framing

The lineside T1 card is capable of interfacing with CPE or CSU equipment either in D4 or ESF framing mode. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on what type of framing the CPE or CSU equipment supports.

T1 coding

The lineside T1 card is capable of interfacing with CPE or CSU equipment using either AMI or B8ZS coding. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on what type of coding the CPE or CSU equipment supports.

DSX-1 length

Estimate the distance between the lineside T1 card and the hardwired local

CPE, or the Telco demarc RJ48, for the carrier facility connecting the lineside

T1 and the remote CPE. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on this distance.

Line supervision on T1 failure

This setting determines in what state all 24 ports of the lineside T1 card appears to the CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 in case of T1 failure.

Ports can appear as either in the on-hook or off-hook states on T1 failure.

Note: All idle lineside T1 lines will go off-hook and seize a Digitone

Receiver when the off-hook line processing is invoked on T1 failure.

This may prevent DID trunks from receiving incoming calls until the lineside T1 lines time-out and release the DTRs.

Daisy-chaining to MMI

If two or more lineside T1 cards are installed and the MMI is used, daisy-chain the cards together to use one MMI terminal or modem, See

Figure 33 on page 221 . Make the selection for this dip switch position based

on how many lineside T1 cards will be installed.

MMI master or slave

This setting is used only if daisy-chaining the cards to the MMI terminal or modem. This setting determines whether this card is a master or a slave in the

MMI daisy-chain. Select the master setting if this card is the card that is


Page 208 of 906

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards cabled directly into the MMI terminal or modem; select the slave setting if this card is cabled to another lineside T1 card in a daisy chain.

Tables 80 through 83 describes the proper dip switch settings for each type of

T1 link. After the card has been installed, the MMI displays the DIP switch

settings the command Display Configuration is used. See “Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software” on page 225 for details on how to invoke this

command.

Table 80

Lineside T1 card—T1 Switch 1 (S1) dip switch settings

Dip Switch

Number

1

Characteristic

MMI port speed selection

2

3–6

7

8

T1 signaling

XPEC Address for the lineside T1 card

Not Used

Reserved for SL-100 use

Selection

On = 1200 baud

Off = 2400 baud

On = Ground start

Off = Loop start

See Table 81

Leave Off

Leave Off

Table 81

Lineside T1 card – XPEC address dip switch settings (Switch S1, positions 3 – 6)

(Part 1 of 2)

XPEC

Address

00

01

02

03

04

S1 Switch

Position 3

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

S1 Switch

Position 4

Off

Off

Off

Off

On

S1 Switch

Position 5

Off

Off

On

On

Off

S1 Switch

Position 6

Off

On

Off

On

Off

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 209 of 906

Table 81

Lineside T1 card – XPEC address dip switch settings (Switch S1, positions 3 – 6)

(Part 2 of 2)

XPEC

Address

08

09

10

11

05

06

07

12

13

14

15

S1 Switch

Position 3

On

On

On

On

Off

Off

Off

On

On

On

On

S1 Switch

Position 4

Off

Off

Off

Off

On

On

On

On

On

On

On

S1 Switch

Position 5

Off

Off

On

On

Off

On

On

Off

Off

On

On

S1 Switch

Position 6

Off

On

Off

On

On

Off

On

Off

On

Off

On

Table 82

Lineside T1 card – T1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings (Part 1 of 2)

Dip Switch

Number

1

2

3–5

6

Characteristic

T1 framing

T1 Coding

CPE or CSU distance

Line processing on T1 link failure

Selection

On = D4

Off = ESF

On = AMI

Off = B8ZS

See Table 83 on page 210

On = On-hook

Off = Off-hook


Page 210 of 906


Table 82

Lineside T1 card – T1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings (Part 2 of 2)

Dip Switch

Number

7

8

Characteristic

Daisy-chaining to MMI

MMI Master or Slave

Selection

On = Yes

Off = No

On = Master

Off = Slave

Table 83

Lineside T1 card – CPE or CSU distance dip switch settings (Switch S2, positions 3 – 5)

Distance

0–133

134–266

267–399

400–533

534–655

S2 Switch

Position 3

On

Off

Off

Off

Off

S2 Switch

Position 4

Off

On

On

Off

Off

S2 Switch

Position 5

Off

On

Off

On

Off

Installation

This section describes how to install and test the lineside T1 card.

When installed, the lineside T1 card occupies two card slots. It can be installed into an NT8D37 IPE module.

When installing the lineside T1 card into NT8D37 IPE module, determine the vintage level module. If the 25-pair I/O connectors are partially split between adjacent IPE card slots, the lineside T1 card works only in card slots where

Unit 0 of the motherboard card slot appears on the first pair of the 25-pair I/

O connector.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 211 of 906

Certain vintage levels have dedicated 25-pair I/O connectors only for card slots 0, 4, 8, and 12. These vintage levels are cabled with only 16 pairs of wires from each card slot to the I/O panel. Some of the 25-pair I/O connectors are split between adjacent card slots. Other vintage levels cable each card slot to the I/O panel using a unique, 24-pair connector on the I/O panel. In these vintage levels, the lineside T1 card can be installed in any available pair of card slots. However, because of the lower number of wire pairs cabled to the

I/O panel in the lower vintage level, only certain card slots are available to the lineside T1 card.

See Table 84 for the vintage level information for the NT8D37 IPE

modules.

Table 84

Lineside T1 card – NT8D37 IPE module vintage level port cabling

Vintage Level

NT8D37AA

NT8D37BA

NT8D37DC

NT8D37DE

NT8D37EC

Number of ports cabled to I/O panel

16 ports

24 ports

16 ports

16 ports

24 ports

Vintage levels cabling 24 ports

For modules with vintage levels that cabled 24 ports to the I/O panel, the lineside T1 card can be installed in any pair of card slots 015.


Page 212 of 906


Vintage levels cabling 16 ports

For modules with vintage levels that cabled 16 ports to the I/O panel, the lineside T1 card can be installed into the following card slot pairs:

Available: Motherboard/Daughterboard

0 and 1

1 and 2

4 and 5

7 and 8

8 and 9

9 and 10

12 and 13

13 and 14

The lineside T1 card cannot be installed into the following card slot pairs:

Restricted: Motherboard/Daughterboard

2 and 3

3 and 4

6 and 7

10 and 11

11 and 12

14 and 15

If the lineside T1 card must be installed into one of the restricted card slot pairs, rewire the IPE module card slot to the I/O panel by installing an additional NT8D81 cable from the lineside T1 card motherboard slot to the I/

O panel. Re-arrange the three backplane connectors for the affected card slots. This will permit the connection of the NT5D13AA lineside T1 card carrier and maintenance external I/O cable at the IPE module I/O panel connector for card slots that are otherwise restricted.

Also, all lineside T1 card connections can be made at the main distribution frame instead of connecting the NT5D13 lineside T1 card external I/O cable at the I/O panel. This eliminates these card slots restrictions.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 213 of 906

Cabling the lineside T1 card

After configuring the dip switches and installing the lineside T1 card into the selected card slots, the lineside T1 card is ready to be cabled to the CPE or

CSU equipment. Connections can also be made to the MMI terminal or modem (optional), an external alarm (optional), and other lineside T1 cards for daisy-chain use of the MMI terminal (optional).

The lineside T1 card is cabled from its backplane connector through connections from the motherboard circuit card only (no cable connections are made from the daughterboard circuit card) to the input/output (I/O) panel on the rear of the IPE module. The connections from the lineside T1 card to the

I/O panel are made with the NT8D81AA Tip and Ring cables provided with the IPE module.

Cabling from the I/O panel with the NT5D13AA lineside T1 I/O cable

Usually, the I/O panel is connected to the T1 link and other external devices

through the NT5D13AA lineside T1 I/O cable. See Figure 32 on page 214 .

This cable consists of a 25-pair amphenol connector (P1) on one end which plugs into the I/O panel. The other end has 4 connectors:

1

a DB15 male connector (P2) which plugs into the T1 line

2

a DB9 male connector (P3) which plugs into an external alarm system

3

a second DB9 male connector (P5) which connects to an MMI terminal or modem

4

a DB9 female connector (P4) that connects to the next lineside T1 card’s

P4 connector for MMI daisy chaining

Cabling from the I/O panel at the Main Distribution Frame

All lineside T1 connections can be made at the main distribution frame

(MDF) if it is preferred to not use the NT5D13AA lineside T1 I/O cable at the

I/O panel.


Page 214 of 906


Figure 32

Lineside T1 card – connection using the NT5D13AA lineside T1 cable

NT8D37

IPE

Module

System

NT8D81

Tip & Ring

Slot 0

Cable

Line

Side T-1

Card

12A

12B

13A

13B

14A

14B

15A

15B

16A

16B

17A

17B

18A

18B

19A

19B

(bl-w)

(w-bl)

(o-w)

(w-o)

(g-w)

(w-g)

(br-w)

(w-br)

(s-w)

(w-s)

(bl-r)

(r-bl)

(or-r)

(r-or)

(gr-r)

(r-gr)

P1

3

28

4

29

5

1

26

2

27

7

32

8

33

30

6

31

A

3

28

4

29

5

1

26

2

27

7

32

8

33

30

6

31

Module

I/O panel

NC

NC

62A

62B

9

34

9

34

NT5D13

Maintenance

Interface Cable

T-1 tip receive data

T-1 ring receive data

T-1 tip transmit data

T-1 ring transmit data

P2

11

3

1

9

To

CPE or CSU

(DB15 male)

(CPE)

Alarm out normally open

Alarm out common

Alarm out normally closed

P3

1

2

3

To external alarm indicator

(DB9 male)

MMI in transmit data

MMI in receive data

Ground

Control 1

Control 2

P5

3

7

9

2

5

Toward

MMI

(DB9 male)

(DCE)

MMI out receive data

MMI out transmit data

Ground

Control 1

Control 2

P4

5

7

2

3

9

Away from

MMI

(DB9 female)

(DTE)

69A

69B

16

41

16

41

Not used

73A

73B

17

42

17

42

80A

80B

Module backplane

24

49

24

49

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

553-AAA1119


Page 215 of 906

Procedure 11

Connecting to the MDF

To make the connections at the MDF, follow this procedure:

1

Punch down the first eight pairs of a standard telco 25-pair female-connectorized cross-connect tail starting with the first tip and ring pair of the lineside T1 motherboard card slot on the cross-connect side of the MDF terminals.

2

Plug the NT5D13AA lineside T1 I/O cable into this 25-pair cross-connect tail at the MDF, regardless of the card slot restrictions that exist from the vintage level of IPE or CE module used. This connection can also be made at the MDF without using the NT5D13 lineside T1 I/O cable, by

cross-connecting according to the pinouts in Table 85.

3

Turn over the T1 transmit and receive pairs, where required for hardwiring the lineside T1 card to local CPE T1 terminal equipment.


The backplane connector is arranged as an 80-row by 2-column array of pins.

Table 85 shows the I/O pin designations for the backplane connector and the

25-pair Amphenol connector from the I/O panel. Although the connections from the I/O panel only use 14 of the available 50 pins, the remaining pins are reserved and cannot be used for other signaling transmissions.

The information in

Table 85

is provided as a reference and diagnostic aid at

the backplane, since the cabling arrangement can vary at the I/O panel. See


and Configuration (553-3021-210) for cable pinout information for the I/O panel.

Table 85

Lineside T1 card – backplane pinouts (Part 1 of 2)

Backplane

Connector Pin

12A

12B

I/O Panel

Connector Pin

1

26

Signal

T1 Tip, Receive Data

T1 Ring, Receive Data


Page 216 of 906


Table 85

Lineside T1 card – backplane pinouts (Part 2 of 2)

Backplane

Connector Pin

15A

15B

16A

16B

13A

13B

14A

14B

I/O Panel

Connector Pin

2

27

3

28

4

29

5

30

17A

17B

18A

18B

19A

19B

6

31

7

32

8

33

Signal

T1 Tip, Transmit Data

T1 Ring, Transmit Data

Alarm out, Normally open

Alarm out, Common

Alarm out, Normally closed

No Connection

No Connection

Away from MMI terminal,

Receive Data

Away from MMI terminal,

Transmit Data

Towards MMI terminal,

Transmit Data

Towards MMI terminal,

Receive Data

Daisy-chain Control 2

Daisy-chain Control 1

Ground

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 217 of 906

Table 86 shows the pin assignments when using the NT5D13AA lineside T1

I/O cable.

Table 86

Lineside T1 card – NT5D13AA connector pinouts (Part 1 of 2)

I/O panel connector pin Lead designations

4

7

3

28

1

26

2

27

31

33

8

32

T1 Tip Receive Data

T1 Ring Receive Data

T1 Tip Transmit Data

T1 Ring Transmit Data

Alarm out common

Alarm out (normally open)

Alarm out (normally closed)

Towards MMI terminal

Receive Data

Towards MMI terminal

Transmit Data

Ground

Control 1

Control 2

3

2

1

2

1

9

11

3

NT5D13AA

Lineside

T1 I/O connector pin

Lineside T1 cable connector to external equipment

DB15 male to T1 (P2)

Lineside T1 card is CPE transmit to network and receive from network

DB9 male to external alarm (P3)

3

DB9 male towards MMI (P5)

Wired as DCE

Data is transmitted on pin 2 (RXD) and received on pin 3 (TXD)

5

7

9


Page 218 of 906


Table 86

Lineside T1 card – NT5D13AA connector pinouts (Part 2 of 2)

I/O panel connector pin

33

8

32

30

6

Lead designations

Ground

Control 1

Control 2

Away from MMI terminal

Transmit Data

Away from MMI terminal

Receive Data

NT5D13AA

Lineside

T1 I/O connector pin

Lineside T1 cable connector to external equipment

DB9 female away from MMI (P4)

Wired as DTE

Data is transmitted on pin 2 (TXD) and received on pin 3 (RXD)

9

3

5

7

2

T1 connections

T1 signaling for all 24 channels is transmitted over P2 connector pins 1, 3, 9,

and 11 as shown in Table 86 on page 217 . Plug the DB15 male connector

labeled “P2” into the T1 link. T1 transmit and receive pairs must be turned over between the lineside T1 card and CPE equipment that is hardwired without carrier facilities. If the lineside T1 card is connected through T1 carrier facilities, the transmit and receive pairs must be wired straight through to the RJ48 at the Telco demarc, the CSU, or other T1 carrier equipment. The

T1 CPE equipment at the far end will also have transmit and receive wired straight from the RJ48 demarc at the far end of the carrier facility.

External alarm connections

P3 connector pins 3, 4, and 28 can be plugged into any external alarm hardware. Plug the male DB9 connector labeled “P3” into the external alarm.

These connections are optional, and the functionality of the lineside T1 card is not affected if they are not made.

The MMI (described in detail in “Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software” on page 225

) monitors the T1 link for specified performance criteria and reports on problems detected.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 219 of 906

One of the ways it can report information is through this external alarm connection. If connected, the lineside T1 card’s microprocessor activates the external alarm hardware if it detects certain T1 link problems that it has

classified as alarm levels 1 or 2. See “Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software” on page 225

for a detailed description of alarm levels and configuration. If an alarm level 1 or 2 is detected by MMI, the lineside T1 card will close the contact that is normally open, and will open the contact that is normally closed. The MMI command Clear Alarm will return the alarm contacts to their normal state.

MMI connections

P5 connector pins 2, 3, 5, 7 and 9 are used to connect the lineside T1 card to the MMI terminal and daisy chain lineside T1 cards together for access to a shared MMI terminal. When logging into a lineside T1 card, “control 2” is asserted by that card, which informs all of the other cards not to talk on the bus, but rather to pass the data straight through. The pins labeled “control 1” are reserved for future use. As with the external alarm connections, MMI connections are optional. Up to 128 lineside T1 cards, located in up to 16 separate IPE shelves, can be linked to one MMI terminal using the daisy chaining approach.

If only one lineside T1 card is being installed, cable from the DB9 female connector labeled “P5” (towards MMI terminal) to one of the COM ports on the back of any TTY, a PC running a terminal emulation program, or a modem. For installations of only one card, no connection is made to the DB9 male connector labeled “P4” (away from MMI terminal).

If two or more lineside T1 cards are being installed into the system, the MMI port connections can be daisy-chained together so that only one MMI

terminal is required for up to 128 lineside T1 cards. See Figure 33 on page 221

. Cards can be located in up to 16 separate IPE shelves. Any card slot in the IPE shelf can be connected to any other card slot; the card slots connected together do not need to be consecutive.


Page 220 of 906


Procedure 12

Connecting two or more lineside T1 cards to the MMI terminal

Follow this procedure for connecting two or more lineside T1 cards to the MMI terminal:

1

Cable the DB9 male connector labeled “P5” (towards MMI terminal) to one of the COM ports on the back of any TTY, a PC running a terminal emulation program, or a modem.

2

Make the connection from the first card to the second card by plugging the

DB9 female connector labeled “P4” (away from MMI terminal) from the

first card into the DB9 male connector of the second card labeled “P5”

(towards MMI terminal).

3

Repeat Step 2 for the remaining cards.

4

When the last card in the daisy chain is reached, make no connection to the DB9 male connector labeled “P4” (away from MMI terminal).

5

If two lineside T1 cards are located too far apart to connect the “P4” and

“P5” connectors together, connect them together with an off-the-shelf

DB-9 female to DB-9 male straight-through extension cable, available at any PC supply store.


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 221 of 906

Figure 33

Lineside T1 card – connecting two or more cards to the MMI

MMI terminal

NT5D13

Maintenance

Interface

Cable

(typ)

Toward

MMI

Away from

MMI

P2 P3 P5 P4

P1

NT8D81

Tip & Ring

Cable

(typ)

LTI card no. 1

LTI card no. 2

LTI card no. 3

IPE module backplane

LTI

Tx & Rx

(tip & ring)

I/O panel on rear of IPE module

Alarm out

Last LTI card in daisy chain

No connection

553-6481


Page 222 of 906


Terminal configuration

For the MMI terminal to be able to communicate to the lineside T1 card, the interface characteristics must be configured to the following:

• Speed – 1200 or 2400 bps, depending on the setting of switch position 1 of Switch 1

• Character width – 8 bits

• Parity bit – none

• Stop bits – one

• Software handshake (XON/XOFF) – off

Software configuration

Although much of the architecture and many of the features of the lineside T1 card differ from the analog line card, the lineside T1 card has been designed to emulate an analog line card to the CS 1000 Release 4.5 software. Because of this, the lineside T1 card software configuration is performed the same as two adjacent analog line cards.

All 24 T1 channels carried by the lineside T1 card are individually configured using the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program

LD 10. Use Table 87 on page 223 to determine the correct unit number and

the NTP Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311) for LD 10 service change instructions.

The lineside T1 card circuitry routes 16 units (0-15) on the motherboard and eight (0-7) units on the daughterboard to 24 T1 channels. The motherboard circuit card is located in the left card slot, and the daughterboard circuit card is located in right card slot. For example, if the lineside T1 card is installed into card slots 0 and 1, the motherboard would reside in card slot 0 and the daughterboard would reside in card slot 1. In order to configure the terminal equipment through the switch software, the T1 channel number must be

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 223 of 906

cross-referenced to the corresponding card unit number. This mapping is

shown in Table 87.

Table 87

DX-30 to T1 time slot mapping (Part 1 of 2)

Item

Motherboard

Motherboard

Motherboard

Motherboard

Motherboard

Motherboard

Motherboard

Motherboard

Motherboard

Motherboard

Motherboard

Motherboard

Motherboard

Motherboard

Motherboard

Motherboard

Daughterboard

Daughterboard

Daughterboard

Daughterboard

TN

12

13

14

15

10

11

8

9

2

3

0

1

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

T1 Channel Number

13

14

15

16

9

10

11

12

17

18

19

20

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2


Page 224 of 906


Table 87

DX-30 to T1 time slot mapping (Part 2 of 2)

Item

Daughterboard

Daughterboard

Daughterboard

Daughterboard

TN

6

7

4

5

T1 Channel Number

21

22

23

24

Disconnect supervision

The lineside T1 card supports far-end disconnect supervision by opening the tip side toward the terminal equipment upon the system's detecting a disconnect signal from the far-end on an established call. The Supervised

Analog Line feature (SAL) must be configured in LD 10 for each lineside T1 port. At the prompt FTR, respond:

OSP <CR>

and against FTR respond:

ISP <CR>

The lineside T1 card treats OSP and ISP for both originating and terminating calls as hook flash disconnect supervision, also known as cut-off disconnect.

Originating calls are outgoing from the terminal equipment. Terminating calls are incoming to the terminal equipment. The lineside T1 card does not support battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision on originating calls.

After the software is configured, power up the card and verify the self test results. The STATUS LED on the faceplate indicates whether or not the lineside T1 card has passed its self test, and is functional. When the card is installed, this LED remains lit for two to five seconds as the self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in software, the LED goes out.

The LED goes out if either the motherboard or daughterboard is enabled by the software. If the LED flashes continuously or remains weakly lit, replace the card.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 225 of 906

Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software

Description

The Man-Machine Interface (MMI) supplies a maintenance interface to a terminal that provides T1 link diagnostics and historical information. See

“Installation and configuration” on page 204 for instructions on how to install

the cabling and configure the terminal for the MMI.

This section describes the features of MMI and explains how to configure and use the MMI firmware.

The MMI provides the following maintenance features:

• default and reconfigurable alarm parameters

• notification of T1 link problems by activating alarms

• Reports on current and historical T1 link performance

• T1 tests for T1 verification and fault isolation to lineside T1 card, T1 link, or CPE equipment

Alarms

MMI activates alarms for the following T1 link conditions:

• excessive bit error rate

• frame slip errors

• out of frame condition

• loss of signal condition

• blue alarm condition

The alarms are activated in response to pre-set thresholds and error durations.

Descriptions of each of these T1 link alarm conditions, instructions on how to configure alarm parameters, and access alarm reporting can be found in

“Alarm operation and reporting” on page 236

.


Page 226 of 906


Two levels of alarm severity exist for bit errors and frame slip errors. For these conditions, two different threshold and duration configurations are established.

When the first level of severity is reached (alarm level 1), the MMI will do the following:

• activate the external alarm hardware

• light the appropriate LED on the faceplate (either RED ALARM or

YELLOW ALARM)

• display an alarm message on the MMI terminal

• create entry in the alarm log

When the second level of severity is reached (alarm level 2), the MMI will perform all of the same functions as alarm level 1, and in addition, force the lineside T1 card to enter trunk processing mode. In this mode, the terminal equipment will be sent either “on-hook” or “off-hook” signals for all 24 ports to the CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1, depending on how the dip switch for trunk processing was set (dip switch #2, position #6).

If the MMI detects T1 link failures for any of the remainder of the conditions monitored (out of frame condition, loss of signal condition, and blue alarm condition), the lineside T1 card automatically performs all alarm level 2 functions. The MMI also sends a yellow alarm to the distant end CPE or CSU.

Alarms can be configured to self-clear or not self-clear when the alarm condition is no longer detected.

All alarms activated produce a record in an alarm log. The alarm log maintains records for the most recent 100 alarms and can be displayed, printed and cleared. The alarm log displays or prints the alarms listing the most recent first in descending chronological order. The alarms are stamped with the date and time they occurred.

T1 performance counters and reports

The MMI maintains performance error counters for the following T1 conditions:

• errored seconds

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 227 of 906

• bursty seconds

• unavailable seconds

• framer slip seconds

• loss of frame seconds

It retains the T1 performance statistics for the current hour, and for each hour for the previous 24 hours. Descriptions of each of these performance error counters, and instructions on how to report on them and clear them can be

found in “Performance counters and reporting” on page 239 .

T1 verification and fault isolation testing

The MMI performs various tests to verify that the T1 is working adequately, or help to isolate a problem to the lineside T1 card, the T1 link, or the CPE equipment. Descriptions of all of these tests and instructions on how to run

them can be found in “Testing” on page 241 .

Login and password

The MMI can be accessed through a TTY, a PC running a terminal emulation program, or a modem. After installing the MMI terminal and card cables, the

MMI firmware can be accessed.

For single card installations, log in by entering:

L<CR>

For multiple card installations connected in a daisy-chain, log in by entering:

L <address>

where the four-digit address is the two-digit address of the IPE shelf as set by dip switch positions (dip switch #1, positions 3-6) on the card (as opposed to the address set in the CS 1000 Release 4.5 software), plus the two-digit address of the card slot that the motherboard occupies. For example, to login to a card located in shelf 13, card slot 4, type:

L 13 4 <CR>


Page 228 of 906


A space is inserted between the login command (L), the shelf address, and the card slot address.

The MMI then prompts for a password. The password is “LTILINK”, and it must be typed all in capital letters.

After logging in, the prompt will then look like this:

•

LTI:::> for single-card installations

•

LTI:ss cc> for multi-card installations, where ss represents the two-digit

address, and cc represents the two-digit card slot address

Basic commands

MMI commands can now be executed. There are seven basic commands that can be combined together to form a total of 19 command sets. They are:

• Alarm

• Clear

• Display

• Set

• Test

• Help

• Quit

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 229 of 906

If ?<CR> is typed, the MMI will list the above commands along with an explanation of their usage A screen similar to the following will appear. The help screen can also appear by typing H<CR>, or HELP<CR>.

ALARM

CLEAR

USAGE: Alarm [Enable | Disable]

USAGE: Clear [Alarm] | [Error counter] [Log]

DISPLAY USAGE: Display [Alarm | Status | Perform |

History] [Pause]

HELP

SET

TEST

QUIT

USAGE: Help | ?

USAGE: Set [Time | Date | Alarm | Clearing |

Name | Memory]

USAGE: Test [Carrier All]

USAGE: Quit

Notation Used:

CAPS - Required Letters [ ] -

Optional

| - Either/

Or

Each of these commands can be executed by typing the first letter of the command or by typing the entire command. Command sets are entered by typing the first letter of the first command, a space, and the first letter of the

second command or by typing the entire command. Table 88 shows all the

possible command sets, listed in alphabetical order. These commands are described by subject later in this section.

Table 88

MMI commands and command sets (Part 1 of 3)

Command Description

A D

A E

C A

C A L

Alarm Disable

Disables all alarms.

Alarm Enable

Enables all alarms.

Clear Alarm

Clears all alarms, terminates line processing, and resets the T1 bit error rate and frame slip counters.

Clear Alarm Log

Clears the alarm log.


Page 230 of 906


Table 88



C E

D A [P]

D C

D H [P]

D P

D S [P]

H or ?

L

Clear Error

Clears the error counter for the T1.

Display Alarms [Pause]

Displays the alarm log – a list of the most recent 100 alarms along with time and date stamps.

Display Configuration

Displays the configuration settings for the cards including:

• the serial number of the card

• MMI firmware version

• date and time

• alarm enable/disable setting

• self-clearing enable/disable setting

• settings entered in Set Configuration

• dip switch settings

Display History [Pause]

Displays performance counters for the past 24 hours.

Display Performance

Displays performance counters for the current hour.

Display Status [Pause]

Displays carrier status, including whether the card is in the alarm state, and what alarm level is currently active.

Help

Displays the help screen.

Login

Logs into the MMI terminal when the system has one lineside T1 card.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 231 of 906

Table 88



Q

S A

S C

S D

S T

T x

Quit

Logs the terminal user out. If multiple lineside T1 cards share a single terminal, logout after using the MMI. Because of the shared daisy-chained link, if a lineside

T1 card is logged in, it occupies the bus and no other lineside T1 cards are able to notify the MMI of alarms.

Set Alarm parameters

Alarm parameters include the allowable bit errors per second threshold and alarm duration.

Set Clearing

Sets the alarm self-clearing function to either enable or disable

.

Set Date

Sets date or verifies current date.

Set time

Sets time or verifies current time.

Test

Initiates the T1 carrier test function. To terminate a test in process, enter the

STOP TEST (S) command at any time.


Page 232 of 906


Configuring parameters

The MMI has been designed with default settings so that no configuration is necessary. However, it can be configured to suit a specific environment.

Set Time

Before configuring the MMI, login to the system and enter the current time.

Do this by typing in the Set Time (S T) command set. The MMI will then display the time it has registered. Enter a new time or press “Enter” to leave it unchanged. The time is entered in the “hh:mm:ss” military time format.

Set Date

The current date must be set. Do this by typing in the Set Date (S D) command set. MMI will then display the date it has registered. Enter a new date or press

“Enter” to leave it unchanged. The date is entered in the “mm/dd/yy” format.

Alarm parameters

The Set Alarm (S A) command set establishes the parameters by which an alarm is activated, and its duration. There are three alarm activation levels:

•

Alarm Level 0 (AL0)

consists of activity with an error threshold below the AL1 setting. This is a satisfactory condition and no alarm is activated.

•


consists of activity with an error threshold above the AL1 setting but below AL2 setting. This is a minor unsatisfactory condition. In this situation, the external alarm hardware will be activated by closing the normally open contact, the RED ALARM LED on the faceplate will light, and an alarm message will be created in the alarm log and the MMI terminal.

•


consists of activity with an error threshold above the AL2 setting. This is an unsatisfactory condition. In this situation, the external alarm hardware will be activated by closing the normally open contact, the RED ALARM LED on the faceplate will light, an alarm message will be created in the alarm log and the MMI terminal, the lineside T1 card will enter line processing mode, and a yellow alarm message will be sent to the CPE/CSU. Line processing will send the

CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 either all “on-hook” or all

“off-hook” signals, depending on the dip switch setting of the card.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 233 of 906

When the Set Alarm command is used, a prompt appears to configure the threshold level and duration period for alarm levels 1 and 2.

The threshold value indicates the number of bit errors detected per second that is necessary to activate the alarm. The T1 link processes at a rate of approximately 1.5 mb/s. The threshold value can be set between 3 and 9 and can be different for each alarm level. Any other value entered will cause the software to display a “Parameter Invalid” message. The threshold number

entered represents the respective power of 10 as shown in Table 89.

Note: The error rate threshold for a level 2 alarm must be greater (a smaller power of 10) than for a level 1 alarm.

Table 89

T1 bit error rate threshold settings

Alarm threshold bit errors per second in power of 10

10

–3

10

–4

10

–5

10

–6

10

–7

10

–8

10

–9

Threshold to set alarm

1,500/second

150/second

15/second

1.5/second

1.5/10 seconds

1.5/100 seconds

1.5/1000 seconds

Allowable duration periods

1–21 seconds

1–218 seconds

1–2148 seconds

1–3600 seconds

10–3600 seconds

100–3600 seconds

1000–3600 seconds

The duration value is set in seconds and can be set from 1 to 3600 seconds

(1 hour). This duration value indicates how long the alarm will last. Low bit error rates (10

-7

through 10

-9

) are restricted to longer durations since it takes more than one second to detect an alarm condition above 10

-6

. Higher bit error rates are restricted to shorter durations because the MMI error counter fills at 65,000 errors.

The alarm indications (LEDs and external alarm contacts) clear automatically after the duration period has expired, if the Set Clearing (S C) “Enable Self


Page 234 of 906


Clearing” option has been set. Otherwise, the alarm will continue until the command set Clear Alarm (C A) has been entered.

When an alarm is cleared, the following activity caused by the alarm will be cleared:

• the external alarm hardware will be deactivated (the contact normally open will be reopened)

• the LED light will go out

• an entry will be made in the alarm log of the date and time the alarm was cleared

• carrier fail line supervision will cease (for alarm level 2 only)

If self-clearing alarm indications have been disabled, carrier fail line supervision will terminate when the alarm condition has ceased, but the alarm contact and faceplate LED will remain active until the alarm is cleared.

Note: A heavy bit error rate can cause 150 bit errors to occur in less than

100 seconds. This will cause the alarm to be activated sooner.

An alarm will not be automatically cleared until the system no longer detects the respective bit error threshold during the corresponding duration period.

For example, if an AL1 threshold of 6 (representing 10

–6

) and a duration period of 100 seconds is specified, an alarm will be activated if more than 150 bit errors occur in any 100 second period (1.5 seconds X 100 seconds = 150/

100 seconds). As soon as the alarm is activated, the bit counter is reset to 0.

If the next 100 seconds pass, and less than 150 bit errors are detected, then the alarm will clear after the duration period. However, if more than 150 bit errors are detected in the next 100 seconds, the alarm continues for the designated duration period. The alarm will finally clear when the alarm condition is no longer detected for the designated duration period either by self-clearing (if this function is enabled), or when the Clear Alarm (C A) command set is entered.

In addition to bit errors, the Set Alarm function configures parameters for detecting frame slip errors, by establishing a threshold necessary to activate an alarm. If the threshold value is exceeded, a level 2 alarm will be activated.

The frame slip threshold can be specified from 1 to 255 frame slips per time period. The duration time period can be specified from 1 to 24 hours.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 235 of 906

When entering the Set Alarm command set, the MMI will scroll through the previously described series of alarm options. These options are displayed along with their current value. Enter a new value or press Enter to retain the

current value. Table 90 outlines the options available in the Set Alarm

function.

Table 90

Set alarm options

Option Description

AL1 Threshold

AL1 Duration

AL2 Threshold

AL2 Duration

Sets the allowable bit errors per second (from 3 to 9) before alarm level 1 is activated. Factory default is 10

–6

.

Sets the duration in seconds (from 1 to 3,600 seconds) that alarm level 1 is activated. Factory default is 10 seconds.

Sets the allowable bit errors per second (from 3 to 9) before alarm level 2 is activated. Factory default is 10

-5

.


Frame Slip Threshold Sets the allowable frame slips per time period (from 1 to 255) before alarm level 2 is activated. Factory default is 5.

Frame Slip Duration Sets the duration in hours (from 1 to 24) that the frame slips are counted. After this time period, the counter is reset to 0. Factory default is 2 hours.

Note: If the duration period is set too long, the lineside T1 card will be slow to return to service automatically even when the carrier is no longer experiencing any errors. The Clear Alarm command will have to be entered manually to restore service promptly. To avoid this, the duration period should normally be set to 10 seconds.

Set Clearing

Use the Set Clearing (S C) command set to enable or disable alarm self-clearing. Answer Y or N to the question: “Enable Self Clearing? (YES or

NO)”. If “Enable Self-Clearing” is chosen (the factory default condition), the system will automatically clear alarms after the alarm condition is no longer detected for the corresponding duration period.


Page 236 of 906


The “Disable Self-Clearing” option causes the system to continue the alarm condition until the Clear Alarm (C A) command set is entered. Line processing and the yellow alarm indication to the CPE is terminated as soon as the alarm condition clears, even if “Disable Self-Clearing” is set.

Display Configuration

The Display Configuration (D C) command set displays the various configuration settings established for the lineside T1 card. Entering the

Display Configuration (D C) command set causes a screen similar to the following to appear:

LTI S/N 1103 Software Version 1.01 3/03/95 1:50

Alarms Enabled: YES Self Clearing Enabled: YES

Alarm Level 1 threshold value: E-7 Threshold duration

(in seconds): 10

Alarm Level 2 threshold value: E-5 Threshold duration

(in seconds): 1

Frame slips alarm level threshold: 5 Threshold duration

(in hours): 2

Current dip switch S1 settings (S1..S8) On Off Off On Off

Off Off On

Current dip switch S2 settings (S1..S8) On Off On Off Off

Off On Off

Alarm operation and reporting

The MMI monitors the T1 link according to the parameters established through the Set Alarm command set for the following conditions:

• Excessive bit error rate

• Frame slip errors

• Out of frame condition

• Loss of signal condition

• Blue alarm (AIS) condition

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 237 of 906

Descriptions of the excessive bit error rate and frame slip errors conditions

can be found in “Configuring parameters” on page 232 . Bit errors may

activate either a level 1 or level 2 alarm. The remaining conditions, when detected, will always cause the system to activate a level 2 alarm.

An out of frame condition will be declared if two out of four frame bits are in error. If this condition occurs, the hardware will immediately attempt to reframe. During the reframe time, the T1 link will be declared out of frame, and silence will be sent on all receive timeslots.

A loss of signal condition is declared if a full frame (192 bits) of consecutive zeros has been detected at the receive inputs. If this condition occurs, the T1 link will automatically attempt to resynchronize with the distant end. If this condition lasts for more than two seconds, a level 2 alarm will be declared, and silence will be sent on all receive timeslots. The alarm will be cleared if, after two seconds, neither a loss of signal, out of frame condition, nor blue alarm condition occurs.

If a repeating device loses signal, it immediately begins sending an unframed all 1’s signal to the far-end to indicate an alarm condition. This condition is called a blue alarm, or an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS). If an AIS is detected for more than two seconds, a level 2 alarm will be declared, and silence will be sent on all receive timeslots. The alarm will be cleared if, after two seconds, neither a loss of signal, out of frame condition, nor blue alarm condition occurs.

Alarm Disable

The Alarm Disable (A D) command disables the external alarm contacts.

When this command is typed, the MMI will display the message “Alarms

Disabled” and the MAINT LED will light. In this mode, no yellow alarms are sent and the lineside T1 card will not enter line processing mode. Alarm messages will still be sent to the MMI terminal and the LED light will continue to indicate alarm conditions.

Alarm Enable

The Alarm Enable (A E) command set does the opposite of the Alarm Disable command set. It enables the external alarm contacts. When this command set is typed in, the MMI will display the message “Alarms Enabled.” In this


Page 238 of 906

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards mode, yellow alarms can be sent and the lineside T1 card can enter line processing mode.

Clear Alarm

The Clear Alarm (C A) command set will clear all activity initiated by an alarm: the external alarm hardware will be deactivated (the contact normally open will be reopened), the LED light will go out, an entry will be made in the alarm log of the date and time the alarm was cleared, and line processing will cease (for alarm level 2 only). When this command set is typed in, the

MMI will display the message “Alarm acknowledged.” If the alarm condition still exists, the alarm will be declared again.

Display Alarms

A detailed report of the most recent 100 alarms with time and date stamps can be displayed by entering the Display Alarms (D A) command set into the

MMI. Entering the Display Alarms (D A) command set will cause a screen similar to the following to appear:

Alarm Log

3/03/95 1:48 Yellow alarm on T1 carrier

3/03/95 1:50 Initialized Memory

3/03/95 2:33 T1 carrier level 1 alarm

3/03/95 3:47 T1 carrier level 2 alarm

3/03/95 4:43 T1 carrier performance within thresholds

3/03/95 15:01 Log Cleared

The Pause command can be used to display a full screen at a time by entering

D A P.

Clear Alarm Log

Clear all entries in the alarm log by typing in the Clear Alarm Log

(C A L) command set.

Display Status

The Display Status (D S) command set displays the current alarm condition of the T1 link as well as the on-hook or off-hook status of each of the 24 ports

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 239 of 906

of the lineside T1 card. Entering the Display Status (D S) command set will cause a screen similar to the following to appear:

LTI S/N Software Version 1.01 3/03/95 1:50

In alarm state: NO

T1 link at alarm level 0

Port 0 off hook, Port 1 on hook, Port 2 on hook,

Port 3 on hook,

Port 4 on hook, Port 5 on hook, Port 6 off hook,

Port 7 off hook,


Port 11 on hook,


Port 15 on hook,

Port 16 on hook, Port 17 on hook, Port 18 off hook,

Port 19 off hook,


Port 23 on hook

Performance counters and reporting

The MMI monitors the performance of the T1 link according to several performance criteria including errored, bursty, unavailable, loss of frame and frame slip seconds. It registers the performance of these criteria by reading their status every second and counting their results. These counts are accumulated for an hour, and then they are reset to 0. Previous hour count results are maintained for each hour for the previous 24 hours.

Performance counts are maintained for the following:

• Errored seconds – one or more CRC-6 errors, or one or more out of frame errors in a second.

• Bursty seconds – more than one and less than 320 CRC-6 errors in a second.

• Unavailable seconds – unavailable state starts with 10 consecutive severely errored seconds and ends with 10 consecutive severely errored seconds (excluding the final 10 non-severely errored seconds). Severely errored seconds are defined as more than 320 CRC-6 errors, or one or more out of frames in a second.


Page 240 of 906


• Loss of frame seconds – loss of frame or loss of signal for three consecutive seconds.

• Framer slip seconds – one ore more frame slips in a second.

The MMI also maintains an overall error counter that is a sum of all the errors counted for the five performance criteria listed above. The error counter can only be cleared by entering the “Clear Error” command. It will stop counting at 65,000. The error counter provides an easy method to determine if an alarm condition has been corrected. Simply clear the error counter, wait a few minutes, and display performance to see if any errors have occurred since the counter was cleared.

Display the reports on these performance counters by entering the Display

Performance (D P) or the Display History (D H) command sets into the MMI.


Enter the Display Performance (D P) command set to display performance counters for the past hour. A screen similar to the following will appear:

LTI T1 Interface Performance Log

Data for the past 37 Minutes

Errored Bursty Unavaila ble

Loss

Frame

Frame

Slip

Error

Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Counter

2263 2263 352 321

Each column, except the error counter, indicates the number of errors in the current hour and is reset to zero every hour on the hour. When these counters are reset to zero, the performance counter values are put into the history log.

The error counter indicates the number of errors that occurred since the error counter was cleared.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 241 of 906

Display History

Enter the Display History (D H) command set to display performance counters for each hour for the past 24 hours. A screen similar to the following will appear:

LTI T1 Interface History Performance Log

3/03/95 1:35

Hour Errore d

Bursty Unavaila ble

Loss

Frame

Frame

Slip

Endin g

Second s

20:00 139

Second s

0

Error

Seconds Seconds Seconds Counte r

129 139 23 162

19:00 0

18:00 0

17:00 0

16:00 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Use the pause command to display a full screen at a time by entering D H P.

Clear Error

Reset the error counter to zero by entering the Clear Error (C E) command set.

The error counter provides a convenient way to determine if the T1 link is performing without errors since it can be cleared and examined at any time.

Testing

The Test Carrier (T C) command set enables tests to be run on the lineside T1 card, the T1 link, or the CPE device. These three tests provide the capability

to isolate faulty conditions in any one of these three sources. See Table 91 on page 242

for additional information on these three test types.

After entering the T C command set, select which test to start. The prompt appears, similar to the following:

Test 1: Local Loopback Test

Test 2: External Loopback Test

Test 3: Network Loopback Test

(1,2,3 or S to cancel):


Page 242 of 906


Tests can be performed once (for 1 through 98 minutes), or continuously

(selected by entering 99 minutes) until a “Stop Test” command is entered.

Tests continue for the duration specified even if a failure occurs, and terminate at the end of the time period or when a “Stop Test” command is issued. Only a “Stop Test” command will stop a test with a duration selection of 99. After entering the test number selection, a prompt similar to the following will appear:

Enter Duration of Test (1-98 Mins, 0 = Once, 99 =

Forever)

Verify DS-30A Links are disabled.

Hit Q to quit or any Key to Continue

Before a test is run, verify that DS-30A links are disabled since the tests will interfere with calls currently in process.

During a test, if an invalid word is received, a failure peg counter is incremented. The peg counter saturates at 65,000 counts. At the end of the test, the Test Results message will indicate how many failures, if any, occurred during the test.

Table 91 shows which test to run for the associated equipment.

Table 91

MMI Tests

Test number

1

2

3

Equipment tested

Lineside T1 card

T1 link, lineside T1 card and T1 network

CPE device and T1 network

Test description

Local loopback

External loopback

Network loopback

Test 1, local loopback, loops the T1 link signaling toward itself at the backplane connector, and test data is generated and received on all timeslots.

If this test fails, it indicates that the lineside T1 card is defective. Figure 34 on page 243

demonstrates how the signaling is looped back toward itself.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 243 of 906

Figure 34

MMI local loopback test

System

Common

Equipment

Line side

T-1 interface card

T-1 link

External network

T-1 link

Customer premise equipment

(CPE)

553-AAA1120

Test 2, external loopback, assumes an external loopback is applied to the T1 link. Test data is generated and received by the lineside T1 card on all timeslots. If test 1 passes but test 2 fails, it indicates that the T1 link is defective between the lineside T1 card and the external loopback location. If test 1 was not run and test 2 fails, the T1 link or the lineside T1 card could be defective. To isolate the failure to the T1 link, tests 1 and 2 must be run in

tandem. Figure 35 demonstrates how an external loopback is applied to the

T1 link.

Figure 35

MMI external loopback test

System

Common

Equipment

Line side

T-1 interface card

T-1 link

External network

T-1 link


(CPE)

553-AAA1121

Test 3, network loopback, loops the received T1 data back toward the CPE equipment. No test data is generated or received by the lineside T1 card. If test 2 passes but test 3 fails, it indicates that the CPE device is defective. If test 2 was not run and test 3 fails, the T1 link or the CPE device could be defective. To isolate the failure to the CPE device, tests 2 and 3 must be run


Page 244 of 906


in tandem. Figure 36 demonstrates how the signaling is looped back toward

the CPE equipment.

Figure 36

MMI network loopback test

System

Common

Equipment

Line side

T-1 interface card

T-1 link

External network

T-1 link


(CPE)

553-AAA1122

Applications

The lineside T1 interface is an IPE line card that provides cost-effective connection between T1-compatible IPE and a system or off-premise extensions over long distances.

Some examples of applications where a lineside T1 card can be interfaced to a T1 link are:

• T1 compatible Voice Response Unit (VRU) equipment

• T1 compatible turret systems

• T1 compatible wireless systems

• Remote analog (500/2500-type) telephones through T1 to a channel bank

• Remote Norstar sites behind CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 over

T1

The lineside T1 card is appropriate for any application where both T1 connectivity and “lineside” functionality is required. This includes connections to T1-compatible voice response units, voice messaging and

trading turret (used in stock market applications) systems. See Figure 37.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 245 of 906

Figure 37

Lineside T1 interface connection to IPE

System

T1

Line-side T1 interface

LTI

Third-party peripheral equipment with T1 interface

Trunks Public network

553-AAA1123

For example, the lineside T1 card can be used to connect the system to a

T1-compatible VRU. An example of this type of equipment is Nortel Open

IVR system. In this way, the system can send a call to the VRU. Because the lineside T1 card supports analog (500/2500-type) telephones, the VRU is able to send the call back to the system for further handling.

The lineside T1 card can also be used to provide off-premise extensions to remote locations (up to 500 miles from the system). In this application, the analog telephone functionality is extended over T1 facilities, providing a telephone at a remote site with access to analog (500/2500-type) telephone

lines. See Figure 38 on page 246 . An audible message-waiting indicator can

be provided as well.


Page 246 of 906


Figure 38

Lineside T1 interface in off-premise application

System

Channel bank

T1

LTI

T1

Public network

553-AAA1124

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 247 of 906

Similarly, the lineside T1 can be used to provide a connection between the

system and a remote Norstar system. See Figure 39. In this case, channel

banks would not be required if the Norstar system is equipped with a T1 interface.

Figure 39

Lineside T1 interface connection to Norstar system

System

Norstar

LTI

T1

Public network

T1

553-AAA1125

Note: The lineside T1 card audio levels must be considered when determining the appropriateness of an application.


Page 248 of 906


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

312

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1

Interface cards

Page 249 of 906

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249




Installation and Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Introduction

Two vintages of NT5D33 and NT5D34 cards are supported:

• NT5D33AB/NT5D34AB – standard Lineside E1 Interface (LEI) cards

The LEI card is an IPE line card that provides an all-digital connection between E1–compatible terminal equipment (such as a voice mail system) and CS 1000S, CS 1000M, or Meridian 1.

The LEI interfaces one E1 line, carrying 30 channels, to the CS 1000S,

CS 1000M, or Meridian 1, and emulates an analog line card to the system software. Each channel is independently configured by software control


Page 250 of 906

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards in the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program

LD 10. The LEI also comes equipped with a Man-Machine Interface

(MMI) maintenance program, which provides diagnostic information regarding the status of the E1 link.

• NT5D33AC/NT5D34AC – Enhanced Lineside E1 Interface (ELEI) cards

The ELEI card is similar to an LEI card, but has been enhanced to allow the capability of transporting caller information using the proprietary signaling interface Channel Associated Signaling (CAS+).

ELEI cards can operate in one of two modes: LEI mode, or enhanced

(ELEI) mode. In LEI mode, this card is fully compatible with, and provides the same functionality as, the standard LEI card. In ELEI mode, this card can be connected to any CAS+ compliant systems. This includes wireless server hosting Digital Enhanced Cordless Telephones

(DECTs), voice response units, voice messaging systems, and trading turret systems (used in stock market applications). More information regarding CAS+ can be obtained through Nortel Development Partner program.

Note: As the ELEI cards provide identical functionality to LEI cards, references to LEI cards in this chapter also apply to ELEI cards unless specified otherwise.

Install the NT5D33 version of the LEI/ELEI card in the NT8D37 IPE module.

Install the NT5D34 version of the LEI/ELEI card in:

• the NTAK11 Cabinet

• the NTAK12 Expansion Cabinet

• the NT1P70 Small Remote IPE Main Cabinet

• the NTAK12 Small Remote IPE Expansion Cabinet


The LEI mounts in two consecutive card slots in the IPE shelf. It uses 16 channels on the first slot and 14 channels on the second. The LEI includes a

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Page 251 of 906

motherboard (31.75 by 25.40 cm (12.5 by 10 in) and a daughterboard (5.08 by 15.24 cm (2 by 6 in).

Card connections

The LEI uses the NT8D81AA Tip and Ring cable to connect from the IPE backplane to the 25-pair Amphenol connector on the IPE Input/Output (I/O) panel. The I/O panel connector connects to a E1 line, external alarm and an

MMI terminal or modem, using the NT5D35 or NT5D36 lineside I/O cable available from Nortel.

Faceplate

The LEI faceplate is twice as wide as the other standard analog and digital

line cards. It occupies two card slots. The LE1 faceplate has four LEDs. See

Figure 40 on page 252

(IPE version), and Figure 41 on page 253 (Cabinet

system).


Page 252 of 906


Figure 40

NT5D33AB LEI card – faceplate

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 253 of 906

Figure 41

NT5D34AB LEI card – faceplate


Page 254 of 906


The LEDs give status indications on the operations as described in Table 92.

Table 92

LEI card LED operation

LED

Status

Red alarm

Yellow alarm

Maint

Operation

Line card

E1 near end

E1 far end

Maintenance

The STATUS LED indicates if the LEI has successfully passed its self test, and therefore, if it is functional. When the card is installed, this LED remains lit for two to five seconds as the self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in software, the LED goes out. If the LED continually flashes or remains weakly lit, replace the card.

The STATUS LED indicates the enabled/disabled status of both card slots of the LEI simultaneously. To properly enable the card, both the motherboard and the daughterboard slots must be enabled. The STATUS LED will turn off as soon as either one of the LEI slots have been enabled. No LED operation will be observed when the second card slot is enabled. To properly disable the card, both card slots must be disabled. The LED will not turn on until both card slots have been disabled.

The RED ALARM LED indicates if the LEI has detected an alarm condition from the E1 link. Alarm conditions can include such conditions as not receiving a signal, the signal has exceeded bit error thresholds or frame slip

thresholds. See “Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software” on page 284

for information on E1 link maintenance.

If one of these alarm conditions is detected, this LED will light. Yellow alarm indication is sent to the far end as long as the near end remains in a red alarm

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 255 of 906

condition. Depending on how the Man Machine Interface (MMI) is configured, this LED will remain lit until one the following actions occur:

• If the “Self-Clearing” function is enabled in the MMI, the LED will clear the alarm when the alarm condition is no longer detected. This is the factory default configuration.

• If the “Self-Clearing” function has not been enabled or it has been subsequently disabled in the MMI, the LED alarm indication will stay lit until the command “Clear Alarm” has been typed in the MMI, even though the carrier automatically returned to service when the alarm condition was no longer detected.

The YELLOW ALARM LED indicates that the LEI has detected a yellow alarm signal from the terminal equipment side of the E1 link. See

“Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software” on page 284 for

information on E1 link maintenance. If the terminal equipment detects a red alarm condition such as not receiving a signal, or the signal exceeds bit-error thresholds or frame-slip thresholds, a yellow alarm signal is sent to the LEI, if the terminal equipment supports this feature. If a yellow alarm signal is detected, this LED will light.

The MAINT LED indicates if LEI is fully operational because of certain

maintenance commands that are issued through the MMI. See “Man-Machine

E1 maintenance interface software” on page 284

for information on E1 link maintenance. If the card detects that tests are being run or that alarms have been disabled through the MMI, this LED will light and will remain lit until these conditions are no longer detected, then it turns off.


Figure 42 on page 256 shows a block diagram of the major functions

contained on the LEI card. Each of these functions is described on the following pages.


Page 256 of 906


Figure 42

LEI card – block diagram

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 257 of 906

Overview

The LEI card is an IPE line card that provides a cost-effective, all-digital connection between E1 compatible terminal equipment (such as voice mail systems, voice response units, trading turrets, etc.) and the system. In this application, the terminal equipment can be assured access to analog (500/

2500-type) telephone line functionality such as hook flash, SPRE codes and ringback tones. The LEI supports line supervision features such as loop and ground start protocols. It can also be used in an off-premise arrangement where analog (500/2500-type) telephones are extended over twisted-pair or coaxial E1 with the use of channel bank equipment.

The LEI offers significant improvement over the previous alternatives. For example, if a digital “trunk-side” connection were used, such as with the DTI/

PRI interface card, “lineside” functionality would not be supported.

Previously, the only way to achieve lineside functionality was to use analog ports and channel bank equipment. With the LEI, a direct connection is provided to the IPE. No channel bank equipment is required, resulting in a more robust and reliable connection.

When used for connecting to third-party applications equipment, the LEI offers a number of benefits. It is a more cost-effective alternative for connection because it eliminates the need for expensive channel bank equipment. The LEI card supports powerful E1 monitoring, and diagnostic capability. Overall costs for customer applications may also be reduced because the E1-compatible IPE is often more attractively priced than the analog-port alternatives.

The LEI is compatible with all IPE-based systems and with standard public or private CEPT-type carrier facilities. It supports CRC-4- or FAS only framing formats as well as AMI or HDB3 coding. Because it uses standard

PCM in standard E1 timeslots, existing E1 test equipment remains compatible for diagnostic and fault isolation purposes. A/B Bit signaling may be customized according to the user’s system, including the Australian P2 signaling scheme.

Card interfaces

The LEI passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops through the

DS-30X Interface circuits and maintenance data over the card LAN link.


Page 258 of 906


E1 interface circuit

The LEI contains one E1 line-interface circuit which provides 30 individually configurable voice interfaces to one E1 link in 30 different time slots. The circuit demultiplexes the 2.56 Mbps DS-30X transmit signaling bitstreams from the DS-30X network loop and converts it into 2.048 mHz E1 transmit signaling bitstreams onto the E1 link. It also does the opposite, receiving receive signaling bitstreams from the E1 link and transmitting receive signaling bitstreams onto the DS-30X network loop.

The E1 interface circuit provides the following:

• An industry standard CEPT (0 to 655 feet) interface

• DS-30X signaling protocol into FXO A- and B-channel-associated signaling protocol

• Switch-selectable transmission and reception of E1 signaling messages over an E1 link in either loop or ground start mode

• Switch-selectable call processing between the Australian P2, North

American Standard, or other user-configurable schemes


The LEI also contains signaling and control circuits that establish, supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work with the system controller to operate the E1 line interface circuit during calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the controller and return incoming call status information to the controller over the DS-30X network loop.


Control functions are provided by a microcontroller and a card LAN link on the LEI. A sanity timer is provided to automatically reset the card if the microcontroller stops functioning for any reason.

Microcontrollers

The LEI contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card. The microcontroller controls the following:

• reporting to the CE CP through the card LAN link

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 259 of 906

— card identification (card type, vintage, serial number)


— self-test results

— programmed unit parameter status

• receipt and implementation of card configuration

— control of the E1 line interface


— programming of loop interface control circuits for administration of channel operation


• interface with the line card circuit

— converts on/off-hook, and ringer control messages from the DS-30X loop into A/B bit manipulations for each time slot in the E1 data stream, using channel associated signaling.

• the front panel LED when the card is enabled or disabled by instructions from the NT8D01 controller card.


Maintenance data is exchanged with the Common Equipment CPU over a dedicated asynchronous serial network called the Card LAN link. The Card

LAN link is described in “Card LAN link” on page 36 .

Sanity Timer

The LEI also contains a sanity timer that resets the microcontroller in the event of a loss of program control. If the timer is not properly serviced by the microcontroller, it times out and causes the microcontroller to be hardware-reset. If the microcontroller loses control and fails to service the sanity timer at least once per second, the sanity timer will automatically reset the microcontroller, restoring program control.

Man-Machine Interface

The LEI provides an optional Man-Machine Interface (MMI) that is primarily used for E1 link performance monitoring and problem diagnosis. The MMI


Page 260 of 906

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards provides alarm notification, E1 link performance reporting, and fault isolation testing. The interface is accessed through connections from the I/O panel to a terminal or modem. Multiple cards (up to 64) can be served through one MMI terminal or modem by linking the LEIs through a daisy chain.

The MMI is an optional feature, since all E1 configuration settings are performed through dip switch settings or preconfigured factory default settings. Available MMI commands, and their functionality, are discussed

in-depth in “Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software” on page 284 .

ELEI additional functionality

As mentioned earlier, ELEI cards are enhanced to allow CAS+ compliance, as shown in Figure 43. This enhancement provides several additional benefits for systems with ELEI cards installed.

Note: MDECTS and ELEI (operating in enhanced mode) cannot be configured on the same system.

Figure 43

CAS+ compliance

TDM or IP public/private network

Nortel

Meridian 1 or CS 1000S

ELEI

CAS

CAS+ compliant system

Key Benefits of using CAS+ signaling (ELEI mode) over traditional A/B bit signaling (LEI mode) include:

1

Calling Line ID Presentation (CLIP)

When an incoming call over the TDM/IP network or a CS 1000 originated call is directed towards the CAS+ compliant system, Calling

Line ID can be provided over the CAS+ interface. This is assuming that the incoming call has the CLID without any presentation restrictions.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 261 of 906

2

Redirecting Line ID Presentation (RLIP)

When an incoming call over the TDM/IP network or a CS 1000 originated call which has undergone redirections is directed towards the

CAS+ compliant system, Redirecting Line ID can be provided over the

CAS+ interface. This is assuming that the incoming call has the

Redirecting Line ID without any presentation restrictions.

3

Message waiting indication (MWI)

Message waiting indication can be provided over the CAS+ interface.


Table 93 provides a technical summary of the E1 line interface. Table 94 on page 262

lists the maximum power consumed by the card.

E1 channel specifications

Table 93 provides specifications for the 30 E1 channels. Each characteristic

is set by a dip switch. See “Installation and Configuration” on page 263 . for

a discussion of the corresponding dip switch settings.

Table 93

LEI card — line interface unit electrical characteristics

Characteristics

Framing

Coding

Signaling

Distance to LTU

Description

CRC-4 or FAS, only

AMI or HDB3

Loop or ground start

A/B robbed-bit

0-199.6 meters (0-655 feet)


Page 262 of 906



Table 94 shows the voltage and maximum current that the LEI requires from

the backplane. One NT8D06 IPE Power Supply AC or NT6D40 IPE Supply

DC can supply power to a maximum of eight LEIs.

Table 94

LEI card – power required

Voltage

5.0 V dc

+15.0 V dc

-15.0 V dc

Max. Current

1.6 Amp

150 mA

150 mA


In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning strikes is not provided on the LEI. It does, however, have protection against accidental shorts to –52 V dc analog lines.

When the card is used to service off-premise terminal equipment through the public telephone network, install a Line Termination Unit (LTU) as part of the terminal equipment to provide external line protection.


Table 95 shows the environmental specifications of the LEI.

Table 95

LEI card – environmental specifications (Part 1 of 2)

Parameter

Operating temperature – normal

Operating temperature – short term

Operating humidity – normal

Operating humidity – short term

Specifications

15° to +30° C (+59° to 86° F), ambient

10° to +45° C (+50 to 113° F), ambient


20% to 80% RH (non condensing)

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 263 of 906

Table 95

LEI card – environmental specifications (Part 2 of 2)

Parameter

Storage temperature

Storage humidity

Specifications

–50° to + 70° C (–58° to 158° F), ambient


Installation and Configuration

Installation and configuration of the LEI consists of six basic steps:

1

Configure the dip switches on the LEI for the call environment.

2

Install the LEI into the selected card slots.

3

Cable from the I/O panel to the LTU, MMI terminal or modem

(optional), external alarm (optional), and other LEIs for daisy chaining use of MMI terminal (optional).

4

Configure the MMI terminal.

5

Configure the LEI through the CS 1000 Release 4.5 software and verify self-test results.

6

Verify initial E1 operation and configure MMI (optional).

Steps 1-5 are explained in this section. Step 6 is covered in “Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software” on page 284 .

Installation and configuration of the ELEI follows the same steps. If enhanced functionality is required, then one additional step is required:

7

The Meridian 1 line unit(s) associated with the lineside E1 must be programmed for wireless operation (set WTYP=DECT, and WRLS=Yes in LD 10) in non–concentrated mode. Refer to Software Input/Output:

Administration (553-3001-311) details on LD 10.

Dip switch settings

Begin the installation and configuration of the LEI by selecting the proper dip switch settings for the environment. The LEI contains two dip switches, each containing eight switch positions. They are located in the upper right corner


Page 264 of 906


of the motherboard circuit card as shown in Figure 44 on page 266 . The

settings for these switches are shown in Table 96 on page 267

through

Table 99 on page 270 .

When the LEI card is oriented as shown in Figure 44 on page 266 , the dip

switches are ON when they are up, and OFF when they are down. The dip switch settings configure the card for the following parameters:

MMI port speed selection

This dip switch setting selects the appropriate baud rate for the terminal or modem (if any) that is connected to the MMI.

Line Supervisory Signaling protocol

The LEI is capable of supporting loop start or ground start call processing modes. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on what type of line signaling the Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) supports.

Address of LEI to the MMI

The address of the LEI to the MMI is made up of two components:

• the address of the card within the shelf

• the address of the shelf in which the card resides

These two addresses are combined to create a unique address for the card. The

MMI reads the address of the card within the shelf from the card firmware; the address of the shelf must be set by this dip switch.

The shelf address dip switch can be from 0 to 15, 16 being the maximum number of lineside E1 IPE shelves (a maximum of 64 LEI cards) capable of daisy chaining to a single MMI terminal. For ease, it is recommended that this address be set the same as the address of the peripheral controller identifier in

LD 97 for type: XPE. However, this is not mandatory, and, since the dip switch is limited to 16, this will not always be possible.

E1 framing

The LEI is capable of interfacing with LTU equipment either in CRC-4 or

FAS only framing mode. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on what type of framing the LTU equipment supports.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 265 of 906

E1 Coding

The LEI is capable of interfacing with LTU equipment using either AMI or

HDB3 coding. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on the type of coding the LTU equipment supports.


Page 266 of 906


Figure 44

LEI card – E1 protocol dip switch locations

C31

C57

C61

U87

U92

U90

U85

U84

C64

C63

C62

Y2

U76

U59

C73

U58

U 56

C33

U45

C32

RP15

U91

C60

C59

U75

U 57

R P17

U89

U88

U86

C56

U 73

C54

U 72

U74

C58

C72

U44

U43

U55

U54

C74

C29

U41

C28

U 39

RP13

U38

C53

U 71

U83

U82

C51

C49

U70

U69

U53

U36

U52

C40

U35

U 81

RP12

R P11

R P10

U80

U68

C47

U67

U51

U50

C39

C38

C26

U32

U46

C30

U 42

U40

RP14

U37

C27

U34

U33

C46

U79

U78

C45

U77

C68

U31

U65

U49

U66

C44

U64

C43

C42

C41

C37

U 63 U62 RP16

U 48 U47

U61

R20

C34

C36

C35

U60

R19

C25

R26

R25

RP8

C71

U29

RP7

U 26

U 25

C67

U30

RP9

C69

U24

U28

U27

C75

U 12

O N

OFF

1

S1

8 1

U11

S2

8

C21

U23

C20

C 19 C22

U9

U10

R14

T3

D6D7

R13

D4D5

R 12

C18

Y1

U 22

C17

C16

U21

RP6

U 20

U19

U18

U17

C15

U 16

U15

C3

U2

R27

C77

R4

R3

U 1

C1

C2

C76

RP 5 U 14

C 14

C13

U13

C70

T2

T1

R2 R1 K3

D3

K2

D2

X1

K1

D1

dip switches

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 267 of 906

Line supervision on E1 failure

This setting determines in what state all 30 LEI ports will appear to the

CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 in case of E1 failure. Ports can appear as either in the “on-hook” or “off-hook” states on E1 failure.

Note: All idle LEI lines will go off-hook and seize a Digitone Receiver when the off-hook line processing is invoked on E1 failure. This may prevent DID trunks from receiving incoming calls until the LEI lines time-out and release the DTRs.

Daisy-Chaining to MMI

If two or more LEIs will be installed and the MMI used, daisy-chain the cards together to use one MMI terminal or modem. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on how many LEIs are being installed.

MMI Master or Slave

This setting is used only if daisy-chaining the cards to the MMI terminal or modem. It determines whether this card is a master or a slave in the daisy chain. Select the master setting if there are no LEIs between this card and the

MMI terminal or modem. Select the slave setting if there are other cards in the daisy chain between this card and the MMI.

Tables 96 through 98 show the dip switch settings for Switch #1. Table 99 on page 270

shows the dip switch settings for Switch #2.

Table 96

LEI card – Switch #1 dip switch settings (Part 1 of 2)

Characteristic

MMI port speed selection

E1 signaling

Selection

1200 baud

2400 baud

Ground start

Loop start

Switch

Position

2

2

1

1

Switch

Setting

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Factory

Default

OFF

OFF


Page 268 of 906


Table 96

LEI card – Switch #1 dip switch settings (Part 2 of 2)

Characteristic

IPE Shelf address for LEI

Card type for ringer allocation

E1 signaling

Selection

See Table 98

XTI = 19

XMLC = 18

See Table 97

Switch

Position

5

6

3

4

7

7

8

Switch

Setting

See Table 98

ON

OFF

OFF

Factory

Default

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

When dip switch #1, positions 2 and 8 are set to “Table,” AB Bits are

configured by the user through the Set Mode MMI command (see “Set Mode” on page 295 ). Otherwise, the signaling scheme selected by dip switch 1,

positions 2 and 8 will be used.

Table 97

LEI card – signaling-type dip switch settings

Switch #1

Characteristic

Signaling Type

Selection

Loop start

Ground start

Australian P2

Table

Position 2

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Position 8

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 269 of 906

Table 98

LEI card – XPEC address dip switch settings (Switch S1, positions 3-6)

XPEC

Address

12

13

14

15

08

09

10

11

04

05

06

07

00

01

02

03

S1 Switch

Position 3

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

S1 Switch

Position 4

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

S1 Switch

Position 5

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

S1 Switch

Position 6

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF


Page 270 of 906


When setting E1 Switch 2 dip switch settings, there are differences between

vintages. For NT5D33AB or NT5D34AB cards, use Table 99. For

NT5D33AC or NT5D34AC cards, use Table 99 on page 270 .

Table 99

LEI card – E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings

Characteristic

E1 framing

E1 coding

NOT USED

NOT USED

Selection

CRC-4 Disabled

CRC-4 Enabled

AMI

HDB3 leave ON leave ON

Switch

Position

1

2

3

4

Switch

Setting

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Factory

Default

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

NOT USED

Line processing on E1 link failure


MMI master or slave leave ON

On-hook

Off-hook

YES

NO

Master

Slave

5

6

7

8

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 271 of 906

Table 100

ELEI card – E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings

Characteristic

E1 framing

E1 coding

NOT USED

NOT USED

Selection

CRC-4 Disabled

CRC-4 Enabled

AMI

HDB3 leave ON leave ON

Switch

Position

1

2

3

4

Switch

Setting

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Factory

Default

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Mode

Line processing on E1 link failure


MMI master or slave

LEI Mode

ELEI Mode

On-hook

Off-hook

YES

NO

Master

Slave

5

6

7

8

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

After the card has been installed, display the dip switch settings using the

MMI command Display Configuration (D C). See “Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software” on page 284 for details on this and the rest

of the available MMI commands.

Installation

Because of the wiring in some of the system modules and cabinets, the LEI will only work in certain card slot pairs. These restrictions depend on the type


Page 272 of 906

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards of module or cabinet. In all other modules or cabinets where the conditions listed below do not exist, the LEI will work in any two adjacent card slots:

• In the NTAK12 Small Remote IPE Expansion Cabinet only card slots

10-15 are available.

• In the NT8D37 IPE module, if the 25-pair I/O connectors are partially split between adjacent IPE card slots, the LEI works only in card slots where Unit 0 of the motherboard card slot appear on the first pair of the

25-pair I/O connector.

If installing the LEI into the NT8D37 IPE module, determine the vintage level model. Certain vintage levels have dedicated 25-pair I/O connectors only for card slots 0, 4, 8, and 12. These vintage levels are cabled with only 16 pairs of wires from each card slot to the I/O panel. Some of the 25-pair I/O connectors are split between adjacent card slots.

Other vintage levels cable each card slot to the I/O panel using a unique,

24-pair connector on the I/O panel. In these vintage levels, the LEI can be installed in any available pair of card slots. However, because of the lower number of wire pairs cabled to the I/O panel in the lower vintage level, only certain card slots are available to the LEI.

See Table 101 for the vintage level information for the NT8D37 IPE

modules.

Table 101

LEI card – NT8D37 IPE module vintage level port cabling

Vintage Level

NT8D37BA

NT8D37DE

Number of ports cabled to I/O panel

30 ports

16 ports

NT8D37EC 30 ports

Available and restricted card slots in the NT8D37 IPE module

If installing the LEI into an NT8D37 IPE module, the card slots available depend on the vintage level module.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 273 of 906

Vintage levels cabling 30 ports:

For modules with vintage levels that cabled 30 ports to the I/O panel, the LEI can be installed in any pair of card slots 0-15.

Vintage levels cabling 16 ports:

For modules with vintage levels that cable 16 ports to the I/O panel, the LEI can be installed into the card slot pairs shown in the following card slots:

Available: Motherboard/Daughterboard

0 and 1

1 and 2

4 and 5

5 and 6

8 and 9

9 and 10

12 and 13

13 and 14

LEIs must not be installed into the following card slot pairs:

Restricted: Motherboard/Daughterboard

2 and 3

3 and 4

6 and 7

10 and 11

11 and 12

14 and 15

If the LEI must be installed into one of the restricted card slot pairs, rewire the IPE module card slot to the I/O panel by installing an additional NT8D81 cable from the LEI motherboard slot to the I/O panel, and re-arranging the three backplane connectors for the affected card slots. This will permit the connection of the NT5D35AA or NT5D36AA LEI card carrier and maintenance external I/O cable at the IPE and CE module I/O panel connector for card slots that are otherwise restricted.


Page 274 of 906


Alternatively, all LEI connections can be made at the main distribution frame instead of connecting the NT5D35AA or NT5D36AA LEI card external I/O cable at the I/O panel. This eliminates these card slot restrictions.

Cabling the LEI card

After the dip switches are configured and the LEI installed into the selected card slots, the LEI can be cabled to the LTU equipment, the MMI terminal or modem (optional), an external alarm (optional), and other LEIs for daisy chaining use of the MMI terminal (optional).

The LEI is cabled from its backplane connector through connections from the motherboard circuit card only to the I/O panel on the rear of the IPE module.

No cable connections are made from the daughterboard circuit card. The connections from the LEI to the I/O panel are made with the NT8D81AA Tip and Ring cables provided with the IPE module.

Cabling from the I/O panel with the NT5D35AA or NT5D36AA lineside E1 I/O cable

In a twisted-pair E1 installation, make the connection from the I/O panel to the E1 link and other external devices with the NT5D35AA lineside E1 I/O cable.

This cable consists of a 25-pair amphenol connector (P1) on one end which plugs into the I/O panel. The other end has four connectors:

1

a DB15 male connector (P2), which plugs into the E1 line

2

a DB9 male connector (P3), which plugs into an external alarm system

3

a second DB9 male connector (P5), which connects to an MMI terminal or modem

4

a DB9 female connector (P4), which connects to the next LEI’s P4 connector for MMI daisy chaining

In a coaxial E1 installation, make the connection from the I/O panel to the E1 link and other external devices through the NT5D36AA lineside E1 I/O cable.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 275 of 906

This cable consists of a 25-pair amphenol connector (P1) on one end which plugs into the I/O panel. The other end has 4 connectors:

1

a DB15 female connector (P2) with an adapter that breaks out Tx

(transmit) and Rx (receive) connectors, which that plug into the E1 line

2

a DB9 male connector (P3), which plugs into an external alarm system

3

a second DB9 male connector (P5), which connects to an MMI terminal or modem

4

a DB9 female connector (P4), which connects to the next LEI’s P4 connector for MMI daisy chaining. The Tx marking on the adapter at P2 is the LEI output. The E1 data stream coming from the network into the

LEI connects at the Rx coaxial connector

Table 102 shows the pin assignments of the LEI backplane and I/O Panel.

Table 102

LEI card – LEI backplane and I/O panel pinouts (Part 1 of 2)

Backplane connector pin

14A

14B

15A

15B

12A

12B

13A

13B

16A

16B

I/O Panel connector pin

3

28

4

29

1

26

2

27

5

30

Signal

E1 Tip, Receive data

E1 Ring, Receive data

E1 Tip, Transmit data

E1 Ring, Transmit data

Alarm out, normally open

Alarm out, common

Alarm out, normally closed

No connection

No connection

Away from MMI terminal, receive data


Page 276 of 906


Table 102

LEI card – LEI backplane and I/O panel pinouts (Part 2 of 2)

Backplane connector pin

17A

17B

18A

18B

19A

19B

I/O Panel connector pin

6

31

7

32

8

33

Signal

Away from MMI terminal, transmit data

Toward MMI terminal, transmit data

Toward MMI terminal, receive data

Daisy chain control 2

Daisy chain control 1

Ground

Table 103 shows the pin assignments from the I/O panel relating to the pin

assignments of the lineside E1 I/O cable.

Table 103

LEI card – lineside E1 I/O cable pinouts (Part 1 of 2)

I/O Panel

Connector

Pin Lead Designations

1 E1 Tip Receive data

26

2

27

3

28

E1 Ring Receive data

E1 Tip Transmit data

E1 Ring Transmit data

Alarm out, common

Alarm out (normally open)

9

1

3

1

2

LEI

Connect or Pin

11

LEI Cable Connector to External

Equipment

DB15 male to E1 (P2). LEI is CPE transmit and receive to network

DB9 male to external alarm (P3)

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 277 of 906

Table 103

LEI card – lineside E1 I/O cable pinouts (Part 2 of 2)

33

8

32

30

33

8

32

I/O Panel

Connector

Pin Lead Designations

4

7

31

6

Alarm out (normally closed)

Toward MMI terminal, receive data

Toward MMI terminal, transmit data

Ground

Control 1

Control 2

Ground

Control 1

Control 2

Away from MMI terminal, transmit data

Away from MMI terminal, receive data

LEI

Connect or Pin

3

2

3

9

3

5

7

5

7

9

2

LEI Cable Connector to External

Equipment

DB9 male toward MMI (P5).

Wired as DCE.

Data is transmitted on pin 2 (RXD) and received on pin 3 (TXD)

DB9 female away from MMI terminal

(P4)

E1 Connections

For twisted-pair installations, E1 signaling for all 30 channels is transmitted

over P2 connector pins 1, 3, 9, and 11, as shown in Table 103 on page 276 .

Plug the DB 15 male connector labeled “P2” into the E1 link. E1 transmit and receive pairs must be turned over between the LEI and the CPE that is hardwired without carrier facilities. If the LEI is connected through E1 carrier facilities, the transmit and receive pairs must be wired straight through to the

RJ48 at the Telco demarc, the LTU, or other E1 carrier equipment. The E1


Page 278 of 906


CPE at the far-end will likewise have transmit and receive wired straight from the RJ48 demarc at the far-end of the carrier facility.

For 75 ohm coaxial installations, E1 signaling for all 30 channels is transmitted over P2 connector pins 1, 3, 9, and 11 though an adapter and out two coaxial connectors Tx (transmit) and Rx (receive). Tx is the LEI output, and Rx is the LEI input from the E1 stream. E1 transmit and receive pairs must be turned over between the LEI and the CPE that is hardwired without carrier facilities. If the LEI is connected through E1 carrier facilities, the transmit and receive pairs must be wired straight through to the RJ48 at the

Telco demarc, the LTU, or other E1 carrier equipment. The E1 CPE at the far end will likewise have Tx and Rx wired straight from the RJ48 demarc at the far end of the carrier facility.

External Alarm Connections

P3 connector pins 1, 2 and 3 can be plugged into any external alarm-sensing hardware. Plug the DB9 male connector labeled “P3” into an external alarm.

These connections are optional, and the LEI functionality is not affected if they are not made.

The MMI monitors the E1 link for specified performance criteria and reports on problems detected. One of the ways it can report information is through this external alarm connection. If connected, the LEI’s microprocessor will activate the external alarm hardware if it detects certain E1 link problems it

has classified as alarm levels 1 or 2. See “Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software” on page 284

for a detailed description of alarm levels and configuration. If an alarm level 1 or 2 is detected by the MMI, the LEI will close the contact that is normally open, and will open the contact that is normally closed. The MMI command “Clear Alarm” will return the alarm contacts to their normal state.

MMI Connections

P5 connector pins 2, 3, 5, 7 and 9 are used to connect the LEI to the MMI terminal, connecting LEIs in a daisy chain for access to a shared MMI terminal. When logging into a LEI, “control 2” is asserted by that card, which informs all of the other cards not to talk on the bus, but rather to pass the data straight through. The pins labeled “control 1” are reserved for future use. As with the external alarm connections, MMI connections are optional. Up to

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 279 of 906

128 LEIs can be linked, located in up to 16 separate IPE shelves, to one MMI terminal using the daisy chain approach.

If only one LEI is will be installed, cable from the DB9 male connector labeled “P5” (toward MMI terminal) to one of the COM ports on the back of any TTY, a PC running a terminal emulation program, or a modem. For installations of only one card, no connection is made to the DB9 female connector labeled “P4” (away from MMI terminal).

If two or more LEIs are being installed into the system, the MMI port connections can be daisy-chained together so that only one MMI terminal is

required for up to 128 LEIs. See Figure 45 on page 280 . Cards can be located

in up to 15 separate IPE shelves. Start with any card slot in the IPE shelf and connect to any other card slot. Connected card slots do not need to be consecutive.

Procedure 13

Connecting two or more LEIs to the MMI terminal

Follow this procedure for connecting two or more LEIs to the MMI terminal:

1

Cable the DB9 male connector labeled “P5” (toward MMI terminal) to one of the COM ports on the back of any TTY, a PC running a terminal emulation program, or a modem.

2

Make the connection from the first card to the second card by plugging the

DB9 female connector labeled “P4” (away from MMI terminal) from the

first card into the DB9 male connector of the second card labeled “P5”

(toward MMI terminal).

3

Repeat step 2 for the remaining cards.

4

At the last card of the daisy chain, make no connection from the DB9 female connector labeled “P4” (away from MMI terminal).

5

If two LEIs are too far apart to connect the “P4” and “P5” connectors connect them with an off-the-shelf DB9 female to DB9 male straight-through extension cable, available at any PC supply store.



Page 280 of 906


Figure 45

LEI card – connecting two or more cards to the MMI

Terminal configuration

For the MMI terminal to be able to communicate to the LEI, the interface characteristics must be set to:

• speed – 1200 or 2400 bps

• character width – 7 bits

• parity bit – mark

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 281 of 906

• stop bits – one

• software handshake (XON/XOFF) – off

Software Configuration

Although much of the architecture and many features of the LEI card are different from the analog line card, the LEI has been designed to emulate an analog line card to the CS 1000 Release 4.5 software. Because of this, the LEI software configuration is the same as for two adjacent analog line cards.

All 30 E1 channels carried by the LEI are individually configured using the analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program LD 10. Use

Table 104 to determine the correct unit number and Software Input/Output:

Administration (553-3001-311) for LD 10 service-change instructions.

LEI circuitry routes 16 units (0 – 15) on the motherboard and 14 (0 – 13) units on the daughterboard to 30 E1 channels. The motherboard circuit card is located in the left card slot, and the daughterboard circuit card is located in right card slot. For example, if installing the LEI into card slots 0 and 1, the motherboard would reside in card slot 0 and the daughterboard would reside in card slot 1. In order to configure the terminal equipment through the switch software, the E1 channel number will need to be cross-referenced to the

corresponding card unit number. This mapping is shown in Table 104.

Table 104

Card unit number to E1 channel mapping (Part 1 of 3)

Item

Motherboard

Motherboard

Motherboard

Motherboard

Motherboard

Motherboard

Motherboard

TN

4

5

6

2

3

0

1

E1 Channel Number

5

6

7

3

4

1

2


Page 282 of 906


Table 104


Item TN

Motherboard

Motherboard

Motherboard 9

Motherboard 10

7

8

Motherboard

Motherboard

Motherboard

Motherboard

11

12

13

14

Motherboard

Daughterboard

Daughterboard

Daughterboard

Daughterboard

Daughterboard

Daughterboard

Daughterboard

Daughterboard

Daughterboard

Daughterboard

Daughterboard

Daughterboard

7

8

9

10

11

5

6

3

4

1

2

15

0


21

22

23

24

17

18

19

20

25

26

27

28

29

12

13

14

15

10

11

8

9

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 283 of 906

Table 104


Item

Daughterboard

Daughterboard

TN

12

13


30

31

Disconnect supervision

The LEI supports far-end disconnect supervision by opening the tip side toward the terminal equipment upon the system’s detecting a disconnect signal from the far-end on an established call. The Supervised Analog Line feature (SAL) must be configured in LD 10 for each LEI port. At the prompt

FTR respond:

OSP <CR>

Against FTR respond:

ISP <CR>

The LEI treats OSP and ISP for both originating and terminating calls as hook flash disconnect supervision, also known as cut-off disconnect. Originating calls are outgoing from the terminal equipment. Terminating calls are incoming to the terminal equipment. The LEI does not support battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision on originating calls.

After the software is configured, power-up the card and verify the self-test results. The STATUS LED on the faceplate indicates whether or not the LEI has successfully passed its self test, and is, therefore, functional. When the card is installed, this LED remains lit for two to five seconds as the self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in software, the LED goes out. The LED will go out if either the motherboard or daughterboard is enabled by the software. If the LED continually flashes or remains weakly lit, replace the card.


Page 284 of 906


Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software

Description

The Man-Machine Interface (MMI) provides E1-link diagnostics and

historical information for the LEI system. See “Installation and

Configuration” on page 263 for instructions on how to install the cabling and

configure the terminal for the MMI. The following sections will describe the options available through the LEI’s MMI terminal and will explain how to set-up, configure, and use the MMI.

The MMI provides the following maintenance features:

• configurable alarm parameters

• E1-link problem indicator

• current and historical E1-link performance reports

• E1 verification and fault isolation testing

• configuration of A\B bits (North American Standard, Australian P2, or customized settings are available)

Alarms

The MMI may be used to activate alarms for the following E1-link conditions:

• excessive bit-error rate,

• frame-slip errors,

• out-of-frame,

• loss-of-signal, and

• blue alarm.

Pre-set thresholds and error durations trip LEI alarm notifications. For

descriptions of each of these E1-link alarm conditions, see “Performance counters and reporting” on page 304 . For instructions on how to set alarm

parameters, see “Set Alarm” on page 290 . For information on accessing

alarm reporting, see “Display Alarms” on page 302

, “Display Status” on page 303

and “Display Performance” on page 305 .

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 285 of 906

Two levels of alarm severity exist for bit errors. Different threshold and duration settings must be established for each level.

When the first level of severity is reached (alarm level 1), the MMI causes the following:

• the external alarm hardware activates

• he RED ALARM LED on the faceplate will be lit

• an alarm message will be displayed on the MMI terminal

• an entry will be created in the alarm log and printed to the MMI port

When the second level of severity is reached (alarm level 2), the MMI will perform all functions at alarm level 1. In addition, the LEI enters line-conditioning mode. In this mode, the LEI sends either “on-hook” or

“off-hook” signals for all 30 ports to the CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and

Meridian 1, depending on how the dip switch for line processing is set (dip

switch 2, position 6). See Table 99 on page 270

.

If the MMI detects E1-link failures for any of the other conditions monitored

(out-of-frame, excess frame slips, loss-of-signal, and blue alarm condition), the LEI automatically performs all alarm level 2 functions. The MMI also sends a yellow alarm to the far-end LTU. Alarms may be configured to

self-clear when the alarm condition is no longer detected. See “Set Clearing” on page 294 .

All alarms activated produce a record in the alarm log. The alarm log maintains records for the most recent 100 alarms, and can be displayed, printed, and cleared. The alarm log displays or prints the alarms in descending chronological order, beginning with the most recent alarm. Notifications in the alarm log include the date and time of the alarm’s occurrence.

E1 Performance Counters and Reports

The MMI maintains performance error counters for the following E1 conditions:

• errored seconds

• bursty seconds

• unavailable seconds


Page 286 of 906


• framer-slip seconds

• loss-of-frame seconds

The MMI retains E1 performance statistics for the current hour, and for each hour for the previous 24. For descriptions of these performance error counters and instructions on how to create a report on them and clear them, see

“Performance counters and reporting” on page 304 .

E1 Verification and Fault Isolation Testing

The MMI enables various tests to be performed that either verify that the E1 is working adequately, or help to isolate a problem to the LEI, the E1 link, or the CPE. For descriptions of all of these tests and instructions on how to run

them, see “Testing” on page 307.

Login and Password

The MMI can be accessed through any TTY, PC running a terminal emulation program, or modem. After installing the MMI terminal and card cables, the

MMI can be configured.

For single-card installations, it is accessed by entering L<CR> to login.

For multiple-card installations connected in a daisy chain, it is accessed by entering L <address>, where the four-digit address is a combination of the two-digit address of the IPE shelf as set by dip switch positions on the card

Switch 1, positions 3-6, plus the address of the card slot the motherboard

occupies. See Table 101 on page 272 .

For example, to login to a card located in shelf 13, card slot 4, type:

L 13 4 <CR>

Spaces are inserted between the login command (L), the shelf address, and the card slot address.

The MMI prompts for a password. The password is “LEILINK,” and it must be typed in all capital letters.

After logging in, the prompt looks like this:

LEI::> (for single-card installations)

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 287 of 906

LEI::ss cc> (for multi-card installations, where ss represents the shelf

address and cc represents the card slot address.)

Basic commands

MMI commands can now be executed. The seven basic commands are:

• Help

• Alarm

• Clear

• Display

• Set

• Test

• Quit

Type ? <CR> to list these commands, along with an explanation of their

usage. A screen similar to Figure 46 will appear. The help screen will also

appear by typing H<CR>, or HELP<CR>.

Figure 46

HELP (H, ?) screen

ALARM USAGE: Alarm [Enable | Disable]

CLEAR USAGE: Clear [Alarm] | [Error counter] [Log]

DISPLAY USAGE: Display [Alarm | Status | Perform | History] [Pause]

HELP USAGE: Help | ?

SET USAGE: Set[Time | Date | Alarm | Clearing | Name Memory | Mode | Simple

TEST USAGE: Test [Carrier All]

QUIT USAGE: Quit

Notation Used:

CAPS - Required Letters [ ] - Optional | - Either/Or


Page 288 of 906


Each of these commands can be executed by entering the first letter of the command or by entering the entire command. Commands with more than one word are entered by entering the first letter of the first word, a space, and the

first letter of the second word or by entering the entire command. Table 105

shows all possible MMI commands in alphabetical order. These commands are also described later in this section.

Table 105


Command

A D

A E

C A

C A L

C E

D A(P)

D C(P)

D H(P)

D P

Description

Alarm Disable. Disables all alarms.

Alarm Enable. Enables all alarms.

Clear Alarm. Clears all alarms, terminates time processing, and resets the E1 bit error rate and frame slip counters.

Clear Alarm Log. Clears alarm log.

Clear Error. Clears the E1 error counter.

Display Alarms. Displays the alarm log, which is a list of the 100 most recent alarms with time and date stamps. (Momentarily stop the scrolling display by typing P. Continue scrolling by typing any other key.)

Display Configuration. Displays the configuration settings for the

LEI(s), single- or multiple-card system. Display includes each card’s serial number, MMI firmware version, date and time, alarm disable/enable setting, self-clearing disable/enable setting, values entered through the Set Configuration command, and dip switch settings.(Momentarily stop the scrolling display by typing P. Continue scrolling by typing any other key.)

Display History. Displays performance counters for the past 24 hours.

(Momentarily stop the scrolling display by typing P. Continue scrolling by typing any other key.)

Display Performance. Displays performance counters for the current hour.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 289 of 906

Table 105


Command

D S(P)

H or ?

L

Lxx

Q

S A

S C

S D

S M

S S

S T

T

Description

Display Status. Displays carrier status, including alarm state and, if active, alarm level. (Momentarily stop the scrolling display by typing P.

Continue scrolling by typing any other key.)

Help. Displays the Help screen.

Login. Logs into the MMI terminal in a single-LEI system.

Login. Logs into the MMI terminal in a daisy-chained system, where xx represents the address of the card to be configured.

Quit. Logs out of the MMI terminal.

Note: If it is a daisy-chained system, be certain to log out when finished with configuration. In a daisy-chained system, only one card may occupy the bus at a given time and all other LEIs will be unable to notify the MMI of alarms unless logged-out of configuration mode.

Set Alarm. Sets alarm parameters, such as the allowable bit-errors per second, threshold, and alarm duration.

Set Clearing. Sets the alarm self-clearing function, ”enable” or

”disable.”

Set Date. Sets the date or verifies the current date.

Set Mode. Sets the A/B Bits mode.

Set Simple. Sets whether or not the LEI waits for the terminal equipment to return an idle-state message before returning the channel to idle at call disconnect from the far-end.

Set Time. Sets the time or verifies current time.

Test. Initiates the E1 carrier test function. To terminate a test in-process, enter the STOP TEST command at any time.


Page 290 of 906


Configuring parameters

The MMI has been designed with default settings so that no configuration is necessary. However, it can be configured based on the call environment.

Set Time

Before beginning to configure the MMI, login to the system and verify the current time. Do this by entering the Set Time (S T) command. The

MMI displays the time it has registered. Enter a new time or hit Enter to leave it unchanged. The time is entered in the “hh:mm:ss,” the 24-hour, or military, format.

Set Date

Verify the current date. Do this by entering the Set Date (S D) command. The MMI then displays the date it has registered. Enter a new date or hit Enter to leave it unchanged. The date is entered in the “mm/dd/yy” format.

Set Alarm

The Set Alarm (S A) command sets the parameters by which an alarm is activated and the duration of the alarm after it is activated. There are three alarm levels as described below:

•

Alarm Level 0 (AL0) consists of activity with an error threshold below

the AL1 setting, which is a satisfactory condition and no alarm is activated.

•

Alarm Level 1 (AL1) consists of activity with an error threshold above

the AL1 setting, but below the AL2 setting that is deemed to be of minor importance. In this situation, the external alarm hardware is activated by closing the normally open contact, the RED ALARM LED on the faceplate lights, and an alarm message is created in the alarm log and the

MMI terminal.

•

Alarm Level 2 (AL2) consists of activity with an error threshold above

the AL2 setting which is deemed to be of major importance. In this situation, the following happens:

— the external alarm hardware is activated by closing the normally open contact

— the RED ALARM LED on the faceplate lights

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 291 of 906

— an alarm message is created in the alarm log and the MMI terminal

— the LEI card enters line-conditioning mode

— a yellow alarm message is sent to the CPE/LTU

Line processing sends the CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 either all

“on-hook” or all “off-hook” signals, depending on the dip switch setting of

the card. See Table 99 on page 270 .

When the Set Alarm command is selected, the prompt appears for setting the threshold level and duration for alarm levels 1 and 2.

The E1 link processes at a rate of approximately 2.0 mb/s. The threshold value indicates the ratio of the total number of bits that must be detected as being in error per second before the LEI activates an alarm. It can be set between 3 and 9 and can be different for each alarm level. Any other value entered will cause the MMI to display a “Parameter Invalid” message. The digit entered as the threshold value is a number representing a

negative power of 10 as shown in Table 106.

Note: The error-rate threshold for a level 2 alarm must be greater (a smaller power of 10) than for a level 1 alarm. Remember that the numbers being represented are negative numbers. Since 3 represents –3, and 4 represents –4, 4 represents a smaller number than 3 does.

Table 106

E1 bit error rate threshold settings (Part 1 of 2)


10

-3

10

-4

10

-5

10

-6

10

-7


2,000/ second

200/second

20/second

2.0/second

2.0/10 seconds

Allowable Duration

Periods

1-21 seconds

1-218 seconds

1-2148 seconds

1-3600 seconds

10-3600 seconds


Page 292 of 906


Table 106

E1 bit error rate threshold settings (Part 2 of 2)


10

-8

10

-9


2.0/100 seconds

2.0/1000 seconds

Allowable Duration

Periods

100-3600 seconds

1000-3600 seconds

The duration value is set in seconds and can be set from 1 to 3,600 seconds (1 hour). This duration value indicates how long the alarm condition must last before an alarm will be declared. Low bit-error rates (10

7

through 10

9

) are restricted to longer durations since it takes more than one second to detect an alarm condition above10

6

. Higher bit-error rates are restricted to shorter durations because the MMI error counter fills at 65,000 errors.

The alarm indications (LEDs and external alarm contacts) will clear automatically after the specified period, or duration, has expired if the Set

Clearing (S C) “Enable Self Clearing” option has been set. Otherwise, the

alarm will continue until the command Clear Alarm (C A) has been entered.

When an alarm is cleared, all activity caused by the alarm indications is cleared:

• the external alarm hardware is deactivated (the contact normally open will be reopened)

• the LED goes out

• an entry is made in the alarm log of the date and time the alarm was cleared

• carrier-fail line supervision ceases (for alarm level 2 only)

If self-clearing alarm indications have been disabled, carrier-fail line supervision terminates when the alarm condition has ceased, but the external alarm contact and faceplate LED remain active until the alarm is cleared.

A heavy bit-error rate can cause 200 bit errors to occur much more quickly than100 seconds. This causes the alarm to be declared sooner.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 293 of 906

An alarm condition is not automatically cleared until the system no longer detects the respective bit error threshold during the corresponding duration period.

For example, if AL1 threshold of 6 (representing 10-6) is specified, and a duration period of 100 seconds is specified, an alarm is activated if more than

200 bit errors occur in any 100 second period. As soon as the alarm is activated, the bit counter is reset to 0. If the next 100 seconds pass, and less than 200 bit errors are detected, then the alarm clears after the alarm’s duration period. However, if more than 200 bit errors are detected in the next

100 seconds, the alarm condition continues for the designated time period.

The alarm finally clears when the alarm condition is no longer detected for the designated period, either by self-clearing (if this function is enabled), or when the Clear Alarm (C A) command is entered.

In addition to bit errors, the Set Alarm function sets parameters for detecting frame-slip errors by establishing a threshold necessary to activate an alarm. If the threshold value is exceeded, a level 2 alarm is activated. The frame slip threshold can be specified from 1 to 255 frame slips per time period. The duration time period can be specified from 1 to 24 hours.

When entering the Set Alarm (S A) command, the MMI scrolls through the previously described series of alarm options. These options are displayed along with their current value, at which point a new value can be entered or

enter <CR> to retain the current value. Table 107 outlines the options

available in the Set Alarm (S A) function.

Table 107


(Part 1 of 2)

Option

AL1 Threshold

AL1 Duration

Description

Sets the allowable bit errors per second before alarm level 1 is activated. Factory default is 6.



Page 294 of 906


Table 107


(Part 2 of 2)

Option

AL2 Threshold

AL2 Duration

Frame Slip

Threshold

Frame Slip Duration

Description

Sets the allowable bit errors per second (from 3 to

9) before alarm level 2 is activated. Factory default is 10

-5

.


Sets the allowable frame slips per time period

(from 1 to 255) before alarm level 2 is activated.

Factory default is 5.

Sets the duration in hours (from 1 to 24) that the frame slips are counted. After this time period, the counter is reset to 0. Factory default is 2 hours.

Note: If the duration period set is too long, the LEI card is slow to return to service automatically even when the carrier is no longer experiencing errors. The CLEAR ALARM (C A) command has to be entered manually to restore service promptly. To avoid this, an alarm’s duration period is normally set to 10 seconds.

Set Clearing

The SET CLEARING (S C) command allows self-clearing of alarms by responding to the question: Enable Self Clearing? (YES or NO). If YES is chosen (the factory default setting), the system automatically clears (resets) alarms after the alarm condition is no longer detected. Choosing the NO option causes the system to continue the alarm condition until the Clear

Alarm (C A) command is entered. Line processing and yellow alarm

indication to the CPE terminates as soon as the alarm condition clears, even if self-clearing is disabled.

Set Simple

The SET SIMPLE command controls call tear-down signaling when the far-end disconnects from a call.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 295 of 906

When the far-end terminates a call, Release 1 of LEI’s AB vintage sends a disconnect message to the terminal equipment and waits for the terminal equipment to go idle before going idle itself. A NO response to the S S command configures Release 2 (and later) boards to operate in this way. See

Figure 47.

Release 2 of AB vintage LEIs gives the administrator the option of using the signaling described above, or configuring the LEI to take its channel idle immediately after sending the call-disconnect message. A YES response to the S S command, the default configuration for Release 2 (and later) boards,

configures the LEI to operate in this way. See Figure 48.

Figure 47

Set Simple (S S) no screen

LEI::>S S

Enable Simplified Call Tear Down? (YES or NO)N

Simplified Call Tear Down Disabled.

LEI::>

Figure 48

Set Simple (S S) yes screen

LEI::>S S

Enable Simplified Call Tear Down? (YES or NO)Y

Simplified Call Tear Down Enabled.

LEI::>

Set Mode

At the SET MODE (S M) command, the MMI prompts the user with the current signaling mode, either Default (Australian P2) or Table (of bit values.) Entering a <CR> accepts the current value, or the user can type in 1

to revert to the Default, or 2 to edit the table entries. See Figure 49 on page 296

. If the user selects default, then the A/B Bit values is reset to the

Default values.

Responding to the MMI’s Set Mode prompt with “1” also results in the line,

“Signaling Bits set to Default,” as in Figure 49.


Page 296 of 906


Figure 49

Set Mode (S M): <CR> screen

LEI:>S M

Hit <CR> to accept current value or type in a new one.

Current Mode : 1 New Mode :

Signaling Bits set to Default.

LEI:>

However, responding to this prompt with 2 selects “Table” and allows the user to set the A/B Bit Mode to whatever configuration the user chooses.

If “Table” is selected, the individual table values will is prompted for. See


and Figure 51 on page 298

. After each value is displayed, enter <CR> to do the following:

• accept the current value

• enter just the AB bits (which will be copied to the CD bits)

• enter a complete ABCD bit pattern

• in the case of optional states, a ‘N’ or ‘n’ can be entered to indicate that the state is not needed

Note that in D4 Framing for E1, there are no CD bits, so they will be ignored.

The user is prompted for ABCD bit values for the following states when the table mode is selected.

Send and Receive refer to the LEI sending ABCD bits to the CPE (Customer

Provided Equipment) or receiving ABCD bits from the CPE.

Incoming and Outgoing refer to E1 digital link from the CPE point of view.

Incoming is thus an external call arriving over the digital link and accepted by the CPE. Outgoing is a call originated by the CPE over the digital link.

Configuring the A/B Bit Signaling table is illustrated in Figure 50 and

Figure 51 on page 298 .

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 297 of 906

Figure 50

Set Mode (S M): Table screen

O u t g o i n g c a l l S E I Z E R E C E I V E : C u r r e n t : 0 0 0 1 N e w : 1 1 1

E r r o r : N o t e e n o u g h v a l u e s s p e c i f i e d . E n t e r e i t h e r 2 o r 4 v a l u e s .

O u t g o i n g c a l l S E I Z E R E C E I V E : C u r r e n t : 0 0 0 1 N e w : 1 1

O u t g o i n g c a l l S E I Z E R E C E I V E b i t s c h a n g e d t o : 1 1 1 1

O u t g o i n g c a l l S E I Z E A C K S E N D e n a b l e d ? ( Y / N ) : N

O u t g o i n g c a l l S E I Z E A C K S E N D i s d i s a b l e d .

O u t g o i n g c a l l D I A L M A K E R E C E I V E : C u r r e n t : 1 1 1 1 N e w :

O u t g o i n g c a l l D I A L M A K E R E C E I V E b i t s n o t c h a n g e d .

O u t g o i n g c a l l D I A L B R E A K R E C E I V E : C u r r e n t : 1 0 1 0 N e w :

O u t g o i n g c a l l D I A L B R E A K R E C E I V E b i t s n o t c h a n g e d .

O u t g o i n g c a l l A N S W E R E D S E N D : C u r r e n t : 0 1 0 1 N e w :

O u t g o i n g c a l l A N S W E R E D S E N D b i t s n o t c h a n g e d .

O u t g o i n g c a l l ( C P E ) D I S C O N N E C T R E C E I V E : C u r r e n t : 0 1 0 1 N e w :

O u t g o i n g c a l l ( C P E ) D I S C O N N E C T R E C E I V E b i t s n o t c h a n g e d .

O u t g o i n g c a l l ( F a r E n d ) D I S C O N N E C T S E N D : C u r r e n t : 1 1 1 1 N e w :

O u t g o i n g c a l l ( F a r E n d ) D I S C O N N E C T S E N D b i t s n o t c h a n g e d .

D i s c o n n e c t T i m e ( 0 t o 4 0 0 0 m s ) : 1 0 0 0

D i s c o n n e c t T i m e n o t c h a n g e d .

I n t e r c a l l T i m e ( 0 t o 2 0 0 0 m s ) : 8 0 0

I n t e r c a l l T i m e n o t c h a n g e d .

L E I : >

Idle SEND – This is the value that the LEI sends (acting as the CO or PSTN)

when the circuit is in the idle state. This value is required.

Idle RECEIVE – This is the value that the LEI expects to see from the CPE

when it is in the idle state. This value is required.

Blocking RECEIVE – This is the value that the LEI expects to see from the

CPE when the customer equipment is in the blocking or fault state and is


Page 298 of 906


Figure 51

Set Mode (S M): Table screen

LEI: >S M

Hit <CR> to accept current value or type i n a new one.

Curr ent Mode : 1 New Mode : 2

Sign aling Bi ts set to Table .

Inco ming and outgoi ng calls are in referen ce to th e CPE.

All ABCD bit s are w ith resp ect to S ENDing from LEI /M1 to C PE or R ECEIVing from C PE to LE I/M1.

Plea se enter new AB CD bits or hit < CR> to accept. You may ente r 2 or 4 values . If on ly 2 val ues are entered , the A and

B bi ts will be copi ed to th e C and D bits.

IDLE SEND: Current : 0000 New: 010 1

IDLE SEND bi ts chan ged to: 0101

IDLE RECEIVE : Curr ent: 010 1 New:

IDLE RECEIVE bits u nchanged .

BLOC KING REC EIVE en abled? ( Y/N): N

BLOC KING REC EIVE is disable d.

Inco ming cal l RINGE R-ON SEN D: Curr ent: 00 00 New:

Inco ming cal l RINGE R-ON SEN D bits n ot chan ged.

Inco ming cal l RINGE R-OFF SE ND: Cur rent: 0 101 New : 0101

Inco ming cal l RINGE R-OFF SE ND bits not cha nged.

Inco ming cal l OFFHO OK RECEI VE: Cur rent: 1 111 New : 11

Inco ming cal l OFFHO OK RECEI VE bits not cha nged.

Inco ming cal l CONNE CTED SEN D: Curr ent: 01 01 New:

Inco ming cal l CONNE CTED SEN D bits n ot chan ged.

Inco ming cal l (Far End) DIS CONNECT SEND: Current: 1111 N ew:

Inco ming cal l (Far End) DIS CONNECT SEND bi ts not c hanged.

Inco ming cal l (CPE) DISCONN ECT RECE IVE: C urrent: 0101 Ne w:

Inco ming cal l (CPE) DISCONN ECT RECE IVE not changed .

unable to accept new calls. Set this value to N if this state is not needed. If this value is not set to N, then dip switch #2 position 6 will determine whether off-hook or on-hook is sent to the M1/SL100 when this state is entered. See


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 299 of 906

Incoming call Ringer ON SEND – This is the value that the LEI sends to

indicate that a call is incoming to the CPE and that ringing voltage should be applied at the CPE. This value is required.

Incoming call Ringer OFF SEND – This is the value that the LEI sends

to indicate that a call is incoming to the CPE and that the ring cycle is in the off portion of the cadence. This value is required.

Incoming call Offhook RECEIVE – This is the value that the LEI expects

to see from the CPE when the customer equipment has gone to an off hook state which indicates that the incoming call has been answered. This value is required.

Incoming call CONNECTED SEND – This is the value that the LEI sends

to the CPE to indicate that it has seen and recognized the off hook indication sent by the CPE. The call is considered fully connected at this point. This value is required.

Incoming call (Far-end) DISCONNECT SEND – This is the value that

the LEI sends to indicate that the far-end has released the call. This value is required.

Incoming call (CPE) DISCONNECT RECEIVE – This is the value that

the LEI expects to see from the CPE when the customer equipment wishes to end the call. This value is required.

Outgoing call SEIZE RECEIVE – This is the value that the LEI expects

to see when the CPE goes to an off hook condition and wishes to initiate a call. This value is required.

Outgoing call SEIZE ACK SEND – This is the value that the LEI will

send to indicate that the seized condition has been noted and the M-1 is ready for dial digits. This value can be set to N if it is not required such as in a loop start case.

Outgoing call DIAL MAKE RECEIVE – This is the value that the LEI

expects to see from the CPE during the make part of the digit. This value is required.


Page 300 of 906


Outgoing call DIAL BREAK RECEIVE – This is the value that the LEI

expects to see from the CPE during the break part of the digit. This value is required.

Outgoing call ANSWERED SEND – This is the value that the LEI will

send to indicate that the far-end has answered the call. This value is required.

Outgoing call (CPE) DISCONNECT RECEIVE – This is the value that

the LEI expects to see from the CPE when the customer equipment wishes to end the call. This value is required.

Outgoing call (Far-end) DISCONNECT SEND – This is the value that

the LEI will send to indicate that the far-end has released the call This value is required.

Disconnect Time – This is the number of milliseconds that the LEI will

send the disconnect signal to the CPE before reverting to the idle state. If the

CPE reverts to a connected state during this time, it is ignored. This value is only used when disconnect supervision is available and is needed for the signaling type in use. It is used when the far-end initiates the disconnect. For loop start cases, this value is not used.

Intercall (release guard) Time – This is the number of milliseconds that

the LEI maintains the idle signal to the CPE before initiating a new call. The

CPE should not initiate a new call during this time. If it does so, the off-hook indication is ignored until the release guard time has expired. This value defaults to 0 which relies on the M-1 to observe the proper guard time. If a non-zero value is entered, off-hook from the CPE and Ringer-On commands from the M1/SL100 is ignored until this timer has expired.

Display Configuration (D C)

The Display Configuration (D C) command displays the various configuration settings established for the LEI. Entering this command causes

a screen similar to Figure 52 to appear.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 301 of 906

Figure 52

Display Configuration (D C) screen

LEI S/N 1103 Software Version 1.01 3/03/95 1:50

Alarms Enabled: YES Self Clearing Enabled: YES

Alarm Level 1 threshold value: E-7 Threshold duration (in seconds): 10

Alarm Level 2 threshold value: E-5 Threshold duration (in seconds): 1

Frame slips alarm level threshold: 5 Threshold duration (in hours)

2

Current dip switch S1 settings (S1..S8) On Off Off On Off Off Off On

Current dip switch S2 settings (S1..S8) On Off On Off Off Off On Off

Alarm operation and reporting

The MMI monitors the E1 link according to parameters established through the Set Alarm command for the following conditions:

• Excessive bit error rate

• Frame slip errors

• Out of frame condition

• Loss of signal condition

• Blue alarm (AIS) condition

Descriptions of the excessive bit error rate and frame slip errors conditions

are found in “Configuring parameters” on page 290. Bit errors activate either

a level 1 or level 2 alarm. The remaining conditions, when detected, always cause the system to activate a level 2 alarm.

An out-of-frame condition will be declared if 3 consecutive frame bits are in error. If this condition occurs, the hardware immediately attempts to reframe.

During the reframe time, the E1 link is declared out-of-frame, and silence is sent on all receive timeslots.

A loss of signal condition is declared if a full frame (255 bits) of consecutive zeros has been detected at the receive inputs. If this condition occurs, the E1 link automatically attempts to resynchronize with the far-end. If this condition lasts for more than two seconds, a level 2 alarm is declared, and silence is sent on all receive timeslots. The alarm is cleared if, after two


Page 302 of 906

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards seconds, neither a loss of signal, out-of-frame condition, or blue alarm condition occurs.

If a repeating device loses signal, it immediately begins sending an unframed signal of all ones to the far-end to indicate an alarm condition. This condition is called a blue alarm, or an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS). If an AIS is detected for more than two seconds, a level 2 alarm is declared, and silence is sent on all receive timeslots. The alarm is cleared if, after two seconds, neither a loss of signal, out-of-frame condition, or blue alarm condition occurs.

Alarm Disable

The Alarm Disable (A D) command disables the external alarm contacts.

When this command is typed, the MMI displays the message Alarms

Disabled and the MAINT LED lights. In this mode, no yellow alarms are sent

and the LEI does not enter line processing mode. Alarm messages are sent on the MMI terminal and the LED continues to indicate alarm conditions.

Alarm Enable

The Alarm Enable (A E) command does the reverse of the Alarm Disable

(A D) command. It enables the external alarm contacts. When this command

is typed in, the MMI will display the message Alarms Enabled. In this mode, yellow alarms can be sent and the LEI can enter line processing mode.

Clear Alarm

The Clear Alarm (C A) command clears all activity initiated by an alarm: the external alarm hardware is deactivated (the contact normally open is reopened), the LED goes out, an entry is made in the alarm log of the date and time the alarm was cleared, and line processing ceases (for alarm level 2 only). When this command is typed, MMI displays the message Alarm

acknowledged. If the alarm condition still exists, an alarm is declared again.

Display Alarms

A detailed report of the most recent 100 alarms with time and date stamps can be displayed by entering the Display Alarms (D A) command into the MMI,

which will cause a screen similar to Figure 53 on page 303 to appear.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 303 of 906

Figure 53

Display Alarm (D A) screen

Alarm Log

2/03/99 1:48 Yellow alarm on E1 carrier

2/03/99 2:33 E1 carrier level 1 alarm

2/03/99 3:47 E1 carrier level 2 alarm

2/03/99 4:43 E1 carrier performance within thresholds

2/03/99 15:01 Log Cleared

The Pause command can be used to display a full screen at a time, by entering

D A P. If there is more than one screen in the log, the MMI scrolls the log

until the screen is full, then stops. When ready to see the next screen, press any key. The display shows another screen and stops again. This continues until the entire log has been displayed.

Clear Alarm Log

Clear all entries in the alarm log by typing the Clear Alarm Log (C A L) command.

Display Status

The Display Status (D S) command displays the current alarm condition of the E1 link as well as the on-hook or off-hook status of each of the 30 ports

of the LEI. Entering this command causes a screen similar to Figure 54 on page 304

to appear.


D S P. If there is more than one screen, the MMI scrolls until the screen is

full, then stops. When ready to see the next screen, press any key. The display shows one more screen, and stops again. This continues until the entire E1 link has been reported on.


Page 304 of 906


Figure 54

Display Status (D S) screen

LEI S/N Software Version 1.01 3/03/95 1:50

In alarm state: NO

E1 link at alarm level 0

Port 0 off hook, Port 1 on hook, Port 2 on hook, Port 3 on hook,

Port 4 on hook, Port 5 on hook, Port 6 off hook, Port 7 off hook,




Port 20 off hook, Port 21 on hook, Port 22 on hook, Port 23 on hook



Port 29 off hook

Performance counters and reporting

The MMI monitors the performance of the E1 link according to several performance criteria including errored, bursty, unavailable, loss-of-frame and frame-slip seconds. It registers the performance of these criteria by reading their status every second and counting their results. These counts are accumulated for an hour, then reset to 0. Previous hour count results are maintained for each of the previous 24 hours.

The LEI counts CRC-4 errors when CRC-4 is enabled and Bipolar Violations

(BPV) when CRC-4 is disabled. The performance criteria for which these counts are maintained as follows:

• Errored seconds are seconds in which one or more CRC-4 / BPV errors, or one or more out-of-frame errors in one second.

• Bursty seconds are seconds in which more than one and less than 320

CRC-4 / BPV errors in a second.

• Severely errored seconds are seconds in which more than

320 CRC-4 / BPV errors, or one or more out-of-frames in a second.

• Unavailable seconds are seconds in which unavailable state starts with 10 consecutive severely errored seconds and ends with 10 consecutive non-severely errored seconds (excluding the final 10 non-severely errored seconds).

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 305 of 906

• Loss-of-frame seconds are seconds in which loss-of-frame or loss-of-signal conditions have existed for three consecutive seconds.

• Frame slip seconds are seconds in which one or more frame slips occur.

The MMI also maintains an overall error counter which is the sum of all errors counted for the performance criteria listed above. The error counter can only be cleared by entering the Clear Error (C E) command. It stops counting at 65,000. The error counter provides an easy method to determine if an alarm condition has been corrected. Clear the error counter, wait a few minutes, and display the performance to see if any errors have occurred since the counter was cleared.

The MMI display reports on these performance counters through the Display

Performance (D P) or the Display History (D H) commands.


Entering the Display Performance (D P) command displays performance

counters for the past hour. A screen similar to Figure 55 will appear.

Figure 55

Display Performance (D P) screen

LEI E1 Interface Performance Log

Data for the past 37 Minutes

3/03/95 1:37 PM

Errored Bursty Unavailable Loss Frame Frame Slip Error

Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Counter

2263 0 2263 2263 352 321

Each column, except the error counter, indicates the number of errors in the current hour and is reset to zero every hour on the hour. Just before the performance counters are reset to zero, the values are put into the history log.

The error counter indicates the number of errors since the error counter was cleared.


Page 306 of 906



D P P. If more than one screen is to be displayed, the MMI scrolls until the

screen is full, then stops. When ready to see the next screen, press any key.

The display shows one more screen, and stops again. This continues until the entire display has been shown.

Display History

Entering the Display History (D H) command displays performance counters for each hour of the past 24 in reverse chronological order,

beginning with the last full hour. A screen similar to Figure 56 will appear.

The Pause command works the same for Display History as it does for the other display commands. Simply enter D H P to see a report on the performance counters, one screen at a time.

Figure 56

Display History (D H) screen

LEI E1 Interface History Performance Log

1/03/99 8:37 PM

Hour Errored Bursty Unavailable Loss Frame Frame Slip Error

Ending Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Count

20:00 139 0 129 139 23 162

19:00 0 0 0 0 0 0

18:00 0 0 0 0 0 0

17:00 0 0 0 0 0 0

16:00 0 0 0 0 0 0

As with all Display commands, the Pause command can be used to display a full screen of the history report at a time, by entering D H P.

Clear Error

Reset the error counter to zero by entering the Clear Error (C E) command.

The error counter provides a convenient way to determine if the E1 link is performing without errors since it can be cleared and examined at any time.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 307 of 906

Testing

The Test Carrier (T) command allows tests to be run on the LEI, the E1 link, or the CPE device. The three tests are designed to provide the capability to

isolate faulty conditions in any of these three sources. See Table 108 on page 308

for additional information on these three test types. Enter the T command, and at the prompt, enter which of these three tests is to be initiated.

The prompt is similar to Figure 57.

Figure 57

Test Carrier (T) screen

Test 1: Local Loopback Test

Test 2: External Loopback Test

Test 3: Network Loopback Test

(1,2,3 or S to cancel):

Tests can be performed once, for one through 98 minutes, or continuously

(selected by entering 99 minutes), until a Stop Test command is entered.

Tests continue for the duration specified even if a failure occurs, and terminate at the end of the time period or when a Stop Test command is issued. Only Stop Test stops a test with a duration selection of 99; however, the STOP command terminates a test set to any duration from one to 99. After

entering the test number, a prompt similar to Figure 58 appears.

Figure 58

Test parameters screen

Enter Duration of Test (1-98 Mins, 0 = Once, 99 = Forever)

Test will interfere with traffic. Hit Q to quit or any Key to Continue

Before a test is run, be sure to verify that the card is disabled, as the tests interfere with calls currently in process.

During a test, if an invalid word is received, this is recorded by a failure peg counter. The peg counter has a limit of 65,000. At the end of the test, the Test

Results message indicates how many failures, if any, occurred during the test.


Page 308 of 906


Table 108 shows which test to run for the associated equipment.

Table 108

MMI Tests

Test number

1

2

3

Equipment Tested

LEI

E1 link, LEI, and E1 network

CPE device and E1 network

Test Description

Local loopback

External loopback

Network loopback

Test 1, local loopback, loops the E1 link signaling toward itself at the backplane connector. Test data is generated and received on all timeslots. If

this test fails, it indicates that the LEI is defective. Figure 59 illustrates how

the signaling is looped back toward itself.

Figure 59

MMI Local loopback test

System

Common

Equipment

Line side

E-1 interface card

E-1 link

External network

E-1 link


(CPE)

553-1160

Test 2, external loopback, applies an external loopback to the E1 link. Test data is generated and received by the LEI on all timeslots. If test 1 passes but test 2 fails, it indicates that the E1 link is defective between the LEI and the external loopback location. If test 1 was not run and test 2 fails, the E1 link or the LEI could be defective. To isolate the failure to the E1 link, tests 1 and 2

must be run in tandem. Figure 60 on page 309 demonstrates how an external

loopback is applied to the E1 link.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 309 of 906

Figure 60

MMI External loopback test

System

Common

Equipment

Line side

E-1 interface card

E-1 link

External network

E-1 link


(CPE)

553-1161

Test 3, network loopback, loops the LEI's received E1 data back toward the

CPE. No test data is generated or received by the LEI. If test 2 passes but test

3 fails, it indicates that the CPE device is defective. If test 2 was not run and test 3 fails, the E1 link or the CPE device could be defective. To isolate the

failure to the CPE device, tests 2 and 3 must be run in tandem. Figure 61

illustrates how the signaling is looped back toward the CPE.

Figure 61

MMI Network loopback test

System

Common

Equipment

Line side

E-1 interface card

E-1 link

External network

E-1 link


(CPE)

553-1162


Page 310 of 906


Applications

The LEI is an IPE line card that provides cost-effective connection between

E1-compatible IPE and a CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 system or off-premise extensions over long distances.

Some examples of applications where an LEI can be interfaced to an E1 link are:

• E1-compatible VRU equipment

• E1-compatible turret systems

• E1-compatible wireless systems

• Remote analog (500/2500-type) telephones through E1 to channel bank

• Remote Norstar sites behind CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 over

E1

The LEI is appropriate for any application where both E1 connectivity and

“lineside” functionality are required. This includes connections to

E1-compatible voice response units, voice messaging and trading turret (used

in stock market applications) systems. See Figure 62.

Figure 62

LEI connection to IPE

For example, the LEI can be used to connect the system to an E1-compatible

Voice Response Unit (VRU). An example of this type of equipment is Nortel

Open IVR system. In this way, the CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 can

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 311 of 906

send a call to the VRU, and, because the LEI supports analog (500/2500-type) telephone functionality, the VRU is able to send the call back to the system for further handling.

The LEI can also be used to provide off-premise extensions to remote locations, up to 500 miles from the system. In this application, analog telephone functionality is extended over E1 facilities, providing a telephone at a remote site with access to analog (500/2500-type) telephone line

functionality. See Figure 63. Audible Message Waiting Indicator can be

provided as well.

Figure 63

LEI in off-premise extension application

Similarly, use the LEI to provide a connection between the system and a

remote Norstar system. See Figure 64 on page 312

. In this case, channel banks are not required if the Norstar system is equipped with an E1 interface.

Note: Consider LEI audio levels when determining the appropriateness of an application.


Page 312 of 906


Figure 64

LEI connection to Norstar system

LEI

E1

Public network

Norstar

E1

E1

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

318

Page 313 of 906

NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card (XCMC)

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313




Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Introduction

The NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card supports the Custom Local Area

Signaling Services (CLASS) feature. The CLASS Modem card receives

Calling Number and Calling Name Delivery (CND) data and time/date data from the CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1and transmits it to a line port, such as a port on an Analog Line card, which delivers the CND data to a

CLASS telephone when presenting the telephone with a new call.

For information about the CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery feature, please refer to the Features and Services (553-3001-306). For administration and maintenance commands, see the Software Input/Output:

Administration (553-3001-311).


CLASS Modem cards are housed in NT8D37 IPE modules.


Page 314 of 906

NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card (XCMC)

The CLASS modem card circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm

(12.5 in. by 10 in.) double-sided printed circuit board. The card connects to the backplane through a 160-pin edge connector.

The faceplate of the CLASS modem card is equipped with a red LED that lights when the card is disabled. When the card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to five seconds as a self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit until the card is configured and enabled in software, then the LED goes out. If the LED continually flashes or remains weakly lit, replace the card.


The CLASS Modem card is designed to plug into any one of the peripheral card slots of the IPE module. The CLASS modem card supports up to 32 transmit-only modem resources, using a DS30X interface. Up to 255 modems can be configured per system.

The CND transmission process begins with the CS 1000 Release 4.5 software sending an initiating message to the CLASS Modem card indicating the length of the CND information and the type of the CND information flow to be transmitted. In response, the CLASS Modem card assigns a message buffer to capture the CND information from the CS 1000 Release 4.5 software.

System software then sends the CND information to the CLASS Modem card, one byte at a time, where it is stored in the message buffer. If the CLASS

Modem card receives more bytes than were specified in the initiating message, then the additional bytes will be discarded and will not be included in the CND memory buffer.

Once all of the CND information has been stored in the memory buffer, the

CLASS Modem card begins transmission when requested by the system software. Data is sent one ASCII character at a time. The CLASS Modem card inserts a start and stop bit to each ASCII character sent.

The transmission of the calling party name/number to the terminating telephone is accomplished through asynchronous FSK simplex-mode transmission at 1200 bits/second over a 2-wire loop, in accordance with the

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

TNs

08

09

10

11

04

05

06

07

00

01

02

03


Page 315 of 906

Bell 202 standard. The transmission is implemented by the appropriate PCM equivalent of 1200 or 2200 Hz.

Upon completion of transmitting the CND data, the CLASS Modem card sends a message to the system software to indicate successful transmission of the CND data.

Eight modems can be associated with each module. Table 109 shows time

slot mapping for the CLASS modem card.

Table 109

Time slot mapping (Part 1 of 2)

XCMC mapping of TNs

DS30X timeslot

08

09

10

11

04

05

06

07

00

01

02

03

Modem units on the CLASS

Modem card

module 0, 00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07 module 1, 00

01

02

03


Page 316 of 906


Table 109

Time slot mapping (Part 2 of 2)

XCMC mapping of TNs

TNs

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

12

13

14

15

28

29

30

31

24

25

26

27

DS30X timeslot

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

12

13

14

15

28

29

30

31

24

25

26

27

Modem units on the CLASS

Modem card

04

05

06

07 module 2, 00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07 module 3, 00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 317 of 906


This section lists the electrical characteristic of the CLASS modem card.

Data transmission specifications

Table 110 provides specifications for the 32 transmit-only modem resources.

Table 110

CLASS modem card—data transmission electrical characteristics

Characteristics

Units per card

Transmission rate

Description

32 transmit only modem resources

1200 ± 12 baud

The CLASS modem card has no direct connection to the Public Network.


The CLASS modem card requires less than 1.0 Amps of +5V dc ± 1% supply supplied by the power converter in the IPE shelf.


Table 111 shows the environmental specifications of the card.

Table 111

CLASS modem card – environmental specifications

Parameter


Operating humidity

Storage temperature

Specifications

0° C to +65° C (+32 ° F to +149 ° F)


–50° C to +70° C (–58 ° F to +158 ° F)


Page 318 of 906


Configuration

The NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card has no user-configurable jumpers or switches. The card derives its address from its position in the backplane and reports that information back to the CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1

CPU through the Card LAN interface.


On systems equipped with either CNUMB (package 332) or CNAME

(package 333), up to 255 CLASS Modem (CMOD) units can be configured in LD 13, and analog (500/2500-type) telephones can be assigned as CLASS telephones in LD 10 by assigning them CNUS, or CNUA and CNAA class of service. See the Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311) for

LD 10 and LD 13 service change instructions.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

366

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card

Page 319 of 906

Contents

The following are the topics in this section:

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319



Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Introduction

This section contains information required to install the NT5D97 Dual-port

DTI2/PRI2 (DDP2) card.

The NT5D97 is a dual-port 2.0 Mb DTI2/PRI2 card (the DDP2 firmware functions in DTI2 or PRI2 mode, depending on DIP switch settings) that integrates the functionality of two NT8D72BA PRI2 cards, and one QPC414

ENET card into a single CE card. The NT5D97 occupies a single slot in the

Network shelf and provides two DTI2/PRI2 network connections: an interface to an external D-Channel Handler (the NT6D11AF) or the NT6D80

Multi-purpose Serial Data Link card, and an optional plug-on NTBK51AA

Downloadable D-Channel daughterboard (DDCH) with two DCH interface ports.

The NT5D97 DDP2 card can be mixed in the same machine with PRI2

NT8D72BA cards.


Page 320 of 906

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card

The NT5D97 DDP2 card hardware design uses a B57 ASIC E1/T1 framer.

The carrier specifications comply with the ANSI TI.403 specification. The

NT5D97 provides an interface to the 2.048 Mbps external digital line either directly or through an office repeater, Network Channel Terminating

Equipment (NCTE), or Line Terminating Unit (LTU).

DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

The NT5D97 DDP2 card is not designed to be connected directly to the Public Switched Network, or other exposed plant networks. Such a connection should only be done using an isolating-type networking terminating device that provides voltage surge protection, such as a Line Terminating Unit

(LTU), Network Channel Terminating Equipment

(NCTE), or Network Termination 1 (NT1), as certified by your local, regional, or national safety agency and telecommunication authority.


External D-Channel Interface DCH or MSDL

The connection between the DDP2 card and the external DCH or MSDL is through a 26-pin female D type connector. The data signals conform to the electrical characteristics of the EIA standard RS-422.

Two control signals are used to communicate the D-channel link status to the

DCH or MSDL. These are:

• Receiver Ready (RR), originating at the DDP2 card, to indicate to the

DCH or MSDL that the D-channel link is operational.

• Transmitter Ready (TR), originating at the DCH or MSDL, to indicate to the DDP2 card that the DCH are ready to use the D-channel link.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 321 of 906

Table 112 indicates how the RR control signal operates with regard to the

DDP2 status.

Table 112

DCH/MSDL Receiver Ready control signals

RR State

ON

OFF

Condition

D-Channel data rate selected at 64 Kbps and

PRI2 loop is enabled and

PRI2 link is not in OOS or Local Alarm mode state and

PRI2 link is not transmitting a Remote Alarm pattern and

PRI2 link is not receiving a Remote Alarm Indication from a remote facility

All other conditions

NT5D97 faceplate

Figure 65 on page 322 illustrates the faceplate layout for the NT5D97 DDP

card. The faceplate contains an enable/disable switch; a DDCH status LED;

6 x 2 trunk port status LEDs; and six external connectors. Table 113 on page 323

shows the name of each connector, its designation with respect to the faceplate and the name and description of the card it is connected to. Also shown are the names of the LEDs.


Page 322 of 906


Figure 65

NT5D97 faceplate

D-Channel LED

ENET LED

Trunk Disable LED

Trunk Out of Service LED

Near End Alarm LED

Far End Alarm LED

Loop Back LED

Recovered Clock0#1

Recovered Clock0#2

Recovered Clock1#1

Recovered Clock1#2

Trunk0 / Trunk1

External DCHI/MSDL

Enb

Dis

553-7380

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 323 of 906

Table 113

External connectors and LEDs

Function

Switch

Connectors

Faceplate

Designator

ENB/DIS

Unit 0 Clock 0

LEDs ENET

DIS

OOS

NEA

FEA

LBK

Unit 0 Clock 1

Unit 1 Clock 0

Unit 1 Clock 1

J5 TRK

J6 DCH

DCH

Type Description

Plastic, ESD protected

RJ11 Connector

RJ11 Connector

RJ11 Connector

RJ11 Connector

9 Pin

Female D Connector

26 Pin

Female D Connector

2 Red LEDs

Card Enable/disable switch

Connects reference clock 0 to

Clock Controller card 0







Two external E1 Trunk 0 and

Trunk 1

Connects to external DCH or

MSDL

ENET 0 or ENET 1 is disabled

2 Red LEDs

2 Yellow LEDs

2 Yellow LEDs

2 Yellow LEDs

Trunk 0 or Trunk 1 is disabled

Trunk is out of service

Local (Near End) Alarm

Far End Alarm

2 Yellow LEDs Loop Back test being performed on Trunk 0 or

Trunk 1

Bicolor Red/Green LED NTBK51AA status


Page 324 of 906


The following sections provide a brief description of each element on the faceplate.

Enable/Disable Switch

This switch is used to disable the card prior to insertion or removal from the network shelf. While this switch is in disable position, the card will not respond to the system CPU.

ENET LEDs

Two red LEDs indicate if the “ENET0” and “ENET1” portions of the card are disabled. These LEDs are lit in the following cases:

• When the enable/disable switch is in disabled state (lit by hardware).

• After power-up, before the card is enabled.

• When the ENET port on the card is disabled by software.

Trunk Disable (DIS) LEDs

Two red LEDs indicate if the “trunk port 0” or “trunk port 1” portions of the card are disabled. These LEDs are lit in the following cases:

• Upon reception of the “disable loop” message from the software.

• After power-up.

OOS LEDs

Two yellow LEDs indicate if the “trunk port 0” and “trunk port 1” portions of the card are out of service.

NEA LEDs

Two yellow LEDs indicate if the near end detects absence of incoming signal or loss of synchronization in “trunk port 0” or “trunk port 1” respectively. The near-end alarm causes a far-end alarm signal to be transmitted to the far end.

FEA LEDs

Two yellow LEDs indicate if a far-end alarm has been reported by the far end

(usually in response to a near-end alarm condition at the far end) on “trunk port 0” or “trunk port 1”.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 325 of 906

LBK LEDs

Two yellow LEDs indicate if a remote loopback test is being performed on trunk port 0 or trunk port 1. The loopback indication is active when the digital trunk is in remote loopback mode. Normal call processing is inhibited during the remote loopback test.

DCH LED

When the dual colored LED is red, it indicates the on-board DDCH is present but disabled. When the dual colored LED is green, it indicates the on-board

DDCH is present and enabled. If a DDCH is not configured on the DDP2 card, this lamp is not lit.

Unit 0 Clk Connectors

Two RJ11 connectors for connecting:

• Digital trunk unit 0 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference source on clock controller card 0.


Unit 1 Clk Connectors

Two RJ11 connectors for connecting:



Connector J5 (TRK)

A 9 pin D-Type connector used to connect:

• Digital trunk unit 0 receive and transmit Tip / Ring pairs.

• Digital trunk unit 1 receive and transmit Tip / Ring pairs.

Connector J6 (DCH)

A 26 pin D-type connector is used to connect the DDP2 card to the external

MSDL or D-channel handler.


Page 326 of 906


Port definitions

Since the NT5D97 card is dual-card, it equips two ports; these ports can be defined in the following combinations:

Table 114

NT5D97AA/AB loops configuration

not configured

DTI2

PRI2 not configured

V

V

V

Loop 0

DTI2

V

V

V

PRI2

V

V

V

Table 115

NT5D97AD loops configuration

not configured

DTI2

PRI2

DDCS not configured

V

V

V

V

Loop 0

DTI2

V

V

V

V

PRI2

V

V

V

X

DDCS

V

V

X

V

Note: Each loop DPNSS can be defined in Normal or Extended addressing mode.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 327 of 906

System capacity and performance

Physical capacity

Each NT5D97 DDP2 card occupies one slot on the network shelf. Each card supports two digital trunk circuits and two network loops. The total number of DDP2 cards per system is limited by the number of network loops, physical capacity of the shelf, number of DTI2/PRI2 interfaces allowed by the software and the range of DCH addresses.

D-Channel capacity

The software configuration for the NTBK51AA DDCH is similar to the

MSDL and only supports D-channel functionality.

The system has a total capacity of 16 addresses (Device Addresses or

DNUM) that can be reserved for DCH card, MSDL card or DDCH card. One exception is DNUM 0 which is commonly assigned to the TTY terminal.

No two different D-Channel providers can share the same DNUM. Hence, the combined maximum number of DCH, MSDL and DDCH cards in the system is 16.

The DCH has one D-Channel unit, the DDCH has two D-Channel units, and the MSDL has a maximum of four units. Therefore, the total number of

D-Channel is derived by the following formula:

Total_Num_DCH-Units = Num_DCHx1 + Num_DDCHx2 +

Num_MSDLx4

Therefore,

Total_Num_DCH-Units

in any given system is between 0-63.

CPU capacity

Using a NT5D97 DDP2 card instead of DTI2/PRI2 cards does not increase the load on the CPU. The DDP2 replaces an ENET card and two DTI2/PRI2 cards. Emulating the ENET card and the overall CPU capacity is not impacted by using a DDP2 card instead of a DTI2/PRI2 card.


Page 328 of 906



Table 116 lists the power requirements for the NT5D97 DDP2 card.

Table 116

NT5D97 DDP2 power requirements

Voltage Source Current

+5V

+12V

-12V

Backplane

Backplane

Backplane

Total Power (Maximum)

DDP2

(without

NTBK51AA)

3A

25mA

25mA

15.6W

DDP2

(with

NTBK51AA)

3.8A

75mA

75mA

20.8W

Cable requirements

This section lists the types of cable used and the lengths required for internal and external NT5D97 DDP2 connections.

Note: No additional cabling is required for nB+D configurations.

Multiple DDP2 cards and the D-channel are associated through software in LD 17.

DDP2 cable assemblies include:

• E1 carrier cables

— NTCK45AA (A0407956)

— NT8D7217 (A0617192)

— NTCK78AA (A0618294)

— NTCK79AA (A0618296)

• DDP2 to QPC471/QPC775 Clock Controller Cables

— NTCG03AA

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 329 of 906

— NTCG03AB

— NTCG03AC

— NTCG03AD

• DDP2 to DCH cables

— NTCK46AA

— NTCK46AB

— NTCK46AC

— NTCK46AD

• DDP2 to MSDL cables

— NTCK80AA

— NTCK80AB

— NTCK80AC

— NTCK80AD

A description of each type of DDP2 cable follows.

E1 carrier cables

NTCK45AA (A0407956)

The NTCK45AA (8 ft.) is an 120

Ω cable for systems equipped with an I/O filter panel, connecting the TRK port (P1, D-type 9 pin male) on the DDP2 faceplate to the I/O filter (P2, P3 D-type 9 pin males).


Page 330 of 906


Figure 66

NTCK45AA

P1

D-type

9 pin, males

P2

P3

D-type

15 pin, males

553-7385

Table 117 which follows lists the pin attributes for the NTCK45AA cable.

Table 117

NTCK45AA cable pins (Part 1 of 2)

1

1

0

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Cable Name

T-PRI0TX

R-PRI0TX

T-PRI0RX

R-PRI0RX

T-PRI1TX

R-PRI1TX

T-PRI1RX

R-PRI1RX

Description Color

Trunk 0 Transmit Tip Black

Trunk 0 Transmit Ring Red

Trunk 0 Receive Tip Black

Trunk 0 Receive Ring White

GND Shield Wire Bare

GND Shield Wire

Standard Wire (3”)

Bare

Bare


Trunk 1 Transmit Tip

Bare

Black

Trunk 1 Transmit Ring Red

Trunk 1 Receive Tip Black

Trunk 1 Receive Ring White

GND Shield Wire Bare

DDP2 pins

I/O Panel pins

P1-1

P2-2

P1-3

P2-6

P2-7

P2-2

P1-4

N/C

P2-3

Case P2

N/C Case P2

Case P2 P2-5

Case P2 P2-9

P1-5 P3-6

P1-6

P1-7

P3-7

P3-2

P1-8

N/C

P3-3

Case P3

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 331 of 906

Table 117


Cable Name

1

1

1

Description

GND Shield Wire



Color

Bare

Bare

Bare

DDP2 pins

I/O Panel pins

N/C Case P3

Case P3 P3-5

Case P3 P3-9

NT8D7217 (A0617192)

The NT8D7217 (50 ft.) is an 120

Ω cable for systems equipped with an I/O filter panel, connecting the 9 pin I/O filter connector to the 9 pin NCTE connector.

Figure 67

NT8D7217

P1

I/O Panel Trunk

D-type 9 pin, female

P2

Multiplexer Trunk

D-type 9 pin, male

553-7386

Table 118 which follows lists the pin attributes for the NT8D7217 cable.

Table 118

NT8D7217 cable pins (Part 1 of 2)

Cable Name

0

0

0

0

T-PRI0TX

R-PRI0TX

T-PRI0RX

R-PRI0RX

Description


Trunk 0 Transmit Ring

Trunk 0 Receive Tip

Trunk 0 Receive Ring

Color

Black

White

Black

Red

DDP2 pins

P1-6

P1-7

P1-2

P1-3

I/O Panel pins

P2-6

P2-7

P2-2

P2-3


Page 332 of 906


Table 118

NT8D7217 cable pins (Part 2 of 2)

Cable Name

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

T-PRI1TX

R-PRI1TX

T-PRI1RX

R-PRI1RX

Description

GND Shield Wire

GND Shield Wire



Trunk 1 Receive Tip


GND Shield Wire

GND Shield Wire

Color

Bare

Bare

Black

White

Black

Red

Bare

Bare

DDP2 pins

P1-2

P1-3

P1-5

P1-9

P1-5

P1-9

P1-6

P1-7

I/O Panel pins

P2-2

P2-3

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

P2-6

P2-7

NTCK78AA (A0618294)

The NTCK78AA (50 ft.) is an 120

Ω cable for connecting the TRK port on the

DDP2 faceplate (P1, D-type 9 pin male) to the Main Distribution Frame

(MDF) (P2, P3 D-type 15 pin males). The NTCK78AA is used for systems not equipped with an I/O filter panel.

Figure 68

NTCK78AA

P1

D-type

9 pin, males

D-type

15 pin, males

P2

P3

553-7385

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 333 of 906

Table 119 lists the pin attributes for the NTCK78AA cable.

Table 119

NTCK78AA cable pins

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

Cable Name

T-PRI0TX

R-PRI0TX

T-PRI0RX

R-PRI0RX

T-PRI1TX

R-PRI1TX

T-PRI1RX

R-PRI1RX

Description



Trunk 0 Receive Tip


GND Shield Wire

GND Shield Wire



Trunk 1 Receive Tip


GND Shield Wire

GND Shield Wire

Color

Black

Red

Black

White

Bare

Bare

Black

Red

Black

White

Bare

Bare

DDP2 pins

P1-1

P1-2

P1-3

P1-4

P1 Case

P1 Case

P1-5

P1-6

P1-7

P1-8

P1 Case

P1 Case

NCTE pins

P2-2

P2-4

P3-1

P3-9

P2-1

P2-9

P2-3

P2-11

P3-3

P3-11

P3-2

P3-4

NTCK79AA (A0618296)

The NTCK79AA (40 ft) is a 75

Ω coaxial cable for connecting the TRK port on the DDP2 faceplate (P1, D-type 9 pin male) to the Line Terminating Unit

(LTU) (P2, P3, P4, P5 BNC males).


Page 334 of 906


Figure 69

NTCK79AA

P1

D-type

9 pin, male

BNC males

P2: Unit 0 Tx

P3: Unit 0 Rx

P4: Unit 1 Tx

P5: Unit 1 Rx

553-7388

Table 120 lists the pin attributes for the NTCK79AA cable.

Table 120


Cable Name

0 T-PRI0TX

Description


Color

Red

DDP2 pins

P1-1

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

R-PRI0TX

T-PRI0RX

R-PRI0RX

T-PRI1TX

R-PRI1TX

T-PRI1RX

R-PRI1RX


Trunk 0 Receive Tip






Red

Green

Green

Red

Red

Green

Green

P1-2

P1-3

P1-4

P1-5

P1-6

P1-7

P1-8

NCTE pins

P2 inner conductor

P2 shield

P3 inner conductor

P3 shield

P4 inner conductor

P4 shield

P5 inner conductor

P5 shield

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 335 of 906

Table 120


Cable Name

1

1

Description

Outer metallized PVC shield

3 stranded wire

Color

Bare

Bare

DDP2 pins

N/C

NCTE pins

P1 Case

N/C P1 Case

Reference clock cables

The NTCG03AA (14 ft), NTCG03AB (2.8 ft), NTCG03AC (4.0 ft), or

NTCG03AD (7 ft), is a DDP2 card to Clock Controller cable, connecting each of the CLK0 or CLK1 ports on the DDP2 faceplate to the primary or secondary source ports on Clock Controller card 0 or 1.

Figure 70

NTCG03AA/AB/AC/AD

2.8, 4, 7 or 14 ft.

P1 P2

Connector P1 - 4 pin, male, RJ11 (DDP2 faceplate)

Connector P2 - 9 pin, male, D-type (Clock Controller)

Note: Includes an RJ11Ö9 pin D-type adaptor.

553-7384

MSDL/DCH cables

External DCH cable

The NTCK46 cable connects the DDP2 card to the NT6D11AF/NT5K75AA/

NT5K35AA D-Channel Handler card. The cable is available in four different sizes:

• NTCK46AA (6 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable

• NTCK46AB (18 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable


Page 336 of 906


• NTCK46AC (35 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable

• NTCK46AD (50 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable

Figure 71

NTCK46AA/AB/AC/AD

P1

D-type

9 pin, males

P2

P3

D-type

15 pin, males

553-7387

External MSDL cable

The NTCK80 cable connects the DDP2 card to the NT6D80 MSDL card. The cable is available in four different sizes:

• NTCK80AA (6 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable

• NTCK80AB (18 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable

• NTCK80AC (35 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable

• NTCK80AD (50 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable

Figure 72

NTCK80AA/AB/AC/AD

P1

D-type

9 pin, males

P2

P3

D-type

15 pin, males

553-7387

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 337 of 906

Cable diagrams



provide examples of typical cabling configurations for the DDP2.

Figure 73 shows a typical DDP2 cabling for a system with an I/O panel, with

the connection between the I/O panel and a Network Channel Terminating

Equipment (NCTE).

Figure 74 shows cabling for a system without an I/O panel. Here, the DDP2

faceplate is cabled directly to the NCTE.

Note: Since several clock cabling options exists, none has been

represented in the diagrams. Refer to “Clock configurations” on page 356

for a description on each available option.


Page 338 of 906


Figure 73

DDP2 cable for systems with an I/O panel

Switch

Enb

Dis

LED's clk0

Port 0 clk1 clk0

Port 1 clk1

Trunk

DCH

Clock Controllers

NCTE

(MDF or LTU)

NT8D7217 cable

NTCK78AA/NTCK79AA cable

NCTE

NT8D7217 cable

NTCK80 cable to MSDL or

NTCK48 cable to DCHI

NT6D80 MSDL or

NT6D11AF/NT5K75AA/

NT5K35AA DCHI

Note: for possible clock cabling options, refer to the

"Clocking configurations" chapter

553-8489

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 339 of 906

Figure 74

DDP2 cable for systems without an I/O panel

Switch

Enb

Dis

LED's clk0

Unit 0 clk1 clk0

Unit 1 clk1

Trunk

DCH

NTCG03 cables

Clock Controllers

NTCK78AA/NTCK79AA cable

NCTE

(MDF or LTU)

NTCK80 cable to MSDL or

NTCK48 cable to DCHI

NT6D80 MSDL or

NT6D11AF/NT5K75AA/

NT5K35AA DCHI

Note: for possible clock cabling options, refer to the

"Clocking configurations" chapter

553-7400


Page 340 of 906



NT5D97 circuit card locations

Each NT5D97 card requires one slot on a shelf. NT5D97 cards can be placed in any card slot in the network bus.

Note in all cases - If an NT8D72BA/NTCK43 card is being replaced by a

DDP2 card, the D-channel Handler can be reconnected to the DDP2 card, or removed if an onboard NTBK51DDCH card is used. Also, DIP Switches in the NT5D97 must be set properly before insertion. NT5D97 has a different

DIP Switch setting from NTCK43AB. Refer to “NT5D97AA/AB DIP switch settings” on page 340

for DIP switch setting).

NT5D97AA/AB DIP switch settings

The the NT5D97 DDP2 card is equipped with 6x2 sets of DIP switches for trunk parameters settings for port0 and port1 respectively. Additionally, the

DDP2 card is equipped with one set of four DIP switches for the Ring Ground setting. The NT5D97AA/AB has one set of eight DIP switches and

NT5D97AD has two sets of ten DIP switches for the D-channel Handler parameters setting.

The DIP switches are used for the setting of default values of certain parameters. Firmware reads the general purpose switches, which sets the default values accordingly.

Table 121

DIP switch settings for NT5D97AA/AB (Part 1 of 2)

Trunks

0 and 1 Port 0 Port 1 Trunk 0 Trunk 1 Card

S1 ENB/DSB mounted on the face plate

Ring Ground

MSDL

TX Mode

S2

S3

S4 S10

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 341 of 906

Table 121

DIP switch settings for NT5D97AA/AB (Part 2 of 2)

LBO Setting

Receiver Interface

General Purpose

Card

Trunks

0 and 1 Port 0 Port 1 Trunk 0

S5

S6

S7

S8

S9

Trunk 1

S11

S12

S13

S14

S15

The following parameters are set by DIP switches. The boldface font shows the factory set-up.


Page 342 of 906


Figure 75

Dip switches for NT5D97AA/AB

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 343 of 906

Trunk interface switches for NT5D97AA/AB

Impedance level and unit mode

The S9/S15 switch selects the impedance level and loop operation mode on

DEI2 OR PRI2. Refer to Table 122.

Table 122

Impedance level and loop mode switch settings


1 Impedance level

2

3

4

Spare

Spare

Unit mode

S9/S15 Switch Setting

X

X

OFF - 120 ohm

ON - 75 ohm

OFF - Loop operates in the DTI2 mode

ON - Loop operates in the PRI2 mode

Transmission mode

A per-trunk switch (S4/S10) provides selection of the digital trunk interface

type. Refer to Table 123.

Table 123

Impedance level and loop mode switch settings

Description

E1

Not used

S4/S10 switch settings

OFF

Line build out

A per-trunk set of three switches (S5/S11, S6/S12 and S7/S13) provides the

dB value for the line build out. Refer to Table 124 on page 344

.


Page 344 of 906


Note: Do not change this setup.

Table 124

Trunk interface line build out switch settings

Description

0dB

S5/S11

OFF

Switch setting

S6/S12

OFF

S7/S13

OFF

Receiver impedance

A per-trunk set of four DIP switches (S8/S14 provides selection between 75

or 120 ohm values. Refer to Table 125.

Table 125

Trunk interface impedance switch settings

Description

75 ohm

120 ohm

OFF

OFF

S8/S14 switch setting

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

Ring ground switches for NT5D97AA/AB

A set of four Dip switches (S2) selects which Ring lines are connected to

ground. Refer to Table 126.

Table 126

Ring ground switch settings (Part 1 of 2)


1 Trunk 0 Transit

2 Trunk 0 Receive

S2 switch settingS

OFF-Ring line is not grounded

ON- Ring line is grounded



553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 345 of 906

Table 126

Ring ground switch settings (Part 2 of 2)


3 Trunk 1 Transmit

4 Trunk 1 Receive

S2 switch settingS





DCH Address select switch for NTBK51AA daughter board for

NT5D97AA/AB

In case of an on-board NTBK51AA D-channel daughterboard, set of four

switches (S3) provide the daughterboard address. Refer to Table 134 on page 350

.

Note: Switch 8 of S3 (S3-8) does not require a switch setting to select between the on-board NTBK51AA D-channel daughterboard and an external DCHI/MSDL. The NT5D97 detects when the on-board

NTBK51AA D-channel daughterboard is used.

Table 127

DCH mode and address switch settings


1-4

5-8

D-channel daughterboard address

For future use

S3 switch setting

See Table 128

OFF

Table 128 shows the possible selection of the NTBK51AA D-channel.

Table 128


Device Address

0

1

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

Switch Setting

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF


Page 346 of 906


Table 128


Device Address Switch Setting

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

10

11

12

13

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

14

15

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

Note 1: The system contains a maximum number of 16 DCHI, MSDL, and DDCH devices. The

Device Addresses are equivalent to the MSDL DNUM designations.

Note 2: Device address 0 is commonly assigned to the System TTYD Monitor.

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 347 of 906

NT5D97AD DIP switch settings

The the NT5D97 DDP2 card is equipped with 6x2 sets of DIP switches for trunk parameters settings for port0 and port1 respectively. Additionally, the

DDP2 card is equipped with one set of four DIP switches for the Ring Ground setting. The NT5D97AA/AB has one set of eight DIP switches and

NT5D97AD has two sets of ten DIP switches for the D-channel Handler parameters setting.

The DIP switches are used for the setting of default values of certain parameters. Firmware reads the general purpose switches, which sets the default values accordingly.

Table 129

DIP switch settings for NT5D97AD

Trunks

0 and 1 Port 0 Port 1 Trunk 0 Trunk 1 Card

S1 ENB/DSB mounted on the face plate

Ring Ground

DPNSS

MSDL

TX Mode

LBO Setting

S16

S8

S9

S9

Receiver Interface

General Purpose

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

S12

S10

S13

S14

S15

S11

S7

Refer to DIP switch locations in Figure 76 on page 348 .

The following parameters are set by DIP switches. The boldface font shows the factory set-up.


Page 348 of 906


Figure 76

Dip switches locations for NT5D97AD

NT5D97AD

S1

Daughter Board

NTBK51

S9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

S8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

S7

1 2 3 4

S12

1 2 3 4

S6

1 2 3 4

S11

1 2 3 4

S16

1 2 3 4

S5

1 2 3 4

S15

1 2 3 4

S4

1 2 3 4

S14

1 2 3 4

S3

1 2 3 4

S13

1 2 3 4

S2

1 2 3 4

S10

1 2 3 4

17

B A

1 A B

1

22

B A

1

Daughter Board

NTAG54

Not to scale

60 A B

553-AAA0367

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 349 of 906

Trunk interface switches for NT5D97AD

Trunk 0 switches

Switch S12 gives the MPU information about its environment.

Table 130

General purpose switches for NT5D97AD


S12_1 Impedance level

S12_2

S12_3

S12_4

Spare

Spare

Unit mode

S9/S15 Switch Setting

OFF - 120 ohm

ON - 75 ohm

X

X

OFF - Unit operates in the DTI2 mode

ON - Unit operates in the PRI2 mode

Switch S2 selects the Transmission mode.

Table 131

TX mode switches for NT5D97AD

TX mode

E1

Not used

S2

OFF

ON

Switch S3, S4, and S5 select LBO function.

Table 132

LBO switches for NT5D97AD

LBO setting

0dB

7.5dB

15dB

S3

OFF

ON

ON

S4

OFF

ON

OFF

S5

OFF

OFF

ON


Page 350 of 906


Switch S6 selects the Receiver interface.

Table 133

Receiver interface switches for NT5D97AD

Impedance

75 ohm

120

οhm

S6-1

OFF

OFF

S6-2

OFF

OFF

S6-3

ON

OFF

S6-4

OFF

ON

Trunk 1 switches for NT5D97AD

Table 134

Trunk 1 switches

Switch

S7

S10

S13, S14 & S15

S11

Function

General Purpose...See Table 130 on page 349

TX Mode...See Table 131 on page 349

LBO...See Table 132 on page 349

RX Impedance...See Table 133 on page 350

Ring ground switches for NT5D97AD

Switch S16 selects which ring lines connect to ground. When set to ON, the ring line is grounded.

Table 135

Ring ground switch for NT5D97AD

Switch

S16_1

S16_2

S16_3

S16_4

Line

Trunk 0 Transmit

Trunk 0 Receive

Trunk 1 Transmit

Trunk 1 Receive

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 351 of 906

DCH Address select switch for NTBK51AA daughterboard for

NT5D97AD

Switch S9 selects the NTBK51AA DCH daughter card address.

Switch S8 is not used when the NTBK51AA daughter card is used. S8_1-10 can be set to OFF position.

Table 136

NTBK51AA DCH switches for NT5D97AD

Switch number

S9_1-4

S9_5-8

S9_9

S9_10

Function

DCH daughter card address

Set to OFF

Set to ON (NTBK51AA Mode)

Set to ON (NTBK51AA Mode)


Page 352 of 906


MSDL external card

Table 137

Switch settings for MSDL external card

Switch number

S9_1-10

S8_1-10

Function

X

X

Use Table 138 to set the card address.

Table 138

Switch setting for MSDL external card (Part 1 of 2)

Switch Setting

DNUM (LD 17)

9

10

7

8

11

12

5

6

3

4

0

1

2

1

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

2

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

3

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

4

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Table 138

Switch setting for MSDL external card (Part 2 of 2)

Switch Setting

DNUM (LD 17)

13

14

15

1

ON

OFF

ON


Page 353 of 906

2

OFF

ON

ON

3

ON

ON

ON

4

ON

ON

ON

Architecture

Clock operation

There are two types of clock operation - tracking mode and free-run mode.

Tracking mode

In tracking mode, the DDP2 loop supplies an external clock reference to a clock controller. Two DDP2 loops can operate in tracking mode, with one defined as the primary reference source for clock synchronization, the other defined as the secondary reference source. The secondary reference acts as a back-up to the primary reference.

As shown in Figure 77, a system with dual CPUs can have two clock

controllers (CC-0 and CC-1). One clock controller acts as a back-up to the other. The clock controllers should be completely locked to the reference clock.

Free run (non-tracking) mode

The clock synchronization of the can operate in free-run mode if:

• no loop is defined as the primary or secondary clock reference,

• the primary and secondary references are disabled, or

• the primary and secondary references are in local (near end) alarm


Page 354 of 906


Figure 77

Clock Controller primary and secondary tracking

Primary clocking source

REF 1

Primary

Reference

REF 2

Secondary clocking source

REF 1

Secondary

Reference

REF 2

Primary

Primary

Secondary

Secondary

Clock

Controller 0

J1

J2

J3

Clock Controller

Backup

Clock

Controller 1

J1

J2

J3

553-7401

Reference clock errors

CS 1000 Release 4.5 software checks at intervals of 1 to 15 minutes to see if a clock controller or reference-clock error has occurred. (The interval of this check can be configured in LD 73).

In tracking mode, at any one time, there is one active clock controller which is tracking on one reference clock. If a clock controller error is detected, the

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 355 of 906

system switches to the back-up clock controller, without affecting which reference clock is being tracked.

A reference-clock error occurs when there is a problem with the clock driver or with the reference clock at the far end. If the clock controller detects a reference-clock error, the reference clocks are switched.

Automatic clock recovery

A command for automatic clock recovery can be selected in LD 60 with the command EREF.

A DDP2 loop is disabled when it enters a local-alarm condition. If the local alarm is cleared, the loop is enabled automatically. When the loop is enabled, clock tracking is restored in the following conditions:

• If the loop is assigned as the primary reference clock but the clock controller is tracking on the secondary reference or in free-run mode, it is restored to tracking on primary.

• If the loop is assigned as the secondary reference clock but the clock controller is in free-run mode, it is restored to tracking on secondary.

• If the clock check indicates the switch is in free-run mode:

— Tracking is restored to the primary reference clock if defined.

— If the primary reference is disabled or in local alarm, tracking is restored to the secondary reference clock if defined.

Note: If the system is put into free-run mode by the craftsperson, it resumes tracking on a reference clock unless the clock-switching option is disabled (LD 60, command MREF), or the reference clock is

“undefined” in the database.


Page 356 of 906


Automatic clock switching

If the EREF command is selected in LD 60, tracking on the primary or secondary reference clock is automatically switched in the following manner:

• If software is unable to track on the assigned primary reference clock, it switches to the secondary reference clock and sends appropriate DTC maintenance messages.

• If software is unable to track on the assigned secondary reference clock, it switches to free run.

Clock configurations

Clock Controllers can be used in a single or a dual CPU system.

A single CPU system has one Clock Controller card. This card can receive reference clocks from two sources referred to as the primary and secondary sources. These two sources can originate from a PRI2, DTI2, etc. PRI2 cards such as the NT8D72BA are capable of supplying two references of the same clock source. These are known as Ref1 (available at J1) and Ref2 (available at J2) on the NT8D72BA.

The NT5D97 card is capable of supplying two references from each clock source, for example, four references in total. NT5D97 can supply Clk0 and

Clk1 from Unit 0 and Clk0 and Clk1 from Unit 1. Either Unit 0 or Unit 1 can

originate primary source, as shown in Figure 78 through Figure 81.

There is one Clock Controller cable required for the DDP2 card, which is available in four sizes; this is the NTCG03AA/AB/AC/AD. Refer to

“Reference clock cables” on page 335

for more information.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 357 of 906

Table 139 summarizes the clocking options. Table 140 on page 358

explains the options in more detail.

Table 139

Clock Controller options - summary

CC Option

Option 1

Option 2

Option 3

Option 4

CPU Type

Single

Dual

Dual

Dual

Notes

Ref from P0 on Clk0

Ref from P1 on Clk0

Ref from P0 on Clk0

Ref from P0 on Clk1

Ref from P1 on Clk0

Ref from P1 on Clk1

Ref from P0 on Clk0

Ref from P0 on Clk1

Ref from P1 on Clk0

Ref from P1 on Clk1


Page 358 of 906


Table 140

Clock Controller options - description

Notes Clock

Option

Option 1

Option 2

Option 3

Option 4

This option provides a single CPU system with 2 clock sources derived from the 2 ports of the DDP2.

Connector Clk0 provides a clock source from Unit 0.

Connector Clk0 provides a clock source from Unit 1.

Refer to Figure 78.

This option provides a Dual CPU system with 2 references of a clock source derived from port 0 of the DDP2.

Connector Clk0 provides a Ref 1 clock source from Unit 0.


Refer to Figure 79.

This option provides a Dual CPU system with 2 references of a clock source derived from port 1 of the DDP2.



Refer to Figure 80.

This option provides a Dual CPU system with 2 references from each clock source derived from the DDP2.





Refer to Figure 81.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 359 of 906

Figure 78

Clock Controller – Option 1

Primary clocking source

REF 1

Primary

Reference

REF 2

Secondary clocking source

REF 1

Secondary

Reference

REF 2

Primary

Primary

Secondary

Secondary

Clock

Controller 0

J1

J2

J3

Clock Controller

Backup

Clock

Controller 1

J1

J2

J3

553-7401

Operation

The following discussion describes possible scenarios when replacing a digital trunk NT8D72BA PRI2 card or QPC536E DTI2 card or NTCK43

Dual PRI card configuration with a NT5D97 DDP2 card configuration.


Page 360 of 906


Figure 79


Primary

Reference

DDP2 clk 0

Port 0 clk 1

Clk0

Port 1

Clk1

Primary Ref 1

Primary Ref 2

Secondary

Reference

DDP2 clk 0

Port 0 clk 1

Clk0

Port 1

Clk1

Secondary Ref 1

Secondary Ref 2

An NT8D72BA may be configured as an alternate to DDP2

J1 Ref 1

NT8D72BA

J2 Ref 2

Both references from port 0

Clock Controller for CPU 0

J1 Sec.

J2 Prim.

Secondary Ref 1


J1 Sec.

J2 Prim.

Secondary Ref 2

553-7403

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 361 of 906

Figure 80


Primary

Reference

DDP2 clk 0

Port 0 clk 1

Clk0

Port 1

Clk1

Primary Ref 1

Primary Ref 2


J1 Sec.

J2 Prim.

Secondary

Reference

DDP2 clk 0

Port 0 clk 1

Clk0

Port 1

Clk1

Secondary Ref 1

Secondary Ref 2

Secondary Ref 1


J1 Sec.

J2 Prim.

An NT8D72BA may be configured as an alternate to DDP2

J1 Ref 1

NT8D72BA

J2 Ref 2

Secondary Ref 2

Both references from port 1

553-7404


Page 362 of 906


Figure 81


Primary

Reference

DDP2 clk 0

Port 0

clk 1

Primary Ref 1

Primary Ref 2


J1 Sec.

J2 Prim.

Secondary

Reference

Clk0

Port 1

Clk1

Secondary Ref 1

Secondary Ref 2


J1 Sec.

J2 Prim.

Both references from both ports

553-7402

Case 1 - The two ports of a QPC414 network card are connected to two digital

trunks.

In this case, the QPC414 and the two digital trunks are replaced by a single

DDP2 card, which is plugged into the network shelf in the QPC414 slot.

Case 2 - One port of the QPC414 card is connected to a digital trunk, and the

second is connected to a peripheral buffer. Both cards are in network loop location.

In this case, the QPC414 should not be removed. The digital trunk is removed and the DDP2 card is plugged into one of the two empty slots.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 363 of 906

Case 3 - The network shelf is full, one port of a QPC414 network card is

connected to a digital trunk, and the second is connected to a peripheral buffer. This arrangement is repeated for another QPC414. The digital trunks are located in a shelf that provides only power.

In this case, the peripheral buffers will have to be re-assigned, so that each pair of buffers will use both ports of the same QPC414 card. The other

QPC414 card can then be replaced by the NT5D97 DDP2.

CAUTION

The static discharge bracelet located inside the cabinet must be worn before handling circuit cards.

Failure to wear the bracelet can result in damage to the circuit cards.

Procedure 14

Installing the NT5D97

1

Determine the cabinet and shelf location where the NT5D97 is to be installed. The NT5D97 can be installed in any card slot in the Network bus.

2

Unpack and inspect the NT5D97and cables.

3

If a DDCH is installed, refer to the section “Removing the NT5D97” on page 364 .

4

Set the option switches on the NT5D97 card before installation. Refer to

“NT5D97AA/AB DIP switch settings” on page 340 .

The ENB/DIS (enable/disable faceplate switch) must be OFF (DIS) when installing the NT5D97, otherwise a system initialize can occur. The ENB/

DIS on the NT5D97 corresponds to the faceplate switch on the QPC414

Network card.

5

Install NT5D97 card in the assigned shelf and slot.

6

Set the ENB/DIS faceplate switch to ON.

If the DDCH is installed, the DDCH LED should flash three times.

7

If required, install the I/O adapters in the I/O panel.


Page 364 of 906


8

Run and connect the NT5D97 cables.

CAUTION

Clock Controller cables connecting the Clock

Controller and NT5D97 card must NOT be routed through the center of the cabinet past the power harness. Instead they should be routed around the outside of the equipment shelves.

9

If required, install connecting blocks at the MDF or wall mounted cross-connect terminal.

10 If required, designate connecting blocks at the MDF or wall mounted cross-connect terminal.

11 If required, install a Network Channel Terminating Equipment (NCTE). or

Line Terminating Unit (LTU).

12 Add related office data into switch memory.

13 Enable faceplate switch S1. This is the “Loop Enable” switch.

The faceplate LEDs should go on for 4 seconds then go off and the

OOS, DIS and ACT LEDs should go on again and stay on.

IF DDCH is installed, the DCH LED should flash 3 times.

14 Run the PRI/DTI Verification Test.

15 Run the PRI status check.


Procedure 15

Removing the NT5D97

1

Determine the cabinet and shelf location of the NT5D97 card to be removed.

2

Disable Network Loop using LD 60. The command is DISL “loop number.”

The associated DCHI might have to be disabled first. The faceplate switch

ENB/DIS should not be disabled until both PRI2/DTI2 loops are disabled first.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 365 of 906

3

If the NT5D97 card is being completely removed, not replaced, remove data from memory.

4

Remove cross connections at MDF to wall-mounted cross-connect terminal.

5

Tag and disconnect cables from card.

6

Rearrange Clock Controller cables if required.

CAUTION

Clock Controller cables connecting the Clock Controller and DDP2 card must NOT be routed through the center of the cabinet past the power harness. Instead, they should be routed around the outside of the equipment shelves.

7

Remove the DDP2 card only if both loops are disabled. If the other circuit of a DDP2 card is in use, DO NOT remove the card. The faceplate switch

ENB/DIS must be in the OFF (DIS) position before the card is removed, otherwise the system will initialize.

8

Pack and store the NT5D97 card and circuit card.


Configuring the NT5D97

After the NT5D97 DDP2 is installed, configure the system using the same procedures as the standard NT8D72BA PRI2.

Consider the following when configuring the NT5D97 DDP2 card:

• The CS 1000 Release 4.5 software allows four ports to be defined for the

NT6D80 MSDL. The DDCH (NTBK51AA) card has only two ports, 0 and 1; therefore, ports 2 and 3 must not be defined when using the

NTBK51AA.


Page 366 of 906


• Port 0 of the NTBK51AA can only be defined to work with Loop 0 of the

NT5D97 DDP2 card, and Port 1 of the NTBK51AA can only be defined to work with Loop 1 of the NT5D97. This relationship must be reflected when configuring a new DCH in LD 17 (in response to the DCHL prompt, enter either 0 or 1 when specifying the loop number used by the

DCH).

• You cannot define one of the DDP2 loops for the NTBK51AA DDCH, and the other loop for the NT6D11AF/NT5K75AA/NT5K35AA DCH card or the NT6D80 MSDL.

• When configuring the NT5D97 DDP2 in DTI2 outgoing dial pulse mode, a Digit Outpulsing patch is required.

Testability and diagnostics

The DDP2 card supports testing and maintenance functions through the following procedures:

• Selftest upon power up or reset

• Signalling test performed in the LD 30

• Loopback tests, self tests, and continuity tests performed by LD 60 and

LD 45

• The D-Channel (DCH, MSDL, DDCH) maintenance is supported by

LD 96.

Note: The MSDL selftest is not applicable to the NTBK51AA

D-Channel daughterboard.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

368

NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card

Page 367 of 906

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Introduction

The NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card provides an interface for up to

16 analog (500/2500-type) telephones equipped with either ground button recall switches, high-voltage Message Waiting lamps, or low-voltage

Message Waiting LEDs.


Note: Up to four NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card are supported in each Media Gateway 1000S (MG 1000S). Up to four NT5K02 Flexible

Analog Line card are supported in each MG 1000S Expansion.

The NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card performs several functions, including:

• flexible transmission

• ground button operation

• low-voltage Message Waiting option

• card self-ID for auto-configuration


Page 368 of 906

NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card

Applications

The NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card can be used for the following applications:

• NT5K02AA high-voltage Message Waiting analog line card typically used in Australia

• NT5K02DA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line card typically used in France

• NT5K02EA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line card typically used in Germany

• NT5K02FA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line card with 600¾ termination (A/D –4 dB, D/A–1 dB)

• NT5K02GA same as NT5K02FA with a different loss plan (A/D –4 dB,

D/A –3 dB)

• NT5K02HA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line card typically used in Belgium

• NT5K02JA low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line card typically used in Denmark

• NT5K02KA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line card typically used in Netherlands

• NT5K02LA and NT5K02LB analog line card typically used in New

Zealand

• NT5K02MA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line card typically used in Norway

• NT5K02NA ground button, low-voltage message Waiting, analog line card typically used in Sweden

• NT5K02PA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line card typically used in Switzerland

• NT5K02QA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line card typically used in the United Kingdom

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

378

Page 369 of 906

NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

MFC signaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

MFE signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Sender and receiver mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373


Introduction

The XMFC/MFE (Extended Multi-frequency Compelled/Multi-frequency sender-receiver) card is used to set up calls between two trunks. Connections may be between a PBX and a Central Office or between two PBXs. When connection has been established, the XMFC/MFE card sends and receives pairs of frequencies and then drops out of the call.

The XMFC/MFE card can operate in systems using either A-law or µ-law companding by changing the setting in software.


MFC signaling

The MFC feature allows the system to use the CCITT MFC R2 or L1 signaling protocols.


Page 370 of 906

NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card

Signaling levels

MFC signaling uses pairs of frequencies to represent digits, and is divided into two levels:

•

Level 1: used when a call is first established and may be used to send the

dialed digits.

•

Level 2: used after Level 1 signaling is completed and may contain such

information as the status, capabilities, or classifications of both calling parties.

Forward and backward signals

When one NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card sends a pair of frequencies to a receiving XMFC/MFE card (forward signaling), the receiving XMFC/MFE card must respond by sending a different set of frequencies back to the originating XMFC/MFE card (backward signaling). In other words, the receiving card is always “compelled” to respond to the originating card.

In summary, the signaling works as follows:

• The first XMFC/MFE card sends a forward signal to the second card.

• The second card hears the forward signal and replies with a backward signal.

• The first card hears the backward signal and “turns off” its forward signal.

• The second card hears the forward signal being removed and removes its backward signal.

• The first XMFC/MFE can either send a second signal or drop out of the call.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 371 of 906

Digit

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

9

10

11

12

13

MFC signaling involves two or more levels of forward signals and two or more levels of backward signals. Separate sets of frequencies are used for forward and backward signals:

•

Forward signals. Level I forward signals are dialed address digits that

identify the called party. Subsequent levels of forward signals describe the category (Class of Service) of the calling party, and may include the calling party status and identity.

•

Backward signals. Level I backward signals (designated “A”) respond

to Level I forward signals. Subsequent levels of backward signals (B, C, and so on) describe the status of the called party.

Table 141 lists the frequency values used for forward and backward signals.

Table 141

MFC Frequency values (Part 1 of 2)

Forward direction

DOD-Tx, DID-Rx

1380 Hz + 1500 Hz

1380 Hz + 1620 Hz

1500 Hz + 1620 Hz

1380 Hz + 1740 Hz

1500 Hz + 1740 Hz

1620 Hz + 1740 Hz

1380 Hz + 1860 Hz

1500 Hz + 1860 Hz

1620 Hz + 1860 Hz

1740 Hz + 1860 Hz

1380 Hz + 1980 Hz

1500 Hz + 1980 Hz

1620 Hz + 1980 Hz

backward direction

DOD-Rx, DID-Tx

1140 Hz + 1020 Hz

1140 Hz + 900 Hz

1020 Hz + 900 Hz

1140 Hz + 780 Hz

1020 Hz + 780 Hz

900 Hz + 780 Hz

1140 Hz + 660 Hz

1020 Hz + 660 Hz

900 Hz + 660 Hz

780 Hz + 660 Hz

1140 Hz + 540 Hz

1020 Hz + 540 Hz

900 Hz + 540 Hz


Page 372 of 906


Table 141

MFC Frequency values (Part 2 of 2)

Digit

14

15


DOD-Tx, DID-Rx

1740 Hz + 1980 Hz

1860 Hz + 1980 Hz

backward direction

DOD-Rx, DID-Tx

780 Hz + 540 Hz

660 Hz + 540 Hz

The exact meaning of each MFC signal number (1-15) within each level can be programmed separately for each trunk route using MFC. This programming can be done by the customer and allows users to suit the needs of each MFC-equipped trunk route.

Each MFC-equipped trunk route is associated with a data block that contains the MFC signal functions supported for that route.

MFE signaling

The NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card can be programmed for MFE signaling which is used mainly in France. MFE is much the same as MFC except it has its own set of forward and backward signals.

Table 142 lists the forward and backward frequencies for MFE. The one

backward signal for MFE is referred to as the “control” frequency.

Table 142

MFE Frequency values (Part 1 of 2)

Digit

1


OG-Tx, IC-Rx

700 Hz + 900 Hz

2

3

4

700 Hz + 1100 Hz

900 Hz + 1100 Hz

700 Hz + 1300 Hz

Backward direction

1900 Hz

(Control Frequency)

—

—

—

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 373 of 906

Table 142

MFE Frequency values (Part 2 of 2)

Digit

7

8

5

6

9

10


OG-Tx, IC-Rx

900 Hz + 1300 Hz

1100 Hz + 1300 Hz

700 Hz + 1500 Hz

900 Hz + 1500 Hz

1100 Hz + 1500 Hz

1300 Hz + 1500 Hz


—

—

—

—

—

—

Sender and receiver mode

The XMFC/MFE circuit card provides the interface between the system’s

CPU and the trunk circuit which uses MFC or MFE signaling.

The XMFC/MFE circuit card transmits and receives forward and backward signals simultaneously on two channels. Each channel is programmed like a peripheral circuit card unit, with its own sending and receiving timeslots in the network.

Receive mode

When in receive mode, the XMFC/MFE card is linked to the trunk card by a

PCM speech path over the network cards. MFC signals coming in over the trunks are relayed to the XMFC/MFE card as though they were speech. The

XMFC/MFC card interprets each tone pair and sends the information to the

CPU through the CPU bus.

Send mode

When in send mode, the CPU sends data to the XMFC/MFE card through the

CPU bus. The CPU tells the XMFC/MFE card which tone pairs to send and the XMFC/MFE card generates the required tones and sends them to the trunk over the PCM network speech path. The trunk transmits the tones to the far end.


Page 374 of 906


XMFC sender and receiver specifications

Table 143 and Table 144 provide the operating requirements for the NT5K21

XMFC/MFE card. These specifications conform to CCITT R2 recommendations: Q.441, Q.442, Q.451, Q.454, and Q.455.

Table 143

XMFC sender specifications

Forward frequencies in DOD mode:

Backward frequencies in DOD mode:

Frequency tolerance:

Power level at each frequency:

Level difference between frequencies:

Harmonic Distortion and Intermodulation

Time interval between start of 2 tones:

Time interval between stop of 2 tones:

1380, 1500, 1620, 1740, 1860, 1980 Hz

1140, 1020, 900, 780, 660, 540 Hz

+/- 0.5 Hz from nominal

Selectable: 1 of 16 levels

< 0.5 dB

37 dB below level of 1 signaling frequency

125 usec.

125 usec.

Table 144

XMFC receiver specifications (Part 1 of 2)

Input sensitivity:

accepted: rejected:

Bandwidth twist:

accepted: rejected:

Amplitude twist:

accepted:

-5 to -31.5 dBmONew CCITT spec.

-38.5 dBmOBlue Book fc +/- 10 Hz fc +/- 60 Hz

Norwegian requirement rejected:

Operating time:

Release time: difference of 5 dB between adjacent frequencies difference of 7 dB between non-adjacent frequencies difference of 12 dB (for unloaded CO trunks) difference of 20 dB between any two frequencies

< 32 msec.

< 32 msec.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 375 of 906

Table 144

XMFC receiver specifications (Part 2 of 2)

Tone Interrupt no release:

Longest Input tone ignored:

Noise rejection:

< 8 msec. Receiver on, while tone missing

< 8 msec. Combination of valid frequencies

S/N > 18 dB No degradation, in band white noise

S/N > 13 dB Out-of-band disturbances for CCITT

XMFE sender and receiver specifications

Tables 145 and Table 146 on page 376 provide the operating requirements

for the XMFC/MFE card when it is configured as an XMFE card. These requirements conform to French Socotel specifications ST/PAA/CLC/CER/

692.

Table 145

XMFE sender specifications

Forward frequencies in OG mode:

Forward frequencies in IC mode:

Frequency tolerance:

Power level at each frequency:

Level tolerance:

Harmonic Distortion and Intermodulation:

Time interval between start of 2 tones:

Time interval between stop of 2 tones:

700, 900, 1100, 1300, 1500 Hz

1900 Hz

+/- 0.25% from nominal

Selectable: 1 of 16 levels

+/- 1.0 dB

35 dB below level of 1 signaling frequency

125 usec.

125 usec.


Page 376 of 906


Table 146

XMFE receiver specifications


accepted: rejected: rejected: rejected:

Bandwidth:

accepted:

Amplitude twist:

accepted:

Operating time:

Release time:

Tone Interrupt causing no release:

-4 dBm to -35 dBm +/- 10 Hz of nominal

-42 dBm signals

-4 dBmoutside 500-1900 Hz

-40 dBmsingle/multiple sine wave in 500-1900 Hz fc +/- 20 Hz difference of 9 dB between frequency pair

< 64 msec.

< 64 msec.

< 8 msec. Receiver on, tone missing

Longest Input tone ignored: < 8 msec. Combination of valid frequencies

Longest control tone ignored: < 15 msec.Control Frequency only

Noise rejection: S/N > 18 dBNo degradation in-band white noise

Physical specifications

Table 147 outlines the physical specifications of the NT5K21 XMFC/MFE

circuit card.

Table 147

Physical specifications (Part 1 of 2)

Dimensions

Faceplate LED

Height:12.5 in. (320 mm)

Depth:10.0 in. (255 mm)

Thickness:7/8 in. (22.25 mm)

Lit when the circuit card is disabled

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 377 of 906

Table 147

Physical specifications (Part 2 of 2)

Cabinet Location

Power requirements

Environmental considerations

Must be placed in the main cabinet

(Slots 1-10)

1.1 Amps typical

Meets the environment of the system


Page 378 of 906


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

384

Page 379 of 906

NT6D70 SILC Line card

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379



Introduction

The S/T Interface Line card (SILC) (NT6D70AA –48V North America,

NT6D70 BA –40 V International) provides eight S/T four-wire full-duplex interfaces to connect ISDN BRI-compatible terminals over Digital Subscriber

Loops (DSLs) to the System. A description of the ISDN BRI feature is contained in ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Installation and Configuration

(553-3001-218).


Note: A maximum of four NT6D70 SILC cards are supported in an

MG 1000S. A maximum of four NT6D70 SILC cards are supported in an MG 1000S Expansion.

ISDN BRI

ISDN BRI consists of two 64Kb/s Bearer (B) channels and one 16Kb/s Data

(D) channel. The BRI interface is referred to as a 2B+D connection as well as a Digital Subscriber Loop (DSL).


Page 380 of 906

NT6D70 SILC Line card

B-channels transmit user voice and data information at high speeds, while

D-channels are packet-switched links that carry call set-up, signaling and other user data across the network.

One single DSL can carry two simultaneous voice or data conversations to the same or to different locations. In either case, the D-channel can also be used for packet communication to a third location simultaneously. The two

B-channels can also be combined to transmit data at uncompressed speeds of up to 128 Kbps.

A wide range of devices and telephone numbers can be associated with a single DSL to offer equipment flexibility and reduce line, wiring, and installation costs.


The NT6D70 SILC card is a standard-size circuit card. Its faceplate is equipped with an LED to indicate its status.


Power consumption is +5 V at 800 mA and –48 V at 480 mA.


In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided on the SILC card. When the SILC card is used in TIE trunk applications in which the cabling is exposed to outside plant conditions, an NT1 module certified for such applications must be used. Check local regulations before providing such service.


The NT6D70 SILC card provides eight S/T four-wire full-duplex polarity-sensitive interfaces to connect ISDN BRI-compatible terminals over

Digital Subscriber Loops (DSL) to the system. Each S/T interface provides two B-channels and one D-channel and supports a maximum of eight physical connections that can link up to 20 logical terminals on one DSL.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 381 of 906

A logical terminal is any terminal that can communicate with the system over a DSL. It can be directly connected to the DSL through its own physical termination or be indirectly connected through a common physical termination.

The length of a DSL depends on the specific terminal configuration and the

DSL wire gauge; however, it should not exceed 1 km (3,280 ft).

The SILC interface uses a four-conductor cable that provides a differential

Transmit and Receive pair for each DSL. The SILC has options to provide a total of two watts of power on the Transmit or Receive leads, or no power at all. When this power is supplied from the S/T interface, the terminal devices must not draw more than the two watts of power. Any power requirements beyond this limit must be locally powered.

Other functions of the SILC are:

• support point-to-point and multi-point DSL terminal connections

• execute instructions received from the MISP to configure and control the

S/T interfaces

• provide channel mapping between ISDN BRI format (2B+D) and system bus format

• multiplex 4 D-channels onto one timeslot

• perform activation and deactivation of DSLs

• provide loopback control of DSLs

• provide a reference clock to the clock controller

Micro Controller Unit (MCU)

The Micro Controller Unit (MCU) coordinates and controls the operation of the SILC. It has internal memory, a reset and sanity timer, and a serial control interface.

The memory consists of 32 K of EPROM which contains the SILC operating program and 8 K of RAM used to store interface selection and other functions connected with call activities.


Page 382 of 906


The reset and sanity timer logic resets the MCU.

The serial control interface is an IPE bus used by the MPU to communicate with the S/T transceivers.

IPE interface logic

The IPE interface logic consists of a Card-LAN interface, an IPE bus interface, a maintenance signaling channel interface, a digital pad, and a clock controller and converter.

The Card-LAN interface is used for routine card maintenance, which includes polling the line cards to find the card slot where the SILC is installed. It also queries the status and identification of the card and reports the configuration data and firmware version of the card.

The IPE bus interface connects an IPE bus loop that has 32 channels operating at 64 kbps and one additional validation and signaling bit.

The Maintenance Signaling Channel (MSC) interface communicates signaling and card identification information from the system CPU to the

SILC MCU. The signaling information also contains maintenance instructions.

The digital pad provides gain or attenuation values to condition the level of the digitized transmission signal according to the network loss plan. This sets transmission levels for the B-channel voice calls.

The clock recovery circuit recovers the clock from the local exchange.

The clock converter converts the 5.12-MHz clock from the IPE backplane into a 2.56 MHz clock to time the IPE bus channels and an 8 kHz clock to provide PCM framing bits.

S/T interface logic

The S/T interface logic consists of a transceiver circuit and the DSL power source. This interface supports DSLs of different distances and different numbers and types of terminal.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 383 of 906

The transceiver circuits provide four-wire full-duplex S/T bus interface. This bus supports multiple physical terminations on one DSL where each physical termination supports multiple logical B-channel and D-channel ISDN BRI terminals. Idle circuit-switched B-channels can be allocated for voice or data transmission to terminals making calls on a DSL. When those terminals become idle, the channels are automatically made available to other terminals making calls on the same DSL.

The power on the DSL comes from the SILC, which accepts –48 V from the

IPE backplane and provides two watts of power to physical terminations on each DSL. It provides -48 V for ANSI-compliant ISDN BRI terminals and

–40 V for CCITT (such as ETSI NET-3, INS NET-64) compliant terminals.

The total power used by the terminals on each DSL must not exceed two watts.


Page 384 of 906


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

388

Page 385 of 906

NT6D71 UILC Line card

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385



Introduction

The NT6D71 U Interface Line card (UILC) supports the OSI physical layer

(layer 1) protocol. The UILC is an ANSI-defined standard interface. The

UILC provides eight two-wire full-duplex (not polarity sensitive)

U interfaces to connect ISDN BRI-compatible terminals over Digital

Subscriber Loops (DSL) to the CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1. A description of the ISDN BRI feature is contained in ISDN Basic Rate

Interface: Installation and Configuration (553-3001-218).


Note: A maximum of four UILCs are supported in an MG 1000S. A maximum of four UILCs are supported in an MG 1000S Expansion.


The NT6D71 UILC is a standard-size circuit card. Its faceplate is equipped with an LED to indicate its status.


Page 386 of 906

NT6D71 UILC Line card


Power consumption is +5 V at 1900 mA.


Each U interface provides two B-channels and one D-channel and supports one physical termination. This termination can be to a Network Termination

(NT1) or directly to a single U interface terminal. Usually, this physical termination is to an NT1, which provides an S/T interface that supports up to eight physical terminal connections. The length of a DSL depends on the specific terminal configuration and the DSL wire gauge; however, it should not exceed 5.5 km (3.3 mi).

The main functions of the UILC are as follows:

• provide eight ISDN U interfaces conforming to ANSI standards

• support point-to-point DSL terminal connections

• provide channel mapping between ISDN BRI format (2B+D) and system bus format

• multiplex four D-channels onto one timeslot

• perform activation and deactivation of DSLs

• provide loopback control of DSLs

Micro Controller Unit (MCU)

The Micro Controller Unit (MCU) coordinates and controls the operation of the UILC. It has internal memory, a reset and sanity timer, a serial control interface, a maintenance signaling channel, and a digital pad.

The memory consists of 32 K of EPROM that contains the UILC operating program and 8 K of RAM that stores interface selection and other functions connected with call activities.

The reset and sanity timer logic resets the MCU.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 387 of 906

The serial control interface is an IPE bus that communicates with the

U transceivers.

IPE interface logic

The IPE interface logic consists of a Card-LAN interface, a IPE bus interface, a maintenance signaling channel interface, a digital pad, and a clock converter.

The Card-LAN interface is used for routine card maintenance, which includes polling the line cards to find in which card slot the UILC is installed. It also queries the status and identification of the card and reports the configuration data and firmware version of the card.

The IPE bus interface connects one IPE bus loop that has 32 channels operating at 64 kbps and one additional validation and signaling bit.

The Maintenance Signaling Channel (MSC) interface communicates signaling and card identification information from the system CPU to the

UILC MCU. The signaling information also contains maintenance instructions.

The digital pad provides gain or attenuation values to condition the level of the digitized transmission signal according to the network loss plan. This sets transmission levels for B-channel voice calls.

The clock converter converts the 5.12 MHz clock from the IPE backplane into a 2.56 MHz clock to time the IPE bus channels and an 8-kHz clock to provide

PCM framing bits.

U interface logic

The U interface logic consists of a transceiver circuit. It provides loop termination and high-voltage protection to eliminate the external hazards on the DSL. The U interface supports voice and data terminals, D-channel packet data terminals, and NT1s. A UILC has eight transceivers to support eight

DSLs for point-to-point operation.


Page 388 of 906


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

426

Page 389 of 906

NT6D80 MSDL card

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389



Engineering guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Replacing MSDL cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Symptoms and actions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

System disabled actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Introduction

This document describes the Multi-purpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) card.

This card provides multiple interface types with four full-duplex serial I/O ports that can be independently configured for various operations. Peripheral software downloaded to the MSDL controls functionality for each port.

Synchronous operation is permitted on all MSDL ports. Port 0 can be configured as an asynchronous Serial Data Interface (SDI).

An MSDL card occupies one network card slot in Large System Networks, or

Core Network modules and communicates with the CPU over the CPU bus and with I/O equipment over its serial ports. It can coexist with other cards


Page 390 of 906

NT6D80 MSDL card that support the same functions. For example, three cards supported with the

MSDL (NT6D80) are QPC757 (DCHI), QPC513 (ESDI), QPC841 (SDI) and

NTSD12 (DDP).

Though the MSDL is designed to coexist with other cards, the number of ports supported by a system equipped with MSDL cards is potentially four times greater than when using other cards. Since each MSDL has four ports, representing a single device, a system can support as many as 16 MSDL cards with a maximum of 64 ports.


The MSDL card is a standard size circuit card that occupies one network card slot and plugs into the module’s backplane connector to interface with the

CPU bus and to connect to the module’s power supply. On the faceplate, the

MSDL provides five connectors, four to connect to I/O operations and one to

connect to a monitor device that monitors MSDL functions. Figure 82 on page 391

illustrates major MSDL components and their locations on the printed circuit card.

Note: Switches S9 and S10 are configured to reflect the device number set in LD 17 (DNUM). S10 designates tens, and S9 designates ones. For example, set device number 14 with S10 at 1 and S9 at 4.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NT6D80 MSDL card

Page 391 of 906

Figure 82

MSDL component layout

Card Address Switches

Tens Ones

LED

Port 0

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Monitor

Port

ON

DCE

ON

S4

DCE

ON

S3

DCE

ON

S2

DCE

S1

DTE

ON

ON

S8

DTE

ON

ON

S7

DTE

S6

DTE

S5

422

232

422

232

422

232

422

232

S9 S10

553-5431


Page 392 of 906

NT6D80 MSDL card


Figure 83 on page 393 illustrates the MSDL functional block diagram. The

MSDL card is divided into four major functional blocks:

• CPU bus interface

• Micro Processing Unit (MPU)

• Memory

• Serial interface

Two processing units serve as the foundation for the MSDL operation: the

Central Processing Unit (CPU) and the MSDL Micro Processing Unit

(MPU). CS 1000 Release 4.5 software, MSDL firmware, and peripheral software control MSDL parameters. Peripheral software downloaded to the

MSDL controls MSDL operations.

The MSDL card’s firmware and software do the following:

• communicate with the CPU to report operation status

• receive downloaded peripheral software and configuration parameters

• coordinate data flow in conjunction with the CPU

• manage data link layer and network layer signaling that controls operations connection and disconnection

• control operation initialization and addressing

• send control messages to the operations

CPU bus interface

The CPU bus transmits packetized information between the CPU and the

MSDL MPU. This interface has a 16-bit data bus, an 18-bit address bus, and interrupt and read/write control lines.

Shared Random Access Memory (RAM) between the CPU and the MSDL

MPU provides an exchange medium. Both the CPU and the MSDL MPU can access this memory.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NT6D80 MSDL card

Page 393 of 906

Figure 83

MSDL block diagram

CPU Bus

Address Bus

Control Bus

Data Bus

Address Buffer and

Decoding Logic

Control and Data

Transceivers

MPU Bus

Shared Resource

Arbitrator

Interface Registers

MPU Address

Decoding Logic

Memory Address

Counter & Buffer

Micro Processing Unit

(68020 MPU)

Memory

Shared Memory

Address Bus

Control Bus

Data Bus

DMA

Arbitrator

Parallel I/O

Controller

Integrated Serial Communication Controllers

RS-232

Transceiver

Monitor Port

RS-232/422

Transceiver

RS-232/422

Transceiver

RS-232/422

Transceiver

RS-232/422

Transceiver

Port 0 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3

553-5432


Page 394 of 906

NT6D80 MSDL card

Micro Processing Unit (MPU)

The MPU, which is based on a Motorola 68020 processor, coordinates and controls data transfer and port addressing, communicating via the CPU bus with the system. Prioritized interrupts tell the MPU which tasks to perform.

Memory

The MSDL card contains two megabytes of Random Access Memory (RAM) for storing downloaded peripheral software that controls MSDL port operations. The MSDL card includes the shared RAM that is used as a communication interface buffer between the CPU and the MPU.

The MSDL Flash Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (Flash

EPROM) also includes the peripheral software to protect it against a power failure or reset. MSDL can copy peripheral software directly from the Flash

EPROM after power up or reset instead of requesting that the system CPU download it.

The MSDL card also contains Programmable Read Only Memory (PROM) for firmware that includes the bootstrap code.

Serial interface

The MSDL card provides one monitor port and four programmable serial ports that can be configured for the following various interfaces and combinations of interfaces:

• synchronous ports 0–3

• asynchronous port 0

• DCE or DTE equipment emulation mode

• RS-232 or RS-422 interface

Transmission mode – All four ports of the MSDL can be configured for

synchronous data transmission by software. Port 0 can be configured for asynchronous data transmission for CRT, TTY, and printer applications only.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NT6D80 MSDL card

Page 395 of 906

Equipment emulation mode – Configure an MSDL port to emulate DCE or

DTE by setting switches on the card and downloading LD 17 interface parameters.

I/O port electrical interface – Each MSDL port can be configured as an

RS-232 or RS-422 interface by setting the switches on the MSDL card.

MSDL ports use Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) II 26-pin female connectors.

Figure 84 on page 396 shows the system architecture using the MSDL as an

operational platform. It illustrates operation routing from the CPU, through the MSDL, to the I/O equipment. It also shows an example in which DCH operation peripheral software in the MSDL controls functions on ports

2 and 3.

MSDL operations

The system automatically performs self-test and data flow activities. Unless a permanent problem exists and the system cannot recover, there is no visual indication that these operations are taking place.

The system controls the MSDL card with software that it has downloaded.

The MSDL and the system enable the MSDL by following these steps:

1

When the MSDL card is placed in the system, the card starts a self-test.

2

When the MSDL passes the test, it indicates its state and L/W version to the system. The CPU checks to see if downloading is required.

3

After downloading the peripheral software, the system enables the

MSDL.

4

MSDL applications (DCH, AML, SDI) may be brought up if appropriately configured.


Page 396 of 906

NT6D80 MSDL card

Figure 84

MSDL functional block diagram

Application

Module Link

D-Channel

System

AML Handler

System

DCH Handler

MSDL Handler

System software

MSDL software modules

Boot Code

& Loader

Modules

P

S

O

S

+

System Interface Module

AML Loadware

DCH Loadware

CPU Bus

Physical Layer (Layer 1) Handler

Port 0

Meridian Link

Port 1

Meridian Mail

Port 2

PRI Trunk

Port 3

PRI Trunk

553-5433

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NT6D80 MSDL card

Page 397 of 906

Data flow

The MSDL transmit interface, managed by the MSDL handler, sends data from the system to the MSDL. This interface receives packetized data from the system and stores it in the transmit buffer on the MSDL. The transmit buffer transports these messages to the appropriate buffers, from which the messages travel over the MSDL port to the I/O equipment.

The MSDL uses the MSDL receive interface to communicate with the system. The MSDL card receives packetized data from the I/O equipment over the MSDL ports. This data is processed by the MSDL handler and sent to the appropriate function.

The flow control mechanism provides an orderly exchange of transmit and receive messages for each operation. Each operation has a number of outstanding messages stored in buffers waiting to be sent to their destinations.

As long as the number of messages does not exceed the threshold specified, the messages queue in the buffer in a first-in-first-out process.

If the outstanding number of messages for an operation reaches the threshold, the flow control mechanism informs the sender to wait until the number of messages is below the threshold before sending the next message.

If buffer space is not available, the request to send a message to the buffer is rejected and a NO BUFFER fault indication is sent.

Engineering guidelines

Available network card slots

The number of available network slots depends on the system option, the system size, and the number of available network slots in each module for the selected system option.

Some of these network card slots are normally occupied by Network cards,

Superloop Network cards, Conference/TDS, and others, leaving a limited number of unused slots for MSDL and other cards.


Page 398 of 906

NT6D80 MSDL card

Card mix

A system that exclusively uses MSDL cards can support up to 16 such cards, providing 64 ports. These ports can be used to run various synchronous and asynchronous operations simultaneously.

The system will also support a mix of interface cards (MSDL, DCHI, and

ESDI for example). However, using multiple card types will reduce the number of cards and ports available.

Address decoding

The MSDL card decodes the full address information received from the system. This provides 128 unique addresses. Since MSDL ports communicate with the CPU using a single card address, the system can support 16 MSDL cards providing 64 ports.

The MSDL card addresses are set using decimal switches located on the card.

These switches can select 100 unique card addresses from 0 to 99.

An address conflict may occur between the MSDL and other cards because of truncated address decoding by the other cards. For example, if a DCHI port is set to address 5, its companion port will be set to address 4, which means that none of the MSDL cards can have hexadecimal address numbers 05H,

15H, …75H, nor addresses 04H, 14H, …74H. To avoid this conflicts system software limits the MSDL card addresses from 0 to 15.

Port specifications

The MSDL card provides four programmable serial ports configured with software as well as with switches for the following modes of operation:

Transmission mode

Configure an MSDL port for synchronous or asynchronous data transmission using LD 17.

Synchronous transmission uses an external clock signal fed into the MSDL.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NT6D80 MSDL card

Page 399 of 906

Table 148 lists the synchronous interface specifications and the means of

configuring the interface parameters.

Table 148

Synchronous interface specifications

Parameter

Data bits

Data rate

Transmission

Clock

Interface

Mode

Specification Configured

In packets-Transparent

1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4,

48, 56, and 64 kbps

Full Duplex

Internal/External

RS-232

RS-422

DTE or DCE

N/A

Software

N/A

Software

Software

Switches

Switches

Asynchronous transmission uses an internal clock to generate the appropriate baud rate for serial controllers.

Table 149 lists asynchronous interface specifications and the means of

configuring interface parameters.

Table 149

Asynchronous interface specifications (Part 1 of 2)

Parameter

Data bit, parity

Data rate

Stop bits

Transmission

Interface

Specification

7 bits even, odd or no parity, or 8 bits no parity

0.3, 0.6, (1.2), 2.4, 4.8,

9.6, 19.2, and 38.4 kbps

1 (default), 1.5, 2

Full Duplex

RS-232

Configured

Software

Software

Software

N/A

Software


Page 400 of 906

NT6D80 MSDL card

Table 149

Asynchronous interface specifications (Part 2 of 2)

Parameter

Mode

Specification

RS-422

DTE or DCE

Configured

Switches

Switches

Emulation mode Each port can be configured to emulate a DCE port or a

DTE port by setting the appropriate switches on the MSDL. For details on

how to set the switches, refer to “Installation” on page 404

of this document.

DCE is a master or controlling device that is usually the source of information to the DTE and may provide the clock in a synchronous transmission linking a DCE to a DTE.

DTE is a peripheral or terminal device that can transmit and receive information to and from a DCE and normally provides a user interface to the system or to a DCE device.

Interface Each MSDL port can be configured as an RS-232 or an RS-422

interface by setting the appropriate switches on the card.

Table 150 lists the RS-232 interface specifications for EIA and CCITT

standard circuits. It shows the connector pin number, the associated signal name, and the supported circuit type. It also indicates whether the signal originates at the DTE or the DCE device.

This interface uses a 26-pin (SCSI II) female connector for both RS-232 and

RS-422 circuits.

Table 150

RS-232 interface pin assignments (Part 1 of 2)

Pin Signal name

1

2

Frame Ground (FG)

Transmit Data (TX)

EIA circuit

AA

BA

CCITT circuit DTE DCE

— 102

103

—

X

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NT6D80 MSDL card

Page 401 of 906

Table 150

RS-232 interface pin assignments (Part 2 of 2)

Pin Signal name

5

6

3

4

Receive Data (RX)

Request to Send (RTS)

Clear to Send (CTS)

Data Set Ready (DSR)

7

8

Signal Ground (SG)

Carrier Detect (CD)

15 Serial Clock Transmit

(SCT)

17 Serial Clock Receive

(SCR)

18 Local Loopback (LL)

20 Data Terminal Ready

(DTR)

21 Remote Loopback (RL)

23 Data Rate Selector (DRS)

24 External Transmit Clock

(ETC)

25 Test Mode (TM)

EIA circuit

AB

CF

DB

BB

CA

CB

CC

DD

LL

CD

RL

CH/CI

DA

TM

115

141

108.2

140

111/112

113

142

CCITT circuit DTE DCE

X 104

105

106

107

102

109

114

X

— —

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Table 151 on page 402 lists RS-422 interface specifications for EIA circuits.

It shows the connector pin number, the associated signal name, and the


Page 402 of 906

NT6D80 MSDL card supported circuit type. It also indicates whether the signal originates at the

DTE or DCE device.

Table 151

RS-422 interface pin assignments

Pin Signal Name

17

20

23

24

13

14

15

16

8

12

5

7

3

4

1

2

Frame Ground (FG)

Transmit Data (TXa)

Receive Data (RXa)

Request to Send (RTS)

Clear to Send (CTS)

Signal Ground (SG)

Receive Ready (RR)

Receive Signal Timing (RST)

Transmit Data (TXb)

Transmit Signal Timing (TSTb)

Transmit Signal Timing (TSTa)

Receive Data (RXb)

Receive Signal Timing (RSTa)

Data Terminal Ready (DTR)

Terminal Timing (TTa)

Terminal Timing (TTb)

EIA

Circuit

DDa

CD

DAb

DAa

BAb

DBb

DBa

BBb

CB

AB

CF

DDb

AA

BAa

BBa

CA

DTE

—

X

X

—

X

X

X

DCE

—

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

—

Implementation guidelines

The following are guidelines for engineering and managing MSDL cards:

• An MSDL can be installed in any empty network card slot.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NT6D80 MSDL card

Page 403 of 906

• A maximum of eight MSDL cards can be installed in a fully occupied module because of the module’s power supply limitations.

• The Clock Controller card should not be installed in a module if more than 10 MSDL ports are configured as active RS-232 (rather than

RS-422) ports in that module because of the module’s power supply limitations.

• The MSDL address must not overlap other card addresses.

• Before downloading a peripheral software module for an MSDL, disable all MSDL ports on cards running the same type of operation.

Environmental and power requirements

The MSDL card conforms to the same requirements as other interface cards.

The temperature, humidity, and altitude for system equipment, including the

MSDL, should not exceed the specifications shown in Table 152.

Table 152

Environmental requirements

Condition

Operating

Temperature

Relative Humidity

Altitude

Storage

Temperature

Relative Humidity


0° to 50° C (32° to 122° F)

5% to 95% non-condensing

3,048 meters (10,000 feet) maximum

–50° to 70° C (–58° to 158° F)

5% to 95% non-condensing

A stable ambient operating temperature of approximately 22°C (72°F) is recommended. The temperature differential in the room should not exceed

±3°C (±5°F).


Page 404 of 906

NT6D80 MSDL card

The internal power supply in each module provides DC power for the MSDL and other cards. Power consumption and heat dissipation for the MSDL is

listed in Table 153.

Table 153

MSDL power consumption

Voltage

(VAC)

+5

+12

–12

Current

(Amps)

3.20

0.10

0.10

Power

(Watts)

16.00

1.20

1.20

Heat

(BTUs)

55.36

4.15

4.15

Installation

Device number

Before installing MSDL cards, determine which of the devices in the system are available. If all 16 devices are assigned, remove one or more installed cards to replace them with MSDL cards.

Make sure that the device number assigned to the MSDL card is not used by an installed card, even if one is not configured. Use the MSDL planning form, at the end of this section, to assist in configuring MSDL cards.

MSDL interfaces

Before installing the cards, select the switch settings that apply to your system, the interfaces, and card addresses.

Table 154 on page 405 shows the switch positions for the DCE and the DTE

interface configurations on the MSDL card. Figure 85 on page 406 shows the

MSDL and the location of configuration switches on the MSDL. The switch

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NT6D80 MSDL card

Page 405 of 906

settings shown in this figure are an example of the different types of interfaces available. Your system settings may differ.

Table 154

MSDL interface switch settings

DCE switch

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

DTE switch Interface

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

RS-232

RS-422 DTE

RS-422 DCE

N/A

Comment

DTE/DCE is software configured

All switches configured

All switches configured

Not allowed


Page 406 of 906

NT6D80 MSDL card

Figure 85

MSDL switch setting example

Care Locking Device

Card Address Select Switches

Tens Ones

LED

Port 0

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Monitor

Port

ON

DCE

ON

S4

DCE

ON

S3

DCE

ON

S2

DCE

S1

DTE

ON

S8

DTE

ON

ON

S7

DTE

S6

DTE

ON

S5

S9 S10

Setting for an RS-232 interface

DTE/DCE are software configured

Setting for an RS-422 DTE interface

Setting for an RS-422 DCE interface

Setting for an RS-232 interface

DTE/DCE are software configured

553-5434

I/O Port Interface Configuration DIP Switches

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NT6D80 MSDL card

Page 407 of 906

Installing the MSDL card

Procedure 16

Installing the MSDL card

To install an MSDL card follow these steps:

1

Set Device Number S10 and S9.

2

Hold the MSDL by its card-locking devices. Squeeze the tabs to unlatch the card locking devices and lift the locking device out and away from the card. Be careful not to touch connector pins, conductor traces, or integrated circuits. Static discharge may damage integrated circuits.

3

Insert the MSDL card into the selected card slot of the module following the card guides in the module.

4

Slide the MSDL into the module until it engages the backplane connector.

5

Push the MSDL firmly into the connector using the locking devices as levers by pushing them toward the card’s front panel.

6

Push the card-locking devices firmly against the front panel of the card so they latch to the front lip in the module and to the post on the card.

7

Observe the red LED on the MSDL faceplate. If it turns on, flashes three times, and stays on continuously, the MSDL is operating correctly but is not yet enabled. Go to step 7.

8

If the LED turns on and stays on continuously without flashing three times, the card may be defective. Go to steps 8 and 9.

9

Connect the cables. The installation is complete.

10 Unplug the MSDL card and reinsert it. If the red LED still does not flash three times, leave the card installed for approximately 10 minutes to allow the card to be initialized.

11 After 10 minutes unplug the card and reinsert it. If the card still does not flash three times, the card is defective and must be replaced.



Page 408 of 906

NT6D80 MSDL card

Cable requirements

The MSDL card includes four high-density 26-pin (SCSI II) female connectors for ports and one 8-pin miniature DIN connector for the monitor

port. See Figure 86 on page 409

for a diagram of the MSDL cabling configuration.

A D-Channel on the MSDL requires a connection from the appropriate

MSDL port connector to the DCH connector located on the ISDN PRI trunk faceplate.

Other operations on the MSDL are connected to external devices such as terminals and modems. To complete one of these connections, connect the appropriate I/O connector on the MSDL to a connector on the I/O panel at the back of the module where the MSDL is installed. If a terminal is connected to the regular SDI port, use 8 bit, VT100 terminal emulation. If the terminal is connected to the SDI/STA port with line mode editing, use 8 bit, VT220 terminal emulation.

To determine the type and number of cables required to connect to MSDL cards, you must determine the type of operation you wish to run and select the appropriate cable to connect the operation to the MSDL port. Different types

of cables, as described in Table 155 on page 410 , connect the MSDL port to

a device:

• NTND26, used to connect the MSDL port to the ISDN PRI trunk connector J5, for DCH

• QCAD328, when cabling between two different columns, that is, I/O to

I/O (when MSDL is in one row and QPC720 is in another row)

• NTND98AA (J5 of QPC720 to I/O panel)

• NTND27, used to connect the MSDL port to the I/O panel at the rear of the module, for other interface functions

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NT6D80 MSDL card

Page 409 of 906

Figure 86

MSDL cabling

ESDI to I/O cable

(NTND27AB—6 ft.)

ISL/PRI

I/O panel

RS-232 shielded

(QCAD328—

35 ft. max.)

I/O panel

NTND27

ISL

M

S

D

L

NTND25AA—6 ft.

NTND26AB—18 ft.

NTND26AC—35 ft.

NTND26AD—50 ft.

720

APL applications

(RS-232 cable)

SDI to terminal cable

PRI to I/O panel cable

(NTND98AA)

7

2

0

Q

P

C

553-5845


Page 410 of 906

NT6D80 MSDL card

Note: The choices of cable to use with an MSDL card depend on what type of modem is connected. For example, the NTND27 cable is used when the modem has a DB25 connection. If the modem is v.35, a customized or external vendor cable is required.

Table 155

Cable types

Function

DCH

AML, ISL, SDI

Cable type

NTND26AA

NTND26AB

NTND26AC

NTND26AD

NTND27AB

Cable length

6 feet

18 feet

35 feet

50 feet

6 feet

Cable installation

When the MSDL card is installed, connect the cables to the equipment required for the selected operation.

PRI trunk connections

D-channel operations require connections between the MSDL and a PRI trunk card. Refer to Meridian Link ISDN/AP General Guide (553-2901-100) for a complete discussion of PRI and D-channels.

Procedure 17

Cabling the MSDL card to the PRI card

The following steps explain the procedure for cable connection:

1

Identify the MSDL and the PRI cards to be linked.

2

Select the appropriate length cable for the distance between the MSDL and the PRI card.

3

Plug the 26-pin SCSI II male connector end of a cable into the appropriate

MSDL port.

4

Route the cable through cable troughs, if necessary, to the appropriate

PRI card.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NT6D80 MSDL card

Page 411 of 906

5

Plug the DB15 male connector end of the cable into the J5 DB15 female connector on the PRI card.

6

Secure the connections in place with their fasteners.

7

Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each connection.


I/O panel connections

Operations aside from PRI require cable connections to the I/O panel.

Connections between the I/O panel and Application Equipment Modules

(AEM) are described in “Application Module description,” Meridian Link

description (553-3201-110).

Procedure 18

Cabling the MSDL card to the I/O panel

The following steps explain the procedure for cable connection:

1

Identify the MSDL card and the I/O panel connector to be linked.

2

Using the NTND27AB cable, plug the 26-pin SCSI II male connector end of a cable into the appropriate MSDL port.

3

Route the cable to the rear of the module next to the I/O panel.

4

Plug the DB25 male connector end of a cable into a DB25 female connector at the back of the I/O panel.

5

Secure cable connectors in place with their fasteners.

6

Repeat steps 1 through 5 for each connection.



Page 412 of 906

NT6D80 MSDL card

MSDL planning form

Use the following planning form to help sort and store information concerning the MSDL cards in your system as shown in the sample. Record switch settings for unequipped ports as well as for equipped ports.

Device no.

Shelf

MSDL data form

Slot Card ID Boot Code version

Date installed Last update

Operation information

2

3

Ports Operation

0

1

Logical no.

Switch setting Cable no.

Slot

Sample

13 3

5 NT6D80AA-110046

Date installed

2/1/93

Last update

5/5/93

Ports Operation Logical no.

Switch setting Cable no.

0

1

2

3

Device no.

TTY

DCH

AML

Spare

Shelf

13

25

3

RS-232 DCE

RS-422 DTE

RS-232 DCE

RS-232

Card ID

NTND27AB

NTND26AB

NTND27AB

Boot

Code version

004

Operation information

maint TTY 9600 baud

PRI 27 to hdqtrs

Meridian Mail

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NT6D80 MSDL card

Page 413 of 906

Maintenance

Routine maintenance consists of enabling and disabling MSDL cards and downloading new versions of peripheral software. These activities are performed by an authorized person such as a system administrator.

Troubleshooting the MSDL consists of determining problem types, isolating problem sources, and solving the problem. A craftsperson normally performs these activities.

CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 systems have self-diagnostic indicators as well as software and hardware tools. These diagnostic facilities simplify MSDL troubleshooting and reduce mean-time-to-repair (MTTR).

For complete information concerning system maintenance, refer to

Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1: Large System Maintenance

(553-3021-500).

For complete information regarding software maintenance programs, refer to

Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311).

MSDL states

MSDL states are controlled manually by maintenance programs or

automatically by the system. Figure 87 on page 414

shows MSDL states and the transitions among them. These are the three states the MSDL may be in:

• Manually disabled

• Enabled

• System disabled

The following sections describe the relationships between these states.

Manually disabled

In this state, the MSDL is not active. The system does not attempt to communicate or attempt any automatic maintenance on the MSDL.


Page 414 of 906

NT6D80 MSDL card

Figure 87

MSDL states

Manually disabled

1 2

3

Enabled

4

5

System disabled

553-5435

A newly configured MSDL automatically enters the manually disabled state.

An operating MSDL can be manually disabled by issuing the

DIS MSDL x

command in LD 37 (step 1 in Figure 87).

Entering the

DIS MSDL x

command in LD 37 moves the card to manually disabled status and stops all system communication with the card (step 5 in

Figure 87).

Manually enabled

When the card has been manually disabled, re-enable it with the

ENL MSDL x

command in LD 37 (step 2 in Figure 87).

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NT6D80 MSDL card

Page 415 of 906

System disabled

When the system disables the MSDL card (step 4 in Figure 87 on page 414 ),

it continues to communicate and attempt maintenance procedures on the card.

To stop all system communication with the card, enter

DIS MSDL x

to disable

it (step 5 in Figure 87 on page 414 ). Otherwise, the system periodically tries

to enable the card, attempting recovery during the midnight routines (step 3

in Figure 87 on page 414

).

The system disables the MSDL if the card:

• exhibits an overload condition

• does not respond to system messages

• is removed

• resets itself

• encounters a fatal error

• is frequently system disabled and recovered

When an MSDL is system disabled, a substate indicates why the MSDL is disabled. The substates are:

•

Not Responding The system cannot communicate with the MSDL.

•

Self-Testing The MSDL card is performing self-tests.

•

Self-tests Passed The MSDL card successfully completed self-tests and

the system is determining if download is required or the software downloading is complete.

•

Self-tests Failed The MSDL card self-tests failed.

•

Shared RAM Tests Failed The system failed to read/write to the MSDL

shared RAM.

•

Overload The system received an excessive number of messages within

a specified time period.

•

Reset Threshold The system detected more than four resets within

10 minutes.

•

Fatal Error The MSDL card encountered a fatal condition from which

it cannot recover.


Page 416 of 906

NT6D80 MSDL card

•

Recovery Threshold The MSDL card was successfully enabled by the

MSDL autorecovery function five times within 30 minutes. Each time it was system disabled because of a problem encountered during operation.

•

Bootloading The MSDL base software is in the process of being

downloaded to the MSDL.

Detailed information on system disabled substates and the action required for

each substate appears in “Symptoms and actions” on page 422 .

Maintaining the MSDL

The system controls automatic MSDL maintenance functions. A craftsperson or system administrator performs manual maintenance by changing the card status, downloading new versions of peripheral software, or invoking self-tests.

System controlled maintenance

Built-in diagnostic functions constantly monitor and analyze the system and individual card, performing the following operations:

• using autorecovery to automatically correct a temporarily faulty condition and maintain the system and its components

• printing information and error messages to indicate abnormal conditions that caused a temporary or an unrecoverable error

During system initialization, the system examines the MSDL base code. If the base code needs to be downloaded, the CPU resets the MSDL card and starts downloading immediately following initialization. At the same time, all other

MSDL peripheral software programs are checked and, if they do not correspond to the system disk versions, the correct ones are downloaded to the card.

If manual intervention is required during initialization or operation, information and error messages appear on the console or the system TTY to suggest the appropriate action. For a complete discussion of the information and error messages, refer to Software Input/Output: Administration

(553-3001-311). Detailed information of system disabled substates and the action required for each substate is found at the end of this document.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NT6D80 MSDL card

Page 417 of 906

Manually controlled maintenance

Use manual maintenance commands found in the following programs to enable, disable, reset, get the status of, and perform self-tests on the MSDL card:

• Input/Output Diagnostic Program LD 37

• Program LD 42

• Link Diagnostic Program LD 48

• PRI D-channel Diagnostic Program LD 96

For a complete discussion of these programs, refer to Software Input/Output:


Note 1: Enter commands after the dot (.) prompt.

Note 2: The “

x

” in the commands below represents the DNUM value of the card number.

Enabling the MSDL

Enter

ENL MSDL x

to enable the MSDL manually. If the MSDL base code has not been previously downloaded or if the card version is different from the one on the system disk, the software is downloaded and the card is enabled.

To force software download and enable the card, enter

ENL MSDL x FDL

.

This command forces the download of the MSDL base code and the configured peripheral software even if it is already resident on the card. The card is then enabled.

To enable a disabled MSDL and its ports, enter

ENL MSDL x ALL

. This command downloads all peripheral software (if required) and enables any configured ports on the card. This command can be issued to enable some manually disabled ports on an already enabled MSDL.


Page 418 of 906

NT6D80 MSDL card

Disabling the MSDL

To disable an MSDL card, enter

DIS MSDL x

.

To disable the MSDL and all its ports, enter

DIS MSDL x ALL

.

Resetting the MSDL

To reset an MSDL and initiate a limited self-test, the MSDL must be in a manually disabled state. To perform the reset, enter

RST MSDL x

.

Displaying MSDL status

To display the status of all MSDL cards, enter

STAT MSDL

.

To display the status of a specific MSDL, enter

STAT MSDL x

. The status of the MSDL, its ports, and the operation of each port appears.

The command

STAT MSDL x FULL

displays all information about an MSDL

(card ID, bootload firmware version, base code version, base code state, operation state, date of base code activation) as well as the version, state, and activation date for each card operation.

Self-testing the MSDL

To perform extensive self-testing of an MSDL, enter

SLFT MSDL x

. This test can be activated if the card is in the manually disabled state. If the test passes, the system outputs the card ID and a pass message. If it fails, the system displays a message indicating which test failed.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NT6D80 MSDL card

Page 419 of 906

Manually isolating and correcting faults

Problems are due to configuration errors that occur during installation or hardware faults resulting from component failure during operation. See

“Symptoms and actions” on page 422 for more information on problem

symptoms and required responses.

Isolate MSDL faults using the diagnostic tools described below:

1

Observe and list the problem symptoms; for example, a typical symptom is a permanently lit LED.

2

If the LED flashes three times but the card does not enable, verify that the card is installed in a proper slot.

3

Check that the address is unique; no other card in the system can be physically set to the same device number as the MSDL.

4

If installation is correct and no address conflict exists, refer to “Newly installed MSDL cards” on page 419

or “Previously operating MSDL cards” on page 420 .

5

If the MSDL still does not operate correctly, contact your Nortel representative.

Newly installed MSDL cards

Problems that occur during MSDL card installation usually result from improperly installed, incorrectly addressed, or faulty cards.

If the LED on a newly installed MSDL does not flash three times after insertion, wait 5 minutes, then remove and reinsert. If the LED still does not flash three times, the card is faulty.


Page 420 of 906

NT6D80 MSDL card

Previously operating MSDL cards

Problems that occur during normal operation usually result from faulty cards.

Follow these steps to evaluate the situation:

1

Use the

STAT MSDL x

command to check MSDL card status. See

“Displaying MSDL status” on page 418 .

2

If the card has been manually disabled, try to enable it using

ENL MSDL x

. See “Enabling the MSDL” on page 417 . If this fails,

perform self-testing as described in step 4.

3

If the card has been disabled by the system, disable it manually with

DIS MSDL x

. See “Disabling the MSDL” on page 418 .

4

Invoke self-testing with the

SLFT MSDL x

command. See “Self-testing the MSDL” on page 418 . If self-tests fail, replace the card. If self-tests

pass, try to enable the card again, as in step 2. If the card does not enable, note the message output to the TTY and follow the recommended action.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NT6D80 MSDL card

Page 421 of 906

Replacing MSDL cards

After completing MSDL troubleshooting you may determine that one or more

MSDL cards are defective. Remove the defective cards and replace them with new ones.

Procedure 19

Replacing an MSDL card

An MSDL card can be removed from and inserted into a system module without turning off the power to the module. Follow these steps:

1

Log in on the maintenance terminal.

2

At the > prompt, type LD 37 (you can also use LD 42, LD 48, or LD 96) and press Enter.

3

Type DIS MSDL x ALL and press Enter to disable the MSDL and any active operations running on one or more of its ports. The MSDL card is now disabled.

4

Disconnect the cables from the MSDL faceplate connectors.

5

Unlatch the card-locking devices, and remove the card from the module.

6

Set the switches on the replacement card to match those on the defective card.

7

Insert the replacement card into the same card slot.

8

Observe the red LED on the front panel during self-test. If it flashes three times and stays on, it has passed the test. Go to step 8.

9

If it does not flash three times and then stay on, it has failed the test. Pull the MSDL partially out of the module and reinsert it firmly into the module.

If the problem persists, troubleshoot or replace the MSDL.

10 Connect the cables to the MSDL faceplate connectors.

11 At the . prompt in the LD 37 program, type ENL MSDL x ALL and press

Enter to enable the MSDL and its operations. If the red LED on the MSDL turns off, the MSDL is functioning correctly. Since self-tests were not invoked, no result message appears.

12 Tag the defective card(s) with a description of the problem and return them to your Nortel representative.



Page 422 of 906

NT6D80 MSDL card

Symptoms and actions

Explained here are some of the symptoms, diagnoses, and actions required to resolve MSDL card problems. Contact your Nortel representative for further assistance.

These explain the causes of problems and the actions needed to return the card to an enabled state following installation or operational problems.

Symptom:

The LED on the MSDL card is steadily lit.

or

Diagnosis:

Peripheral software download failed because of MSDL card or system disk failure.

Action:

If only one MSDL card has its LED lit, replace it.

Symptom:

Autorecovery is activated every 30 seconds to enable the MSDL.

MSDL300 messages appear on the console or TTY.

Diagnosis:

The MSDL card has been system disabled because of an incorrect address.

Action:

Verify the switch settings.

or

Diagnosis:

The MSDL card is disabled or faulty.

Action:

Refer to “Manually isolating and correcting faults” on page 419 .

Diagnosis:

The MSDL card has been system disabled because of peripheral software or configuration errors.

Action:

Refer to “System disabled actions” on page 423 .

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NT6D80 MSDL card

Page 423 of 906

System disabled actions

These explain the causes of problems and the actions needed to return the card to an enabled state following system disabling.

SYSTEM DISABLED—NOT RESPONDING

Cause:

The MSDL card is not installed or is unable to respond to the messages from the system.

Action

:

Check the MSDL messages on the console and take the action recommended. Refer to Software Input/Output: Administration

(553-3001-311).

Verify that the address switches on the MSDL are set correctly.

Verify that the card is properly installed in the shelf for at least 5 minutes.

If the problem persists, manually disable the card by entering the

DIS MSDL x

. Follow the steps described in “Previously operating

MSDL cards” on page 420 .

SYSTEM DISABLED—SELF-TESTING

Cause:

The MSDL card has reset itself or the system has reset the card to perform self-tests. Self-tests are in progress.

Action

:

Wait until self-tests are completed. Under some circumstances, the self-tests may take up to 6 minutes to complete.

Take the action described in the appropriate section below

(“SYSTEM DISABLED—SELF-TESTS PASSED” or “SYSTEM

DISABLED—SELF-TESTS FAILED”).

SYSTEM DISABLED—SELF-TESTS PASSED

Cause:

The MSDL card passed self-tests. The system will automatically download the MSDL base code, if needed, and attempt to enable the card


Page 424 of 906

NT6D80 MSDL card using autorecovery. If a diagnostic program (overlay) is active, the downloading of the MSDL base code occurs later.

Action

:

Wait to see if the system will enable the card immediately. If the

MSDL is enabled, no further action is necessary.

If the MSDL base code download fails five times, autorecovery stops. The following appears in response to the

STAT MSDL x

command;

MSDL 10: SYS DSBL—SELFTEST PASSED

NO RECOVERY UNTIL MIDNIGHT: FAILED BASE DNLD 5

TIMES

SDI 10 DIS PORT

AML 11 DIS PORT 1

DCH 12 DIS PORT 2

AML 13 DIS PORT 3

Error messages will usually indicate the problem in this case. See

“Maintaining the MSDL” on page 416

.

SYSTEM DISABLED—SELF-TESTS FAILED

Cause:

The card did not pass self-tests. These tests repeat five times. If unsuccessful, autorecovery stops until midnight unless you take action.

Action

:

Allow the system to repeat the self-tests.

If self-tests fail repeatedly, disable the card using the

DIS MSDL x

command and replace the card.

SYSTEM DISABLED—SRAM TESTS FAILED

Cause:

After self-tests passed, the system attempted to perform read/ write tests to the shared RAM on the MSDL and detected a fault. The shared RAM test will be repeated five times, and, if unsuccessful, autorecovery will not resume until midnight unless you take action.

Action:

Allow the system to repeat the self-tests.

If self-tests fail repeatedly, disable the card using the

DIS MSDL x

command and replace the card.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NT6D80 MSDL card

Page 425 of 906

SYSTEM DISABLED—OVERLOAD

Cause:

The system received an excessive number of messages from the

MSDL card in a certain time. If the card invokes overload four times in

30 minutes, it exceeds the recovery threshold as described in “SYSTEM

DISABLED—RECOVERY THRESHOLD.” The system resets the card, invokes self-tests, and attempts to enable the card. The problem may be due to excessive traffic on one or more MSDL ports. Traffic load redistribution may resolve this condition.

Action

:

Check the traffic report, which may indicate that one or more MSDL ports are handling excessive traffic.

By disabling each port, identify the port with too much traffic and allow the remaining ports to operate normally. Refer to

“Maintaining the MSDL” on page 416 . If the problem persists, place

the card in the manually disabled state by the

DIS MSDL x

command

and follow the steps in “Previously operating MSDL cards” on page 420

.

SYSTEM DISABLED—RESET THRESHOLD

Cause:

The system detected more than four MSDL card resets within 10 minutes. The system attempts to enable the card again at midnight unless you intervene.

Action:

Place the card in the manually disabled state with the

DIS MSDL x

command and follow the steps in “Previously operating MSDL cards” on page 420 .


Page 426 of 906

NT6D80 MSDL card

SYSTEM DISABLED—FATAL ERROR

Cause:

The MSDL card encountered a fatal error and cannot recover.

The exact reason for the fatal error is shown in the MSDL300 error message output to the console of TTY when the error occurred.

Action:

Check the MSDL300 message to find out the reason.

Alternatively, display the status of the MSDL, which also indicates the cause of the problem, with the

STAT MSDL x

command and check the information to find the cause of the fatal error.

Allow the system to attempt recovery. If this fails, either by reaching a threshold or detecting self-test failure, place the MSDL in the manually disabled state with the

DIS MSDL x

command and follow

the steps in “Previously operating MSDL cards” on page 420 .

SYSTEM DISABLED—RECOVERY THRESHOLD

Cause:

The system attempted autorecovery of the MSDL card more than five times within 30 minutes and each time the card was disabled again.

The system attempts to enable the card again at midnight unless you intervene.

Action

:

Place the MSDL card in a manually disabled state with the

DIS

MSDL x

command and follow the steps in “Previously operating

MSDL cards” on page 420 .

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

526

Page 427 of 906

NT7D16 Data Access card

Content list

The following are the topics in this section:

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

Controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Dialing operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Keyboard dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

Hayes dialing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

System database requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500

Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

Installing the Data Access card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

Port configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

Backplane pinout and signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514

Configuring the Data Access card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

Connecting Apple Macintosh to the DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522

Upgrading systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522


Page 428 of 906


Introduction

The NT7D16 Data Access card (DAC) is a data interface card that integrates the functionality of the QPC723A RS-232 4-Port Interface Line card (RILC) and the QPC430 Asynchronous Interface Line card (AILC). This combination allows the NT7D16 DAC to work with the RS-232-C interface, the RS-422 interface, or both.

The DAC supports up to six ports, each capable of operating in RS-232-C or

RS-422 mode. Each port supports its own parameters that, once configured and stored in the system database memory, are downloaded to the card.


Features

Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) indicate the status of the card, the call connection, and the mode (RS-232-C or RS-422) the DAC is operating in. A push-button toggle switch allows you to scan all six ports and monitor the activity on each port.

The DAC supports the following features:

• Asynchronous and full duplex operation

• Keyboard dialing

• Hayes dialing

• Data terminal equipment (DTE)/data communication equipment (DCE) mode selection

• Modem and gateway connectivity in DTE mode

• Terminal and host connectivity in DCE mode

• Forced or normal DTR

• Hotline

• Remote and local loopback testing

• Virtual leased line mode

• Inactivity timeout

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 429 of 906

• Wire test mode

• Self diagnostics

• Inbound modem pooling with any asynchronous modems

• Outbound modem pooling using “dumb” modems

• Outbound modem pooling using auto dialing modems

Controls and indicators

The LEDs on the DAC faceplate indicate the status mode for each port.

Figure 88 on page 431 shows the NT7D16 DAC faceplate.

Card status

The LED at the top of the faceplate is unlabeled. This LED is:

• off: if one or more ports are enabled

• on: if all ports are disabled

Electronic Industries Association signal monitors

The six LEDs located below the card status LED are labeled SD, RD, DTR,

DSR, DCD, and RI. They show the dynamic state of the associated Electronic

Industries Association (EIA) control leads for a specific port (as shown by the display). When in RS-422 mode, only SD and RD are utilized. When in

RS-232-C mode, the LED goes on to indicate that the signal is asserted on, or off to indicate that the signal is asserted off. When the LED is off, there is no active voltage on the signal lead.

CONNECT

This lamp lights to indicate that a data call is established for the port displayed. A data call is connected when the data module-to-data module protocol messages are successfully exchanged between the two ends.


Page 430 of 906


Port mode

This lamp lights to indicate that the port indicated is in RS-422 mode. If the lamp is dark, the specified port is in RS-232-C mode.

Port number

The number displayed specifies the port driving the EIA signal LEDs mentioned above. The push-button switch below the display allows you to rotate among the six ports to monitor the activity of any port. This display is also used to monitor several error conditions.

Port select button

This push-button switch below the display is used to select which port is monitored.

Wire test

These switches are used to select the wire test mode for each of the six ports.

Dialing operations

The DAC supports both keyboard and Hayes dialing sequences. The following discussion concerns features common to both dialing modes.

Port firmware in idle state

The port firmware is considered idle when it is expecting one of the allowed autobaud characters. The idle state is identified by either of the following conditions:

• The last prompt received was RELEASED (keyboard dialing).

• The last prompt received was OK, NO CARRIER, or ERROR (Hayes dialing).

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 431 of 906

Figure 88

NT7D16 Data Access card faceplate

card status

EIA signal monitor LEDs

CONNECT

Port mode

Port number

Port select

Wire test

SD

RD

DTR

DSR

DCD

RI

CONNECT

RS-422

2

UN SEL

WIRE TEST

UN0

UN1

UN2

UN3

UN4

UN5

OFF ON

NT7D16AA

553-5018


Page 432 of 906


Call Set-up abort

The user may abandon the call during the dialogue phase using one of the following methods:

•

Terminal off-line This method is useful for RS-232-C interface only.

The equipment drops Data Terminal Ready (DTR) to indicate an idle connection. For example, if the equipment is turned off, the DAC interprets that signal as an idle connection.

•

Long break The user sends a break (transmit line held in the OFF or

SPACE state) for more than 1.2 seconds. The break is not transmitted to the far end. At the end of the long break, the DAC port initiates call disconnect. The AILU converts the dropping of DTR into a long break for the RS-422 interface. The long break feature can be disabled through the Modify menu on the DAC port.

•

Three short breaks When the user equipment transmits three breaks to

the far end, the DAC abandons the call. Note that the breaks must be spaced at least 10 msec apart, and all three must occur within 3 seconds.

Make Port Busy on loss of DTR

This feature is implemented by means of the Make Set Busy (MSB) station feature. When this is activated, any attempt to reach the specified Data DN will result in a busy signal.

This application, which operates only in the RS-232-C mode, requires a non-standard RS-232-C interface. Only two of the possible sixteen RS-232-C modes can be used: Mode 8 (DCE, Host, Normal DTR, Manual dial), and

Mode 12 (DCE, Terminal, Normal DTR, Manual dial). This feature is configured in the software, and is downloaded to the DAC.

A DTR timeout period is started whenever the DTR signal lead makes the transition to OFF. If DTR is returned to ON within the set time period

(5 seconds), the DAC port operates as if this feature was not activated. If the

DTR remains OFF beyond the 5 seconds, the system receives an MSB feature key message. The DAC sends another MSB message when the DTR returns to ON, and the port is able to receive inbound calls.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 433 of 906

Note: If this feature is active, and the port is connected to a DTE that holds DTR OFF when idle, the port will be permanently busied out to inbound calls following the DTR timeout period.

Inactivity timeout

Once a successful data call is completed, the user's activity is monitored. If no activity occurs within the amount of time configured in the downloaded parameters, the DAC releases the call. Three minutes before the inactivity timeout takes place, the DAC sends a warning message to the near-end equipment if terminal mode is selected.

Wire test mode

The DAC allows for the EIA signaling leads to be tested to facilitate installation and troubleshooting. This feature can be invoked through the service change downloaded parameters, or by setting the appropriate front panel switch. Wire test mode only operates when the port is idle. The leads are cycled ON and OFF in 0.5 second periods (ON for 0.5 seconds, OFF for

0.5 seconds) for the number of cycles shown in Table 156 on page 433 . The

lead status can be monitored by the front panel LEDs. The test will be run indefinitely until the front panel switch is turned off, and the software wire test parameters are disabled.

Note: For the most accurate results, be sure no equipment is connected to the EIA leads.

Table 156

Wire test signal leads cycle counts

Cycle count

Label

EIA Signal Lead description Pin RS-232-C RS-422

TxD Transmit 2 1 1

RxD Receive 3 2 2

Note: The CTS signal is not included in the faceplate LED. Therefore, a

1.5-second delay will occur between the RxD lamp going on, and the DSR lamp going on.


Page 434 of 906


Table 156

Wire test signal leads cycle counts

Cycle count

Label

EIA Signal Lead description Pin RS-232-C RS-422

CTS

DSR

DCD

Clear To Send

Data Set Ready

Carrier Detect

5

6

8

3

4

5

—

—

—

DTR

RI

Data Terminal Ready

Ring Indicator

20

22

6

7

—

—

Note: The CTS signal is not included in the faceplate LED. Therefore, a

1.5-second delay will occur between the RxD lamp going on, and the DSR lamp going on.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 435 of 906

Independent storage of dialing parameters

Two dialing parameters, DCD control, and Answer mode, can be modified by both keyboard and Hayes dialing commands.

The Hayes dialing mode also allows the user to modify the Input echo control, and Prompt/Result codes transmit control. With keyboard dialing, the Input echo control and Prompt/Response codes control are determined by the downloaded parameters. They cannot be altered through dialing commands.

The DAC maintains separate buffers for keyboard and Hayes dialing modes.

Changes made to a given parameter in one mode do not affect that parameter in the other mode. When a dialing mode is selected, the DAC copies the corresponding dialing parameters into the active buffer. This buffer controls the call processing.

If the DAC receives an incoming call while idle, the most recent dialing mode is used to answer the call.

User input

User input may include either upper or lower case ASCII characters.

All entries are accumulated in an input record. This record is completed with a Terminator character. For keyboard dialing, this character is always <CR>; for Hayes dialing, it can be user defined (but default to <CR>). The entries are not processed until the Terminator character is received.

The input record is limited to 43 characters, including the Terminator, but excluding any ignored space characters.

The record can be edited by using the backspace and escape characters.

Operating modes

There are sixteen possible RS-232-C operating modes with three basic common modes of operation which correspond to three types of equipment connected to the DAC. The three modes are: modem, terminal, and host. Host mode is a subset of the terminal mode, which only suppresses the prompts at the terminal.


Page 436 of 906


The fourth mode, gateway, is a subset of the modem mode and is not normally used. This mode is useful if the attached modems do not have Ring Indicator lead. The application used is inbound modem pooling.

The different modes enable the DAC to connect to different types of devices such as modems (modes 0, 1, 2, and 3), gateways (modes 4, 5. 6, and 7), hosts

(modes 8. 9. 10, and 11), and terminals (modes 12. 13. 14, and 15). After selecting the appropriate group (that is, modem, gateway, host, or terminal), the installer should study the four different modes in that group to make the

proper selection. See Table 157.

Table 157

DAC mode of operation selection (Part 1 of 5)

Service changeable downloadable parameters (LD 11)

Operation mode

Modem/

Gateway/

Host/KBD

Forced

DTR* Hotline

Type of device to be connected Group selection

DEM PRM DTR HOT

0 (DTE)

1 (DTE)

OFF

“Host On”

(Ring

Indicator

— RI)

OFF

“Host On”

(RI)

OFF

Not

Forced

OFF

Not

Forced

OFF

Not

Hotline

ON

Hotline

Modem Pool inbound and outbound (similar to Synchronous /

Asynchronous

Data Module

(SADM) in inbound) MSB by

RI

Modem Pool inbound only

(Hotline by RI- similar to SADM)

Modes 0, 1, 2, and 3 are for

RS232 modem connectivity

* Not prompted for Type = R422. Defaults for Type = R422: DEM = DCE and DTR = OFF.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 437 of 906

Table 157



Operation mode

Modem/

Gateway/

Host/KBD

Forced

DTR* Hotline


DEM PRM DTR HOT

2 (DTE)

3 (DTE)

4 (DTE)

5 (DTE)

OFF

“Host On”

(RI)

OFF

“Host On”

(RI)

ON

“Keyboard

Dialing

(KBD) On”

(No RI)

ON

“KBD On”

(No RI)

ON

Forced

ON

Forced

OFF

Not

Forced

OFF

Not

Forced

OFF

Not

Hotline

ON

Hotline

OFF

Not

Hotline

ON

Hotline

Modem Pool inbound and outbound (for

Hayes 1200 modem) MSB by RI

Modem Pool inbound only

(Hotline for Hayes

1200 modem only)

Gateway inbound and outbound

(DTR is OFF in idle state) MSB by

Carrier Detect

(DCD)

Gateway inbound only (Hotline by

DCD: ON for

Hotline

OFF for Virtual

Leased Line (VLL)


RS232 Gateway connectivity



Page 438 of 906


Table 157



Operation mode

Modem/

Gateway/

Host/KBD

Forced

DTR* Hotline


DEM PRM DTR HOT

6 (DTE)

7 (DTE)

ON

“KBD On”

(No RI)

ON

“KBD On”

(No RI)

ON

Forced

ON

Forced

OFF

Not

Hotline

ON

Hotline

Gateway inbound and outbound

(DTR is on in idle state)

MSB by DCD

Gateway inbound only (Hotline by

DCD:

ON for Hotline

OFF for VLL)

(DTR is ON in idle state)

8 (DCE)

9 (DCE)

OFF

“Host On”

(prompts off)

OFF

“Host On”

(prompts off)

OFF

Not

Forced

OFF

Not

Forced

OFF

Not

Hotline

On

Hotline

Outbound to Host

(similar to Multi

Channel Data

System (MCDS))

Prompt PBDO =

OFF/ON

Host Hotline by

DTR


Modes 8 and 9 are for RS422

Host connectivity

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 439 of 906

Table 157



Operation mode

Modem/

Gateway/

Host/KBD

Forced

DTR* Hotline


DEM PRM DTR HOT

10 (DCE)

11 (DCE)

OFF

“Host On”

(prompts off)

OFF

“Host On”

(prompts off)

ON

Forced

ON

Forced

OFF

Not

Hotline

On

Hotline

Host similar to

MCDS but does not require DTR to be

ON

Continuous Hotline mode when DTR is

ON (VLL)


RS232 Host connectivity

12 (DCE)

13 (DCE)

ON

“KBD On”

(prompts on)

ON

“KBD On”

(prompts on)

OFF

Not

Forced

OFF

Not

Forced

OFF

Not

Hotline

On

Hotline

Terminal similar to

Asynchronous/

Synchronous

Interface Module

(ASIM) when set to

Not Forced DTR and Not Hotline

Prompt PBDO =

OFF/ON

Terminal similar to

ASIM when set to

Not Forced DTR and Hotline


Modes 12 and 13 are for RS422

Terminal connectivity


Page 440 of 906


Table 157



Operation mode

Modem/

Gateway/

Host/KBD

Forced

DTR* Hotline


DEM PRM DTR HOT

14 (DCE) ON

“KBD On”

(prompts on)

ON

Forced

OFF

Not

Hotline

Terminal similar to

ASIM when set to forced DTR and

Not Hotline

15 (DCE) ON

“KBD On”

(prompts on)

ON

Forced

On

Hotline

Continuous Hotline when DTR is ON



RS232 Terminal connectivity

(similar to ASIM)

Selecting the proper mode for Modem connectivity

Select modes 0, 1, 2, and 3 when the DAC is connected to different types of modems for inbound and outbound modem pooling. In these modes, the DAC operates as a DTE, monitors the DSR, DCD, and RI control leads, and drives the DTR lead. No menus are given and no characters are echoed when DCD is OFF. All prompts and messages are enabled for inbound calls and disabled for outbound calls.

In modes 0 and 1, the DAC drives the DTR lead OFF when in the idle state, and ON when processing an incoming or outgoing call.

In modes 2 and 3, the DAC drives the DTR lead ON except when the call is being disconnected. At disconnect, DTR is dropped for 0.2 seconds and then returns to ON.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 441 of 906

In the case of outbound modem pooling, the DAC answers the data call and drives the DTR lead ON (modes 0 and 1). Then the calling data module and the DAC form a transparent link between the calling DTE and the modem.

The DTE user may then enter the appropriate commands to the modem for dialing a remote modem. When the call is established, the modem may cause the DAC to disconnect the call by dropping either DSR or DCD.

In the case of inbound modem pooling, the modem must drive the RI lead ON to activate the DAC. Then the DAC responds by driving the DTR lead ON and making the unit busy for outbound calls (modes 0 and 1). The modem is expected to turn DCD to ON within 35 seconds; otherwise, the call will be dropped by the DAC. If the modem turns DCD ON before the 35-second timeout, the DAC validates the incoming call and prepares to accept <CR>

from the remote modem for autobaud. See Figure 89 on page 442

for more details.


Page 442 of 906


Figure 89

DAC to modem connectivity

DAC (DTE) Modem (DCE)

(not required) pin 2 pin 3 pin 5 pin 6 pin 7 pin 8 pin 20 pin 22

RS- 232 leads

>>>

>>>

<<<

<<<

<<<

<<<

<<<

TX

RX

CTS

DSR

GND

DCD

DTR

RI

553-5215

Mode 0

This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a modem, except

Hayes-1200, for inbound and outbound modem pooling (see modes 2 and 3 for Hayes-1200 modem). The modem used should have the following features:

Auto-answer capability This feature is required when the modem is used for

inbound modem pooling. It allows the modem to drive the RI lead ON when ringing is present at its tip and ring. In addition, the modem should auto-answer after the first ringing cycle if the DTR lead is ON (most modems support this feature).

Dynamic control of DCD This feature must be supported by all modems to

be connected to the DAC. It allows the modem to drive the DCD lead ON when the carrier is detected and OFF when the carrier is absent (most modems support this feature).

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 443 of 906

Auto-dial capability This feature is required when the modem is used for

outbound modem pooling. It allows the modem to go off-hook and dial the remote number (such as Smartmodem Hayes-2400 or Bizcomp).

Auto-reset capability This feature is required when the modem is used for

outbound modem pooling. The modem should execute auto-reset when the

DTR lead goes OFF. As a result, the modem must reset all its internal parameters to the default values. This feature prevents the users of the modem pool from modifying the modem’s default parameters to inappropriate values.

Configuring modems for mode 0

To configure Hayes modem 2400, enter the following commands:

AT&D2&W

ATVl&W

ATQ&W

ATEl&W

ATSO= 1&W

AT&Cl&Sl&W

AT&J&W

ATB1&W

AT&D3&W

Since the default parameters are programmable using commands, there is no guarantee that users will not change them.

To configure Bizcomp 1200 modem, set the following parameters in LD11:

DEMDTE

PRMOFF

DTROFF

HOTOFF

• To configure MULTI MODEM 224E modem, set the configuration switches as follows: switches 3 and 8 to DOWN position

• all other switches to UP position. Switch 7 should be UP when using

RJ-11 jack.


Page 444 of 906


Programing DAC for mode 0 in service change LD11

When used for inbound or outbound Modem Pool only, the DAC can be configured as R232 in LD11. When used for both inbound and outbound

Modem Pool, the DAC must be configured as R232; station hunting for the outbound modem access should be in the opposite direction to the 500/2500

station hunting for the inbound modem access. See Figure 90 on page 445 for

more details.

Note: If Call Detail Recording (CDR) is required, use separate outbound and inbound Modem Pools.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Figure 90

DAC to Modem Pool connectivity

System

Outbound hunting

DAC

R232 port 0

R232 port 1

R232 port 2

R232 port 3

Inbound hunting

500/2500 line card

Unit 3

Unit 2

Unit 1

Unit 0


Page 445 of 906

Modem 1

Modem 2

Modem 3

Modem 4

553-AAA1126


Page 446 of 906


Mode 1

This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to an auto-answer modem for inbound Hotline operation. In this mode, the DAC automatically executes Hotline operation when RI is driven ON by the modem. The modem used should have the following features:

Auto-answer capability This feature is required when the modem is used for

inbound modem pooling. It allows the modem to drive the RI lead ON when ringing is present at its tip and ring. In addition, the modem should auto-answer after the first ringing cycle if the DTR lead is ON (most modems support this feature).

Dynamic control of DCD This feature must be supported by all modems to

be connected to the DAC. It allows the modem to drive the DCD lead ON when the carrier is detected and OFF when the carrier is absent (most modems support this feature).

The baud rate of the Hotline call is determined by switches 6 and 8, and the system should be programmed to allow inbound modem calls only.

Configuring modems for mode 1

Most dumb modems can be configured for this mode. The modem must be able to auto-answer and have dynamic control of DCD as described in mode

0. Smart modems can also be used if set to the dumb mode of operation.

Hayes 2400, Bizcomp 1200, and MULTI MODEM 224E can be used when set up as follows:

• For Hayes 2400, the dumb-mode-strap should be moved to the dumb-position (see Hayes manual).

• For Bizcomp 1200 modem, set the following parameters in LD11:

DEMDTE

PRMOFF

DTROFF

HOTON

Hayes 1200 cannot be used in this mode when the default parameters are selected (see mode 3).

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 447 of 906


The DAC must be configured as R232 (the Autodial feature key is used for this mode). The DAC must not be configured as an Asynchronous Data

Module (ADM) trunk.

Mode 2

This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a Hayes-1200 modem for inbound and outbound modem pooling. This mode is created specially to resolve some problems that were encountered with this modem, namely, the auto-reset implementation. When this modem is operating in the auto-reset mode, it drives both RI and DCD ON as long as DTR is OFF. This problem was resolved by driving DTR ON in the idle state, and OFF for 0.2 seconds, and then ON when an established call is dropped. The DAC also ignores the status of RI and DCD for approximately 2 seconds after a call is released to avoid false inbound call initiation.

Configuring Hayes 1200 for mode 2

To configure this modem, set the following parameters in LD11:

DEMDTE

PRMOFF

DTRON

HOTOFF

To configure this modem, set the configuration switches as follows:

• switches 3, 8, and 10 to DOWN position

• all other switches to UP position. Switch 7 should be UP when using

RJ-11 jack.


When used for inbound or outbound Modem Pool only, the DAC can be configured as R232 in LD11. When used for both inbound and outbound

Modem Pool, the DAC must be configured as R232. When the DAC is programmed as station hunting, outbound modem access should be in the opposite direction to the 500/2500 station hunting for the inbound modem access.


Page 448 of 906


Note: If Call Detail Recording (CDR) is required, use separate outbound and inbound Modem Pools.

Mode 3

This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a Hayes-1200 modem for inbound Hotline operation. It is recommended that mode 1 be used for inbound Hotline operations if some other modem is available.

However, if only Hayes-1200 modems are available, then this mode could be used as a last resort.

Configuring Hayes 1200 for mode 3

For Hayes 1200 modem, set the following parameters in LD11:

DEMDTE

PRMOFF

DTRON

HOTON

To configure this modem, set the configuration switches as follows:

• all switches to UP position, except for switch 4. Switch 7 should be UP when using RJ-11 jack.


The DAC must be configured as R232 (the Autodial feature is used for this mode). The DAC must not be configured as an ADM trunk.

Selecting the proper mode for Gateway connectivity

Select modes 4, 5, 6, and 7 when the DAC is connected to different types of gateways for inbound and outbound operations. The term gateway refers to any equipment that has the following characteristics:

• The equipment must be a DCE.

• The equipment does not drive RI lead (optional, the DAC ignores this lead).

• The equipment must drive DCD lead dynamically.

• The equipment drives DSR lead (optional).

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 449 of 906

• The equipment can monitor the DTR lead (optional, depending on the mode selected).

In modes 4, 5, 6, and 7, the DAC:

• operates as a DTE

• monitors the DSR

• monitors DCD control leads

• drives the DTR lead

The RI lead is ignored. No menus or prompts are given when DCD is OFF.

All prompts and messages are enabled for inbound calls and disabled for

outbound calls. See Figure 91 on page 450 for more details.

In modes 4 and 5, the DAC drives the DTR lead OFF in the idle state, and ON when processing an incoming or outgoing call.

In modes 6 and 7, the DAC drives the DTR lead ON except when the call is being disconnected. At disconnect, DTR is dropped for 0.2 seconds and then returns to ON.

With outbound gateway access, the DAC answers the data call and drives the

DTR lead ON (modes 4 and 5; in modes 6 and 7, DTR is already ON). Then the calling data module and the DAC form a transparent link between the calling Data Module (DM) and the gateway. The DM user may then enter the appropriate commands to the gateway to establish a data call. The DAC expects the gateway to drive DCD ON (modes 4 and 5 only) within

35 seconds. If the gateway fails to do so, the DAC turns DTR OFF and drops the call. When the call is established, the gateway may cause the DAC to disconnect the call by dropping either DSR or DCD.

For inbound gateway access, the gateway must drive the DCD lead ON to activate the DAC. When the DAC receives this signal, it drives the DTR lead

ON, makes the unit busy for outbound calls (modes 4 and 5; in modes 6 and

7, DTR is already ON), and prepares to accept <CR> for autobaud. The DAC expects DCD to remain ON for as long as the data call is established.


Page 450 of 906


Figure 91

DAC to Gateway connectivity

DAC (DTE)

(not required)

(not required) pin 2 pin 3 pin 5 pin 6 pin 7 pin 8 pin 20 pin 22

RS- 232 leads

>>>

>>>

<<<

<<<

<<<

<<<

<<<

TX

RX

CTS

DSR

GND

DCD

DTR

RI

Gateway (DCE)

553-5217

Mode 4

This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a gateway for inbound and outbound operation. The characteristics of the gateways to be used with this mode are:

Auto-answer capability This feature is required when the gateway is used

for inbound operation. It allows the gateway to drive the DCD lead ON when the inbound data call is pending. In addition, the gateway should auto-answer when the DTR lead is ON.

Dynamic control of DCD This feature must be supported by all gateways to

be connected to the DAC. It allows the gateway to drive the DCD lead ON when the data call is established, and OFF when the data call is disconnected.

In the inbound operation, the DAC drives the DTR lead OFF until the gateway drives the DCD lead ON. Then, the DAC drives DTR ON and makes that unit busy for any outbound calls. After that, the user of the gateway may enter the proper commands to establish a local data call to any DM.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 451 of 906

In the outbound operation, the DAC drives the DTR lead OFF until another

DM calls it for outbound accessing. The DAC answers the data call and drives the DTR lead ON. The calling DM is then transparently connected to the gateway. The DAC requires the gateway to drive the DCD lead to ON within

35 seconds after the outbound call is connected. Call disconnection may be initiated by dropping DCD (or DSR) from ON to OFF.

Programing DAC for mode 4 in service change LD 11

When used for inbound or outbound gateway access, the DAC can be configured as R232 in LD 11. When used for both inbound and outbound gateway access, the DAC must be configured as R232. When the DAC is programmed as station hunting, outbound gateway access should be in the

opposite direction to the hunting for inbound gateway access. See Figure 92

for more details.

Note: If CDR is required, use separate outbound and inbound gateway access.

Figure 92

DAC to Gateway—Inbound/Outbound connectivity

System

Outbound hunting

DAC

R232 port 0

R232 port 1

R232 port 2

R232 port 3

Gateway 1

Gateway 2

Gateway 3

Gateway 4

Inbound hunting

553-AAA1127


Page 452 of 906


Mode 5

This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to an auto-answer gateway for inbound Hotline operation. In this mode, the DAC automatically executes Hotline operation when DCD is driven ON by the gateway. If the

DM being called by the Hotline operation is busy or not answering, the DAC will place repeated Hotline calls as long as the DCD lead is ON until the called unit answers. The gateway used in this mode should have the following features:

Auto-answer capability This feature is required when the gateway is used

for inbound operation. It allows the gateway to drive the DCD lead ON when the inbound data call is pending. In addition, the gateway should auto-answer when the DTR lead is ON.

Dynamic control of DCD This feature must be supported by all gateways to

be connected to the DAC. It allows the gateway to drive the DCD lead ON when the data call is established, and OFF when the data call is disconnected.

The baud rate of the Hotline call is determined by the AUTB and BAUD parameters in LD 11. The system should be programmed to allow inbound modem calls only.



Mode 6

This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a gateway that requires DTR to be ON always except during call disconnection. In this mode, the DAC can be used for both inbound and outbound operations. The operation of this mode is similar to mode 4 except for the following:

• The DTR lead is ON in the idle state.

• The DTR lead will be dropped OFF for 0.2 seconds when an established call is disconnected.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 453 of 906


When used for inbound or outbound gateway access, the DAC can be configured as R232 in LD 11. When used for both inbound and outbound gateway access, the DAC must be configured as R232. When the DAC is programmed as station hunting, outbound gateway access should be in the

opposite direction to the hunting for inbound gateway access. See Figure 92 on page 451 for more details.


Mode 7

This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a gateway for inbound Hotline operation. The operation of this mode is similar to mode 5 except for the following:

• The DTR lead is ON in the idle state.

• The DTR lead will be dropped OFF for 0.2 second when an established call is disconnected.

The baud rate of inbound Hotline calls is determined by programmable database. The system should be programmed to allow inbound calls only on the DAC unit.



Selecting the proper mode for Host connectivity

Select modes 8, 9, 10, and 11 when the DAC is connected to different types of hosts (DTE). In these modes, the DAC operates as a DCE and drives DSR,

DCD, and RI control leads (see Figure 93 on page 454 ). CTS, DSR, and DCD

are driven OFF in the idle state.

The DAC will not send any menu or prompt to the host, nor will it echo any command sent from the host. The CTS, DSR, and DCD will be driven ON until the call is released. An incoming call to the DAC causes the RI lead to


Page 454 of 906

NT7D16 Data Access card go ON for 2 seconds and then OFF for 4 seconds until the call is answered by the host. When the host turns DTR ON, the DAC answers the call. If

DM-to-DM protocol exchange is successful, the DAC drives CTS, DSR, and

DCD ON. If DTR was already ON, the DAC does not drive RI ON.

Figure 93

DAC to Host connectivity

Host (DTE) DAC (DCE) pin 2 pin 3 pin 5 pin 6 pin 7 pin 8 pin 20 pin 22

>>>

>>>

<<<

<<<

<<<

<<<

<<<

TX

RX

CTS

DSR

GND

DCD

DTR

RI not required for mode 10

RS- 232 leads

553-5219

Mode 8

This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a host for host accessing. In this mode, the DAC operates in a similar manner to the MCDS.

The hosts used with this mode should have the following characteristics:

Auto-answer capability The host should be capable of monitoring the RI

lead for detection of incoming calls. When RI is turned ON by the DAC, the host responds by driving DTR ON, which forces the DAC to answer the incoming call. If the host drives the DTR lead ON all the time, incoming calls will always be immediately answered and the RI lead will not be turned ON by the DAC. If DM-to-DM protocol exchange is successful, the DAC drives

CTS, DSR, and DCD ON.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 455 of 906

Dynamic control of DTR This feature is required only if the host must be

capable of releasing an established call. The host should be able to drop an established data call by driving DTR OFF for more than 100 ms.

Note: If the PBDO parameter in LD 11 is ON, then Make Set Busy will be activated when DTR is driven OFF for more than five seconds.

In this mode, the DAC will not send any menus or prompts to the host.

However, the host can still originate an outgoing call by blind-dialing

(sending commands to the DAC without receiving echoes).

Programing DAC for mode 8 in service change LD 11 When used for

inbound or outbound host access, the DAC can be configured as R232 or

R422 in LD 11. When used for both inbound and outbound host access, the

DAC must be configured as R232 or R422. When the DAC is programmed as station hunting, outbound host access should be in the opposite direction to the hunting for inbound host access.

Note: If CDR is required, use separate outbound and inbound host access.

Mode 9

This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a host and

Hotline call origination is required. In this mode, the host will be able to

Hotline to a specific data unit by simply driving the DTR lead ON. The transition of DTR from OFF to ON causes the DAC to Hotline to the Autodial

DN. The hosts used with this mode should have the following characteristics.

Dynamic control of DTR for call origination The host should be capable of

driving the DTR lead from OFF to ON to initiate the Hotline call. If the host always drives the DTR lead ON (not capable of dynamic control), mode 11 should be used.

Dynamic control of DTR for releasing established calls This feature is

required only if it is required that the host be capable of releasing an established call. The host should be able to drop an established data call by driving DTR OFF for more than 100 ms.


Page 456 of 906



The DAC must be configured as R232 or R422 (the Autodial feature is used for this mode). The DAC must not be configured as an ADM trunk.

Mode 10

This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a host for inbound host accessing. The host in this mode is not required to monitor RI or drive DTR. This mode is similar to mode 8, except for the following:

• The status of DTR lead is assumed to be always ON, even when the actual condition of that lead is OFF (forced-DTR). The DAC always answers an incoming call regardless of the status of DTR.

• The host cannot release an established data call by driving DTR OFF. As a result, the host cannot initiate call release except with a long break or three short breaks.

In this mode, the DAC does not send any menus or prompts to the host.

However, the host can still originate an outgoing call by blind-dialing

(sending commands to the DAC without receiving echoes).


When used for inbound or outbound host access, the DAC can be configured as R232 in LD 11. When used for both inbound and outbound host access, the

DAC must be configured as R232. When the DAC is programmed as station hunting, outbound host access should be in the opposite direction to the hunting for inbound host access.


Mode 11

This mode provides a “virtual leased line” and the meaning of the Forced

DTR switch is re-defined. The operation is similar to having a leased line feature, where the connection between two extensions is always established.

The DAC does not send any menus or prompts to the host. The baud rate of the Hotline call is determined by switches 6, 7, and 8.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 457 of 906

This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a host and continuous Hotline operation is required. In this mode, the DAC repeatedly tries to Hotline to the Autodial DN as long as DTR is ON. When the DAC tries to Hotline to a busy Data Module, it activates Ring Again and the connection is established as soon as the called unit is free. After establishing the data call, if the called unit releases the call for any reason, the DAC will automatically try to Hotline again to reestablish the call.

If the data unit being called does not answer the Hotline call, the DAC tries to place another Hotline call once every 40 seconds until the called unit answers. This mode is recommended only when a permanent connection between a host and another data unit is required.



Selecting the proper mode for Terminal connectivity

Select modes 12, 13, 14,and 15 when the DAC is connected to different types of terminals. In these modes, the DAC operates as a DCE, drives DSR, DCD, and RI control leads, and monitors DTR lead in modes 12, 13, and 15 (see

Figure 94 on page 458 ). DTR is ignored in mode 14. All the menus and

prompts are sent to the terminals and all the commands from the terminals are echoed. CTS, DSR, and DCD are driven OFF during the idle state (data call is not established).

When the call is released, DSR and DCD are turned OFF for 200 ms. The RI lead is controlled only in modes 12, 13, and 15, and is driven OFF in the idle and connect states. An incoming call to the DAC causes the RI lead to go ON for 2 seconds and then OFF for 4 seconds until the call is answered by the terminal. When the terminal turns DTR ON, the DAC answers the call.

Mode 12

This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a terminal

(DTE) for inbound and outbound data calls. This mode is similar to the operation of the ASIM when set to not-forced-DTR and not-Hotline. In this mode, call origination and auto-answer will not be executed by the DAC,


Page 458 of 906


Figure 94

DAC to Terminal connectivity

Terminal (DTE) DAC (DCE) pin 2 pin 3 pin 5 pin 6 pin 7 pin 8 pin 20 pin 22

>>>

>>>

<<<

<<<

<<<

<<<

<<<

TX

RX

CTS

DSR

GND

DCD

DTR

RI not required for mode 14

RS- 232 leads

553-5220 unless the DTR lead is driven ON by the terminal. Any terminal that drives the DTR lead ON can be used with this mode (such as VT100 or VT102).

The DAC drives CTS, DSR, and DCD ON, except when a call is dropped or when control—Z is entered during the idle state. In this case, the DAC drives those leads OFF for 0.2 seconds and then ON. When the DTR lead is driven

OFF by the terminal, the DAC does not execute autobaud, nor will it respond to any command.

Note: If the PBDO parameter in LD 11 is ON, then Make Set Busy will be activated when DTR is driven OFF for more than five seconds.


The DAC must be configured as R232 or R422 since Autodial, Speed Call, and Display commands are likely to be used.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 459 of 906

Mode 13


(DTE) and Hotline call origination is required. This mode is similar to the operation of the ASIM when set to not-forced-DTR and Hotline. In this mode, the terminal is able to Hotline to a specific data unit by driving the DTR lead

ON. The transition of DTR from OFF to ON causes the DAC to Hotline to the

Autodial DN. Any terminal that drives DTR lead ON can be used with this mode (such as VT100 or VT102).

The DAC drives CTS, DSR, and DCD ON, except when a call is dropped. In this case, the DAC drives those leads OFF for 0.2 second and then ON. The baud rate of the Hotline call is determined by the AUTB and BAUD parameters in LD 11.


The DAC must be configured as R232 or R422 since Autodial, Speed Call, and Display commands are likely to be used.

Mode 14


(DTE) for inbound and outbound data calls. This mode is similar to the operation of the ASIM when set to forced-DTR and not-Hotline. The terminal used with this mode is not required to drive the DTR lead. This mode of operation is similar to mode 12, except for the following:

• The status of DTR lead is assumed to be always ON, even when the actual condition of that lead is OFF (forced-DTR). The DAC always answers an incoming call regardless of the DTR status.

• The terminal cannot release an established data call by driving DTR

OFF. As a result, the terminal cannot initiate call release except with a long break or three short breaks.


The DAC must be configured as R232 since Autodial, Speed Call, and

Display commands are likely to be used.


Page 460 of 906


Mode 15

This mode provides a “virtual leased line” and the meaning of the “Forced

DTR” switch is re-defined.


(DTE) and continuous Hotline call origination is required. In this mode, the

DAC repeatedly tries to Hotline to the Autodial DN as long as DTR is ON.

This operation is similar to having a leased line feature, where the connection between two extensions is always established. When the DAC tries to Hotline to a busy Data Module, it activates Ring Again and the connection is established as soon as the called unit is free. After establishing the data call, if the called unit releases the call for any reason, the DAC automatically tries to Hotline again to reestablish the call.

If the data unit being called does not answer the Hotline call, the DAC tries to place another Hotline call once every 40 seconds until the called unit answers. This mode is recommended only when a permanent connection between a terminal and another data unit is required. The baud rate of the

Hotline call is determined by the AUTB and BAUD parameters in LD 11.

The status of CTS, DSR, and DCD is controlled in a similar manner as described in mode 13.


The DAC must be configured as R232 since Autodial, Speed Call, and

Display commands are likely to be used.

Mode selection baud rates

The AUTB and BAUD parameters in LD 11 provide two functions for calls originated from a DAC:

• Provide a way to select a baud rate of a Hotline call. The DAC starts the

Hotline operation without receiving a <CR> for autobaud.

• Set the DAC to operate at a fixed baud rate. The DAC does not return the menu or Hotline unless a <CR> is received at the selected baud rate.

Normally the DAC should be selected to operate at autobaud.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 461 of 906

Note: If AUTB is set to ON, the BAUD parameter is not prompted. If

AUTB is set to OFF, you may select a fixed baud rate in response to the prompt BAUD.

When the DAC receives a call, it adapts to the caller’s baud rate.

See Table 158 for connect and disconnect protocol.

Table 158

Connect and disconnect protocol (Part 1 of 12)

Mode of operation Interface application

Mode 0

Comments

Inbound and Outbound modem pools

For inbound modem pools, most dumb modems may be used.

For outbound modem pools, only smart modems

(auto-dialer) may be used.

Outbound modem pooling:

Modem sends ring/no ring cycle (2 seconds ON, 4 seconds OFF) to initiate connection.

DAC responds by driving DTR ON within the first ring cycle.

Modem responds by answering the incoming call and driving DCD ON within 35 seconds.

If modem does not drive DCD ON within 35 seconds, the DAC drops DTR and goes idle.

Remote DTE sends <CR> to the DAC. The DAC autobauds and sends initial prompt.


Page 462 of 906


Table 158


Mode of operation Interface application Comments

Outbound modem pooling:

Local DM user calls to the outbound modem access number.

DAC answers the outbound call and drives DTR

ON.

Modem receives DTR and prepares to receive commands.

Local DM user enters the proper commands for calling the remote modem.

Remote modem answers; data call established.

Call disconnection (DAC):

DAC drops DTR if the local DM user drops the call. The modem must drop DCD.

DAC drops DTR if the remote modem sends a long break or three short breaks. The modem must drop DCD.

Call disconnection (modem):

Modem drops DCD (DCD OFF for 100 ms or more). The DAC drops DTR and disconnects the local call.

Modem drops DSR (DSR OFF for 100 ms or more). The DAC drops DTR and disconnects the local call.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 463 of 906

Table 158



Mode 1

Mode 2

Comments

Inbound Hotline modem pools

Most dumb modems can be used for this application.

Inbound and Outbound modem pools (with forced

DTR)

Use this mode with Hayes

1200 modem.

Inbound Hotline modem pooling:

Modem sends ring/no ring cycle (2 seconds ON, 4 seconds OFF) to initiate connection.

DAC responds by trying to establish a Hotline call to a specific Data Module (Autodial).

When Data Module answers, then and only then, the DAC turns DTR ON.

Modem should answer the incoming call when

DTR goes ON and should turn DCD ON within 35 seconds; otherwise the DAC disconnects the call.

Call disconnection:

Disconnection is the same as mode 0.

Inbound and Outbound modem pooling:

The DAC operation is identical to mode 0 except that DTR is always forced ON (except during disconnect).


Disconnection is identical to mode 0 except:

—When a call is released, the DAC turns DTR

OFF for 0.2 second and then ON. DTR stays ON until the next call release.

—The DAC ignores RI and DCD for about 2 seconds after releasing a call. This avoids problems with the Hayes 1200 modem.


Page 464 of 906


Table 158



Mode 3 Inbound Hotline modem pools (with forced DTR)

Use this mode with Hayes

1200 modem.

Mode 4 Inbound and Outbound

Gateway access

Comments

Inbound Hotline modem pooling:



Disconnection is identical to mode 2.

Inbound Gateway connection protocol:

Gateway raises DCD to initiate connection.

DAC responds by driving DTR ON.

Gateway does not have to turn DSR ON.

However, toggling DSR or DCD from ON to OFF causes the DAC to disconnect the call.

Gateway user sends <CR> to the DAC.

DAC autobauds and sends the initial prompt to the Gateway.

Outbound Gateway connection protocol:

Local DM user calls the DAC that is connected to a Gateway.

DAC answers the data call and drives DTR ON.

Gateway receives DTR and prepares to receive commands.

Local DM user is now transparently connected to the Gateway.

Gateway is expected to drive DCD ON within 35 seconds. If the Gateway fails to do so, the DAC drops DTR and the call.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 465 of 906

Table 158



Mode 5 Inbound Hotline Gateway access

Comments


DAC drops DTR if the local DM user drops the call. The Gateway must drop DCD.

DAC drops DTR if the DAC receives a long break or three short breaks. The Gateway must drop

DCD.

Call disconnection (Gateway):

Gateway drops DCD (DCD OFF for 100 ms or more). The DAC drops DTR and disconnects the local call.

Gateway drops DSR (DSR OFF for 100 ms or more). The DAC drops DTR and disconnects the local call.

Inbound Hotline Gateway protocol:

Gateway raises DCD to initiate connection.


When Data Module answers, then and only then, the DAC turns DTR ON.

Gateway does not have to turn DSR ON.

However, toggling DSR or DCD from ON to OFF causes the DAC to drop the call.

Gateway is not transparently linked to the equipment connection to the DM.




Page 466 of 906


Table 158



Mode 6

Mode 7

Comments

Inbound and Outbound

Gateway access (with forced

DTR)

Inbound Hotline Gateway access (with forced DTR)

Inbound and Outbound Gateway protocol:

The DAC operation is identical to mode 4 except that DTR is always forced ON (except during disconnect). The establishment of the outbound call does not require DCD to be driven ON by the

Gateway.


Disconnection is identical to mode 4 except that when a call is released, the DAC turns DTR OFF for 0.2 second and then ON. DTR stays ON until the next call release.

Inbound Hotline Gateway protocol:




553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 467 of 906

Table 158



Mode 8 Host access for call origination and answering

Comments

Host answering an incoming data call:

Local DM user dials the access number to initiate the connection.

DAC responds by driving RI ON for 2 seconds and

OFF for 4 seconds until the Host answers by turning DTR ON. (If the Host always drives DTR

ON, the DAC immediately answers the call without driving RI ON.)

When Host receives RI ON, it should respond by turning DTR ON.

DAC answers when it receives DTR ON.

DAC turns DSR, DCD, and CTS ON when the call is completely established. The local DM user is now transparently linked to the Host.

Host originating a data call:

Host turns DTR ON to initiate the connection.

DAC prepares to receive <CR> for autobaud.

Host sends <CR> followed by other commands for establishing a data call (the DAC does not echo a command, nor does it send any prompt to the Host (blind dialing).

When the data call is completely established, the

DAC turns DSR, DCD, and CTS ON as long as the call is connected.


Page 468 of 906


Table 158



Mode 9 Hotline call origination

Comments

Call disconnect ion (DAC):

DAC drops DSR, DCD, and CTS if the local DM user releases the call. The Host should then drop the call.

DAC drops DSR, DCD, and CTS if the Host sends a long break or three short breaks. The Host should then drop the call.

Call disconnection (Host):

The Host toggles DTR from ON to OFF (DTR must be OFF for 100 ms or more). The DAC drops

DSR, DCD, and CTS and disconnects the local call.

Hotline originated by Host (Inbound):

Host toggles DTR from OFF to ON to initiate the

Hotline call.


3When Data Module answers, then and only then, the DAC turns DSR, DCD, and CTS ON (the DAC does not send any prompts to the Host). If the

Data Module is busy or not responding, the DAC requires another transition of DTR from OFF to

ON to initiate another Hotline call. If the Host keeps DTR ON, the DAC does not try to establish another Hotline call, unless the Host sends a

<CR> while DTR is ON.



553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 469 of 906

Table 158



Mode 10 Host access for call origination and answering

(with forced DTR)


(Virtual Leased Line)

Comments

Host access for call origination and answering:

The DAC operation is identical to mode 8 except

DTR is always considered ON, even when the

Host is driving DTR OFF.


DAC drops DSR, DCD, and CTS if the local DM user releases the call. The Host should then drop the call.

DAC drops DSR, DCD, and CTS if the Host sends a long break or three short breaks. The Host should then drop the call.

Hotline origination by Host (continuous

Hotline mode):

The DAC operation is similar to mode 9 except the

Host initiates the Hotline call by driving DTR ON.

However, if the DM is busy or not answering, the

DAC will continuously try to originate Hotline calls once every 40 seconds (as long as DTR stays

ON) until the called DM answers the call.




Page 470 of 906


Table 158



Mode 12 Terminal access for call origination and answering

Comments

Terminal answering an incoming data call:

DAC drives DSR, DCD, and CTS ON in the idle state.

Local DM user dials the access number to initiate the connection.

DAC responds by driving RI ON for 2 seconds and

OFF for 4 seconds, until the terminal answers by turning DTR ON (if the terminal always drive DTR

ON, the DAC immediately answers the call without driving RI ON).

When terminal receives RI ON, it should respond by turning DTR ON.

DAC answers when DTR goes ON and the local

DM user is now transparently linked to the terminal.

Terminal originating an outgoing data call:


Terminal turns DTR ON to initiate the connection.

DAC prepares to receive <CR> for autobaud.

Terminal sends <CR> followed by other commands for establishing a data call (the DAC echoes all commands).


If the local DM user releases the call, the DAC turns DSR, DCD, and CTS OFF for 0.2 second and then ON.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 471 of 906

Table 158



Mode 13

Mode 14

Hotline call origination

Terminal access for call origination and answering

(with forced DTR)

Comments

Call disconnection (terminal):

Terminal toggles DTR from ON to OFF (DTR must be OFF for 100 ms or more). The DAC turns DSR,

DCD, and CTS OFF for 0.2 second and then ON.

Terminal sends a long break or three short breaks. The DAC turns DSR, DCD, and CTS OFF for 0.2 second and then ON.

Hotline originated by terminal:


Terminal toggles DTR from OFF to ON to initiate

Hotline call.

DAC responds by trying to establish a Hotline call to a specific DM (Autodial).

If Data Module is busy or not responding, the DAC requires another transition of DTR from OFF to

ON to initiate another Hotline call. If the terminal keeps DTR ON, the DAC does not try to establish another Hotline call unless the terminal sends a

<CR> while DTR is ON.



Terminal access for call origination and answering:

The DAC operation is identical to mode 12 except that DTR is considered to be always ON, even when the terminal is driving DTR OFF.


Page 472 of 906


Table 158




(Virtual Leased Line)

Comments


If the local DM user drops the call, the DAC turns

DSR, DCD, and CTS OFF for 0.2 second and then ON.

Call disconnection (terminal):

The terminal sends a long break or three short breaks. The DAC turns DSR, DCD, and CTS OFF for 0.2 second, and then ON.

Hotline call origination by terminal:

The DAC operation is similar to mode 13 except the terminal initiates the Hotline call by driving

DTR ON. However, if the called DM is busy or not answering, the DAC will continuously try to originate Hotline calls once every 40 seconds (as long as DTR remains ON) until the Data Module answers the call.



Keyboard dialing

Keyboard dialing is an interactive dialogue mode between the connected equipment and the DAC. This dialogue allows equipment to give dialing commands to the DAC in order to make a data call to another far-end data port. Keyboard dialing supports a modify mode that allows the user to modify certain dialing parameters.

The following keyboard dialing features are supported with the DAC:

• Autobaud from 110 to 19200 bps

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 473 of 906

• Autoparity to ensure that the keyboard dialing menu is readable on the data terminal during the interactive dialogue mode

• Originating calls to local and remote hosts

• Ring Again

• Speed Call

• Two answer modes for incoming calls: manual and auto

• Digit display

• Dialing by mnemonic

Initiating conditions

In order for the DAC to respond to user commands/entries, the following conditions must be met:

• The DAC must be active (power ON), and have successfully received the downloaded parameters from the system.

• The user equipment must be active, and, if in RS-232-C mode, must assert these control lines

— DCE mode: DTR (unless Forced DTR has been software selected)

— DTE mode: RI has cycled the appropriate number of times

Echo

During call setup (dialogue phase), all user input is echoed back to the user equipment. Once the call is established, the DAC is transparent to data communication. To get echoed characters after a call is established, the far end must provide the echo.

Note: When RS-232-C modes 12-15 (Host modes) are selected, there is no echo during dialogue phase.


Page 474 of 906


Prompts

Call processing prompts are in upper case letters only. Other prompts consist of both upper and lower case characters, and the dialogue session depicts the actual upper/lower case letters used.

All prompts are preceded by the Carriage Return and Line Feed ASCII characters (<CR>, <LF>).

Prompts requesting user input are terminated with the ASCII colon (:).

Prompts requiring a Yes or No answer are terminated by a question mark (?), followed by a list of allowable responses. The default response, if allowed, is bracketed.

Call abort

In addition to the methods mentioned above, which are common to both

Hayes and keyboard modes, keyboard dialing supports the following method to abort a call during the dialogue phase.

• Sending the Control Z character (simultaneously pressing the control and

Z keys) sends a message to the DAC to immediately abandon the data call setup.

Autobaud

All user dialogue must begin with Autobaud detection. This allows the DAC to determine the user equipment baud rate. During this phase, only <CR> will be recognized by the DAC. All other entries are ignored, and no entries are echoed. Once a valid <CR> is detected, the DAC responds with the New

Menu prompt at the baud rate detected. If a fixed rate has been determined by the downloaded parameters, the DAC will look for that rate. If the rates agree, the dialogue phase begins. If not, the following prompt is sent to the user:

Baud Rate xxxx expected

After receiving a number of invalid responses, the DAC reverts to autobaud detection, since the terminal data speed may have changed.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 475 of 906

Keyboard Autobaud is allowed after the call is placed in off-line mode.

Note: If the Hayes autobaud characters A or a are sent, the DAC will enter Hayes dialing mode. Autobaud character detection is selected in the software.

Auto parity

The user can override the downloaded parity rate by entering the ASCII period (.) as a command. This period must be the only command sent, followed by <CR>. The period must be sent only when the Primary menu is displayed, and can be sent only once during a call setup session.

Dialing operation

For the purposes of this document, when illustrating the prompt/response sequences, the bold type is what the user enters on the keyboard. All other type represents the DAC output. Likewise, “xxxxxxx,” “yyyyyyy,” or

“zzzzzzz” represents numbers entered by the user, or dialed by the DAC, and in no way indicates the absolute character limit. A maximum of 43 characters is allowed.

When the user enters the autobaud character, <CR>, and the dialing mode is

Manual (not Hotline), the DAC sends the following menu:

<CR><LF><CR><LF><LF>ENTER NUMBER OR H (FOR HELP):<SP>

If the user enters <CR>, the DAC presents this prompt again. When a number is entered, the DAC attempts to place the call. Entering H at this point will list the Primary Commands menu:

Primary Commands Menu:

A - Auto Dial C - Call

D - Display M - Modify

S - Speed Call

CTRL Z (Abort Keyboard Dialing)

Select: <SP>


Page 476 of 906


Whenever a Primary command is expected, the user may enter the Parity command (period). If Auto Parity has already been done, the Invalid

Command menu is presented:

Invalid Command/Entry

Re-Enter: <SP>

The user's port may be set to idle by entering CTRL Z. Any call in progress will be dropped, and any Ring Again placed will be released. Once the

Primary Command menu has appeared, the user must enter C to place a call.

The DAC will not accept a number in place of a Primary command.

Primary commands

Once the Primary menu has appeared, only primary commands are accepted.

Call (C)

The Call command must be used to place a call once the Primary menu has appeared. The DAC will not accept a number only.

C<CR>

ENTER NUMBER:<SP>

xxxxxxx<CR>

CALLING xxxxxxx

RINGING

ANSWERED

CALL CONNECTED. SESSION STARTS

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 477 of 906

Autodial (A)

The Autodial command allows the user to dial a predefined number stored within the local system. The DAC will automatically attempt to place a data call to the Autodial number:

A <CR>

CALLING xxxxxxx

RINGING

ANSWERED


The currently stored Autodial number may be viewed by entering the primary command D (Display), followed by the selection A (Autodial). See the

Display discussion later in this document.

Note: If the Autodial feature key is not defined in the software you will be notified by the following: Feature key Autodial not defined.

Speed Call (S)

The Speed Call command allows the user to make a call to a number associated with a 1-, 2-, or 3-digit access code. The user supplies the access code, and the DAC places the call according to the code supplied.

S<CR>

ENTER ACCESS CODE: <SP>

xxx<CR>

CALLING yyyyyy

RINGING

ANSWERED


If the DAC does not know the access code length, you will be notified by:

ENTER ACCESS CODE (all digits) <SP>. Leading zeroes must be entered


Page 478 of 906

NT7D16 Data Access card if the access code is less than the maximum number of digits allowed for the

Speed Call list for the associated data DN (DDN).

Note: If the Speed Call feature key is not defined in the software, you will be notified by the following: Feature key Speed Call not defined.

Both the Autodial and Speed Call commands can be changed with the Modify command (M). Additionally, the Speed Call number can be changed in the service change. When this command is entered, the Modify menu appears.

Modify Menu:

A - Auto Number D - DCD Control

L - Long Break M - Manual Answer

Q - Quit Modify Menu R - Remote Loopback

S - Speed Call


Select:<SP>

Any of these choices leads to another series of prompts and responses.

By entering A on the keyboard, you enter the Autodial Modify menu.

Respond to the following prompts to change the Autodial number.

A <CR>

Current Autodial number: zzzzzzz

Enter Autodial number: <SP>

xxxxxxx <CR>

New Autodial number: xxxxxxx

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 479 of 906

By entering S on the keyboard, you enter the Speed Call Modify menu. The

Speed Call number can also be changed in the software. Respond to the following prompts to change the Speed Call number.

S<CR>

Enter access code <SP>

Current Speed Call number: zzzzzzz

Enter Speed Call number: <SP>

zzzzzzz<CR>

New Speed Call number: xxxxxxx

By entering R on the keyboard, you enter the Remote Loopback Modify menu. Respond to the following prompts to enable or disable the Remote

Loopback feature.

R <CR>

Remote Loopback Disabled (or enabled, indicating current status)

Remote Loopback

(Y/N): <SP>

Y <CR> or N <CR>

Remote Loopback: Enabled (or Disabled)

By entering M on the keyboard, you enter the Manual Answer Modify menu.

Manual Answer indicates that the DAC prompts the user to answer an incoming data call. Auto answer picks up the call after the specified number


Page 480 of 906

NT7D16 Data Access card of rings. Respond to the following prompts to enable or disable the Manual

Answer feature.

M <CR>

Current Answer Mode: Manual

Auto - xx Rings

Manual Answer? (Y/N): <SP>

Y <CR> N <CR>

Number of rings (1-255 <1>): <SP>

yy

New Answer Mode: Manual New Answer Mode: Auto - yy Rings

By entering D on the keyboard, you enter the DCD Modify menu. Respond to the following prompts to enable DCD as Forced or Dynamic.

D <CR>

DCD Control:Dynamic

Forced On

Dynamic DCD? (Y/N): <SP>

Y <CR> N <CR>

DCD Control: DynamicDCD Control: Forced On

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 481 of 906

By entering L on the keyboard, you enter the Long Break Detect Modify menu. Respond to the following prompts to enable or disable the detection of the Long Break as an abandon signal.

L <CR>

Long Break:Detected

Ignored

Detect Long Break? (Y/N): <SP>

Y <CR> N <CR>

Long Break: Detected Long Break: Ignored

To exit the Modify menu, enter Q. This entry returns you to the Primary commands menu. To view the port's parameters, enter D when in the Primary

Commands menu. This display shows the Display Options menu.

Display Options Menu:

A - Auto Dial number D - Date and Time

K - Feature Keys P - Data Port Parameters

Q - Quit Display S - Speed Call number(s)


Select: <SP>

Ring Again

When a call is placed to a busy DN, the DAC prompts you to activate Ring

Again. The Ring Again feature alerts you as soon as the dialed DN becomes free. Once the Ring Again has been activated, you will return to the Primary

Commands menu. The following is the prompt and response sequence enabling the Ring Again feature.


Page 482 of 906


Note: If you hang up the call, or give an abandon command, Ring Again is canceled.

BUSY, RING AGAIN? (Y/N): <SP>

Y <CR> or N <CR>

RING AGAIN PLACED




S - Speed Call


Select: <SP>

If a Ring Again request has already been placed, the DAC offers the option of overriding the previous request.

RING AGAIN ACTIVE, REPLACE? (Y/N): <SP>

Y <CR>

RING AGAIN PLACED




S - Speed Call


Select: <SP>

When the called DN becomes available, the system notifies the DAC, which then prompts the user to place the call. If you do not respond to the Ring

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 483 of 906

Again prompt within a software determined time period, Ring Again is canceled, and the Primary Commands Menu appears.

DATA STATION NOW AVAILABLE, PLACE CALL? (Y/N/<Y>): <SP>

Y <CR>

CALLING XXXX

RINGING

ANSWERED


Note 1: If the Ring Again notice occurs during a parameter change, the prompt only appears after the change has been completed.

Note 2: If the notice occurs during an active call, the Ring Again notice is ignored. When the active call is completed, you will be notified that the Ring Again call was canceled.

You can also cancel the Ring Again request at this time.

DATA STATION NOW AVAILABLE, PLACE CALL? (Y/N/[Y]): <SP>

N <CR>

RING AGAIN CANCELLED


A - Auto Dial S - Speed Call

C - Call M - Modify

D - Display


Select: <SP>


Page 484 of 906


Not in service

When the DAC attempts a call to a DN that is not supported, it sends you a message. The call is released, and you must reenter the Autobaud character

<CR> to initiate keyboard dialing again.

C<CR>

ENTER NUMBER:<SP>

xxxxxxx<CR>

CALLING xxxxxxx

NOT IN SERVICE

RELEASED

No response from the system

Likewise, when the DAC receives no system response from your port after a

30-second timeout period, the DAC sends you a message. The call is abandoned. This means the port is either disabled or unequipped.

C<CR>

ENTER NUMBER:<SP>

xxxxxxx<CR>

NO SYSTEM RESPONSE

RELEASED

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 485 of 906

Hayes dialing

Like keyboard dialing, Hayes dialing is an interactive dialing mode with the terminating equipment connected to the NT7D16 Data Access Card (DAC).

In addition to the common parameters and functions, the Hayes dialing mode offers the following features:

• Data call dialing

• Two modes for answering incoming calls: auto and manual

• Repeat previous command

• Character echo control

• On-hook/off-hook control

• Detect off-line escape sequence

• Return to on-line

• Initiate Remote Digital Loopback

• Terminate Remote Digital Loopback

• Modify S Registers S0 through S12

• Display S Registers S0 through S12

• Support all S Registers except: S6, S7, S9, and S11

The Hayes dialing mode supports the following AT Dialing commands.

Initiating conditions

The DAC responds to commands only when the following initial requirements are met:

• the DAC is active

• the DAC has successfully received the downloaded parameters

• the user equipment is active, and, if operating in RS-232-C mode

— the DCE mode is DTR (unless Forced DTR has been software selected)


Page 486 of 906


— the DTE mode, and RI has cycled the appropriate number of times and DCD is asserted on by the modem

Note: In Gateway mode, DCD must be asserted on. In modem mode, only RI must be on. The DAC asserts DTR to the modem, and awaits

DCD from the modem.

Input requirements

All input must be in the same case (upper or lower).

The Hayes repeat command, A/, is used to immediately execute the last command entered. The terminator character need not be entered. A complete discussion of the Repeat command can be found later in this document.

Where a Dial Number is expected, you may enter the characters 0-9, #, and comma (,). The characters @, P, R, T, and W are accepted, but ignored.

The maximum number of characters is 43. This limit includes the AT prefix, and the record Terminator character, but does not include the ASCII space character.

Echo

Throughout the dialogue phase, the DAC echoes all user input. In RS-232-C modes 0, 1, 2, and 3, no inbound call messages are presented to the modem.

Prompts are presented only if the modem user originates the call. In modes 8,

9, 10, and 11, no prompts or characters echo under any circumstances. The echo function can be turned off with a Hayes dialing command.

All prompts and responses issued by the system are displayed to the user unless the display command has been disabled. Like the Repeat command, this is explained later in this document.

Note: If the RS-232-C DAC Host modes (1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 11, or 12) are used, all attempts to enable the echo or display is ignored. Likewise, the

Hayes Reset command is also ignored.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 487 of 906

Result codes and messages

Each input record generates a result code which is sent to the user. Only one code is sent regardless of the number of commands in the record. The reply is in one of two formats:

• Numeric replies contain a one- or two-number code

• Verbose replies contain one or more words

Table 159 shows the codes for each reply in both formats, and explanations

for the codes.

Note 1: Verbose commands are the default and appear in upper case characters only. Numeric commands are sent by issuing the Numeric

Results code command (explained later in this document).

Note 2: All verbose codes and messages are preceded and terminated by the user defined Terminator and New Line characters. The default, or reset, characters are the ASCII Carriage Return, and ASCII Line Feed.

The Numeric codes are preceded and terminated by the Terminator character only.

Note 3: The Suppress result command (explained later in this document) will disable the sending of these codes. If in RS-232-C DAC Host modes, this command is ignored.

Table 159

Hayes dialing result codes and messages (Part 1 of 2)

Verbose code

OK

CONNECT

RING

NO CARRIER

ERROR

NO DIALTONE

Numeric code Description

3

4

6

0

1

2

Command(s) executed, no error

Data call established, session starts

Inbound call presented

Data call abandoned

Error in command line

System does not allow call to proceed


Page 488 of 906


Table 159

Hayes dialing result codes and messages (Part 2 of 2)

Verbose code

BUSY

NO ANSWER

CONNECT 1200

CONNECT 2400

CONNECT 4800

CONNECT 9600

CONNECT 19200

Numeric code

5

10

11

12

7

8

14

Description

Far end is busy

Far end does not answer

Session starts at 1200 baud





Baud rate detection

Every command line begins with Baud rate detection. This phase allows the

DAC to determine the user equipment baud rate. During this phase, the DAC accepts only the ASCII “A,” or “a” characters. Once a valid autobaud character is detected, the DAC echoes the parity bit character at the baud rate detected.

Note: If Hayes dialing is desired, you must enter the character “A” or

“a” BEFORE the <CR>. If Carriage Return (<CR>) is entered before this

Hayes dialing command, you will be placed in keyboard dialing mode.

Parity detection

Once the baud rate has been determined, the DAC accepts only the ASCII characters “T,” “t,” or “/.” If the Repeat character “/” is entered, the previous command is executed. If “T,” or “t” is entered, the DAC uses its parity and the parity of the preceding A (a) to determine the user's parity. This parity is used on the following messages and prompts associated with the command lines.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 489 of 906

Note: The parity determined here overrides the parity downloaded from the system. Also, the T (t) must be entered in the same case as the A (a).

If you entered uppercase A for the Baud Rate, you must enter upper case

T for the parity.

Dialing operation

Like keyboard dialing, the Hayes dialing commands allow the user to initiate a data call, as well as change certain dialing parameters. The commands may be entered in either upper or lower case, but must be the same case throughout the command line. Also the case must match the autobaud case.

Note: Hayes dialing does not allow for the Ring Again feature. If a call is made to a busy number, that call is abandoned.

Table 160 provides a list of the AT dialing commands.

Table 160

AT dialing commands (Part 1 of 2)


ATA

ATDnnnn

ATDTnnnn

A/

Answer (answer incoming data call)

Dial (n = 0-9, numbers to be dialed)

ATO

ATDPnnnn

ATF0

ATF1

Repeat last command (no <CR> needed)

On-line (enter three Escape characters rapidly to go off-line)

Voice call (n = 0-9, numbers to be dialed)

Handsfree/mute (toggle Handsfree between mute and normal)

Hold (put voice call on hold)

ATF2

ATH0

Select (take voice call off hold)

Hang up data call

Note 1: To use AT dialing, enter CTRL-z at carriage return (<CR>) when the port is idle.

Note 2: Follow each command (except A/) by a carriage return (<CR>) to execute it.


Page 490 of 906


Table 160

AT dialing commands (Part 2 of 2)


ATHP

ATQn

ATVn

ATXn

ATSn

ATSn=x

ATZ

ATCn

Hang up voice call

Result code (n = 0, 1; if n = 0, result codes are sent)

Verbal result (n = 0, 1; if n = 0, numeric codes are sent)

Result code selection (n = 0, 1; if n = 1, extended results)

Read S register (n = number of S register to read)

Write S register (n = S register number; x = new value)

Soft reset (reset to default parameters)

Carrier detect (n = 0, 1; if n = 1, carrier detect is enabled)

ATEn

ATTSP!

Echo (n = 0, 1; if n = 1, commands will echo back to terminal)

Transparent mode

Note 1: To use AT dialing, enter CTRL-z at carriage return (<CR>) when the port is idle.

Note 2: Follow each command (except A/) by a carriage return (<CR>) to execute it.

For the purposes of this document, when illustrating the prompt/response sequences, the bold type is what the user enters on the keyboard. All other type represents the DAC output. Likewise, “xxxxxxx,” “yyyyyyy,” or

“zzzzzzz” represents numbers entered by the user, or dialed by the DAC, and in no way indicates the absolute character limit. The number of characters is dependent on the feature activated (Auto Dial, Speed Call, for example).

Also, for simplicity purposes, all Result messages are shown in Verbose code.

See Table 159 on page 487 for a complete list of the Verbose and Numeric

codes. See Features and Services (553-3001-306) for a complete description of the features operating.

S registers

These commands allow the user to access various dialing parameters. The user can determine the present parameter setting, and alter the parameter.

These parameters are grouped into a set referred to as the S registers.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 491 of 906

All S registers may be changed with the exception of S1, the Ring count. If an attempt is made to change this parameter, the command is accepted but no action is taken. The Ring count is the number of 6-second intervals that have expired since an inbound call has been received. The current count may be displayed through the Display S register command but cannot be altered After a call is dropped, the Ring counter is set back to 0.

If, when using the display or alter commands, no register or value number is input, the number 0 is used. For example, ATS? is equivalent to ATS0.

Allowable S registers Table 161 shows the supported S registers allowed by

the DAC. This table shows the register number, the range accepted (decimal values shown), and a description of the register. Whenever a register value is changed, the DAC checks for validity. If the value entered is not within the allowed range, all processing ceases and no command processing following the invalid entry is accepted. The DAC sends an ERROR result message.

Table 161

Allowable S registers (Part 1 of 2)

S register Range

S0 0–255

Range units

Rings

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

S7

0–255

0–127

0–127

0–127

0–32,

127

2–255

1–255

Rings

ASCII

ASCII

ASCII

ASCII

Seconds

Seconds

Supported Description

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Number of rings to answer a system call (0 = manual answer)

Ring count for the current inbound system call

Off-line escape sequence character

Input/output line terminating character

New line character for the output line

Backspace character for input/ output lines

Wait time before blind dialing

Timeout timer for far end answering


Page 492 of 906


Table 161

Allowable S registers (Part 2 of 2)

S register

S8

S9

S10

S11

S12

Range

0–30

1–255

1–255

Range units

Seconds

0.1 second

0.1 second

50–255 Milliseconds

20–255 20 milliseconds

Supported Description

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

Duration for the dial pause character

Carrier detect response time

Delay time between loss of carrier and call release

Touch tone spacing

Guard time for the escape sequence

You can view any of the S registers by issuing the following display command. Any S register can be specified through the ATS command, and the system will display the current setting for that parameter. More than one

S register can be viewed by listing the desired registers on the same command line.

One registerTwo registers

ATS8? ATS8? S9

20

OK

002

006

OK

To change any S register range, except S1, use the following change command. The new parameters remain in effect until another change command is given or the Hayes Reset modem command (Z) is issued. If the

DAC is powered up, the parameters are reset to the defaults.

ATS8 = 15

OK

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 493 of 906

Reset Hayes parameters

All of the Hayes dialing parameters and S registers remain even after the data call is complete. Similarly, if the dialing mode, keyboard to Hayes or vice versa, are changed, the parameters remain as specified. The following command allows you to reset the parameters and S registers to the defaults.

Entering 0 resets to the Hayes default, while entering 1 resets to the downloaded operating parameters.

CAUTION

All previous instructions will be ignored.

This command should only be used to reset all parameters. It should be the last command entered, because all previous commands are ignored.

ATZ0

1

OK

Table 162 lists all the parameter and S register default values. These are the

values established when the reset command is given.

Table 162

Hayes parameters and S register reset values (Part 1 of 2)

Parameter Value Description

C

E

1 *

1 *

DCD controlDynamic (1)

Forced ON (0)

Input character echo Enabled (1)

Disabled (0)

Q 0 Send Result codesEnabled (1)

Disabled (0)

* Parameters that are reset to the downloaded operating parameters when 1 is entered at the reset command.


Page 494 of 906


Table 162

Hayes parameters and S register reset values (Part 2 of 2)

Parameter Value Description

S1

S2

S3

S4

P

S0

V

X

0

43

13

10

1

1

Result codes sent in Verbose format

Features selection 0 - 8, 10 - 13

— Dial method (pulse)

0 *?1

Manual Answer (if 0)?Auto answer on 1 ring

Ring count 0

Escape sequence character Plus sign (+)

Terminator character Carriage Return (<CR>)

New line character Line Feed (<LF>)

S5

S6

S7

S8

30

2

8

2

Back space character BS (<BS>)

Blind dial delay 2 seconds

Timeout for outbound call answer 30 seconds

Dial pause delay 2 seconds

S9

S10

S11

S12

6

14

95

50

Carrier detect response time 0.6 seconds

Call disconnect timer for carrier loss 1.4 seconds

Touchtone space 95 milliseconds

Escape sequence guard timer 1.00 seconds

* Parameters that are reset to the downloaded operating parameters when 1 is entered at the reset command.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 495 of 906

Outbound calls

The DAC supports two types of outbound data calls:

• point-to-point data calls

• calls sent through a modem without call origination capabilities

Hayes dialing does not provide for any alterations during call processing,

Ring Again, or Controlled Call Back Queueing (CCBQ) for example.

Consequently, if such variances occur during the call processing, the DAC releases the call and notifies you with a NO CARRIER or BUSY result code.

Table 163 lists the command characters allowed for an outbound call.

Table 163

Allowed outbound call command characters

Character

,

0 - 9

Description

Dial number normal digits

Delay dialing the next digit by the value set in S8 register

Inbound calls

The DAC supports auto answer and manual answer capabilities. The following commands give examples of both auto and manual answer dialogues.

This dialogue session describes the sequence when the S0 register is set to three. In this case, the DAC automatically answers the incoming call on the third ring, and the session begins with the CONNECT message.

RING

RING

RING

CONNECT


Page 496 of 906


Issuing the On Hook command while the call is still ringing disconnects the incoming call. The DAC disconnects the call and notifies you with a NO

CARRIER message.

RING

RING

ATH0

NO CARRIER

When the S0 register is set to 0, the DAC is set to manual answer, and an inbound call must be answered with the Answer command. You can also abandon the call with the On Hook message, as in the Autodial sequence.

RING

RING

ATH0

NO CARRIER

Off Line mode

Off Line mode acts as a sort of Hold mode. Once the call is answered and the session begins, the Off Line command enables you to enter Hayes command modes. The Off Line sequence is transmitted to the far-end, but at the end of the sequence, the command mode is initiated. At this point, any Hayes command except Dial Number can be executed. Once the desired command is completed, you can return to the call through the On Line command.

The Guard Time (S12 register) defines the amount of time for no local input for the Off Line escape sequence to take place. If the S12 register is set to 0, enter the escape character defined in the S2 register. For a complete list of the

parameters allowed for each S Register, see Table 162 on page 493

describing the S Registers.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 497 of 906

In the following example, <GT> is the Guard Time and <EC> the Escape

Character defined in the S2 register. The example shows the Off Line escape sequence, the command to display an S register (Ring Count, in this case), and the command to go back on line and attend to the answered call.

<GT><EC><EC><EC><GT

OK

ATS1

005

OK

ATO0

CONNECT

Specifications

QPC430 and QPC723 interfaces

The NT7D16 Data Access card provides the same features as the QPC430 four-port Asynchronous Interface Line Card (AILC) and the QPC723 RS-232

Interface Line Card (RILC). The operational mode for each port is determined in LD 11.

Download parameters

These parameters are configured in the system through service change operations. They are then downloaded to the DAC. For a complete description of the service change procedures, see the Software Input/Output:



Page 498 of 906


System parameters

System parameters downloaded by the switch include the type of system, the inactivity timer, and the data DN. These parameters are described below:

• System type: CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1

• Inactivity timeout

— No timeout

— 15 minutes

— 30 minutes

— 60 minutes

• DDN: 1 to 7 digits (0–9)

Operating parameters

There are thirteen parameters configured in the system that are downloaded to the DAC. They are:

• Dialogue parity

— Space (OFF)

— Mark (ON)

— Even

— Odd

• DTR control

— Dynamic (affected by call progress)

— Forced ON

• DCD control

— Dynamic (affected by call progress)

— Forced ON

• Dialing mode

— Manual (user initiates the call with dialogue commands)

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 499 of 906

— Hotline (call the Autodial number upon connection)

• Wire test

— Disabled (can be invoked only with front panel switch)

— Enabled (start only if the DAC firmware is idle)

• Language

— English

— Quebec French

• Keyboard dialing

— Enabled (allow both keyboard or Hayes dialing modes)

— Disabled (Hayes dialing only)

• Make port busy

— Disabled—On with DTR (normal)

— Enabled—Off with DTR (modes 8 or 12, and no DTR for 5 seconds)

• Auto Baud

— Variable (use auto baud rate)

— Fixed (use baud rate selection only)

• Baud rate

— 110

— 150

— 300

— 600

— 1200

— 2400

— 4800

— 9600

— 19200

• Operating mode


Page 500 of 906


— DCE

— DTE

• Equipment type

— Terminal (send prompts/replies)

— Host (suppress prompts/replies)

• Long Break Detect

In Figure 95 on page 501


, the rectangles represent the settings of service change parameters in LD11 that affect the desired function. The diamonds represent the logical DAC operating mode decisions.

Upload parameters

The system can, at any time, request information from a DAC port. The uploaded parameters contain information about the individual card (card type, order code, release information), as well as the status of the configured operating parameters. Because the dialogue operations of data calls can affect the operating parameters, this is useful to monitor and confirm port settings.

An additional parameter is listed in the uploaded information: port interface mode (RS-232-C/RS-422). The interface is set by the use of jumpers on the

DAC, and cannot be altered by the service change.

System database requirements

To ensure proper operation of the DAC keyboard and Hayes dialing, the system requires the following:

• The Data DN must have only one appearance.

• For access to remote hosts, the TNs class of service must allow external calls. The Data TN must have the following in its class of service:

— Call Pickup Denied (PUD)

— Call Forward No Answer Denied (FND)

— Call Forward Busy Denied (FBD)

— Data (DTA)

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 501 of 906

Figure 95

Operating mode selection—RS422

OPE YES

Mode 8 and 9

Operate Mode?

Host

Terminal

PRM = On

PRM = Off

Mode 12 and 13

No

Virtual Leased

Line?

Yes

DTR = Off

HOT = On

DTR = On

Hotline?

No

HOT = Off

Yes

HOT = On

Allow

Autobaud?

Yes

AUTB = On

BAUD = 7

No

AUTB = Off

Select BAUD

Set remaining

Operate Parameters as appropriate: par, aut, DLNG, KBD,

WIRE, & PBDO

553-5221


Page 502 of 906


Figure 96

Operating mode selection—RS-232-C

OPE YES

DEM = DTE

PRM = Off

Modem (Modes 0, 1, 2, 3)

Operate Mode?

DEM = DTE

PRM = On

Gateway

(Modes 4, 5,

6, 7)

Terminal (Modes 12, 13, 14, 15)

Host

(Modes 8,

9, 10, 11)

DEM = DCE

PRM = Off

DEM = DCE

PRM = On

Yes

DCD = Off

Dynamic DCD?

No

DCD = On

HOT = On

Yes

AUTB = Off

Select BAUD

Hotline?

No

HOT = Off

Virtual Leased

Line?

No

No

HOT = Off

Dynamic DCD?

Yes

DCD = On

Hotline?

Yes

HOT = On

DCD= On

No

DCD = Off

Yes

HOT = On

DCD= Off

AUTB = Off

Select BAUD

No

Virtual Leased

Line?

Hotline?

No

HOT = Off

Yes

DTR = Off

Dynamic DTR?

No

DTR = On

Yes

HOT = On

DTR = Off

Yes

HOT = On

DTR = On

Allow

Autobaud?

No

AUTB = Off

Select BAUD

Yes

AUTB = On

BAUD = 7

Allow

Autobaud?

Yes

AUTB = On

BAUD = 7

No

AUTB = Off

Select BAUD

Yes

DTR = Off

Dynamic DTR?

No

DTR = On

Set remaining

Operate Parameters as appropriate: par, aut, DLNG, KBD,

WIRE, & PBDO

Dynamic DCD?

Yes

DCD = On

No

DCD = Off

553-5222

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 503 of 906

Note: Warning Tone Denied (WTD) defaults if DTA is entered.

• If the DAC is used to call out through modem pooling, where the modem pool consists of dumb modems connected to QMT8 SADM or QMT12

V.35 SADM, the DAC port should be configured with a secondary DN, which has a single appearance.

•

The Virtual keys must be assigned as shown in Table 164.

Table 164

Virtual key assignments

Key number

Feature key

Data DN

Secondary DN

Call Transfer

Auto Dial

Ring Again

Speed Call

Display

Make Set Busy

2

5

6

3

4

7

SL-1

0

1

SL-100

0

1

—

3

—

2

6

7

Use

Required

Required for manual modem pooling

Required for manual modem pooling

Required for Hotline and VLL

Optional

Optional

Required

Optional


Page 504 of 906


Power supply

Be sure that all power requirements are met before installing the DAC.

Operation may be affected by improper power and environmental conditions.

EIA signals supported

The DAC supports a subset of the standard signals. Only 8 leads can be brought through the backplane connector for each port, totaling 48 leads for

each card slot. Table 165 lists the EIA signals supported on this card.

Table 165

EIA signals supported (RS-232-C)

EIA

DB-25

Pin

Signal abbreviation Description

BA

BB

CB

CC

5

6

2

3

TD

RD

CTS

DSR

Transmitted Data

Received Data

Clear To Send

Data Set Ready

AB

CF

CD

CE

7

8

20

22

GND

DCD

DTR

RI

Signal Ground

Carrier Detect

Data Terminal Ready

Ring Indicator

Note: RS-422 leads supported are: Tx (transmit) and Rx (receive).

DCE mode

—

Out

In

Out

In

Out

Out

Out

DTE mode

—

In

Out

In

In

In

Out

In

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 505 of 906

Environmental

The DAC functions fully when operating within the following specified

conditions. See Table 166.

Table 166

DAC environmental specifications

Specification

Ambient temperature

Humidity

Operating

0 to 60 degrees C

5% to 95%

Storage

40 to 70 degrees C

5% to 95%

Reliability

The DAC has a predicted mean time between failure (MTBF) of 8 years at

45 degrees Celsius. The mean time to repair (MTTR) is 1 hour.

Installing the Data Access card

Cabinet system

The DAC is fully supported in any card slot in either the main or expansion cabinet without any hardware modification. Insert the DAC into any available card slot and secure it in place using the locklatches.

To cable out the DAC, run a standard 25-pair cable to the cross connect, or use one of the following breakout cables in conjunction with an Amphenol

50-pin female-to-female gender converter:

• QCAD318A50-pin Amphenol to 6 female DB25 connectors

• QCAD319A50-pin Amphenol to 6 male DB25 connectors

Note: For Cabinet system, the format to be used in response to the “TN” prompt must be one of the following:

CC 00 00 UUCC - Card Slot or CC UUUU - Unit Number


Page 506 of 906


Large System

In Large Systems, the DAC is fully supported in IPE modules. These special slots on the DAC have 24-pair cables pre-wired to the Main Distribution

Frame (MDF) in card slots 0-15. Any IPE slot will support the first four ports on the DAC if connections are made at the MDF. Most IPE modules can be upgraded to wire 24-pair cables to the MDF for all card slots.

Note: For directions concerning the pinouts for the MDF, refer to


Installation and Configuration (553-3021-210).

Before you begin, power down:

• the IPE module only, if it is a DC-powered system

• the entire column, if it is an AC-powered system

It is recommended that you begin the installation from the right hand side

(when facing the backplane), starting with slot 0 and moving towards slots on the left side. If you wish to add more than six DACs, and require slots 8 through 15, remove the input/output (I/O) panel. Be aware that a full shelf installation can take up to 3 hours. You need the following equipment to upgrade the cabling:

• A0359946 Amphenol cables

— These connectors include all the connector and screw apparatus.

— You need one cable for each DAC.

• cable ties

• wire cutters

• A3/16 nutdriver

System compatibility

To support the 24-pair requirement of the DAC, some cabling may need to be

upgraded (Table 167). See “Upgrading systems” for more information.

Ports 0, 1, 2, and 3 of the DAC work in any standard 16-pair IPE slot (connect directly to the MDF).

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 507 of 906

An upgraded backplane has three shrouds for each card slot. A backplane that cannot be upgraded has only two shrouds for each card slot.

Table 167

System option compatibility with the DAC

System option

Large Systems

Large Systems

Backplane code

NT8D3701

NT8D3701

Backplane release

3 and below

4 and above

Upgrade

No

Yes

Maximum no. of ports/DAC supported

4

6

Port configuration

Figure 97 on page 508 shows the port configurations for both the RS-232-C

and RS-422 ports. The software configuration requirements for the DAC are shown at the end of this chapter. Responses to the prompts listed are required.

Depending on the configuration, ensure that the option plug is set for RS-232 or RS-422.


Page 508 of 906


Figure 97

NT7D16 Data Access Card port connectors

Note: Insert only one option plug per port.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

RS-232

RS-422

}

Port 0

RS-232

RS-422

}

Port 1

RS-232

RS-422

}

Port 2

553-5234

RS-232

RS-422

}

Port 3

RS-232

RS-422

}

Port 4

RS-232

RS-422

}

Port 5

Cabling


Page 509 of 906

Several cabling schemes are possible for both AILC and RILC modes.

Typical capacitance for 24- and 26-gauge cables is shown in the Tables 168 and 169. RS-232 and RS-422 transmission distance is limited by the electrical

capacitance of the cable. Low-capacitance cable carries a digital signal further than a high-capacitance cable.

Table 168

RS-232-C maximum line capacitance 2,500 µF

Gauge

24

26

Capacitance per foot (µF)

24

15

Max distance

104

166

Table 169

RS-422 maximum line capacitance 60,000 µF

Gauge

24

26

Capacitance per foot (µF)

24

15

Max distance

2500

4000

Figure 98 on page 510 shows the cabling choices available. It includes

cabling with the RS-232-C cable, associated patch panel, the RJ-11, and the octopus cable. Each scheme can be tailored to suit individual needs, and specific alternatives are shown in later figures.


Page 510 of 906


Figure 98

Cabling to the data equipment

I/O connector

25 pair

25 pair

Patch panel

(12 connectors total)

DB25

System

MDF

RS-422

RJ-11

DB25

RS-232

RJ-11

DB25

AILU

25 pair 25 pair

Octopus cable

553-AAA1128

DB25

DB25

DB25

DB25

DB25

DB25

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 511 of 906

Figure 99

RJ-11 or RJ-45 jacks

Figure 99 shows a connection through an RJ-11 or RJ-45 jack located at the

data station. It is recommended that four wires be used similarly to the AIM drop when using the RJ-11 jack. Another cable is required to convert the

RJ-11 or RJ-45 into DB25.

Note: It is necessary to turn over Receive Data and Send Data between the DAC and the AILU. This is done on the TN at the MDF.

EIA signals from the DAC (unit n)

TxD

RxD

GND

DTR

MDF

RJ-11 jack

RJ-11 plug

1 (TxD)

6 (RxD)

5 (GND)

20 (DTR)

1 (TxD)

6 (RxD)

5 (GND)

20 (DTR)

6 (DSR)

8 (DCD)

4 (RTS)

5 (CTS)

553-5023


illustrates the patch panel. RS-232-C cables are used to connect the data equipment to the patch panel. This particular panel shows two 50-pin connectors into twelve DB25. The signals from the MDF travel on 25-pair cables, terminating at the patch panel.

Note: Use patch panels that follow the pinout of the DAC.

Figure 101 on page 513 describes an octopus cabling scheme. This cable

replaces the combined patch panel and RS-232-C cabling scheme. The

25-pair cable is split into six RS-232-C male or female connectors. This allows direct connections to the data equipment from the I/O panel. The octopus cable allows for the maximum segregation of the voice signals that might otherwise be present within the same 25-pair cable.


Page 512 of 906


Figure 100

Patch panel layout

50-pin connector

DB25

DB25

50-pin connector

553-5021

Note: Use an octopus cable that follows the pinout of the DAC, such as

QCAD318A (female) and QCAD319A (male), in conjunction with a

50-pin female-to-female gender converter.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Figure 101

Octopus cabling

TxD

RxD

GND

DTR

CTS

DSR

DCD

RI

TxD

RxD

GND

DTR

CTS

DSR

DCD

RI


Page 513 of 906

MDF

To your data equipment

EIA signals from the DAC (unit 0)

2 (TxD)

3 (RxD)

7 (GND)

20 (DTR)

5 (CTS)

6 (DSR)

8 (DCD)

22 (RI)

6 DB25 connectors per 25 pair cable

EIA signals from the DAC (unit 5)

2 (TxD)

3 (RxD)

7 (GND)

20 (DTR)

5 (CTS)

6 (DSR)

8 (DCD)

22 (RI)

To your data equipment

553-5022


Page 514 of 906


Backplane pinout and signaling

Two 40-pin, and two 20-pin edge connectors connect the card to the

backplane. The detailed pinout configurations are listed in Tables 170 and

171.

Table 170

RS-232-C and RS-422 pinouts for first three DAC ports (Part 1 of 2)

I/O cable RS-232-C

Pair Pin

Pair color Unit no.

Signal Pin no.

RS-422

Signal

Patch pair or octopus

3T

3R

4T

4R

1T

1R

2T

2R

26

1

27

2

28

3

29

4

W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-G

G-W

W-BR

BR-W

UNIT 0 TD0

RD0

DTR0

GND0

DCD0

DSR0

RI0

CTS0

2

3

20

7

8

6

22

5

RDA0

RDB0

SDA0

SDB0 Connector

1

5T

5R

6T

6R

20

5

31

6

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

UNIT 1 TD1

RD1

DTR1

GND1

20

7

2

3

RDA1

RDB1

SDA1

SDB1 Connector

7T 32 R-O DCD1 8 2

Note 1: The RS-232 pinout follows the standard set by the QPC723 RILC.

Note 2: The RS-422 pinout follows the standard set by the QPC430 AILC (first pair: Receive

Data; second pair: Send Data). Receive and Send are designated with reference to the DTE; therefore, they must be turned over in the cross-connect since most DTE have first pair as Send

Data and second pair as Receive Data.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 515 of 906

Table 170

RS-232-C and RS-422 pinouts for first three DAC ports (Part 2 of 2)


Pair Pin


Signal Pin no.

RS-422

Signal


7R

8T

8R

7

33

8

O-R

R-G

G-R

DSR1

RI1

CTS1

6

22

5

9T

9R

10T

10R

34

9

35

10

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

UNIT 2 TD2

RD2

DTR2

GND2

20

7

2

3

RDA2

RDB2

SDA2

SDB2 Connector

3 11T

11R

12T

12R

36

11

37

12

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

DCD2

DSR2

RI2

CTS2

8

6

22

5

Note 1: The RS-232 pinout follows the standard set by the QPC723 RILC.

Note 2: The RS-422 pinout follows the standard set by the QPC430 AILC (first pair: Receive

Data; second pair: Send Data). Receive and Send are designated with reference to the DTE; therefore, they must be turned over in the cross-connect since most DTE have first pair as Send

Data and second pair as Receive Data.


Page 516 of 906


Table 171

RS-232-C and RS-422 pinouts for last three DAC ports (Part 1 of 2)


Pair Pin


Signal Pin no.

RS-422

Signal


18R

19T

19R

20T

16R

17T

17R

18T

13T

13R

14T

14R

15T

15R

16T

38

13

39

14

40

15

41

16

42

17

43

18

44

19

45

BK-G

G-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

Y-O

O-Y

Y-G

G-Y

Y-BR

BR-Y

Y-S

UNIT 3

UNIT 4

(Note)

TD3

RD3

DTR3

GND3

DCD3

DSR3

RI3

CTS3

TD4

RD4

DTR4

GND4

DCD4

DSR4

RI4

2

3

20

7

8

6

22

5

2

3

20

7

8

6

22

RDA3

RDB3

SDA3

SDB3

RDA4

RDB4

SDA4

SDB4

Connector

1

Connector

20R

21T

21R

22T

20

46

21

47

S-Y

V-BL

BL-V

V-O

UNIT 5

(Note)

CTS4

TD5

RD5

DTR5

5

2

3

20

RDA5

RDB5

SDA5

Note: Units 4 and 5 are available when the DAC is installed in a fully wired 24-pair slot.

2

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 517 of 906

Table 171

RS-232-C and RS-422 pinouts for last three DAC ports (Part 2 of 2)


Pair Pin


Signal Pin no.

RS-422

Signal


22R

23T

23R

22

48

23

O-V

V-G

G-V

GND5

DCD5

DSR5

7

8

6

SDB5 Connector

24T

24R

49

24

V-BR

BR-V

RI5

CTS5

22

5

Note: Units 4 and 5 are available when the DAC is installed in a fully wired 24-pair slot.

3

Configuring the Data Access card

LD 11 must be configured to accept the DAC. The commands listed here must be answered. LD 20 prints out card information when requested. For a complete list of the service change prompts and responses, see Software

Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311).

DAC administration (LD 11)

Responding R232 or R422 to the TYPE prompt in LD11 begins the prompt sequence for the DAC configuration. Responses to the following prompts are


Page 518 of 906

NT7D16 Data Access card required. The defaults are bracketed, and may be issued by Carriage Return

(<CR>).

LD 11 – Configure Data Access card. (Part 1 of 3)

Prompt Response Description

REQ:

TYPE:

TN

RNPG

CLS

TOV

OPE

PAR

DTR

NEW CHG MOV

COPY

R232

R422 l s c u

<CR>

DTA

ADD

(0) - 3

(NO) YES

(SPAC) ODD EVEN

MARK

(OFF) ON

Add, change, move or copy the unit

RS-232-C unit

RS-422 unit

DAC data TN. The loop (LL) must be a superloop.

Ringing number pickup group (default to zero)

Class of Service allowed for the DAC.

Data Allowed

Digit Display Allowed

Timeout value, where:

0 = no timeout

1 = 15 minutes

2 = 30 minutes

3 = 60 minutes

Operation parameter change

SPAC = space parity

ODD = odd parity

EVEN = even parity

MARK = mark parity

DTR settings, where:

ON = forced DTR

OFF = dynamic DTR

This prompt appears only if TYPE = R232

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

AUT

AUTB

BAUD

DCD

PRM

DEM

(ON) OFF

(ON) OFF

0-(7)-8

(ON) OFF

(ON) OFF

(DCE) DTE


Page 519 of 906



HOT (OFF) ON Hotline

If HOT = ON, then AUTB = OFF

Automatic answer

Autobaud

Prompt appears only if HOT - OFF

Baud rate, where:

0 = 110

1 = 150

2 = 300

3 = 600

4 = 1200

5 = 2400

6 = 4800

7 = 9600

8 = 19200

This prompt appears only if AUTB = OFF.

DCD settings, where:

ON = dynamic DCD

OFF = forced DCD

This prompt appears only if TYPE = R232.

Prompt mode, where:

ON = prompt (Terminal) mode

OFF = no prompt (Host) mode

Data Equipment mode

This prompt appears only if TYPE = R232.


Page 520 of 906




DLNG

KBD

WIRE

PBDO

KEY

(ENG) FRN

(ON) OFF

(OFF) ON

(OFF) ON

0 SCR xxxx

1 SCR xxxx

2 TRN

3 ADL yy xxxx

4 RGA

5 SCC 0-253

6 DSP

7 MSB

Data port language, where:

ENG = English

FRN = Quebec French

Keyboard dialing, where:

ON = enabled

OFF = disabled (Hayes dialing commands will still work)

Wire test mode, where:

OFF = disabled

ON = enabled

Port busy upon DTR off, where:

OFF = disabled (port busy on with DTR)

ON = enabled (port busy off with DTR)

This prompt appears only if TYPE = R232

PBDO = OFF for any RS-232-C mode besides 8, or 12

If PBDO = ON, key 7 = MSB

Key settings

Primary data DN

Secondary Data DN

Call Transfer

Autodial

Ring Again

Speed Call Controller, list number

Display

Make Set Busy

Primary and secondary data DNs must be single appearance DNs. Feature key assignment must be as shown here.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 521 of 906

Printing the card parameters (LD 20)

By responding R232, R422, or DAC to the TYPE prompt in LD 20, you can print out the configured parameters for each port, or the entire DAC. This is useful to determine if any parameters have been altered during keyboard or

Hayes dialing modify procedures.

LD 20 – Print DAC parameters.

Prompt

REQ:

Description

Print data, TN, or unit information for the unit specified

TYPE:

TN

Response

PRT

LTN

LUU

R232

R422

DAC l s c u

Print information for the RS-232-C, RS-422 ports, or the whole DAC

Print information for this TN, where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit. Uploaded parameters can only be printed when a specific TN is listed.

The operation parameter printout for an RS-232 or RS-422 port is similar to the following, depending on the configuration.

Table 172

Print out example (Part 1 of 2)

DBASE

R-232 or R-422

UPLOAD

R-232 or R-422

PAR

DTR

HOT

SPAC

ON

OFF

SPAC

ON

OFF

AUT ON O

Note: The Upload parameters are printed only when a single TN is specified.


Page 522 of 906


Table 172

Print out example (Part 2 of 2)

DBASE

R-232 or R-422

UPLOAD

R-232 or R-422

AUTB

BAUD

DCD

PRM

DEM

DLNG

KBD

WIRE

ON

9600

OFF

KBD ON

DCE

FRN

ON

OFF

ON

4800

OFF

KBD ON

DCE

FRN

ON

OFF

PBDO OFF OFF

Note: The Upload parameters are printed only when a single TN is specified.

Connecting Apple Macintosh to the DAC

The Apple Macintosh can be connected with twisted pair wire to a port of a

NT7D16 Data Access Card (DAC) to allow access to the switching capability. The Macintosh can then access local or remote terminals, personal computers, hosts, and peripherals.

Figure 102 on page 523 shows the 9-pin subminiature D (DB9) connection to the Macintosh. Figure 103 on page 523

shows the mini-8 DIN connection to the Macintosh.

Upgrading systems

The following explains when and how to upgrade your system to support the

DAC. Ports 0, 1, 2, and 3 of the DAC will work in any standard 16-pair IPE slot (connect directly to the MDF).

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 523 of 906

Figure 102

Macintosh to DAC connection—9-pin subminiature D

System

Apple

Macintosh

9-pin subminiature D

5

4

8

9

W

BL

BK

Y

6-wire

Teladapt cord

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

W

BL

BK

Y

MDF

R3

T3

R2

T2

D

A

C

553-AAA1129

Figure 103

Macintosh to DAC connection—mini-8 DIN

Apple

Macintosh

Mini-8

DIN connector

8

5

6

3

RXD+

RXD-

TXD+

TXD-

MDF

R3

T3

R2

T2

System

DB25 pin #

RDA0

RDB0

SDA0

SDB0

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

D

A

C

553-AAA1130


Page 524 of 906


Large System and CS 1000M HG upgrade

The DAC can be installed directly into slots 0, 4, 8, and 12 with no cabling changes. If other slots are required, the upgrade must be made. Follow this procedure to upgrade your cabling. You can upgrade the cabling segment-by-segment, or the entire module at one time.

Note 1: Four NT8D81AA cable/filter assemblies are required to upgrade the entire module, one assembly per segment.

Note 2: Cables are designated by the letter of the I/O panel cutout where the 50-pin cable connector is attached. The 20-pin connectors are labeled

1, 2, and 3.

Note 3: The locations for the cable connectors are designated by the slot number (L0-L9), and the shroud row (1, 2, and 3).

Segment 0

1

Leave cable A as is in slot L0.

2

Move cable end B-3 to L1-3.

3

Remove cable C from the backplane and connect ends C-1, C-2, and C-3 to L2-1, L2-2, and L2-3.

4

Add cable D to the I/O panel by connecting ends D-1, D-2, and D-3 to

L3-1, L3-2, and L3-3.

Segment 1

1

Leave cable E as is in slot L4.

2

Move cable end F-3 to L5-3.

3

Remove cable G from the backplane and connect ends G-1, G-2, and G-3 to L6-1, L6-2, and L6-3.

4

Add cable H to the I/O panel by connecting ends H-1, H-2, and H-3 to

L7-1, L7-2, and L7-3.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 525 of 906

Segment 2

1

Leave cable K as is in slot L8.

2

Move cable end L-3 to L9-3.

3

Remove cable M from the backplane and connect ends M-1, M-2, and

M-3 to L10-1, L10-2, and L10-3.

4

Add cable N to the I/O panel by connecting ends N-1, N-2, and N-3 to

L11-1, L11-2, and L11-3.

Segment 3

1

Leave cable R as is in slot L12.

2

Move cable end S-3 to L13-3.

3

Remove cable T from the backplane and connect ends T-1, T-2, and T-3 to L14-1, L14-2, and L14-3.

4

Add cable U to the I/O panel by connecting ends U-1, U-2, and U-3 to

L15-1, L15-2, and L15-3.


Page 526 of 906


Be sure to re-label the MDF to show that the module has been upgraded to provide one cable for each IPE slot. The resulting backplane and cable arrangement should look like this:

Backplane slot-connector

L11

L12

L13

L14

L15

L7

L8

L9

L10

L3

L4

L5

L6

L0

L1

L2

I/O panel cable position

A

B

C

D (new cable)

E

F

G

H (new cable)

K

L

M

N (new cable)

R

S

T

U (new cable)

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

544

Page 527 of 906

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

Contents

Introduction


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527





Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541

IMPORTANT!

The NT8D02 digital line card is supported in CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and

Meridian 1.

The NTDK16 digital line card is supported ONLY in the Chassis system.

The Digital Line card is a voice and data communication link between the system and Digital Telephones. It supports voice only or simultaneous voice and data service over a single twisted pair of standard telephone wiring.

When a digital telephone is equipped with the data option, an asynchronous or synchronous terminal or personal computer can be connected to the system through the digital telephone.


Page 528 of 906

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

The Digital Line card provides 16 voice and 16 data communication links.

NT8D02 Digital Line card

The 32 port NT8D02 Digital Line card is supported in the MG 1000S and

MG 1000S Expansion.


NTDK16 Digital Line card

The NTDK16 is a 48 port card supported only in the Chassis system. It is based on the NT8D02 Digital Line card and is functionally equivalent to three

NT8D02s, and configured as cards 4, 5, and 6 in the main chassis. It uses A94

Digital Line Interface chips (DLIC) to provide the interface between the

Digital sets and the system.

The NTDK16 Digital Line card can only be installed in slot 4 of the main chassis which is slotted to prevent accidental insertion of other cards.


The Digital Line card circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm

(12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board. The NT8D02 is a double-sided PCB, whereas the NTDK16 is 4 layers, but standard thickness. Both cards connect to the backplane through a 120-pin or 160-pin edge connector.

The faceplate of the NT8D02 Digital Line card is equipped with a red LED

that lights when the card is disabled. See Figure 104 on page 529

. When the card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to five seconds as a self-test runs.

If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit until the card is configured and enabled in software, then the LED goes out. If the LED continually flashes or remains weakly lit, replace the card.

Note: The NTDK16AA has one LED. This LED shows the status of

Card 4. The NTDK16BA has three LEDs. These LEDs show the status of Cards 4, 5, and 6 configured on the NTDK16.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Figure 104

Digital line card – faceplate


Page 529 of 906

Card lock latch

Dgtl

L C

LED

Card lock latch

NT8D02

Rlse 04

553-6160


Page 530 of 906



NT8D02 Digital Line card

The NT8D02 digital line card is equipped with 16 identical units. Each unit provides a multiplexed voice, data, and signaling path to and from digital apparatus over a 2-wire full duplex 512 kHz time compression multiplexed

(TCM) digital link. Each digital telephone and associated data terminal is assigned a separate terminal number (TN) in the system database, for a total of 32 addressable ports per card.

The NT8D02 Digital Line card is equipped with 16 identical digital line interfaces. Each interface provides a multiplexed voice, data, and signaling path to and from a digital terminal (telephone) over a 2-wire full duplex

512 kHz Time Compression Multiplexed (TCM) digital link. Each digital telephone and associated data terminal is assigned a separate Terminal

Number (TN) in the system database, giving a total of 32 addressable units per card. The digital line card supports Nortel’ Meridian Digital Telephone.

The digital line card contains a microprocessor that provides the following functions:

• self-identification

• self-test

• control of card operation

• status report to the controller

• maintenance diagnostics


contained on the NT8D02 Digital Line card. Each of these functions is described on the following pages.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Figure 105

Digital line card – block diagram


Page 531 of 906


+10 V dc

DS-30X loop

Tx PCM

Rx PCM

Digital line interface

5.12 MHz clock

1 kHz frame sync

TCM loop interface circuit

Tip

Ring

Digital phone lines

Address/ data bus

+10 V dc


Digital line interface

TCM loop interface circuit

Tip

Ring

Digital phone lines

Front panel

LED

Card slot address

Microcontroller

Card

LAN link


Power supplies

Sanity timer

+15

Reg

+10

±15 V dc + 5 V dc

553-6163


Page 532 of 906


NTDK16 Digital Line card

The NTDK16 digital line card is equipped with 48 identical units. Each unit provides a multiplexed voice, data, and signaling path to and from digital apparatus over a 2-wire full duplex 512 kHz time compression multiplexed

(TCM) digital link. Each digital telephone and associated data terminal is assigned a separate terminal number (TN) in the system database, for a total

of 96 addressable ports per card. Refer to Figure 106 on page 533

.

The NTDK16 digital line card contains a microprocessor that provides the following functions:


• self-test




The card also provides:

• Ability to support Digital sets and the Digital Console M2250

• Provides a serial link (Card LAN) for status report and maintenance.

• Supports loop lengths up to 3500 ft. (1.0 km) using 24 AWG wire.

• Interface between three DS30X loops and 48 TCM lines.

Card interfaces

The digital line card passes voice, data, and signaling over DS-30X loops and maintenance data over the card LAN link. These interfaces are discussed in

detail in the section “Intelligent Peripheral Equipment” on page 32 .

Digital line interfaces

The digital line interface contains two Digital Line Interface Circuits (DLIC).

Each digital line interface circuit provides eight identical, individually configurable voice and data interfaces to eight digital telephone lines. These

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Figure 106

NTDK16 DLC


Page 533 of 906


Page 534 of 906

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards lines carry multiplexed PCM voice, data, and signaling information as TCM loops.

The purpose of each digital line interface circuit is to de-multiplex data from the DS-30X Tx channel into eight integrated voice and data bitstreams. The circuits then transmit those bitstreams as Bi-Polar Return to Zero, Alternate

Mark Inversion (BPRZ-AMI) data to the eight TCM loops. They also perform the opposite action: they receive eight BPRZ-AMI bitstreams from the TCM loops and multiplex them onto the DS-30X Rx channel. The two digital line interface circuits perform the multiplexing and de-multiplexing functions for the 16 digital telephone lines.

The digital line interface circuits also contain signaling and control circuits that establish, supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work with the on-card microcontroller to operate the digital line interface circuits during calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the

Call Server and return incoming call status information to the Call Server over the DS-30X network loop.

TCM loop interface circuit

Each digital telephone line terminates on the NT8D02 Digital Line card at a

TCM loop interface circuit. The circuit provides transformer coupling and foreign voltage protection between the TCM loop and the digital line interface circuit. It also provides battery voltage for the digital telephone.

To prevent undesirable side effects from occurring when the TCM loop interface cannot provide the proper signals on the digital phone line, the card microcontroller can remove the ±15 V dc power supply from the TCM loop interfaces. This happens when either the microcontroller gets a command from the NT8D01 controller card to shut down the channel, or the digital line card detects a loss of the 1 KHz frame synchronization signal. The ±15 V dc power supply signal is removed from all 16 TCM loop interface units at the same time.

Each TCM loop interface circuit can service loops up to 3500 ft. in length when using 24-gauge wire. They support a maximum ac signal loss of

15.5 dB at 256 KHz and a maximum dc loop resistance of 210 ohms.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 535 of 906


Control functions are provided by a microcontroller and a Card LAN link on the digital line card. A sanity timer is provided to automatically reset the card if the microcontroller stops functioning for any reason.

Microcontroller

The NT8D02 Digital Line card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card. The microcontroller controls the following:

• reporting to the Call Server through the card LAN link:






— programming of the digital line interfaces


— programming of loop interface control circuits for administration of line interface unit operation


The microcontroller also controls the front panel LED when the card is enabled or disabled by instructions from the NT8D01 controller card.


Maintenance data is exchanged with the common equipment Call Server over a dedicated asynchronous serial network called the Card LAN link.

Sanity timer

The NT8D02 Digital Line card also contains a sanity timer that resets the microcontroller if program control is lost. The microcontroller must service


Page 536 of 906

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards the sanity timer every 1.2 seconds. If the timer is not properly serviced, it times out and causes the microcontroller to be hardware reset.

Circuit power

The +15 V dc input is regulated down to +10 V dc for use by the digital line interface circuits. The ±15.0 V dc inputs to the card are used to power the loop interface circuits.


This section lists the electrical characteristics of the NT8D02 Digital Line card.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 537 of 906

Digital line interface specifications

Table 173 provides a technical summary of the digital line cards.

Table 173

NT8D02/NTDK16 Digital Line card technical summary

Characteristics

Units per card

Impedance

Loop limits

Line rate

Power supply

Transmitter output voltage:

• successive “1” bits

• “0” bits

NT8D02 DLC description

16 voice, 16 data

NTDK16BA DLC description

48 voice, 48 data

NTDK16AA DLC description

48 voice, 48 data

100 Ohm j/b ohm 100 Ohm j/b ohm 100 Ohm j/b ohm

30 m (100 ft) to 915 m (3000 ft) with 24

AWG PVC cable

(+15 V DC at 80 mA)

30 m (100 ft) to 915 m (3000 ft) with 24

AWG PVC cable

(+15 V DC at 80 mA)

30 m (100 ft) to 915 m (3000 ft) with 24

AWG PVC cable

(+15 V DC at 80 mA)

0 to 1070 m (3500 ft) with 24 AWG PVC cable (+15 V DC at

80 mA)


80 mA)


80 mA)

512 kbps + 100 ppm 512 kbps + 100 ppm 512 kbps + 100 ppm

+ 5 V DC

+15 V DC

+10 V DC

+ 5 V DC

+15 V DC

+ 5 V DC

+15 V DC

+8 V DC

+1.5 + 0.15 V and

-1.5 + 0.15 V

0 + 50 mV

Not applicable Not applicable

Additional circuitry

Power Failure Transfer Control Ring

Sync.


Page 538 of 906



The digital line card needs +15V DC over each loop at a maximum current of

80 mA. It requires +15V, -15V, and +5V from the backplane. The line feed interface can supply power to one loop of varying length up to 1070 m

(3500 ft) using 24 AWG wire with a maximum allowable AC signal loss of

15.5 dB at 256 kHz, and a maximum DC loop resistance of 210 ohms;

26 AWG wire is limited to 745 m (2450 ft).

Table 174

Digital line card—power required

Voltage

±5.0 V dc

+15.0 V dc

–15.0 V dc

Current (max.)

150 mA

1.6 Amp

1.3 Amp


In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided on the NT8D02 Digital Line card. The NT8D02 Digital Line card does, however, have protection against accidental shorts to –52 V dc analog lines.

When the card is used to service off-premise telephones, primary and secondary Main Distribution Frame (MDF) protection must be installed.

Off-premise telephones served by cable pairs routed through the central office, or crossing a public right-of-way, can be subject to a requirement for on-card protection, and MDF protectors may not be acceptable. Check local regulations before providing such service.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 539 of 906


Table 175 shows the environmental specifications of the card.

Table 175

Digital line card – environmental specifications

Parameter


Operating humidity

Storage temperature

Specifications

0° to +60° C (+32 to +140° F), ambient


–40° to +70° C (–40° to +158° F)


Table 176 shows the I/O pin designations at the backplane connector, which

is arranged as an 80-row by 2-column array of pins. Normally, these pin positions are cabled to 50-pin connectors at the I/O panel in the rear of each module for connection with 25-pair cables to the MDF.

The information in Table 176 is provided as a reference and diagnostic aid at

the backplane, since the cabling arrangement can vary at the I/O panel. See


and Configuration (553-3021-210) for cable pinout information for the I/O panel.

Table 176

NT8D02 Digital Line card – backplane pinouts (Part 1 of 2)

Backplane

Pinout*

Lead

Designations

Backplane

Pinout*

Lead

Designations

12A

13A

14A

Line 0, Ring

Line 1, Ring

Line 2, Ring

12B

13B

14B

Line 0, Tip

Line 1, Tip

Line 2, Tip

15A Line 3, Ring 15B Line 3, Tip

* These pinouts apply to both the NT8D37 and NT8D11 backplanes


Page 540 of 906


Table 176

NT8D02 Digital Line card – backplane pinouts (Part 2 of 2)

Backplane

Pinout*

Lead

Designations

Backplane

Pinout*

Lead

Designations

62A

63A

64A

65A

16A

17A

18A

19A

Line 4, Ring

Line 5, Ring

Line 6, Ring

Line 7, Ring

Line 8, Ring

Line 9, Ring

Line 10, Ring

Line 11, Ring

16B

17B

18B

19B

62B

63B

64B

65B

Line 4, Tip

Line 5, Tip

Line 6, Tip

Line 7, Tip

Line 8, Tip

Line 9, Tip

Line 10, Tip

Line 11, Tip

66A

67A

68A

69A

Line 12, Ring

Line 13, Ring

Line 14, Ring

Line 15, Ring

66B

67B

68B

69B

Line 12, Tip

Line 13, Tip

Line 14, Tip

Line 15, Tip

* These pinouts apply to both the NT8D37 and NT8D11 backplanes

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 541 of 906

Configuration

This section outlines the procedures for configuring the switches and jumpers on the NT8D02 Digital Line card and configuring the system software to

properly recognize the card. Figure 107 on page 542 shows where the

switches and jumper blocks are located on this board.

Jumper and switch settings

The NT8D02 Digital Line card has no user-configurable jumpers or switches.

The card derives its address from its position in the backplane and reports that information back to the Call Server through the LAN Link interface.


Voice and data ports are configured using the Meridian Digital Telephone

Administration program LD 11. See the Software Input/Output:

Administration (553-3001-311) for LD 11 service change instructions.


Page 542 of 906


Figure 107

Digital line card – jumper block and switch locations

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

553-6161


Page 543 of 906

Figure 108

Digital line card – jumper block and switch locations

553-6161


Page 544 of 906


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

546

Page 545 of 906

NT8D03 Analog Line card

Overview

The NT8D03 Analog Line card provides an interface for up to 16 analog

(500/2500-type) telephones. It is equipped with an 8051-family microprocessor that performs the following functions:


• card identification

• self-test

• status reporting to the controller



Note: A maximum of four NT8D03 Analog Line cards can be installed in each MG 1000S. A maximum of four NT8D03 Analog Line cards can be installed in each MG 1000S Expansion.


Page 546 of 906

NT8D03 Analog Line card

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

564

NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting

Line card

Page 547 of 906

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547




Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

Introduction

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card is an IPE line card that can be installed in the NT8D37 IPE module.

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card (µ-Law) provides talk battery and signaling for up to 16 regular 2-wire common battery analog

(500/2500-type) telephones and key telephone equipment, with the Message

Waiting lamp feature.

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card is functionally identical to the NT8D03 Analog Line card, except it can also connect a high-voltage, low-current feed to each line to light the message waiting lamp on telephones equipped with the Message Waiting feature.

The analog message waiting line card mounts in any IPE slot.


Page 548 of 906


Note: A maximum of four NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line cards per MG 1000S and four NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line cards per MG 1000S Expansion are supported.

Cards later than vintage NT8D09AK support µ-Law and A-Law companding, and provide a 2 dB transmission profile change. The transmission change improves performance on long lines, particularly for lines used outside of a single-building environment.

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card supports 56K modem operation.

CAUTION

Damage to Equipment

If a modem is connected to a port on the message waiting line card, that port should not be defined in software (LD 10) as having message waiting capabilities.

Otherwise, the modem will be damaged.

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card interfaces to and is

compatible with the equipment listed in Table 177.

Table 177

NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card application and compatibility (Part 1 of 2)

Specifications Equipment

500-type rotary dial sets (or equivalent):

dial speed percent break interdigital time

2500-type Digitone sets (or equivalent):

frequency accuracy pulse duration

8.0 to 12.5 pps

58 to 70%

150 ms

+ 1.5%

40 ms

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 549 of 906

Table 177

NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card application and compatibility (Part 2 of 2) (Continued)

Equipment

interdigital time speed

Specifications

40 ms

12.5 digits/s


The circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm. by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board.

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card circuits connects to the backplane through a 160-pin connector. The backplane is cabled to a connector in the bottom of the cabinet which is cabled to the cross-connect terminal (Main Distribution Frame) through 25-pair cables. Station apparatus then connects to the card at the cross-connect terminal.

The faceplate of the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card is equipped

with a red LED which lights when the card is disabled (see Figure 109 on page 550

. At power-up, the LED flashes as the analog line card runs a self-test. If the test completes successfully, the card is automatically enabled

(if it is configured in software) and the LED goes out.


The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card contains a microprocessor that provides the following functions:


• self-test





Page 550 of 906


Figure 109

Analog message waiting line card – faceplate

Card lock latch

Anlg

M/WL C

LED

Card lock latch

NT8D09

Rlse 0x

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

553-6165


Page 551 of 906

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card also provides:

• 600 ohms balanced terminating impedance

• analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion of transmission and reception signals for 16 audio phone lines

• transmission and reception of Scan and Signaling Device (SSD) signaling messages over a DS-30X signaling channel in A10 format

• on-hook/off-hook status and switchhook flash detection

• 20 Hz ringing signal connection and automatic disconnection when the station goes off-hook

• synchronization for connecting and disconnecting the ringing signal to zero crossing of ringing voltage

• loopback of SSD messages and Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) signals for diagnostic purposes

• correct initialization of all features at power-up

• direct reporting of digit dialed (500-type telephones) by collecting dial pulses

• connection of –150 V dc at 1 Hz to activate message waiting lamps

• lamp status detection

• disabling and enabling of selected units for maintenance


contained on the analog message waiting line card. Each of these functions are described in the following sections.


Page 552 of 906


Figure 110

Analog message waiting line card – block diagram

PCM

Codec

PCM

Codec


Address/ data bus

Front panel

LED

Microcontroller

Backplane

Card slot address

Async card

LAN link


Controller card

Tx PCM

Rx PCM

5.12 MHz clock

1 kHz frame sync


PCM

PCM

Codec

Codec


Power supplies

Ring generator

+8.5 V dc

Reg

+15 V dc

Reg

Control logic

+ 5 V dc power

+12 V dc power



Analog hybrid

XFMR

Signaling relays



Message waiting


Tip

Ring


Analog hybrid

XFMR

Signaling relays



Message waiting


Tip

Ring


Analog hybrid

XFMR

Signaling relays



Message waiting


Tip

Ring


Analog hybrid

XFMR

Signaling relays



Message waiting


Tip

Ring


–150 V dc light power

– 48 V dc battery

Rsync

Ringing

553-6168

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 553 of 906

Card interfaces

The analog message waiting line card passes voice and signaling data over

DS-30X loops and maintenance data over the card LAN link. These interfaces

are discussed in “Intelligent Peripheral Equipment” on page 32

.

Line interface units

The analog message waiting line card contains 16 identical and independently configurable line interface units (also referred to as circuits). Each unit provides 600-ohm impedance matching and a balance network in a signal transformer/analog hybrid circuit. Circuits are also provided in each unit to apply the ringing voltage onto the line synchronized to the ringing current zero crossing. Signal detection circuits monitor on-hook/off-hook status and switchhook flash detection. Four codecs are provided to perform A/D and D/

A conversion of line analog voiceband signals to digital PCM signals. Each

CODEC supports four line interface units. The following features are common to all units on the card:

• Transmission and reception of Scan and Signaling Device (SSD) signaling messages over a DS30X signaling channel in A10 format.

• Loopback of SSD messages and pulse code modulation (PCM) signals for diagnostic purposes.

• Correct initialization of all features, as configured in software, at power-up.

• Direct reporting of digits dialed (500 telephones) by collecting dial pulses.

• Connection of –150 V dc at 1 Hz to activate message waiting lamps in two telephones in parallel. The two telephones must be the same type or the neon series resistor in each telephone must be 54 K ohms or greater.

• Lamp status detection (will not detect a failure of either lamp when operating in parallel).

• Disabling and enabling of selected units for maintenance.

• 40 mA to telephones with short circuit protection.


Page 554 of 906



Control functions are provided by the following:

• a microcontroller

• a card LAN interface

• signaling and control circuits on the analog message waiting line card

Microcontroller

The analog message waiting line card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card. The microcontroller controls the following:

• reporting to the CE CP through the card LAN link:








— programming of input/output interface control circuits for administration of line interface unit operation

— enabling/disabling of an interrupted dial tone to indicate call waiting


— transmission loss levels


The signaling and control portion of the card provides circuits that establish, supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work with the system CP to operate the line interface circuits during calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the CP and return incoming call status information over the DS-30X network loop.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 555 of 906

Analog line interface

Input impedance

The impedance at tip and ring is 600 ohms with a return loss of:

• 20 dB for 200-500 Hz

• 26 dB for 500-3400 Hz

Insertion loss

On a station line-to-line connection, the total insertion loss at 1 kHz is

6 dB + 1 dB. This is arranged as 3.5 dB loss for analog to PCM, and 2.5 dB loss for PCM to analog.

Frequency response

The loss values in Table 178 are measured relative to the loss at 1 kHz.

Table 178

Analog message waiting line card – frequency response

Frequency (Hz)

60

200

300

3000

3200

3400

Minimum (dB)

20.0

0.0

–0.5

–0.5

–0.5

0.0

Maximum (dB)

—

5.0

1.0

1.0

1.5

3.0

Message channel noise

The message channel noise C-weighted (dBrnC) on 95 percent of the connections (line to line) with both ends terminated in 600 ohms does not exceed 20 dBrnC.


Page 556 of 906


Table 179 provides a technical summary of the analog message waiting line

card.

Table 179

NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card technical summary

Impedance

Loop limit (excluding set)

Leakage resistance

Ring trip

Ringing voltage

Signaling

Supervision

600 ohms

1000 ohms at nominal -48 V (excluding set)

30,000 ohms

During silent or ringing intervals

86 V AC

Loop start

Normal battery conditions are continuously applied (approximately -44.5 V on ring and

-2.5 V on tip at nominal -48 V battery)

Power input from backplane -48 (can be as low as -42 for DC-powered systems), +15,

-15, +8.5 V and ringing voltage; also -150 V on analog message waiting line card.

Insertion loss 6 dB + 1 dB at 1020 Hz

3.5 dB loss for analog to PCM,

2.5 dB loss for PCM to analog

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 557 of 906


Table 180 provides the power requirements for the NT8D09 Analog Message

Waiting Line card.

Table 180


Voltage

(+/-)

+ 12.0 V dc

Tolerance

0.36 V dc

Idle current

48 mA

Active current

0 mA

Max

48 mA

+ 8.0 V dc

–48.0 V dc

–48.0 V dc

86.0 V ac

0.40 V dc

2.00 V dc

5.00 V dc

5.00 V ac

150 mA

48 mA

0 mA

0 mA

8 mA

40 mA

280 mA

688 mA

10 mA

(Note 1)

320 mA

10 mA

(Note 2)

160 mA

–150.0 V dc 3.00 V dc 0 mA 2 mA 32 mA

Note 1: Each active ringing relay requires 10 mA of battery voltage.

Note 2: Reflects the current for ringing a single station set (or DN telephone). There may be as many as five ringers on each line.


In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided on the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting line card.


Page 558 of 906


Overload level

Signal levels exceeding +7 dBm applied to the tip and ring cause distortion in speech transmission.


Table 181 lists the environmental specifications for the analog message

waiting line card.

Table 181

Analog message waiting line card – environmental specifications

Parameter


Operating humidity

Storage temperature

Specifications

0° to +60° C (+32 to +140° F), ambient


–40° to +70° C (–40° to +158° F)


The analog message waiting line card brings the 16 phone lines to the IPE backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. The backplane is cabled to the

I/O panel on the rear of the module, which is then connected to the MDF by

25-pair cables.

Telephone lines from station equipment cross connect to the analog message waiting line card at the MDF using a wiring plan similar to that used for trunk

cards. A typical connection example is shown in Figure 111 on page 560

and

Table 112 on page 563 shows the I/O pin designations at the backplane

connector. This connector is arranged as an 80-row by 2-column array of pins. Normally, these pin positions are cabled to 50-pin connectors at the I/O panel in the rear of each module for connection with 25-pair cables to the cross-connect terminal.

The information in Table 182 on page 559 is provided as a reference and

diagnostic aid at the backplane, since the cabling arrangement may vary at the

I/O panel. See Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1: Large System

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 559 of 906

Installation and Configuration (553-3021-210) for cable pinout information at the I/O panel.

Table 182

Analog message waiting line card – backplane pinouts

Backplane pinout*


Backplane pinout*


16A

17A

18A

19A

12A

13A

14A

15A

Line 0, Ring

Line 1, Ring

Line 2, Ring

Line 3, Ring

Line 4, Ring

Line 5, Ring

Line 6, Ring

Line 7, Ring

16B

17B

18B

18B

12B

13B

14B

15B

Line 0, Tip

Line 1, Tip

Line 2, Tip

Line 3, Tip

Line 4, Tip

Line 5, Tip

Line 6, Tip

Line 7, Tip

62A

63A

64A

65A

Line 8, Ring

Line 9, Ring

Line 10, Ring

Line 11, Ring

62B

63B

64B

65B

Line 8, Tip

Line 9, Tip

Line 10, Tip

Line 11, Tip

66A

67A

68A

69A

Line 12, Ring

Line 13, Ring

Line 14, Ring

Line 15, Ring

66B

67B

68B

69B

* These pinouts apply to both NT8D37 and NT8D11 backplanes.

Line 12, Tip

Line 13, Tip

Line 14, Tip

Line 15, Tip


Page 560 of 906


Figure 111

Analog message waiting line card – typical cross connection example

System

NT8D37

IPE Module

NT8D09

Message

Waiting

Line Card

Slot 0

Unit 0

Unit 1

Unit 2

Module

I/O Panel

Connector

A

2T

2R

3T

3R

4T

4R

0T

0R

1T

1R

5T

5R

4

30

5

28

3

29

31

6

26

1

27

2

(W-BL)

(BL-W)

(W-O)

(O-W)

(W-G)

(G-W)

(W-BR)

(BR-W)

(W-S)

(S-W)

(R-BL)

(BL-R)

Unit 3

Cross-connect

Part of

25-pair cable

MDF

Tip

Ring

Tip

Ring

Tip

Ring

Tip

Ring

Tip

Ring

Tip

Ring

Unit 15

OPS or ONS telephone connections with message waiting lamps


553-AAA1131

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 561 of 906

Configuration

This section outlines the procedures for configuring the switches and jumpers on the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card and configuring the

system software to properly recognize the card. Figure 112 on page 563

shows where the switches and jumper blocks are located on this board.

Jumper and switch settings

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card has no user-configurable jumpers or switches. The card derives its address from its position in the backplane and reports that information back to the CPU through the LAN

Link interface.


Individual line interface units on the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card are configured using the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone


The message waiting feature is enabled by entering data into the customer data block using LD 15. See Software Input/Output: Administration

(553-3001-311) for LD 10 and LD 15 service change instructions.

Analog message waiting line cards with a vintage later than NT8D09AK provide a fixed +2 dB transmission profile change in the gain of the D/A

convertor. See Table 183 on page 562 .

This transmission profile change is used for control of end-to-end connection loss. Control of such loss is a major element in controlling transmission parameters such as received volume, echo, noise, and crosstalk. The loss plan for the analog message waiting line card determines port-to-port loss between an analog line card unit (port) and other IPE ports. LD 97 is used to configure


Page 562 of 906

NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card the system for port-to-port loss. See Software Input/Output: Administration

(553-3001-311) for LD 97 service change instructions.

Table 183

Transmission Profile Changes

Vintage

Previous to AK

AK and later

A/D convertor gain

–3.5 dB

–3.5 dB

D/A convertor gain

–2.5 dB

–0.5 dB

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 563 of 906

Figure 112

Analog message waiting line card – jumper block and switch locations

553-6166


Page 564 of 906


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

626

Page 565 of 906


Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565



Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573



Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624

Introduction

Nortel is pleased to introduce the NT8D14CA Universal Trunk (XUT) card as a replacement for the NT8D14BB card. The NT8D14CA has been modified to add a longer loop capability for CAMA trunk applications.

The NT8D14CA comes equipped with a set of 2 jumpers for each hybrid that should be set to the longer loop length (LL) when the trunk is used in a

CAMA application. The jumpers are numbered P35 to P50 and are set to the shorter loop length (SL) position when it comes from the factory. For each hybrid, both jumpers should be changed to the LL position only if used as a

CAMA trunk. Otherwise the jumpers should be left to the SL position.


Page 566 of 906


The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card interfaces eight analog trunk lines to the system. Each trunk interface is independently configured by software control using the Trunk Administration program LD 14.


Note: Each MG 1000S can contain up to four analog trunk cards. Each

MG 1000S Expansion can contain up to four analog trunk cards.

The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card supports the following trunk types:

• Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA) trunks

• Central Office (CO), Foreign Exchange (FEX), and Wide Area

Telephone Service (WATS) trunks

• Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunks

• Tie trunks: two-way Loop Dial Repeating (LDR) and two-way loop

Outgoing Automatic Incoming Dial (OAID)

• Recorded Announcement (RAN) trunks

• Paging trunks

The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card also supports Music, Automatic Wake

Up, and Direct Inward System Access (DISA) features.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 567 of 906

Table 184 lists the signaling and trunk types supported by the NT8D14

Universal Trunk card.

Table 184

Trunk and signaling matrix

Trunk types

Signaling type

CO/FX/

WATS

DID Tie RAN Paging

CAMA

Loop start Yes No

(see note)

No N/A N/A

Yes

Ground start Yes No No N/A N/A

No

Loop DR No Yes Yes N/A N/A

No

Loop OAID No No Yes N/A N/A

No

Continuous operation mode

No No No Yes N/A

No

Start modes

(pulse and level)

No No No Yes N/A

Note: For incoming and outgoing service, DID trunks must be programmed as loop dial repeating.

No


The trunk and common multiplexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by

25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board.

The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card connects to the backplane through a

160-pin connector shroud. The backplane is cabled to the I/O panel, which is cabled to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) by 25-pair cables. External equipment, such as recorded announcement machines, paging equipment, and Central Office facilities, connect to the card at the MDF.

See the Communication Server 1000S: Installation and Configuration

(553-3031-210) for termination and cross-connect information.


Page 568 of 906


The faceplate of the card is equipped with a red Light Emitting Diode (LED).

See Figure 113 on page 569 . When an NT8D14 Universal Trunk card is

installed, the LED remains lit for two to five seconds while the self-test runs.

If the self-test is successful, the LED flashes three times and remains lit.

When the card is configured and enabled in software, then the LED goes out.

If the LED flashes continuously or remains weakly lit, replace the card.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Figure 113

Universal trunk card – faceplate


Page 569 of 906

Card lock latch

Univ

Trk

LED

S


Card lock latch

NT8D14

Rlse 0x

553-6195


Page 570 of 906



Figure 114 shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card. Each of these functions is described on the following pages.

Figure 114

NT8D14 Universal trunk card – block diagram

Trunk interface units 0–3


PCM

Codec

Address/ data bus

Analog hybrid

XFMR

Signaling relays

Signal detection

Signal hybrid

Tip

Ring

*

*

Analog trunk facilities

(CO/FX/WATS,

DID, tie, RAN, or paging)

Front panel

LED

Microcontroller

Backplane

Card slot address

Async card

LAN link


Controller card

Tx PCM

Rx PCM

5.12 MHz clock

1 kHz frame sync


PCM

Codec




Analog hybrid

XFMR

Signaling relays

Signal detection

Signal hybrid

Tip

Ring

*

*

Analog trunk facilities

(CO/FX/WATS,

DID, tie, RAN, or paging)

*

Signaling lines for

RAN or paging control

Control logic

553-CSE6197

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 571 of 906

Card interfaces

The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card passes voice and signaling data over

DS-30X loops, and maintenance data over the card LAN link. These

interfaces are described in “Intelligent Peripheral Equipment” on page 32

.

Trunk interface units

The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card contains eight identical and independently configurable trunk interface units (also referred to as circuits).

Each unit provides impedance matching and a balanced network in a signal transformer/analog hybrid circuit.

Also provided are relays for placing outgoing call signaling onto the trunk.

Signal detection circuits monitor incoming call signaling. Two codecs are provided for performing A/D and D/A conversion of trunk analog voiceband signals to digital PCM signals. Each codec supports four trunk interface units.

The following features are common to all units on the card:

• trunk type configurable on a per unit basis

• terminating impedance (600 or 900 ohms) selectable on a per-unit basis

(minimum vintage BA)

• balance impedance (600 or 900 ohms or complex impedance network) selectable on a per-unit basis (minimum vintage BA)

• control signals provided for RAN and paging equipment

• loopback of PCM signals received from trunk facility over DS-30X network loop for diagnostic purposes

• switchable pads for transmission loss control


Page 572 of 906



Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN interface, and signaling and control circuits on the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card.

Microcontroller

The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card. The microcontroller controls the following:

• reporting to the CE CPU through the card LAN link:





• receipt and implementation of card configuration through the card LAN link:



— programming of input/output interface control circuits for administration of trunk interface unit operation


— transmission pad settings


Maintenance data is exchanged with the common equipment CPU over a dedicated asynchronous serial network called the Card LAN link.


The signaling and control portion of the Universal Trunk card works with the

CPU to operate the card hardware. The card receives messages from the CPU over a signaling channel in the DS-30X loop and returns status information to the CPU over the same channel. The signaling and control portion of the card

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 573 of 906

provides the means for analog loop terminations to establish, supervise, and take down call connections.

Signaling interface

All trunk signaling messages are three bytes long. The messages are transmitted in channel zero of the DS-30X in A10 format.

Configuration information for the Universal Trunk card is downloaded from the CPU at power-up or by command from maintenance programs. Eleven configuration messages are sent. Three messages are sent to the card to configure the make/break ratio and A-Law or µ-Law operation. One message is sent to each unit to configure the trunk characteristics.

Operation

Administrators can assign optional applications, features, and signaling arrangements for each unit on the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card through the

Trunk Administration LD 14 and Trunk Route Administration LD 16 programs or jumper strap settings on the card.

Loop start operation

Loop start operation is configured in software and implemented in the card through software download messages. When the card is idle, it provides a high impedance toward the CO for isolation and ac (ringing) detection.

Incoming calls

The alerting signal into the System is 20 Hz (nominal) ringing sent by the CO.

When an incoming call is answered, ringing is tripped when the System places a low-resistance dc loop across the tip and ring leads toward the CO.

See Figure 115 and Figure 116 on page 575 .

Outgoing calls

For outgoing calls, the software sends an outgoing seizure message to place a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads toward the CO. See



. When the CO detects the low-resistance loop, it prepares to receive digits.When the CO is ready to


Page 574 of 906


Figure 115

Loop start call states – incoming call from CO/FX/WATS

System (near) end

Idle

High-resistance loop Low-resistance loop

Near end disconnects

Forced far end disconnect

Near end disconnects first

(Note 3)

Dial tone after

far end timeout Far end disconnects first

(Note 2)

Far end originates by ringing

Near end answers, ringing is removed

(Note 1)

Note 1: The originating office may reverse battery and ground when attendant answer is received.

Note 2: No disconnection signal is passed to trunk.

Note 3: The near end provides a high-impedance (>150k ohms) disconnect signal of at least 50 ms before reconnecting the ground detector.

553-AAA1133 receive digits, it returns a dial tone. Outward address signaling is then applied from the system in the form of loop (interrupting) dial pulses or DTMF tones.

Polarity-sensitive/-insensitive packs feature

The CS 1000 Release 4.5 software provides the polarity-sensitive/ polarity-insensitive (PSP and PIP) packs feature for the accurate recording of outgoing call duration for loop start and ground start operation.

On trunks equipped with far-end answer supervision, the PSP class of service is enabled in software and causes call-duration recording in CDR records to begin only upon receipt of answer supervision from the far-end.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 575 of 906

Figure 116

Loop start call connection sequence – incoming call from CO/FX/WATS

A

Near end

Meridian

1

Far end

CO

B

State Signal/direction

Highresistance loop


Remarks

Idle

Trunk seizure

Call presented to console loop key

Ringing

Ringing signal is superimposed on battery by the CO upon seizure.

Near end detects the ringing signal, makes the trunk circuit busy to all other calls, and presents the call to an idle console loop key.

Console answers

2-way voice connection

Low-resistance loop

When attendant presses a loop key to answer the call, the near end places a low-resistance loop between tip and ring and removes the ring and ground detectors from the circuit.


CO detects the change in loop resistance and removes the ringing signal. Normal battery and ground will remain. However, some COs may reverse battery and ground.

A goes on hook

Idle



If near end disconnects first, it opens the loop, waits at least 50 ms, and then reconnects the ring and ground detectors.

Normally, no disconnection signal is returned by the CO; normal battery and ground will remain. However, if battery and ground were reversed when call was established, normal battery would be restored at this time.

B goes on hook

Idle

Ground on tip/ battery on ring and dial tone

If far end goes on hook first, CO sends dial (or busy) tone after timeout. CO also restores normal battery and ground if they had been reversed when the call was established.

All tones and any battery/ground reversal are ignored by the near end.


Near end restores high-resistance loop when terminal A goes on hook.

553-6240


Page 576 of 906


Figure 117

Ground start call states – incoming call from CO/FX/WATS


Low-resistance loop

Idle

High-resistance loop


Far end disconnects far end disconnects first

Near end disconnects first (Note 2)

Far end

originates

Ringing

Assignment to loop key


(Note 1)

Note 1: The far end may reverse battery and ground upon receipt of attendant answer.


553-AAA1133

For trunks not equipped with answer supervision, the PIP class of service is enabled and call-duration recording begins immediately upon near-end trunk seizure. The PSP and PIP classes of service are enabled in the Trunk


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 577 of 906

Figure 118

Ground start call connection sequence – incoming call from CO/FX/WATS

A

Near end

Meridian

1

Far end

CO

B


Highresistance loop


Idle

Trunk seizure


Console answers


Ground on tip

Low-resistance loop

Ringing


CO grounds tip. Near end detects the ground and makes the trunk busy to all outgoing calls.

Ringing is superimposed on battery by the

CO.

When console answers, near end places a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring.

When CO detects change to low-resistance loop, it removes ringing. Some COs may reverse battery and ground on tip and ring.

B goes on hook

Idle



If far end disconnects first, CO removes ground from tip. If battery and ground were reversed when call was established, battery is removed from tip and restored to ring.

Near end detects drop in loop current and opens loop.

A goes on hook

Idle



If near end disconnects first, it opens the loop, waits 50 ms, and then reconnects the ground detector.

CO detects drop in loop current and removes ground from tip. If battery and ground were reversed when call was established, battery is removed from tip and restored to ring.

553-6236


Page 578 of 906


Ground start operation

Ground start operation is configured in software and implemented through software download messages. In the idle state, the tip conductor from the CO is open and a high-resistance negative battery is present on the ring lead.

Incoming calls

In an incoming call, after ground is detected on the tip, the universal trunk card scans for a ringing detection signal before presenting the call to an attendant and tripping the ringing. When the attendant answers, a low resistance is placed across the tip and ring conductors, which trips CO ringing

and establishes a speech path. See Figure 119 on page 579


.

Reverse-wiring compensation

The CS 1000 Release 4.5 software includes a feature for detecting reverse wiring (connection of the near-end tip and ring leads to the far-end ring and tip leads) on ground start trunks with far-end answer supervision.

Ordinarily, an incoming call on a reverse-wired trunk without reverse-wiring compensation presents ringing on the tip lead rather than on the ring lead.

Since the software expects to see a ground on the tip lead, it interprets the end of the first ringing signal as a switchhook flash. But since the interval between ringing signals exceeds the switchhook flash time of 512 milliseconds, the software assumes a far-end disconnect. This causes the call to be presented to a console loop key and then immediately removed.

The reverse-wiring compensation feature operates as follows. If an apparent disconnect takes place immediately after the first ringing signal, the software time stamps the event and temporarily remove the call from the console loop key.

If another such ringing/disconnect event occurs during the No Ringing

Detector (NRD) time, the trunk is considered “possibly reverse-wired” and a threshold counter starts. Calls on trunks identified as possibly reverse-wired are presented to the attendant during the initial ring, removed, and then continuously presented after the second ring. If a call on a possibly reverse-wired trunk is abandoned before the attendant answers, it is disconnected after the NRD timer expires.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 579 of 906

Figure 119

Ground start call states – incoming call from CO/FX/WATS



Idle



Far end disconnects far end disconnects first

Near end disconnects first (Note 2)

Far end

originates

Ringing

Assignment to loop key


(Note 1)

Note 1: The far end may reverse battery and ground upon receipt of attendant answer.


553-AAA1133

A trunk identified as possibly reverse-wired is switched by the software to loop start processing after the second ring. This switching takes place on a call-by-call basis. Thus, if a previously correctly wired trunk becomes reverse-wired, the next incoming call is marked as possibly reverse-wired and the threshold count begins.

If the threshold count exceeds its limit, an error message is printed and the trunk is registered as “positively reverse wired.” Once identified as positively reverse wired, the call is presented continuously from the first ring. When a


Page 580 of 906


Figure 120

Ground start call connection sequence – incoming call from CO/FX/WATS

A

Near end

System

Far end

CO

B


Highresistance loop


Idle

Trunk seizure



Ground on tip

Console answers

Low-resistance loop

Ringing


CO grounds tip. Near end detects the ground and makes the trunk busy to all outgoing calls.

Ringing is superimposed on battery by the

CO.

When console answers, near end places a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring.

When CO detects change to low-resistance loop, it removes ringing. Some COs may reverse battery and ground on tip and ring.

B goes on hook

Idle





A goes on hook

Idle



If near end disconnects first, it opens the loop, waits 50 ms, and then reconnects the ground detector.


553-AAA1134

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 581 of 906

reverse-wired trunk becomes correctly wired, the first subsequent call clears the threshold counter and normal ground start processing is implemented.

Note 1: The far-end can reverse battery and ground upon receipt of attendant answer.

Note 2: The near-end provides a high-impedance (>150k ohms) disconnect signal of at least 50 ms before reconnecting the ground detector.

Outgoing calls

For outgoing calls, the trunk provides a ground to the ring lead. The CO responds by grounding the tip and returning dial tone. After the tip ground is detected by the card, a low-resistance path is placed between the tip and ring leads and the ground is removed from the ring. Addressing is then applied from the system in the form of loop (interrupting) dial pulses or DTMF tones.

See Figure 121 on page 582


.

The Polarity-Sensitive/Polarity-Insensitive Packs (PSP and PIP) feature must be set to provide for proper outgoing call-duration recording with ground start operation. Refer to the description of loop start operation in this section for a more complete discussion of PSP and PIP.


Page 582 of 906


Figure 121

Ground start call states – outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS


Idle

Forced

near end disconnect


Ground on ring Low-resistance loop

Far end disconnects first

Near end originates


Loop pulsing or DTMF

Dial tone


Ringing and ringback tone

CO toll denial


Far end answers

(ans sup) and ringback tone removed

Far end answers

(no ans sup) and ringback tone removed

553-AAA1135

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 583 of 906

Figure 122

Ground start call connection sequence – outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS

A

Near end

System

Far end

CO

B

State

Idle

Trunk seizure

Dial tone from CO

B rings



Highresistance loop

Tip open/ battery

on ring

Ground on ring

Remarks

Ground on tip/ battery on ring, dial tone

Terminal A dials trunk access code. CE sends a message via the data output bus to ground the ring.

Low-resistance loop

Address signaling

Ringback

When the CO recognizes seizure, it grounds the tip and supplies dial tone.

Detection of the ground on tip is signaled to the CE via the data input bus. The CE then sends a signal via the data output bus to place a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring and remove ground from ring.

Digits are outpulsed in the form of a series of loop pulses or DTMF tones.

Upon receipt of the first pulse/tone, the CO removes dial tone. When outpulsing is complete, terminal B is rung (if idle) and the proper audible indication is returned to local end.

When terminal B answers, ringing is tripped and CO cuts terminal B through to trunk. Some COs may reverse battery and ground on tip and ring when terminal B answers or for toll denial.

B goes on hook

Idle

A goes on hook

Idle







If near end disconnects first, it opens the loop.


553-AAA1136


Page 584 of 906


Direct inward dial operation

Incoming calls

An incoming call from the CO places a low-resistance loop across the tip and

ring leads. See Figure 123 on page 585


.

Dial pulses or DTMF tones are then presented from the CO. When the called party answers, the universal trunk card reverses battery and ground on the tip and ring leads to the CO. The trunk is arranged for first party release. The CO releases the trunk by removing the low-resistance loop, at which time normal battery and ground are restored at the near-end. This also applies to incoming tie trunk calls from a far-end PBX.

Note: The near-end can be configured for immediate start, delay dial, or wink start.

Two-way, loop dial repeating, TIE trunk operation

Incoming calls

In an incoming call configuration, the far-end initiates a call by placing a

low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. See Figure 125 on page 587

and Figure 126 on page 588 .

This causes a current to flow through the battery feed resistors in the trunk circuit. Address signaling is then applied by the far-end in the form of DTMF tones or dial pulses. When the called party answers, an answer supervision signal is sent by the software, causing the System to reverse battery and ground on the tip and ringleads to the far-end. Far-end disconnect is initiated by opening the loop while the near-end disconnect is initiated by restoring

normal battery and ground. The operation represented in Figure 125 on page 587

and Figure 126 on page 588 also applies to incoming DID trunk

calls from a CO.

Note: Where no near-end answer supervision is provided, the party at the far-end hangs up after recognizing near-end call termination.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 585 of 906

Figure 123

DID trunk, loop DR call states – incoming call from CO


Ground on tip, battery on ring Battery on tip, ground on ring

Idle

Forced near end disconnect




Battery-ground or loop pulsing or DTMF

(Note)

Far end originates

Near end answers

Note: The near end may be configured for immediate start, delay dial, or wink start.

553-AAA1137


Page 586 of 906


Figure 124

DID trunk, loop DR call connection sequence – incoming call from CO

A

Near end

System

Far end

CO

B



Highresistance loop

Remarks

Idle

Trunk seizure

Outpulsing

A rings


Low-resistance loop

Ringback

Address signaling

CO places a low resistance between tip and ring.

Near end detects increase in loop current and makes trunk busy to all outgoing calls.

CO applies addressing to the trunk in the form of battery-ground or loop pulses or

DTMF tones.

Near end detects addressing, alerts terminal

A, and provides ringback tone to CO.


When terminal A goes off hook, near end trips ringback tone and provides answer super-vision by reversing battery and ground on tip and ring.

B goes on hook

Idle



If far end disconnects first, CO opens the loop.

Near end detects drop in loop current and reverses battery and ground on tip and ring.

A goes on hook

Idle



If near end disconnects first, it reverses battery and ground on tip and ring.

CO detects battery/ground reversal and opens loop.

553-AAA1138

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 587 of 906

Figure 125

Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states – incoming call from far-end PBX

Idle

Ground on tip, battery on ring


Battery on tip, ground on ring

Far end hangs up

(Note)

Far end originates

Battery-ground or loop pulse, or DTMF

Near end answers

(no ans sup)

Near end answers

(ans sup)



Far end disconnects



Note: Where no near-end answer supervision is provided, party at far end hangs up after recognizing near-end call termination.

553-AAA1139


Page 588 of 906


Figure 126

Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence – incoming call from far-end PBX

A

Near end

System

Far end

System

B




Remarks

Idle

Trunk seizure

Outpulsing

A rings


B goes on hook

Idle

A goes on hook

Idle

Ringback

Low-resistance loop

Address signaling


Far end places a low resistance between tip and ring.


Far end applies addressing to the trunk in the form of battery-ground or loop pulsing, or DTMF tones.

Near end detects addressing, alerts terminal A, and provides ringback tone to far end.

When terminal A goes off hook, near end trips ringback tone and provides answer supervision, if required by far end, by reversing battery and ground on tip and ring.




If far end disconnects first, it momentarily opens the loop and then restores normal battery and ground if no nearend answer supervision was provided when call was establish-ed. Otherwise, it waits for the near end to restore normal battery and ground.

Near end detects drop in loop current and restores normal battery and ground if answer supervision was provided.

Otherwise, terminal A simply hangs up.

If answer supervision was provided, far end restores normal battery and ground when it detects battery/ground reversal from near end.



If near end disconnects first, normal battery is restored if answer supervision was provided to establish call.

Otherwise, terminal A simply hangs up.

If far end detects battery/ground reversal, it momentarily opens loop and then restores normal battery. But, if no answer supervision was provided by the near end when the call was established, it cannot supply a battery reversal to signal call termination; the person at terminal B must recognize end of call and hang up, which will then cause the far end to restore normal battery.

553-AAA1140

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 589 of 906

Outgoing calls

In an outgoing call configuration, the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card is

connected to an existing PBX by a tie trunk. See Figure 127 on page 590 and


An outgoing call from the near-end seizes the trunk facility by placing a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. Outward addressing is then applied from the System in the form of DTMF tones or dial pulses. If answer supervision is provided by the far-end, reverse battery and ground on the tip

and ring leads are returned. The operation represented in Figure 129 on page 592

and Figure 130 on page 593 also applies to outgoing calls on a DID

trunk.

Note: Where no far-end answer supervision is provided, the party at the near-end hangs up, after recognizing far-end call termination.


Page 590 of 906


Figure 127

Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states – outgoing call to far-end PBX





Idle

Near end hangs up

(Note)

Near end originates


Battery-ground or loop pulse or DTMF

Far end answers

(no ans sup)


Far end disconnects


Far end answers

(ans sup)


Note: Where no far-end answer supervision is provided, party at near end hangs up after recognizing far-end call termination.

553-AAA1141

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 591 of 906

Figure 128

Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence – outgoing call to far-end PBX

A

Near end

System

Far end

PBX

B




Remarks

Idle

Trunk seizure

Outpulsing

B rings


Low-resistance loop

Address signaling

When terminal A goes off hook, near end places a low resistance between tip and ring.

Terminal A dials and battery-ground or loop pulses, or

DTMF tones, are sent to far end.


If answer supervision is provided by far end, reverse battery and ground are applied to tip and ring when terminal B answers.

Near end monitors loop current during 2-way voice connection.

A goes on hook

Idle




If near end disconnects first, it momentarily opens the loop and then restores normal battery and ground if no far-end answer supervision was provided when call was established. Otherwise, it waits for the far end to restore normal battery and ground.

Far end detects drop in loop current and restores normal battery and ground if answer supervision was provided.

Otherwise, terminal B simply hangs up.

If answer supervision was provided, near end restores normal battery and ground when it detects battery/ground reversal from far end.

B goes on hook

Idle



If far end disconnects first, it restores normal battery if answer supervision was provided to establish call.


If near end detects battery/ground reversal, it momentarily opens loop and then restores normal battery. But, if no answer supervision was provided by the far end when the call was established, it cannot supply a battery reversal to signal call termination; the person at terminal A must recognize end of call and hang up, which will then cause the local end to restore normal battery.

553-AAA1142


Page 592 of 906


Figure 129

Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states – outgoing call to far-end PBX





Idle

Near end hangs up

(Note)

Near end originates


Battery-ground or loop pulse or DTMF

Far end answers

(no ans sup)


Far end disconnects


Far end answers

(ans sup)


Note: Where no far-end answer supervision is provided, party at near end hangs up after recognizing far-end call termination.

553-AAA1141

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 593 of 906

Figure 130

Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence – outgoing call to far-end PBX

A

Near end

System

Far end

PBX

B




Remarks

Idle

Trunk seizure

Outpulsing

B rings


Low-resistance loop

Address signaling

When terminal A goes off hook, near end places a low resistance between tip and ring.

Terminal A dials and battery-ground or loop pulses, or

DTMF tones, are sent to far end.


If answer supervision is provided by far end, reverse battery and ground are applied to tip and ring when terminal B answers.


A goes on hook

Idle




If near end disconnects first, it momentarily opens the loop and then restores normal battery and ground if no far-end answer supervision was provided when call was established. Otherwise, it waits for the far end to restore normal battery and ground.

Far end detects drop in loop current and restores normal battery and ground if answer supervision was provided.


If answer supervision was provided, near end restores normal battery and ground when it detects battery/ground reversal from far end.

B goes on hook

Idle



If far end disconnects first, it restores normal battery if answer supervision was provided to establish call.


If near end detects battery/ground reversal, it momentarily opens loop and then restores normal battery. But, if no answer supervision was provided by the far end when the call was established, it cannot supply a battery reversal to signal call termination; the person at terminal A must recognize end of call and hang up, which will then cause the local end to restore normal battery.

553-AAA1142


Page 594 of 906


Senderized operation for DID and two-way loop DR trunks

Incoming calls

If the far-end is senderized, the near-end can operate in any mode: Immediate

Start (IMM), Delay Dial (DDL) or Wink (WNK) start, as assigned at the

STRI prompt in the Trunk Administration program LD 14. See Figure 131 on page 595

.

Note: If a ground start trunk, the outpulse towards office occurs after ground detection. If a loop start trunk, the outpulse towards office occurs one second later.

For immediate start, following the seizure signal, the far-end starts pulsing after the standard delay (normally 65 ms, minimum).

For delay dial or wink start modes, stop/go signaling (off hook/on hook or battery/ground reversal) is returned by the System after receipt of the seizure signal. The delay dial (stop) signal begins immediately upon seizure and ends

(go signal) 384 ms later. The wink start (stop) signal begins 384 ms after seizure and ends (go signal) 256 ms later. The far-end detecting the go signal starts pulsing after the standard delay (normally 55 ms, minimum). Stop/go signaling, in addition to the signaling function, serves as an integrity check to help identify a malfunctioning trunk.

If required, the near-end can be configured to provide pseudo-answer supervision at the expiration of the end-of-dial timer. End-of-dial timer settings are made at the EOD (non-DTMF) or ODT (DTMF) prompts in the

Trunk Route Administration program LD 16.

The operation represented in Figure 132 on page 596

also applies to incoming calls on a DID trunk from a CO.

Outgoing calls

When DDL or WNK mode is used, outgoing calls require a stop/go signal from the far-end so that the near-end cannot outpulse until the far-end is ready

to receive digits. See Figure 133 on page 598 .

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 595 of 906

Figure 131

Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states – incoming call through senderized, tandem PBX from a CO/FX/WATS trunk

Idle




Far end hangs up

(Note 4)

Far end originates

Battery-ground or loop pulsing, or DTMF

(Note 1)

CO end answers

(no ans sup)

Near end stores office DN

(Note 2)

Near end answers

(ans sup)

(Note 3)

CO/FX/WATS ground start disconnect


Far end disconnects



Note 1: Dial CO/FX/WATS and office DN.

Note 2: If ground start trunk, outpulse toward office after ground detection.

If loop start trunk, outpulse toward office 1 second later.

Note 3: Pseudo-answer supervision is provided by near end at expiration of end-of-dial timer.

Note 4: Where no far-end answer supervision is provided, party at far end hangs up after recognizing near-end call termination.

553-AAA1143


Page 596 of 906


Figure 132

Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states – incoming call through senderized, tandem PBX from a CO/FX/WATS trunk

Idle




Far end hangs up

(Note 4)

Far end originates

Battery-ground or loop pulsing, or DTMF

(Note 1)

CO end answers

(no ans sup)


(Note 2)

Near end answers

(ans sup)

(Note 3)

CO/FX/WATS ground start disconnect


Far end disconnects



Note 1: Dial CO/FX/WATS and office DN.

Note 2: If ground start trunk, outpulse toward office after ground detection.

If loop start trunk, outpulse toward office 1 second later.

Note 3: Pseudo-answer supervision is provided by near end at expiration of end-of-dial timer.

Note 4: Where no far-end answer supervision is provided, party at far end hangs up after recognizing near-end call termination.

553-AAA1143

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 597 of 906

Note: Pseudo-answer supervision is provided by near-end at expiration of end-of-dial timer. Where no far-end answer supervision is provided, the party at the far-end hangs up after recognizing near-end call termination.

Outgoing automatic, incoming dial operation

Incoming calls

When the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card is seized by the far-end on an incoming call, a low-resistance loop is placed across the tip and ring leads.

Addressing is then sent by the far-end in the form of battery-ground or loop pulses, or DTMF tones. The trunk is released at the far-end when the loop is opened. When the near-end detects an open loop, it returns to a normal state.



.

Outgoing calls

When seized as a dial-selected outgoing trunk, the near-end places the battery on the tip and ground on the ring. This alerts the far-end of the seizure. The far-end responds with a low resistance across the tip and ring leads.



.


Page 598 of 906


Figure 133

Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states – outgoing call through far-end PBX to CO/FX/WATS





Battery-ground or loop pulses, or DTMF


Idle

Near end hangs up

(Note 3)

Near end originates

(Note 1)

Far end answers

(no ans sup)

(Note 2)

Dial tone

Go

(Note 2)

Stop

Far end answers

(ans sup)


Far end disconnects



Universal service provided by far end PBX if originating end is senderized

Note 1: Immediate-start outpulsing.

Note 2: Delay-dial or wink-start outpulsing after go signal.

Note 3: Where no far-end answer supervision is provided, party at near end hangs up after recognizing far-end call termination.

553-1144

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 599 of 906

Figure 134

Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call states – incoming call from far-end PBX

Idle




Forced near end disconnects

Far end disconnect



Battery-ground or loop pulses, or DTMF

Far end originates

Near end answers

553-AAA1145


Page 600 of 906


Figure 135

Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call connection sequence – incoming call from far-end PBX

A B

Near end

System

Far end

PBX



Highresistance loop

Remarks

Idle

Trunk seizure

Outpulsing

A rings


Low-resistance loop

Address signaling


Far end PBX seizes trunk by placing a low resistance between tip and ring.


Far end sends battery-ground or loop pulses, or DTMF tones.

Near end detects addressing and alerts terminal A.

Terminal A goes off hook. If answer supervision is required by far end, reverse battery and ground are applied to tip and ring.

Far end monitors loop current during 2-way voice connection.

B goes on hook

Idle


If far end disconnects first, it opens the loop.


Near end detects drop in loop current and restores normal battery and ground.

A goes on hook

Idle




Far end detects battery/ground reversal and opens loop.

553-AAA1146

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 601 of 906

Figure 136

Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call states – outgoing call to far-end PBX




Idle

Near end originates

Near end disconnect

Far end disconnect



Far end answers

553-AAA1147


Page 602 of 906


Figure 137

Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call connection sequence – outgoing call to far-end PBX

A

Near end

System

Far end

PBX

B



Highresistance loop

Remarks

Idle

Trunk seizure



Terminal A goes off hook and dials access code. Near end reverses battery and ground on tip and ring, alerting far end.

Low-resistance loop

Far end detects battery/ground reversal and answers call by placing a low resistance between tip and ring.


B goes on hook

Idle


If far end disconnects first, it opens the loop.


Near end detects drop in loop current and reverses battery and ground on tip and ring.

A goes on hook

Idle




Far end detects battery/ground reversal and opens loop.

553-AAA1148

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 603 of 906

Recorded announcement trunk operation

Note: Refer to “Multi-Channel RAN modes” on page 605

for information on Multi-Channel RAN modes, which are not linked to a

RAN machine or a given trunk.

When configured for Recorded Announcement (RAN) operation, a trunk unit is connected to a customer-provided recorded announcement machine.

Announcement machines must be compatible with RAN trunks. Use the manufacturer’s instructions to set up the Announcement machines.

Each trunk unit provides the following for operation with RAN equipment:

• pulse start, level start, or continuous operation modes

• selectable termination of tip and ring leads into 600 or 900 ohms for interface with a low-impedance (2 or 4 ohms) source

• connection of up to 24 trunk units to a single announcement machine channel

Recorded announcement machines

Recorded announcement machines store prerecorded voice messages that are played back to the trunk units to which they are connected. Most commercially available announcement machines store recordings digitally, although some drum and tape units are still in service.

An announcement machine can provide one or more channels and each channel may be prerecorded with a different message. Some announcement machines also provide a Special Information Tone (SIT) capability. These tones are inserted at the beginning of intercept messages such as “Your call cannot be completed as dialed. Please check the number and try again.”

Figure 138 on page 604 shows a typical connection from a single

announcement machine channel to unit 0 on a universal trunk card.


Page 604 of 906


Figure 138

Connecting RAN equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card (typical)

System

Cross connect

NT8D37

IPE Module

NT8D14

Universal

Trunk Card

Unit 0

Slot 0

Module

I/O Panel

Connector

A

0T

26

0R

1

0CP

27

0MB

2

(W-BL)

(BL-W)

(W-O)

(O-W)

Unit 1

Audio pair

Part of

25-pair cable

Signal pair

MDF

Part of

25-pair cable

Note 1

Unit 7

Parallel trunk connection

(Note 2)

NC

NC

48 V

Typical customerprovided external equipment

Announcer

T

Ref

R

C

Com

MC

Voice signal

Control relay

B

Com

MB

ST+

STÐ

Optoisolator

Busy relay

Start

Tel ground

Note 1:

For continuous operation mode, connect the trunk unit MB line to the announcer B line only and ground the announcer ST+ line. For pulse start or level start modes, connect the trunk unit MB line to the announcer ST+ line only and leave the announcer B line unconnected.

Note 2:

A maximum of 24 universal trunk card units can be paralleled to a single announcer channel.

553-AAA1149

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 605 of 906

RAN modes of operation

Figure 139 on page 606 shows the relationship of control signals to message

playback for the operating modes available in announcement machines. The

signal names shown in Figure 139 are typical.

Note 1: For continuous operation mode, connect the trunk unit MB line to the announcer B line only, and ground the announcer ST+ line. For pulse start or level start modes, connect the trunk unit MB line to the announcer ST+ line only, and leave the announcer B line unconnected.

Note 2: A maximum of 24 universal trunk card units can be paralleled to a single announcer channel.

Multi-Channel RAN modes

In Multi-Channel RAN, multiple RAN channels can be configured within one

RAN trunk route. In a Multi-Channel RAN route, each trunk has its own dedicated RAN channel on a physical RAN machine. Multi-Channel RAN routes do not support the cross connecting (daisy chains) of multiple trunk ports together so that several callers hear the same RAN message.

Multi-channel machine types – Continuous Mode Multi-Channel (MCON),

Pulse Start/Stop Multi-Channel (MPUL) and Level Start/Stop Multi-Channel

(MLVL) – are not linked to a RAN machine or a given trunk. All trunks belonging to the RAN route are considered independent. RAN trunks and

RAN machine channels are connected one-to-one. If one RAN trunk is detected as faulty, then all other trunks are not impacted.

For the RAN machine types, the maximum length of the recorded announcement is two hours. The meaning of a ground signal received from the RAN machine (play or idle) is configured in LD 16.

Multi-Channel Level Start/Control Mode (minimum vintage BA)

A RAN mode of operation is available called “Multi-Channel Level Start/

Control Mode.” This mode enables provisioning of multiple RAN channels for a RAN route (playing the same message independently on demand) cross-connected one-to-one to each RAN trunk in a multi-channel level start

RAN route. Do not bridge RAN trunks in a multi-channel RAN route.


Page 606 of 906


Figure 139

RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE)

Ground

ST+

Open

Play

Message

Idle

Ground

C

Open

ST+ input to announcer hardwired to ground

250 ms reset

250 ms pulse at end of message

— Continuous operation mode —

Ground

ST+

Open

Play

Message

Idle

Ground

C

Open

Ground

ST+

Open

Play

Message

Idle

Ground

C

Open

250 ms pulse starts message

Start

Message plays to completion

End

250 ms pulse at start of message


— Pulse start/Level control mode —

(early disconnect) (disconnect after end of message)

ST+ initiates and maintains message output

Message output only while ST+ is present

250 ms pulse at start of message

Intermediate ST+ pulses ignored


The Route Data Block LD 16 is used to configure a RAN route in

Multi-Channel Level Start/Control mode, using the following response:

RTYP = MLSS

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 607 of 906

Trunk members are provisioned in the Trunk Data Block LD 14.

Refer to “Programming RAN trunks” on page 608 and to Software Input/

Output: Administration (553-3001-311) for instructions on service change programs.

Continuous operation mode

In the continuous operation mode (sometimes called the Audichron mode), a message is constantly played, over and over again. Callers “barge in” on a playing message or receive a ringback tone until the message plays again. The

start line (ST+) is hardwired as always active. See Figure 139 on page 606 .

At the end of each message, a pulse is issued on the “C” line that is used by the trunk unit to cut through to the waiting call.

Note: The “B” (busy) signal line indicates availability of an announcement machine message to the trunk unit when configured for the continuous operation mode. This signal is made active (ground) by the announcement machine if the channel contains a recorded message and is in an online condition. The “B” line is not connected to a trunk unit when configured for start mode operation.

Start modes (minimum vintage BA)

In a start mode (sometimes called the Code-a-Phone or start-stop mode), playback of a message does not begin until a start pulse is received by the announcement machine. Two subcategories of the start mode exist: pulse start and level start.

In the pulse start mode, a start pulse activates playback of a message that continues until completion. The announcement machine ignores all other start pulses that might occur until the message is complete.

In the level start mode, the start signal is a “level” rather than a pulse. The leading edge of the start signal initiates message playback that continues until either the trailing edge of the start signal occurs or the end of the message is reached. A message that is terminated by the trailing edge of a level start signal is immediately reset and ready for playback again.


Page 608 of 906


Call routing to RAN trunks

CS 1000 Release 4.5 software controls recorded announcement machines.

These programs detect the calls to be intercepted, determine the type of intercept treatment required (for example, overflow, attendant, announcement), queue the intercept, and provide ringback tone to the calling party. At the proper time, an intercepted call is connected to the appropriate

RAN trunk.

Programming RAN trunks

The type of intercept and the RAN trunk parameters are defined in the Trunk

Data Block LD 14, Customer Data Block LD 15, and Route Data Block

LD 16 programs.

The Trunk Data Block and Route Data Block programs specify the following:

• the RAN trunk

• the type of announcement machine

• the number of repetitions of announcements before a forced disconnect

(all calls) or an attendant intercept is initiated (CCSA/DID calls only)

• the point at which the trunk may be connected to the announcement

The Customer Data Block program defines the type of intercept and the trunk route to which the intercept is to be connected.

Refer to Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311) for instructions on service change programs.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 609 of 906


Table 185 gives the electrical characteristics of the NT8D14 Universal Trunk

card.

Table 185

Universal trunk card – trunk interface electrical characteristics (Part 1 of 2)

Trunk Types

Characteristic

Terminal impedance

Balance impedance

Supervision type

DC signaling loop length (max)

Far-end battery

CO / FX / WATS DID / TIE RAN Paging

600 or 900 ohms

(Note 1)

600 or 900 ohms

(Note 1),

3COM, or 3CM2

(Note 2)

Ground or loop start

(Note 3)

1700-ohm loop with near-end battery of

–42.75 V

–42 to –52.5 V

(Note 4)

20 mA 10 mA

600 or 900 ohms

(Note 1)

600 or 900 ohms

(Note 1),

3COM, or 3CM2

(Note 2)

Loop start

(with ans sup)

(Note 3)

2450-ohm loop with near-end battery of

–44 V

–42 to –52.5 V

600/900 ohms

(Note 1)

N/A

600 ohms

N/A

Continuous, level, or pulse

N/A

600/900-ohm loop

–42 to –52 V

10 mA

600 ohm loop

N/A

N/A Minimum detected loop current


Low DC loop resistance during outpulsing

High DC loop resistance

±3 V

<300 ohms

±3 V

N/A

N/A

±1 V

N/A

N/A

±1 V

N/A

N/A

Ring detection

Ground start

Š 30k ohms; loop start

Š 5M ohms

17 to 33 Hz

40 to 120 V rms

N/A N/A N/A


Page 610 of 906


Table 185

Universal trunk card – trunk interface electrical characteristics (Part 2 of 2)

Trunk Types

Characteristic CO / FX / WATS DID / TIE RAN Paging

Line leakage

AC induction rejection

Š 30k ohms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground


Š 30k ohms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground


N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Selected in software.

Selected by jumper strap settings on card. Refer to Tables 190, 191, and 192 for details.

For loop extender application, the maximum voltage applied between tip and ring is –105 V ±5%. The minimum dc loop resistance for this type of application is 1800 ohms.


Power to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card is provided by the module power supply (ac or dc).

Table 186

Power requirements for universal trunk card

Voltage

+15.0 V dc

–15.0 V dc

+5.0 V dc

+8.5 V dc

–48.0 V dc

Tolerance

+5%

+5%

+5%

+2%

+5%

Current (max.)

306 mA

306 mA

750 mA

450 mA

415 mA

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 611 of 906


The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card meets UL-1489 and CS03 over-voltage

(power cross) specifications and FCC Part 68 requirements.


Table 187 lists the environmental specifications for the NT8D14 Universal

Trunk card.

Table 187

Environmental specifications for the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Parameter


Operating humidity

Storage temperature

Specifications

0° to +60° C (+32 to +140° F), ambient

0 to 50 degrees C, ambient

(Small Systems and CS 1000S)


–40° to +70° C (–40° to +158° F)

Release control

Release control establishes which end of a call (near, far, either, joint, or originating) disconnects the call. Only incoming trunks in idle ground start configuration can provide disconnect supervision. You configure release control for each trunk independently in the Route Data Block (LD 16).

PAD switching

The transmission properties of each trunk are characterized by the class-of-service (COS) you assign in the Trunk Data Block (LD 14).

Transmission properties may be via net loss (VNL) or non via net loss

(non-VNL).

Non-VNL trunks are assigned either a Transmission Compensated (TRC) or

Non-Transmission Compensated (NTC) class-of-service to ensure stability and minimize echo when connecting to long-haul trunks, such as Tie trunks.


Page 612 of 906


The class-of-service determines the operation of the switchable PADs contained in each unit. They are assigned as follows:

• Transmission Compensated

— used for a two-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater than 2 dB for which impedance compensation is provided

— or used for a four-wire non-VNL facility

• Non-Transmission Compensated

— used for a two-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than

2 dB

— or used when impedance compensation is not provided

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 613 of 906

The insertion loss from IPE ports to IPE ports is as follows:

Table 188

Insertion Loss from IPE Ports to IPE Ports (measured in dB)

500/2500

Line

Digital

Line

IPE Ports

2/4 Wire

E&M Trunk

4 Wire

(ESN) E&M

Trunk

CO/FX

/WATS

Loop Tie

Trunk

IPE Ports

CO/FX/

WATS Loop

Tie Trunk

2.5

0

0

-3.5

0.5

0

0

-0.5

0.5

0.5


Page 614 of 906



The universal trunk card connects the eight analog trunks to the backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. Telephone trunks connect to the universal trunk card at the back of the MG 1000S using a 25-pin connector.

A list of the connections to the universal trunk card is shown in Table 189 on page 614

. See Communication Server 1000S: Installation and Configuration

(553-3031-210) for I/O panel connector information and wire assignments for each tip/ring pair.

Table 189

Universal trunk card – backplane pinouts (Part 1 of 2)

Trunk

Number

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

Backplane

Pin

62A

63A

64A

65A

66A

67A

16A

17A

18A

19A

12A

13A

14A

15A

RAN mode

Tip

CP

Tip

CP

Tip

CP

Tip

CP

Tip

CP

Tip

CP

Tip

CP

Signal

Paging mode

Other modes

Tip

A

Tip

A

Tip

A

Tip

A

Tip

A

Tip

A

Tip

A

Tip

N/A

Tip

N/A

Tip

N/A

Tip

N/A

Tip

N/A

Tip

N/A

Tip

N/A

Backplane

Pin

62B

63B

64B

65B

66B

67B

16B

17B

18B

19B

12B

13B

14B

15B

RAN mode

Ring

MB

Ring

MB

Ring

MB

Ring

MB

Ring

MB

Ring

MB

Ring

MB

Signal

Paging mode

Other modes

Ring

RG

Ring

RG

Ring

RG

Ring

RG

Ring

RG

Ring

RG

Ring

RG

Ring

N/A

Ring

N/A

Ring

N/A

Ring

N/A

Ring

N/A

Ring

N/A

Ring

N/A

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 615 of 906

Table 189

Universal trunk card – backplane pinouts (Part 2 of 2)

Signal

Trunk

Number

7

Backplane

Pin

68A

69A

RAN mode

Tip

CP

Paging mode

Tip

A

Other modes

Tip

N/A

Backplane

Pin

68B

69B

RAN mode

Ring

MB

Signal

Paging mode

Ring

RG

Other modes

Ring

N/A

Configuration

The trunk type for each unit on the card as well as its terminating impedance and balance network configuration is selected by software service change entries at the system terminal and by jumper strap settings on the card.

NT8D14 has a reduced jumper strap setting on the card. There are only three

jumpers, J1.X, J2.X, and J3.X on each channel. Tables 190, 191, and 192

show the functionality of these three jumpers.


Page 616 of 906


Table 190

Jumper strap settings – factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)

Jumper strap settings (Note 1)

Trunk types

Loop length

J1.X

Off

J2.X

Off

J3.X

1–2

J4.X

(Note 2)

1–2 CO/FX/WATS

2-way TIE (LDR)

2-way TIE (OAID)

0–1524 m (5000 ft.)

DID


Paging

0–600 ohms

Not applicable: RAN and paging trunks should not leave the building.

Off

Off

Off

Off

1–2

1–2

1–2

1–2

Note 1: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.X apply to all eight units; “X” indicates the unit number, 0–7. “Off” indicates that no jumper strap is installed on a jumper block. Store unused straps on the universal trunk card by installing them on a single jumper pin as shown below.

Note 2: For the NT8D14BB card, J4.X is not provided on the card. The J4.X jumper setting

specified in Table 190 does not apply.

Jumper strap

Jumper pin

Jumper block

553-6317

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 617 of 906

Table 191

Jumper strap settings – extended range (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB)

Jumper strap settings (Note 1)

Trunk types

Loop length

J1.X

Off

J2.X

Off

J3.X

1–2

J4.X

(Note 2)

2–3 CO/FX/WATS

2-way TIE (LDR)

2-way TIE (OAID)

> 1524 m (5000 ft.)

DID

RAN: pulse start or level start modes

> 600 ohms

Not applicable: RAN trunks should not leave the building.

On

Off

On

Off

1–2

2–3

2–3

1–2

Note 1: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.X apply to all eight units; “X” indicates the unit number, 0–7. “Off” indicates that no jumper strap is installed on a jumper block.

Note 2: For the NT8D14BB card, J4.X is not provided on the board. The J4.X jumper setting

specified in Table 191 does not apply.


Page 618 of 906


Table 192

Trunk types – termination impedance and balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)


Trunk types


(Note 1)

0–915 m

(0–3000 ft)

600 ohms

915–1524 m

(3000–5000 ft)

3COM

> 1524 m

(> 5000 ft)

3CM2 CO/FX/WATS 600 or 900 ohms

2-way TIE (LDR) 600 or 900 ohms

2-way TIE (OAID) 600 or 900 ohms

600 ohms

600 ohms

3COM

3COM

3CM2

3CM2

DID (loop length

< 600 ohms)

DID (loop length

Š 600 ohms)

600 or 900 ohms

600 or 900 ohms

600 ohms

600 ohms

3COM

N/A

3CM2

3CM2


Paging

600 or 900 ohms

600 ohms

600 or 900 ohms N/A N/A

600 ohms N/A N/A



900 ohms or 3COM and jumper selectable between 3COM and 3CM2. Jumper selection for

3COM/3CM2 restriction does not apply to NT8D14BB.


For most applications, the jumper strap settings remain set to the standard

configuration as shipped from the factory. See Table 190 on page 616 .

The jumper strap settings must be changed, as shown in Table 191 on page 617

, for the following:

• For CO/FX/WATS or TIE trunk loops exceeding 1524 meters (5000 ft.)

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 619 of 906

• DID trunks exceeding a loop resistance of 600 ohms

• RAN trunks operating in pulse start or level start modes

Figure 140 on page 620 shows jumper locations on the universal trunk card

(vintage BA).

Service change entries

The trunk type, terminating impedance, and balance network are selected by making service change entries in the Trunk Administration program LD 14.

See Table 193 on page 621 for the proper values for the trunk type and loop

length. Refer to Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311) for

LD 14 service change instructions.

Before the appropriate balance network can be selected, the loop length between the near-end and the far-end (a Central Office, for example) must be known. To assist in determining loop length, some typical resistance and loss

values for the most common cable lengths are given in Table 194 on page 622

for comparison with values obtained from actual measurements.


Page 620 of 906


Figure 140

Universal trunk card – jumper locations (for NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB Release 9 and below)

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

553-6196


Page 621 of 906

Table 193

Trunk types – termination impedance and balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)


Trunk types


(Note 1)

0–915 m

(0–3000 ft)

600 ohms

915–1524 m

(3000–5000 ft)

3COM

> 1524 m

(> 5000 ft)

3CM2 CO/FX/WATS 600 or 900 ohms

2-way TIE (LDR) 600 or 900 ohms

2-way TIE (OAID) 600 or 900 ohms

600 ohms

600 ohms

3COM

3COM

3CM2

3CM2

DID (loop length

< 600 ohms)

DID (loop length

Š 600 ohms)

600 or 900 ohms

600 or 900 ohms

600 ohms

600 ohms

3COM

N/A

3CM2

3CM2


Paging

600 or 900 ohms

600 ohms

600 or 900 ohms N/A N/A

600 ohms N/A N/A



900 ohms or 3COM and jumper selectable between 3COM and 3CM2. Jumper selection for

3COM/3CM2 restriction does not apply to NT8D14BB.


Page 622 of 906


Table 194

Cable loop resistance and loss

Cable length

915 m (3000 ft.)

1524 m (5000 ft.)

2225 m (7300 ft.)

3566 m (11700 ft.)

5639 m (18500 ft.)

Cable loop resistance (ohms)

Cable loop loss (dB)

(nonloaded at 1kHz)

22 AWG 24 AWG 26 AWG 22 AWG 24 AWG 26 AWG

97

162

236

379

600

155

260

378

607

960

251

417

609

977

1544

0.9

1.6

2.3

3.7

5.9

1.2

2.0

3.0

4.8

7.6

1.5

2.5

3.7

6.0

9.4


Loss parameters are selected on the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card by a switchable pad controlled by codec emulation software. For convenience, the pads settings are called “in” and “out.” Pad settings are determined by the two factors listed below (the first is under direct user control; the second is controlled indirectly):

• Class of Service is assigned in LD 14 (under direct user control).

• Port-to-port connection loss is automatically set by software on the basis of the port type selected in LD 16; only the port type is set by the user

(controlled indirectly).

The transmission properties of each trunk are characterized by the class of service assigned in LD 14. Transmission properties can be Via Net Loss

(VNL) or non-Via Net Loss (non-VNL).

The VNL class of service is assigned at the prompt CLS with the response

VNL. The non-VNL class of service is assigned at prompt CLS by selecting either the Transmission Compensated (TRC) or Non-Transmission

Compensated (NTC) response.

Non-VNL trunks are assigned a TRC or NTC class of service to ensure stability and minimize echo when connecting to long-haul trunks, such as Tie

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 623 of 906

trunks. The class of service determines the operation of the switchable pads contained in each unit. They are assigned as follows:

• TRC for a 2-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater than 2 dB, or for which impedance compensation is provided, or for a 4-wire non-VNL facility.

• NTC for a 2-wire, non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than 2 dB, or when impedance compensation is not provided.

See Table 195 for the pad switching control for the various through

connections and the actual port-to-port loss introduced for connections between the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card and any other port designated as

Port B.

Table 195

Pad switching algorithm

Port B pads

Universal Trunk

Pads Port-to-port loss (dB)

Port B

Transmit

D to A

Receive

A to D

Transmit

D to A

Receive

A to D

Port B to

Universal trunk card

Universal trunk card to

Port B

IPE line N/A N/A Out Out 0.5

0.5

Universal trunk

(TRC)

In Out In Out 1 1

IPE TIE (VNL) In In Out Out 0 0

Note: Transmit and receive designations are from and to the system. Transmit is from the system to the external facility (digital-to-analog direction in the Universal trunk card). Receive is to the system from the external facility (analog-to-digital direction in the Universal trunk card).

Note: When Port B is the call originating port. If the Universal trunk card is the originating port, the UTC pads are out, the Port B (PE CO/FX/WATS) pads are in.


Page 624 of 906


Applications

The optional applications, features, and signaling arrangements for each trunk are assigned through unique route and trunk data blocks.

Paging trunk operation

A universal trunk card unit can be configured as a paging trunk. Configure units as paging trunks in the Trunk Data Block program LD 14 and assign routes in the Route Data Block program LD 16.

Figure 141 on page 625 shows a typical connection from customer-provided

equipment to unit 0 on a universal trunk card that can be installed in slots 1,

2, and 3 in an MG 1000S, and slots 7, 8, 9, and 10 in an MG 1000S. See

Communication Server 1000S: Installation and Configuration

(553-3031-210) for trunk wiring information.

Music operation

A trunk unit can be connected to a music source. The audio source should provide an adjustable power output at 600 ohms.

Configure units for music at the MUS or AWR prompts in the Trunk

Administration program LD 14 and assign routes at the MRT prompt in the

Route Data Block program LD 16.

Music operation is similar to that of RAN in the continuous operation mode.

Connect the unit tip and ring leads to the audio source and ground the CP line at the MDF.

If the music source is equipped with contacts that close when music is online, use these contacts to provide a ground to the MB line; otherwise, ground the

MB line at the MDF.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 625 of 906

Figure 141

Connecting paging equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card (typical)

System Cross connect

NT8D37

IPE Module

NT8D14

Universal

Trunk Card

Unit 0

Unit 1

Slot 0

Module

I/O Panel

Connector

A

0T

26

0R

1

0A

0PG

27

2

(w-bl)

(bl-w)

(w-o)

(o-w)

Audio pair

Part of

25-pair cable

Signal pair

MDF

K1

Bat

K1

K1


Tape recorder, radio, etc.

Microphone

K3

Bat

Microphone contacts

K2 K3

K2 K3

Amplifier Speaker

K2

Bat

Unit 7

553-AAA1150


Page 626 of 906


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

666

Page 627 of 906

NT8D15 E & M Trunk card

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627



Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641



Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664

Introduction

The NT8D15 E&M trunk card interfaces four analog telephone trunks to the switch. Each trunk interface connects to a trunk facility using tip and ring leads that carry voice, ringing, and tone signaling, and to signaling interfaces by E&M leads. Each unit can be configured independently by software control in the Trunk Data Block (or Trunk Administration) program LD 14.


Note: Up to four analog trunk cards are supported in each MG 1000S and four analog trunk cards in each MG 1000S Expansion.


Page 628 of 906


Note: In Cabinet systems equipped with Meridian Mail, the Universal

Trunk line card cannot be installed in slot 10 of the main cabinet.

The NT8D15 E&M trunk card supports the following types of trunks:

• 2-wire E&M Type I signaling trunks

• two-wire dial repeating trunks

• two or four wire tie trunks

• 4-wire E&M trunks:

— Type I or Type II signaling

— duplex (DX) signaling

• paging (PAG) trunks

Type I signaling uses two signaling wires plus ground. Type II and DX signaling uses two pairs of signaling wires. Most electronic switching systems use Type II signaling.

Table 196 lists the signaling and trunk types supported by the NT8D15 E&M

trunk card.

Table 196

Trunk and signaling matrix

Trunk types

Signaling

RLM/RLR TIE PAG CSA/CAA/CAM

2-wire E&M Yes Yes Yes Yes

4-wire E&M Yes Yes No

Legend:

RLM Release Link Main

RLR Release Link Remote

CSA Common Control Switching Arrangement

CAA Common Control Switching Arrangement with Automatic Number Identification (ANI)

CAM Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA) trunk

Yes

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 629 of 906


The line interface and common multiplexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board.

The E&M trunk card connects to the backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. External equipment connects to the card at the back of the MG 1000S using a 25-pin connector. Telephone lines from station equipment cross connect to the OPS analog line card at the MDF using a wiring plan similar to that used for line cards. See Communication Server 1000S: Installation

and Configuration (553-3031-210) for termination and cross connect information.

Each card provides four circuits. Each circuit connects with the switching system and with the external apparatus by an 80-pin connector at the rear of the pack. Each trunk circuit on the card connects to trunk facilities by tip an ring leads which carry voice, ringing, tone signaling and battery. Trunk option selection is determined by software control in LD 14.

Figure 142 on page 630 illustrates the faceplate of the E&M trunk card. The

words “Dict Trk” appear on the faceplate label because earlier versions of this card provided dictation trunk connections for third-party equipment.

The faceplate of the card is equipped with a red LED. When an E&M trunk card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to five seconds while the self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in software, then the

LED goes out. If the LED continues to flash or remains weakly lit, replace the card.


Page 630 of 906


Figure 142

E&M trunk card – faceplate

Card lock latch

E & M

Dict Trk

LED

S


Card lock latch

NT8D15

Rlse 05

553-6199

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 631 of 906


The NT8D15 E&M Trunk card serves various transmission requirements.

The trunk circuits on the card can operate in either A-Law or µ-Law companding modes. The mode of operation is set by service change entries.


contained on the E&M trunk card. Each of these functions is discussed on the following pages.

Common features

The following features are common to all circuits on the NT8D15 E&M

Trunk card:

• Analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion of transmission signals.

• Interfaces each of the four PCM signals to one DS30X timeslot in A10 format.

• Transmit and receive SSD signaling messages over a DS30X signaling channel in A10 format.

• Ability to enable and disable individual ports or the entire card under software control.

• Provides outpulsing on the card. Make break ratios are defined in software and down loaded at power up and by software commands.

• Provides indication of card status from self-test diagnostics on faceplate

Light Emitting Diode (LED).

• Supports loopback of PCM signals to DS30X for diagnostic purposes.

• Card ID provided for auto configuration and determining serial number and firmware level of card.

• Software controlled terminating impedance (600, 900, or 1200 ohm) two and four-wire modes.

• Allows trunk type to be configured on a per port basis in software.

• Software controlled 600 ohm balance impedance is provided.

• Isolation of foreign potentials from transmission and signaling circuit.


Page 632 of 906


Figure 143

E&M trunk card – block diagram


Address/ data bus


Front panel

LED

Microcontroller

Backplane

Card slot address

Async card

LAN link


Controller card

Tx PCM

Rx PCM

5.12 MHz clock

1 kHz frame sync


Power supplies

+8.5 V dc

Reg

PCM

Codec

Analog hybrid

XFMR

Signaling relays






Control logic

±15 V dc analog power

+ 5 V dc analog hybrid

Ð 48 V dc battery

Ringing

Rsync


Tip/ring

(2/4 wire)

Voice band

E&M

Sup.

signaling

Facility services interfaces

(2-W E&M,

4-W E&M, and Paging)

Signaling interface

553-6201

• Software control of A/µ-Law mode.

• Software control of digit collection.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 633 of 906

Card interfaces

The E&M trunk card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops and maintenance data over the card LAN link.

The E&M trunk card contains four identical and independently configurable trunk interface units (also referred to as circuits). Each unit provides impedance matching and a balance network in a signal transformer/analog hybrid circuit. Also provided are relays for placing outgoing call signaling onto the trunk. Signal detection circuits monitor incoming call signaling. A

CODEC performs A/D and D/A conversion of trunk analog voiceband signals to digital PCM signals.

The four units on the card can operate in the A-Law or the µ-Law companding mode. The mode is selected by making service change entries. Each unit can be independently configured for 2-wire E&M, 4-wire E&M, and paging trunk types. The trunk type is selected by service change entries and jumper strap settings. All units on the card can perform the following features:

• convert transmission signals from analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog

• provide outpulsing on the card: make/break ratios are defined in software and downloaded at power-up and by software command

• provide 600-ohms balance and termination impedance (2-wire configuration)

• provide 600-ohms termination impedance (4-wire configuration)

• provide pad control for 2-wire and 4-wire facility connections

• enable trunk type and function to be configured on a per-port basis in software

• provide isolation of foreign potentials from transmission and signaling circuit

• provide software control of A-Law and µ-Law modes

• support loopback of pulse code modulation (PCM) signals to DS-30X for diagnostic purposes


Page 634 of 906


Trunk circuit features

Trunk unit functions

The functions provided by each unit on the E&M trunk card include 2-wire signaling, 4-wire signaling, and paging operation as follows:

•

2-wire, E&M Type I signaling (see Figure 144 on page 635 ) with:

— near-end seizure and outpulsing with M lead

— ground detection with E lead

— voice transmission through tip and ring for transmit and receive

•

4-wire, E&M Type I and II signaling (see Figure 145 on page 636

),

2-way dial repeating with:

— echo suppression for Type I signaling

— switchable 7 dB and 16 dB pads for carrier interface

— voice transmission and reception through two separate paths

— Type I signaling through E&M leads

— Type II signaling with near-end seizure by SB/M leads and far-end detection by E/SG lead

•

4-wire, DX signaling (see Figure 146 on page 637 )

•

paging trunk operation (see Figure 147 on page 638 ) with support access

by low-resistance path at the PG/A1 leads

Note: Paging end-to-end signaling is not supported.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Figure 144

E&M Type I signaling

E&M trunk card

Ð 48V

E


Page 635 of 906

E

External signaling circuit

M M

Ð 48V

553-6258


Page 636 of 906


Figure 145

E&M Type II signaling

SG

P

E

Ð 48V

SG

E

M M

P

SB SB

Ð 48V

Note: M, SB, E, and SG designations are Electronic Industries Association and

Telecommunications Industries Association (EIA/TIA) conventions. These leads are also known as MB, MA, EA, and EB, respectively.

553-6259

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Figure 146

4-wire DX signaling


Page 637 of 906


Page 638 of 906


Figure 147



NT8D37

IPE Module

NT8D15

E&M

Trunk Card

Unit 0

Unit 1

Slot 0

Module

I/O Panel

Connector

0T

0R

0A

0PG

A

26

(W-BL)

1

(BL-W)

27

(W-O)

(O-W)

2

Part of

25-pair cable

Audio pair

Signal pair

MDF

K1

Bat

K1

K1


Bat


Microphone

K3

Microphone contacts

K2 K3

K2 K3

Amplifier Speaker

K2

Bat

Unit 3

553-AAA1152

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 639 of 906


Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN, and signaling and control circuits on the E&M trunk card.

Microcontroller

The E&M trunk card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card. The microcontroller provides the following functions:

• card-identification

• self-test



Card LAN

The card LAN provides a serial communication link for transferring maintenance data and control signals between the trunk card and the SSC card. The card LAN controls the microcontroller. The following functions are supported:

• providing card ID/RLS

• reporting self-test status

• polling from the controller card

• enabling/disabling of the DS-30X link


Page 640 of 906



All signaling messages for the trunk are three bytes long. The messages are transmitted in channel zero of the DS30X in A10 format.

Configuration information for the E & M trunk is downloaded from the CPU at power up and by command from maintenance programs. Seven configuration messages are sent. One message is sent to each unit (4) to configure trunk type, signaling type, balance impedance etc. Three messages are sent per card to configure the make/break ratio, A/µ-Law operation.


The signaling and control portion of the E&M trunk card works with the system CPU to operate the card hardware. The card receives messages from the CPU over a signaling channel in the DS-30X loop and returns status information to the CPU over the same channel. The signaling and control portion of the card provides analog loop terminations that establish, supervise, and take down call connections.

Configuration information for the E&M trunk card is downloaded from the

CPU at power-up and by command from maintenance programs.

Configuration messages are sent. One message is sent to configure trunk and signaling type. The other messages are sent to each card to select the make/ break ratio and the A-Law and µ-Law modes.

The signaling and control circuits on the card perform the following functions:

• provide an interface between the card and the system CPU

— transmit PCM signals from each of the four units to one DS-30X timeslot in A10 format (ready to send/clear to send—flow control, handshake format)

— transmit and receive signaling messages over a DS-30X signaling channel in A10 format

• decode received messages to set configuration and activate/deactivate interface relays for PCM loopback diagnostic purposes

• decode outpulsing messages (one per digit) from the CPU to drive outpulsing relays at 20 pps, 10 pps1 (primary), or 10 pps2 (secondary)

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 641 of 906

• monitor signals from the trunk interface and generate a message when required for each state change

• control disabling and enabling of unit or card

• control A-Law and µ-Law operation modes

• control transmission pad settings

Maintenance features

The following features are provided for maintenance of the E&M trunk:

• indication of card status from self-test

• software enable and disable capability for individual units or entire card

• loopback of PCM signals to DS-30X for diagnostic purposes

• card ID for autoconfiguration and determination of serial number and firmware level

Operation

The optional applications, features, and signaling arrangements for each unit on the E&M trunk card are assigned through the Trunk Administration LD 14 and Trunk Route LD 16 programs.

Signaling and call control

The information in this section describes the signaling and call control of

E&M Type I and II trunks. The call is terminated and the trunk released by a disconnect message sent to the associated unit.

Figure 148 on page 642 shows the trunk signaling orientation for a tandem

connection between E&M and CO trunks.

E&M Type I signaling

Figure 149 on page 643 shows E&M Type I signaling patterns for incoming

and outgoing calls. Figure 150 on page 644 shows Type I signaling patterns

on a tandem connection where the originating end is senderized and the route is over a CO trunk (not applicable to CCSA).


Page 642 of 906


Figure 148

Signaling orientation for tandem connection between E&M and CO trunks

Near end PBX

(senderized)

Far end PBX

Outgoing

Tie trunk

Incoming

PBX-CO trunk

CO

E&M CO/FX/

WATS

553-6262

Idle state

For E&M signaling, in the idle state the M lead is ground and the E lead is an open circuit.

Outgoing calls are processed as follows:

• The M lead changes from ground to battery.

— If answer supervision is provided by the far end, there is a change from open to ground on the E lead (ground detection).

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 643 of 906

Figure 149

E&M Type I signaling patterns – originating party release

Near end M lead

Far end disc

Ground

Idle

Near end disc

Dialing

Far end disc first

Battery

Near end seizes

DT

Far end answers

(no ans sup)

Near end disc first

Far end answers

(ans sup)

Outgoing calls from near end

Near end M lead

Ground Battery

Idle

Near end disc

Far end disc

Far end disc first

Near end disc first

Far end seizes

Near end ans

(no ans sup)

Near end answers

(ans sup)

Incoming calls to near end

553-6263


Page 644 of 906


Figure 150

E&M Type I signaling patterns – originating party release on a tandem connection

Near end M lead

Idle

Ground Battery

Near end seizes

Dial CO/

FX/WATS

Go

O/G tie trunk disc

Far end disc

Far end disc first

Stop

O/G tie trunk disc first Far end ans

Outgoing calls from near end

Near end M lead

Ground Battery

Idle

Orig end disc

CO/FX/WATS

disc

Orig end disc first

Stored office DN digits outpulsed after GO signal


Dial CO/FX/WATS and office D

CO/FX/WATS end disc first

(ground start only)(ans sup)

No ans sup

CO/FX/WATS ans

Pseudo-answer supervision provided approx. 150 ms after last dial pulse

Near end may be arranged for IMM, DDL, or WNK

Far end seizes

Incoming calls to near end

Note: IMM = Immediate start

DDL = Delayed dial

WNK = Wink start


Ð If ground start trunk, outpulse toward office after ground detection

Ð If loop start trunk, outpulse

toward office 1 sec later

553-6264

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 645 of 906

Incoming calls

The far-end initiates calls as follows:

• The ground is placed on the E lead in E&M signaling.

• Dial pulses are subsequently applied from the far-end as ground open on the E lead.

• If the far-end is equipped for sending, the system can operate in any mode (immediate start, delay dial, or wink start), as assigned on a start

arrangement basis. See Table 197.

— In immediate start mode, there is no start signal from the called office. The seizure signal (off hook supervisory state) from the far-end should be at least 150 ms. At the end of the seizure signal, the far-end can start pulsing after the standard delay (normally 70 ms minimum).

— In delay dial mode, a 256–384 ms off hook/on hook signal is returned to the far-end immediately after receipt of the seizure signal. When the far-end detects the on hook signal (start signal), the far-end can start pulsing after the standard delay (normally 70 ms minimum).

— In wink start mode, within a 128–256 ms period after receipt of the seizure signal from the far-end, the called office transmits a 250 ms, wink start, off hook/on hook signal to the calling office.

Table 197

Operation Mode

Operation mode Start arrangement

Immediate start

Delay dial

Wink start

IMM

DDL

WNK

E&M Type II signaling


shows E&M Type II signaling patterns for incoming

and outgoing calls. Figure 152 on page 648

shows Type II signaling patterns


Page 646 of 906

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card for a tandem connection where the originating end is senderized and the route is over a CO trunk (CCSA not applicable).

Type II signaling uses four leads: M, SB, E, and SG. Instead of changes of state between battery and ground (M signals) or open and ground (E signals), the trunk signals by closing the contacts between the lead pairs M and SB.

Signals are received by detecting current flow between lead pairs E and SG.

On incoming calls, the far end seizes the trunk by shorting the E and SG leads together. This transmits the ground from the SG lead to the E lead (in Type I signaling the ground to the E lead comes from the far-end). Dialing is done by opening and closing the E/SG contacts. Since the SB and M leads are also used as the ESCG and ESC leads, respectively, for echo suppression, echo suppressor control cannot be used with Type II signaling.

Note: M, SB, E, and SG designations are Electronic Industries

Association and Telecommunications Industries Association (EIA/TIA) conventions. These leads are also known as MB, MA, EA, and EB, respectively.

Release control

Release control of a call made over a trunk is specified in LD 16. Disconnect supervision is specified for each trunk group independently. The two options available are EITHER or ORIGINATING party control. These can be specified for the end (near-end), or for the central office or other PBX end

(far-end). Joint party control can also be specified for the far-end.

Duplex signaling

Duplex (DX) signaling makes use of the voice transmission leads for signaling as well as for voice transmission.

For descriptive purposes, the lead pair Tip B/Ring B is designated the signaling pair. The other pair Tip A/Ring A conducts current in the opposite direction to balance the overall current flow between the near and far ends.

During signaling, current flows through both Tip B and Ring B leads in the same direction.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 647 of 906

Figure 151

E&M Type II signaling patterns – originating party release

Far end disc

Near end M/SB leads

Open

Idle

Dialing

Closed

DT

Near end seizes

System end disc

Far end disc first

Far end answers

(no ans sup)

Near end disc first

Far end answers

(ans sup)

Outgoing calls from system (near end)


Open Closed

Idle

Near end disc

Far end disc

Far end disc first

Near end disc first

Far end seizes

Near end ans

(COS-no ans sup)

Near end answers

(COS-ans sup)

Incoming calls to system (near end)

553-AAA1153


Page 648 of 906


Figure 152

E&M Type II signaling patterns – originating party release on a tandem connection


Idle

Open Closed

Near end seizes

Dial CO/

FX/WATS

Go

O/G tie trunk disc

Far end disc

Far end disc first

Stop

O/G tie trunk disc first

Far end ans

Outgoing calls from system (near end)

Stored office DN digits outpulsed after GO signal



Closed

Idle

Open

Orig end disc

CO/FX/WATS

disc

Orig end disc first

Dial CO/FX/WATS and office DN

CO/FX/WATS end disc first

(ground start only)(COS-ans sup)

COS-no ans sup

CO/FX/WATS ans

Pseudo-answer supervision provided approx. 150 ms after last dial pulse


Ð If ground start trunk, outpulse toward office after ground detection

Local end may be arranged for IMM, DDL, or WNK

Far end seizes

Incoming calls to system (near end)

Note: IMM = Immediate start

DDL = Delayed dial

WNK = Wink start

Ð If loop start trunk, outpulse

toward office 1 sec later

553-AAA1154

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 649 of 906

Table 198 and Table 199 show call-connection and take-down sequencing for

DX signaling. Table 200 on page 650

and Table 201 on page 651 show

sequencing where the E&M trunk card is used in a tandem PBX.

Table 198

DX signaling – outgoing calls with originating party release

Condition

Idle

Seizure

(dial tone from far-end: far-end ready for digits)

Digits

Current in signaling lead

No current flow

Current flow

State of trunk detector

High

High

Far-end answers

Far-end on hook first

Network taken down and trunk idled when near-end goes on hook

Near-end on hook first, network taken down

Far-end on hook, trunk idled

Current flow interrupted for each pulse

No current flow

Current flow

No current flow

High

Low

High

High

Current flow

No current flow

Low

High

Table 199

DX signaling – incoming calls with originating party release (Part 1 of 2)

Condition

Idle

Seizure

(dial tone to far-end: near-end ready for digits)

Digits


No current flow

Current flow

Near-end answers


High

Low


No current flow

Low-high-low for each pulse

Low


Page 650 of 906


Table 199

DX signaling – incoming calls with originating party release (Part 2 of 2)

Condition

Far-end on hook first

Network taken down and trunk idled

Near-end on hook first, network taken down

Far-end on hook, trunk idled


Current flow

No current flow

Current flow

No current flow


High

High

Low

High

Table 200

DX signaling – outgoing calls with originating party release on tandem connections

(Part 1 of 2)

Condition

Idle

Seizure (far-end ready for digits)

Dial CO/FX/WATS



No current flow

Current flow


No current flow

Current flow

High

High

High

Low

High

Stop sender

Go sender (universal service provided by far-end

PBX if originating end is senderized)

CO/FX/WATS offices ready for digits

Stored Office DN digits

Outpulsed

Far end answers

Far end on hook first

Near end on hook, network taken down, trunk idled


No current flow

No current flow

Current flow

No current flow

High

Low

Low

High

High

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 651 of 906

Table 200

DX signaling – outgoing calls with originating party release on tandem connections

(Part 2 of 2)

Condition

Near end on hook first, network taken down

Far end on hook, trunk idled


Current flow

No current flow


Low

High

Table 201

DX signaling – incoming calls with originating party release on tandem connections

(Part 1 of 2)

Condition



Idle

Seizure

(Can be arranged for IS, DD, or WS)

(near-end ready for digits)

No current flow

Current flow

High

Low

Dial CO/FX/WATS and office DN Current flow interrupted for each pulse

Low-high-low for each pulse

Stored digits outpulsed on CO/FX/WATS trunk after ground detection if a ground start, but after 3 seconds if a loop start

If answer supervision: pseudo-answer supervision is sent approximately 13 seconds after last dial pulse received

No current flow Low


Page 652 of 906


Table 201

DX signaling – incoming calls with originating party release on tandem connections

(Part 2 of 2)

Condition


If no answer supervision: CO end disconnects (if a CO ground start – the trunk is idled and network taken down, but the incoming TIE trunk is held under control of the originating end)

Originating end disconnects – network taken down and trunk idled

Current flow

No current flow


Low

High

Note: * – CO ground start: the trunk is idled and the network taken down, but the incoming tie trunk is controlled by the originating end.


Table 202 lists the electrical characteristics of the trunk interface on the E&M

trunk card.

Table 202

Electrical characteristics of E&M trunk cards (Part 1 of 2)

Characteristic 4-wire trunk 2-wire trunk

Signaling range

Signaling type

Far-end battery

Near-end battery


Line leakage between E lead and ground

Type I 150 ohms

Type II 300 ohms loop

Type I, Type II

–42 to –52.5 V dc

–42.75 to –52.5 V dc

+10 V dc

Š20K¾

Type I 150 ohms

Type I

–42 to –52.5 V dc

–42.75 to –52.5 V dc

+10 V dc

Š20K¾

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 653 of 906

Table 202

Electrical characteristics of E&M trunk cards (Part 2 of 2)

Characteristic 4-wire trunk 2-wire trunk

Effective loss

Terminating impedance

Balance impedance

See pad table (Table 209 on page 662 )

600 ohms

N/A

Table 203

Electrical characteristics of trunk cards

See pad table (Table 209 on page 662 )

600 ohms

600 ohms

Characteristic

Nominal impedance

Signaling range

Signaling type

Far-end battery

Near-end battery

Minimum loop current


Low DC loop resistance during outpulsing

High DC loop resistance

DID Trunk

600 or 900 ohms, (selected by software)

2450 ohms

Loop

-42 to -52.5 V

N/A

N/A

+ 10 V

N/A

N/A

CO trunk

600 or 900 ohms, (selected by software)

1700 ohms

Ground or loop start

-42 to -52.5 V

-42.75 to -52.5 V

20 mA

+ 3 V

300 ohms

Line leakage

Effective loss

Equal to or greater than 30 kS (Tip to Ring, Tip to GND,

Ring to GND).

See pad table

Ground start equal to or greater than 30 kS. Loop start equal to or greater than 5 MS

Equal to or greater than 30 kS (Tip to Ring, Tip to GND,

Ring to GND)

See pad table


Page 654 of 906



Table 204 lists the power requirements for the E&M trunk card.

Table 204


Voltage

+15.0 V dc

–15.0 V dc

+8.5 V dc

–48.0 V dc

Tolerance

±5%

±5%

±2%

±5 %

Max current

200 mA

200 mA

200 mA

415 mA


Table 205 provides the environmental specifications for the E&M trunk card.

Table 205


Parameter


Operating humidity

Storage temperature

Specifications

0 to +60 degrees C

(32 to +140 degrees F), ambient


–40 to +70 degrees C

(–40 to +158 degrees F)


The E&M trunk card meets CS03 over-voltage (power cross) specifications and FCC Part 68 requirements.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


The E&M trunk card brings the four analog trunks to the backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud.The backplane is cabled to the I/O panel on the rear of the module, which is then connected to the Main Distribution Frame

(MDF) by 25-pair cables.

Telephone trunks connect to the E&M trunk card at the MDF using a wiring plan similar to that used for line cards.

A typical connection example is shown in Figure 153 on page 657 . A list of

the connections to the E&M trunk card in the various 2-wire modes is shown

in Table 206. A list of the connections to the E&M trunk card in the various

4-wire modes is shown in Table 207 on page 656 .

See the Communication Server 1000S: Installation and Configuration

(553-3031-210) for complete I/O connector information and wire assignments for each tip/ring pair.

Table 206

E&M trunk card – backplane pinouts for 2-wire modes

Trunk

Number

0

1

2

3


Page 655 of 906

Pin

62B

65B

66B

69B

12B

15B

16B

19B

2-wire Paging Mode

Signal

Tip

A

Tip

A

Tip

A

Tip

A

Pin

62A

65A

66A

69A

12A

15A

16A

19A

Signal

Ring

PG

Ring

PG

Ring

PG

Ring

PG

Pin

62B

64B

66B

48B

12B

14B

16B

18B

2-wire Type I Mode

Signal

Tip

E

Tip

E

Tip

E

Tip

E

Pin

62A

64A

66A

68A

12A

14A

16A

18A

Signal

Ring

M

Ring

M

Ring

M

Ring

M


Page 656 of 906


Table 207

E&M trunk card – backplane pinouts for 4-wire modes

4-wire Type I Mode

Trunk

Number

0

1

2

3

Pin

65B

66B

67B

68B

69B

19B

62B

63B

64B

12B

13B

14B

15B

16B

17B

18B

Signal

ECG

TA

RA

E

ECG

ECG

TA

RA

E

TA

RA

E

ECG

TA

RA

E

Pin

65A

66A

67A

68A

69A

19A

62A

63A

64A

12A

13A

14A

15A

16A

17A

18A

Signal

ESCG

TB

RB

M

ESCG

TB

RB

M

ESCG

TB

RB

M

ESCG

TB

RB

M

Pin

65B

66B

67B

68B

69B

19B

62B

63B

64B

12B

13B

14B

15B

16B

17B

18B

4-wire Type II Mode

Signal

MA

TA

RA

EA

MA

MA

TA

RA

EA

MA

TA

RA

EA

TA

RA

EA

Pin

65A

66A

67A

68A

69A

19A

62A

63A

64A

12A

13A

14A

15A

16A

17A

18A

Signal

MB

TB

RB

EB

MB

MB

TB

RB

EB

MB

TB

RB

EB

TB

RB

EB

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 657 of 906

Figure 153

E&M trunk card – typical cross connection example

E&M trunk connections


NT8D37

IPE Module

NT8D15

E&M

Trunk Card

Slot 0

Unit 0

Unit 1

Module

I/O Panel

Connector

A

0TA

0TB

0RA

0RB

0E

0M

0ECG

0ESCG

1T

1R

1E

1M

(W-BL)

26

(BL-W)

1

(W-O)

27

(O-W)

2

(W-G)

28

3

29

(W-BR)

(BR-W)

4

(G-W)

30

(W-S)

(S-W)

5

(R-BL)

31

6

(BL-R)

Part of

25-pair cable

MDF

TipA

TipB

RingA

RingB

E

M

ECG

ESCG

Tip

Ring

E

M

Unit 3

4-wire

Type I

E&M

Trunk

2-wire

Type I

E&M

Trunk


553-AAA1155


Page 658 of 906


Configuration

Each of the four trunk circuits on the E&M trunk card can be individually configured for trunk type, companding mode, and port-to-port loss compensation. Configuring the card requires both jumper changes and configuration software service entries.

The locations of the jumpers are shown in Figure 154 on page 659

.

Jumper settings

The NT8D15 E&M Trunk card serves various transmission requirements.

The four units on the card can operate in A-Law or µ-Law companding modes, which are selected by service change entries. Each unit can be independently configured for 2-wire E&M, 4-wire E&M, and paging trunk types. The trunk type is selected by service change entries and jumper strap settings.

See Table 208 on page 660 .

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Figure 154

E&M trunk card – jumper locations


Page 659 of 906

553-6200


Page 660 of 906


Table 208

E&M trunk card – jumper strap settings

2-wire trunk

Mode of operation (Note 2)

4-wire trunk

DX tip & ring pair

Jumper

(Note 1) Type I Paging Type I Type II

M—rcv

E—xmt

E—rcv

M—xmt

J1.X

J2.X

J3.X

J4.X

J5.X

J6.X

J7.X

J8.X

J9.X

Off

On

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Pins 2–3

Off

On

(Note 3)

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Pins 2–3

Off

On

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Pins 2–3

Off

On

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Pins 2–3

Pins 1–2

Off

(Note 4)

Pins 2–3

(Note 4)

On

On

On

Pins 1–2

Pins 2–3

Off

(Note 4)

Pins 1–2

(Note 4)

On

On

On

Pins 1–2

Note 1: Jumper strap settings J1.X through J9.X apply to all four units; “X” indicates the unit number, 0–3.

Note 2: “Off” indicates that no jumper strap is installed on a jumper block.

Note 3: Paging trunk mode is not zone selectable.

Note 4: Jumper strap installed in this location only if external loop resistance is greater than

2500 ohms.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 661 of 906

Software service entries

The trunk type is selected by making service change entries in Route Data

Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance (LD 16). The companding mode is selected by making service change entries in Trunk Data Block (LD 14).

Refer to Table 208 on page 660

to select the proper values for the trunk type being employed.


Loss parameters are selected on the E&M trunk card by a switchable pad controlled by CODEC emulation software. The pads settings are called “in” and “out.” Pad settings are determined by the three factors listed below (the first two are under direct user control; the third is controlled indirectly):

• Class of Service is assigned in LD 14.

• Facility termination is selected (2-wire or 4-wire) in LD 14 (the 2-wire setting provides 0.5 dB more loss in each direction of transmission for echo control).

Note: Facilities associated with the Nortel Electronic Switched Network

(ESN) are recommended to be 4-wire for optimum transmission; thus, the 4-wire setting is generally referred to as the ESN setting. However, the 4-wire setting is not restricted to networks using the ESN feature.

Conversely, the 2-wire setting, often called non-ESN, can be used on certain trunks in an ESN environment.

• Port-to-port connection loss is automatically set by software on the basis of the port type selected in LD 16; only the port type is set by the user.

The transmission properties of each trunk are characterized by the class of service assigned in LD 14. Transmission properties can be Via Net Loss

(VNL) or non-Via Net Loss (non-VNL).

The VNL class of service is assigned at the CLS prompt by typing VNL. The non-VNL class of service is assigned at the CLS prompt by typing TRC

(Transmission Compensated) or NTC (Non-Transmission Compensated).

Non-VNL trunks are assigned a TRC or NTC class of service to ensure stability and minimize echo when connecting to long-haul trunks, such as tie


Page 662 of 906

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card trunks. The class of service determines the operation of the switchable pads contained in each unit. They are assigned as follows:

• TRC for a 2-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater than

2 dB, or for which impedance compensation is provided, or for a 4-wire non-VNL facility.

• NTC for a 2-wire, non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than 2 dB, or when impedance compensation is not provided.

See Table 209 for the pad switching control for the various through

connections and the actual port-to-port loss introduced for connections between the E&M trunk card and any other IPE port designated as Port B.

Figure 155 on page 663 shows the pad switching orientation.

Table 209

Pad switching algorithm

Port B pads E&M Trunk Pads Port-to-port loss (dB)

Port B

Transmit

D to A

Receive

A to D

Transmit

D to A

Receive

A to D

Port B to

E&M

E&M to

Port B

IPE line N/A N/A Out In 2.5

3.5

Universal trunk

(TRC)

Out Out In In 0 0

IPE TIE (VNL) In Out In Out 0 0

Note: Transmit and receive designations are from and to the system. Transmit is from the system to the external facility (digital-to-analog direction in the E&M trunk card). Receive is to the system from the external facility (analog-to-digital direction in the E&M trunk card).

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 663 of 906

Figure 155

Pad orientation

Analog

E&M

REC

XMT

System

Digital

Port B

XMT

Analog

REC

553-AAA1156


Page 664 of 906


Applications

The optional applications, features and signaling arrangements for each trunk are assigned through unique route and trunk data blocks. Refer to the

Features and Services (553-3001-306) for information about assigning features and services to trunks.

PAD switching

The transmission properties of each trunk are characterized by class-of-service (COS) assignments in the trunk data block (LD 14). The assignment may be non-Via Net Loss (non-VNL) or via Net Loss (VNL). To ensure stability and minimize echo when connecting to long-haul VNL (Tie) trunks, non-VNL trunks are assigned either Transmission Compensated

(TRC) or Non-Transmission Compensated (NTC) class-of-service.

The TRC and NTC COS options determine the operation of the switchable pads contained in the trunk circuits. They are assigned as follows:

• TRC for a two-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater than

2 dB or for which impedance compensation is provided, or for a four-wire non-VNL facility.

• NTC for a two-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than 2 dB or when impedance compensation is not provided.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 665 of 906

Table 210 shows the insertion loss from IPE port to IPE port.

Table 210

Insertion Loss from IPE Ports to IPE Ports (measured in dB)

500/2500

Line

Digital

Line

IPE Ports

2/4 Wire

E&M Trunk

4 Wire

(ESN) E&M

Trunk

CO/FX

/WATS

Loop Tie

Trunk

IPE Ports

2/4 Wire

E&M Trunk

6

3

3.5

-0.5

1

1

4 Wire

(ESN) E&M

Trunk

5.5

2.5

3

-1

0.5

0.5

0

0


When used in the paging mode, a trunk is connected to a customer-provided paging amplifier system (not zone selectable). When the trunk is accessed by dial-up or attendant-key operation, it provides a loop closure across control

leads PG and A. See Figure 156 on page 666

. In a typical application, this transfers the input of the paging amplifier system to the transmission path of the trunk.


Page 666 of 906


Figure 156



NT8D37

IPE Module

NT8D14

Universal

Trunk Card

Unit 0

Unit 1

Slot 0

Module

I/O Panel

Connector

0T

0R

0A

0PG

A

26

(w-bl)

1

(bl-w)

(w-o)

27

2

(o-w)

Audio pair

Part of

25-pair cable

Signal pair

MDF

Unit 7

K1

Bat

K1

K1


Bat


Microphone

K3

Micropho contact

K2 K3

K2 K3

Amplifier Spea

K2

Bat

553-AAA11

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

680

NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface

Paddle Board

Page 667 of 906

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667




Configuring the SDI paddle board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678

Introduction

The NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface (SDI) paddle board provides two

RS-232-C serial ports. These ports allow communication between the system and two external devices. The SDI paddle board is usually used to connect the

CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 system to the system administration and maintenance terminal. It can also be used to connect the system to a background terminal (used in the hotel/motel environment), a modem, or to the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) or Call Detail Recording (CDR) features.

The SDI paddle board mounts to a special socket on the rear of the backplane of the following modules:

• NT5D21 Core/Network module


Page 668 of 906

NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

• NT6D39 CPU/Network module


The SDI paddle board is compatible with all existing system software, but can only be used with the system options listed above. It does not support 20 mA current loop interface.


The NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface paddle board is a printed circuit board

measuring 31.12 by 12.7 cm (12.25 by 5.0 in.). See Figure 157 on page 669 .

Up to two paddle boards can be used in a system backplane for a total of four serial ports. Up to 12 other serial ports can be added by plugging standard serial cards into standard system slots. The two serial ports on each card are addressed as a pair of consecutive addresses (0 and 1, 2 and 3, up to 14 and

15).

The front edge of the card has two serial port connectors, an Enable/Disable switch (ENB/DIS), and a red LED. The LED indicates that the card has been disabled. It is lit when the following occurs:

• the ENB/DIS switch is set to disable

• both ports are disabled in software

• the ports are not configured in the configuration record

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 669 of 906

Figure 157

NT8D41AA SDI paddle board

Option switches

LED

Enable/disable switch

Port 1 connector

(RS-232C)

Backplane mating connectors

Option switches

Port 2 connector

(RS-232C)

Option switches

553-5979


Page 670 of 906



The NT8D41AA SDI paddle board has two asynchronous serial ports. These serial ports are connected to the I/O panel in the back of the shelf using special adapter cables. The serial ports can be used to connect the system to a terminal, a printer, a modem, or to an other system processor.

The SDI paddle board contains two Universal Asynchronous Receiver/

Transmitters (UARTs) and the logic necessary to connect the UARTs to the

system processor bus. See Figure 158. Other logic on the card includes two

baud rate generators, two RS-232-C driver/receiver pairs, and the switches and logic needed to configure the UARTs.

Figure 158

NT8D41AA SDI paddle board block diagram

UARTs

RS-232-C drivers and receivers

UART no. 1

UART no. 2

TD

RD

Port 1

(J1)

TD

RD

Port 2

(J2)

Address decode logic

Clock and bit rate select logic

Control bus

553-5980

System considerations

In dual-processor systems, the SDI paddle board will behave differently depending on which backplane socket it is installed in. Installing the paddle board into a socket in the network area of the backplane allows it to work when either of the system processors is active. Installing the paddle board into

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 671 of 906

a socket in the CPU area of the backplane allows it to work only when that

CPU is active.

The SDI paddle board is normally installed into a socket in the network area of the backplane. This allows it to be accessed by either of the system processors. This is necessary because the active CPU switches automatically each night at midnight, and whenever a fault occurs on the active CPU card.

The SDI paddle board can also be installed into a socket in the CPU area of the backplane. This is done when performing maintenance or an upgrade on the system. The SDI paddle board is plugged into the CPU that is not the active system CPU. One of the serial ports on the SDI paddle board is then connected to a maintenance terminal and the CPU board is put into maintenance mode. Diagnostics can then be run from the maintenance terminal without having to stop the system. This is also used to perform a parallel reload of the system software without affecting the operation of the switch.


The RS-232-C signals for port 1 are brought out on connector J1 and the

RS-232-C signals for port 2 are brought out on connector J2. The pinouts of

J1 and J2 are identical, so Table 211 can be used for both ports.

Table 211

Connectors J1 and J2 pin assignments (Part 1 of 2)

Pin #

5

6

7

3

4

1

2

Signal

CD

RD

TD

DTR

GND

DSR

RTS

Purpose in DTE mode

Carrier detect (Note 1)

Transmitted data

Received data

Data terminal ready

Ground

Data set ready (Note 1)

Request to send (Not Used)

Purpose in DCE mode

Carrier detect (Not used)

Received data

Transmitted data

Data terminal ready (Note 2)

Ground

Data set ready

Request to send (Note 2)


Page 672 of 906


Table 211

Connectors J1 and J2 pin assignments (Part 2 of 2)

Pin # Signal Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode

8 CTS Clear to send (Note 1) Clear to send

Note 1: In DTE mode the signals CD, DSR, and CTS are tied to +12 volts to signify that the port on the SDI paddle board is always ready to transmit and receive data.

Note 2: In DCE mode the signals DTR and RTS are tied to +12 volts to signify that the port on the SDI paddle board is always ready to transmit and receive data.

Configuring the SDI paddle board

Configuring the SDI paddle board consists of setting these option switches for each serial port:

• Port address

• Baud rate

• DTE/DCE/Fiber mode

The SDI paddle board has seven option switches, SW 2–8. Figure 159 on page 676

identifies the location of option switches on the SDI paddle board.

Instructions for setting these switches are in the section that follows.

Once the board has been installed, the system software must be configured to

recognize it. Instructions for doing this are found in “Software service changes” on page 677

”.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 673 of 906

Option switch settings

Address

Address select switch SW4 and logic on the card always address the two

UARTs using a pair of addresses: 0 and 1, 2 and 3 through 15 and 16. The

settings for this switch are shown in Table 212.

Table 212

SDI paddle board address switch settings

Address

Port 1

8

10

12

14

4

6

0

2

Port 2

9

11

13

15

5

7

1

3

1


Switch SW4

2

off off off off on on on on

3

on on off off on on off off

4


Baud rate

Switches SW2 and SW3 determine the baud rate for each individual port. The

settings for these switches are shown in Table 213 on page 674

.


Page 674 of 906


Table 213

SDI paddle board baud rate switch settings

Port 1 – SW2

Baud rate

150

300

600

1200

2400

4800

9600

1

off off off off off off off

2

on off on off off on off

3

on on off off on off off

4

off off off off on on on

1

off off off off off off off

Port 2 – SW3

2

on off on off off on off

3

on on off off on off off

4

off off off off on on on

DTE/DCE/Fiber mode

Each serial port can be configured to connect to a terminal (DTE equipment), a modem (DCE equipment), or a Fiber Superloop Network card. Instructions

for setting the switches SW5, SW6, SW7, and SW8 are shown in Table 214 on page 675 .

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 675 of 906

Table 214

NT8D41AA DTE/DCE/Fiber switch settings

Port 1 – SW5

Mode

DTE (terminal)

DCE (modem)

NT1P61 (Fiber)

DTE (terminal)

DCE (modem)

NT1P61 (Fiber)

Port 1 – SW6

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

on on on on on on off off off off off off off off off off off off on on on on on on on on on on off off off off on on on on

Port 2 – SW7 Port 2 – SW8 on on on on on on off off off off off off off off off off off off on on on on on on on on on on off off off off on on on on


Page 676 of 906


Figure 159

SDI paddle board option switch locations

Address selection


O

N

^

1 2 3 4

O

N

^

1 2 3 4

O

N

^

1 2 3 4

O

N

^

1 2 3 4 5 6

O

N

^

1 2 3 4 5 6

Port 1

Baud rate selection

Port 2

LED

Enable

Disable

Port 1 cable connector

Port 1

DTE/DCE mode selection

Port 2 cable connector

O

N

^

1 2 3 4 5 6

O

N

^

1 2 3 4 5 6

Port 2

DTE/DCE mode selection

553-5988

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 677 of 906


Once the NT8D41 SDI paddle board has been installed in the system, the system software needs to be configured to recognize it. This is done using the

Configuration Record program LD 17. Instructions for running the

Configuration Record program are found in Software Input/Output:


Some of the prompts that are commonly used when running the Configuration

Record program LD 17, are shown in “LD 17 – Serial port configuration parameters.” on page 677 . These parameters must be set for each port if both

ports are being used.

LD 17 – Serial port configuration parameters.

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

IOTB

ADAN

CDNO

DENS

USER

XSM

Response

CHG

CFN

YES

NEW TTY x

NEW PRT x

1–16

DDEN xxx

(NO) YES

Description

Change configuration

Configuration type

Change input/output devices

Define a new system terminal (printer) port as device x, where x = 0 to 15.

Use the SDI paddle board number to keep track of all ports.

Double density SDI paddle board

Enter the user of port x. The values that can be entered depend on the software being used. See the Software Input/

Output: Administration (553-3001-311) for details.

Port is used for the system monitor.


Page 678 of 906


Applications

The NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface paddle board is used to connect the switch to a variety of communication devices, printers, and peripherals. Any

RS-232-C compatible device can be connected to either of the card’s two serial ports.

The standard application for the paddle board is to connect the switch to the system console. This can be either a direct connection if the console is located near the switch, or through a modem for remote maintenance.

Bell 103/212 compatible dumb modems are recommended to connect a remote data terminal. If a smart modem (such as a Hayes modem) is used, configure the modem for the dumb mode of operation (Command

Recognition OFF, Command Echo OFF) before connecting the modem to the asynchronous port.

The serial data interface connectors on the paddle board are not RS-232-C standard DB-25 connectors. The NT8D84AA interface cable is used to adapt the paddle board to a non-standard pinout DB-9 connector (normally located on the I/O panel). The NT8D93 cable is then used to connect the non-standard

DB-9 connector to a peripheral that uses a RS-232-C standard DB-25

connector. See Figure 160 on page 679

.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Figure 160

SDI paddle board cabling


Page 679 of 906

NT8D84 cable

System monitor connector

Filter adapters

(Note 3)

J1

Module front

To external equipment

J1

J2

N

T

8

D

4

1

NT8D93 cable

(Note 1) or

Backplane

NT8D46 cable to connector J2 in the pedestal, where it will connect to the system monitor (Note 2)

Note 1:

Note 2:

Note 3:

The NT8D93 cable is available in several lengths, refer to Equipment identification

(553-3001-154) for specific information.

To connect J2 to system monitor, connect cable from the backplane from J1.

Supplied with NT8D84 cable.

553-3173


Page 680 of 906


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

694

Page 681 of 906

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface

Paddle Board

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681




Configuring the QSDI paddle board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692

Introduction

The NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface (QSDI) paddle board provides four RS-232-C serial ports. These ports allow communication between the system and four external devices, either DTE or DCE. The QSDI paddle board is normally used to connect the system to the system administration and maintenance terminal. It can also be used to connect the system to a background terminal (used in the hotel/motel environment), a modem, or to the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) or Call Detail Recording (CDR) features.

The QSDI paddle board mounts to a special socket on the rear of the backplane of the following modules:



Page 682 of 906

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

• NT6D39 CPU/Network module


The QSDI paddle board is compatible with all existing system software, but can only be used with the system options listed above. It does not support the

110 baud rate or the 20 mA current loop interface.


The NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface paddle board is a printed circuit

board measuring 31.12 by 12.7 cm (12.25 by 5.0 in.). See Figure 161 on page 683

.

The QSDI paddle board can be used in a system backplane for a total of four serial ports. Up to 12 other serial ports can be added by plugging standard serial cards into standard system slots. The serial ports on the card are addressed as a pair of consecutive addresses (0 and 1, 2 and 3, up to 14 and

15), using switches SW15 and SW16.

The front edge of the card has four serial port connectors, an Enable/Disable switch (ENB/DIS), and a red LED. The LED indicates the card status. It is lit when the following occurs:

• the ENB/DIS switch is set to disable

• all four ports are disabled in software

• all four ports are not configured in the configuration record


The NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board has four asynchronous serial ports.

These serial ports are connected to the I/O panel in the back of the shelf using special adapter cables. The serial ports can be used to connect the system to a terminal, a printer, a modem, or to an other system processor.

The QSDI paddle board design contains four Universal Asynchronous

Receiver/Transmitters (UARTs) and the logic necessary to connect the

UARTs to the system processor bus. See Figure 162 on page 684

.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 683 of 906

Figure 161

NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board

Port 1 DTE/DCE

mode selection

(See Table 7)

LED

Enable


Baud rate for Port 1

(See Table 5)


(See Table 5)

SW10

Disable

Port 1 RS-232 cable connector

Port 2 DTE/DCE mode selection

(See Table 7)



(See Table 7)



(See Table 5)

Address selection

for ports 3 and 4

(See Table 6)

Address selection

for ports 1 and 2

(See Table 6)


(See Table 5)


(See Table 7)


Note: DCE-DTE mode selection for each port applies to both switch sets shown.

553-8009


Page 684 of 906


Other logic on the card includes baud rate generators, RS-232-C driver/ receiver pairs, and the switches and logic needed to configure each UART.

Figure 162

NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board block diagram

Processor bus


UARTs

UART no. 1

UART no. 2

UART no. 3

UART no. 4


TD

RD

Port 1

TD

RD

Port 2

TD

RD

Port 3

TD

RD

Port 4

J1

J2


553-5986

System considerations

In dual-processor systems, the QSDI paddle board will behave differently depending on which backplane socket it is installed. Installing the paddle board into a socket in the network area of the backplane allows it to work when either of the system processors is active. Installing the paddle board into a socket in the CPU area of the backplane allows it to work only when that

CPU is active.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 685 of 906

The QSDI paddle board is normally installed into a socket in the network area of the backplane. This allows it to be accessed by either of the system processors. This is necessary because the active CPU switches automatically each night at midnight and whenever a fault occurs on the active CPU card.

The QSDI paddle board can also be installed into a socket in the CPU area of the backplane (supported in NT6D39AA shelves only). This is done when performing maintenance or an upgrade on the system.

The QSDI paddle board is plugged into the CPU that is not the active system

CPU. One of the serial ports on the QSDI paddle board is then connected to a maintenance terminal and the CPU board is put into maintenance mode.

Diagnostics can then be run from the maintenance terminal without having to stop the system. This is also used to perform a parallel reload of the system software without affecting the operation of the switch.


The RS-232-C signals for port 1 through port 4 are brought out on connector

J1 through J4 respectively. The pinouts for each port are identical to those for

each of the other three ports. Table 215 shows the pin assignment that applies

to each connector.

Table 215

Connectors J1, J2, J3, and J4 pin assignments

Pin #

5

6

7

3

4

1

2

Signal

DCD

RD

TD

DTR

GND

DSR

RTS

Purpose in DTE mode

Data Carrier detect (Note 1)

Transmitted data

Received data

Data terminal ready

Signal Ground


Request to send (Not Used)


Data Carrier detect (Not used)

Received data

Transmitted data


Signal Ground

Data set ready



Page 686 of 906


Table 215

Connectors J1, J2, J3, and J4 pin assignments

Pin # Signal Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode

8 CTS Clear to send (Note 1) Clear to send

Note 1: In DTE mode the signals CD, DSR, and CTS are tied to +12 volts to signify that the port on the QSDI paddle board is always ready to transmit and receive data. This mode is set to connect to a terminal device (DTE).

Note 2: In DCE mode the signals DTR and RTS are tied to +12 volts to signify that the port on the QSDI paddle board is always ready to transmit and receive data. This mode is set to connect to a modem device (DCE).

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 687 of 906

Configuring the QSDI paddle board

Configuring the QSDI paddle board to work in a system consists of setting these option switches for each serial port:

• Baud rate

• Port address

• DTE/DCE mode

The QSDI paddle board has fourteen option switches, SW2–13, SW15-16.


identifies the location of option switches on the QSDI paddle board. Learn how to set these switches in the following sections.

Once the board has been installed, the system software must be configured to recognize it. Instructions for doing this are found in the section titled

“Software service changes” on page 691 .

Option switch settings

Baud rate

Switches SW13, SW10, SW11, and SW12 determine the baud rate for ports

1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively. See the settings for these switches in Table 216.

Table 216

NT8D41BA baud rate switch settings

(Part 1 of 2)

SW13 (port 1), SW10 (port 2),

SW11 (port 3), SW12 (port 4)

Baud rate

150

300

600

1,200

2,400

Baud Clock

(kHz)

2.40

4.80

9.60

19.20

38.40

1

on on on on on

2

off on off on off

3

on off off on on

4

on on on off off


Page 688 of 906


Table 216

NT8D41BA baud rate switch settings

(Part 2 of 2)

SW13 (port 1), SW10 (port 2),

SW11 (port 3), SW12 (port 4)

Baud rate

4,800

9,600

19,200*

Baud Clock

(kHz)

76.80

153.60

307.20

1

on on on

2

on off on

3

off off on

4

off off on

*

For future use.

Address

Switch SW15 or SW16 and logic on the card always address the four UARTs using a pair of addresses: 0 and 1, 2 and 3 through 14 and 15. The settings for

both switches are shown in Table 217. To avoid system problems, switches

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 689 of 906

SW15 and SW16 must not be configured identically. Figure 161 on page 683

displays SW15 and SW16.

Table 217

NT8D41BA address switch settings


SW16

Device pair addresses

Port 3 Port 4

10

12

6

8

14

0

2

4

11

13

7

9

15

1

3

5

1*

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

8


7


6

off on on on on off off off

5


4


3


2

+

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

*

To enable ports 1 and 2, set SW15 position 1 to ON. To enable ports 3 and 4, set SW16 position 1 to ON.

+

For each X, the setting for this switch makes no difference, because it is not used.


Page 690 of 906


DTE/DCE/Fiber mode

Each serial port can be configured to connect to a terminal (DTE equipment), a modem (DCE equipment), or a Fiber Superloop Network card. Instructions for setting the switches SW2, SW3, SW4, SW5, SW6, SW7, SW8, and SW9

are shown in Table 218. Figure 161 on page 683 shows the location of these

switches on the paddleboard.

Table 218

NT8D41BA DTE/DCE/Fiber switch settings

Port 1 — SW 3 Port 1 —SW 2

Mode

DTE (terminal)

DCE (modem)

NT1P61 (Fiber)

DTE (terminal)

DCE (modem)

NT1P61 (Fiber)

DTE (terminal)

DCE (modem)

NT1P61 (Fiber)

DTE (terminal)

DCE (modem)

NT1P61 (Fiber)

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

on on on off on off off on off on off on off off off on off on on off on off on off on on on on on off on on on off on off

Port 2 — SW 5 Port 2 — SW4 on on on off on off off on off on off on off off off on off on on off on off on off on on on on on off on on on off on off

Port 3 — SW 7 Port 3— SW 6 on on on off on off off on off on off on off off off on off on on off on off on off on on on on on off on on on off on off

Port 4 — SW 9 Port 4 — SW 8 on on on off on off off on off on off on off off off on off on on off on off on off on on on on on off on on on off on off

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 691 of 906


Once the NT8D841BA QSDI paddle board has been installed in the system, the system software needs to be configured to recognize it, using the

Configuration Record program LD 17. Instructions for running this program are found in Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311).


Record program LD 17 are shown in LD 17 – Prompts to configure the

NT8D841Ba paddle board. These parameters must be set for each port if both

ports are being used.

LD 17 – Prompts to configure the NT8D841Ba paddle board.

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

ADAN

CTYPE

DES

USER

XSM

Response

CHG

ADAN

NEW TTY x

NEW PRT x

SDI4

XQSDI xxx

(NO) YES

Description

Change configuration

Configuration type


Quad port card

Quad density QSDI paddle board.





Page 692 of 906


Applications

The NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface paddle board is used to connect the switch to a variety of communication devices, printers, and peripherals.

Any RS-232-C compatible device can be connected to either of the card’s two serial ports.

The standard application for the paddle board is to connect the switch to the system console. This can be either a direct connection if the console is located near the switch, or through a modem for remote maintenance.

Bell 103/212 compatible dumb modems are recommended to connect a remote data terminal. If a smart modem (such as a Hayes modem) is used, configure the modem for the dumb mode of operation (Command

Recognition OFF, Command Echo OFF) before connecting the modem to the asynchronous port.

The serial data interface connectors on the paddle board are not RS-232-C standard DB-25 connectors. The NT8D84AA interface cable is used to adapt the paddle board to a non-standard pinout DB-9 connector (normally located on the I/O panel). The NT8D93 cable is then used to connect the non-standard

DB-9 connector to a peripheral that uses a RS-232-C standard DB-25

connector. See Figure 163 on page 693

.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 693 of 906

Figure 163

NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board cabling

NT8D84 cable

System monitor connector

Filter adapters

(NT8D84 cable)

J1

J1

Module front

To external equipment

J2

J3

4

1

B

A

N

T

8

D

J4

NT8D93 cable

(Note 1)

Backplane or

NT8D46 cable to connector J4 in the pedestal, where it will connect to the system monitor (Note 2)

Note 1:

The NT8D93 cable is available in several lengths, refer to Equipment identification

(553-3001-154) for specific information.

Note 2:

To connect J4 to system monitor, connect cable from the backplane from J1.

553-8010


Page 694 of 906


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

700

Page 695 of 906

NTAG26 XMFR card

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695

MF signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695


Introduction

The XMFR (Extended Multi-frequency receiver) card is used to receive MF digit information. Connections are made between a PBX and a central office.

The XMFR card can only operate in systems using µ-law companding.


MF signaling

The MF feature allows the system to receive digits for 911 or feature group

D applications.

Signaling levels

MF signaling uses pairs of frequencies to represent digits.


Page 696 of 906

NTAG26 XMFR card

Digit

KP

ST

9

0

STP(ST’)

ST2P(ST”)

ST3P(ST”)

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

Table 219 lists the frequency values used for received signals.

Table 219

MF frequency values


DOD-Tx, DID-Rx

700 Hz + 900 Hz

700 HZ + 1100 Hz

900 Hz + 1100 Hz

700 Hz + 1300 Hz

900 Hz + 1300 Hz

1100 Hz + 1300 Hz

700 Hz + 1500 Hz

900 Hz +1500 Hz

1100 Hz + 1500 Hz

1300 Hz + 1500 Hz

1100 Hz + 1700 Hz

1500 Hz + 1700 Hz

900 Hz + 1700 Hz

1300 Hz + 1700 Hz

700 Hz + 1700 Hz

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NTAG26 XMFR card

Page 697 of 906

XMFR receiver specifications

Table 220 provides the operating requirements for the NTAG26 circuit card.

Table 220

XMFR receiver specifications (Part 1 of 3)

Coding:


Mu-Law must accept: 0 to -25 dBmO must reject: -35 to dBmO

Frequency sensitivity:

Amplitude Twist:

Signal Duration:

KP Signal Duration:

must accept: f +/- (1.5% + 5Hz) must accept: difference of 6dB between frequencies must accept: > 30 ms must reject: < 10 ms must accept: > 55 ms may accept: > 30 ms must reject: < 10 ms

Signal Interruption Bridge: must ignore: < 10 ms

Time Shift between 2 frequencies:

(Envelop for start/stop)

Coincidence between 2 frequencies:

Intersignal Pause: must accept: < 4 ms must reject: < 10 ms must accept: > 25 ms

Maximum Dialling Speed: must accept: 10 signals per second


Page 698 of 906

NTAG26 XMFR card

Table 220


Noise Rejection:

Error Rate in White Noise

Immunity to Impulse Noise

Error Rate from Power Lines

Better than: < 1/2500 calls

Test:

10 digit calls nominal frequency @ -23 dBmO

ON/OFF = 50 ms/50ms

KP duration 100 ms

SNR = -20 dB all digits


Test:


ON/OFF = 50ms/50ms

KP duration 100 ms

SNR = -12 dBs all digits

ATT Digit Simulation Test, Tape #201 from PUB

56201


Test:


ON/OFF = 50 ms/50ms

KP duration 100 ms

60 Hz signal @ 81 dBrnc0 (-9dBm) or

180 Hz signal @ 68 dBrnco (-22dBm) all digits

Tolerate Intermodulation:

Must tolerate @A-B and @B-A modulation products with a power sum

28 dB below each frequency component level of the signals.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NTAG26 XMFR card

Page 699 of 906

Table 220


KP:

KP activation

Multiple KP’s

Excessive Components:

The receiver must not respond to signals prior to KP.

Remain unlocked until ST, STP, ST2P or ST3P is received.

After the initial KP, subsequent KP’s are ignored while in unlocked mode.

If more than two valid frequencies are detected, no digit is reported to the CPU.

The XMFR receiver specifications conform to the following:

• TR-NPL-000258, Compatibility Information for F.G.D. switched access service, Bell Communication Research Technical Reference, Issue 1.0,

October 1985.

• TR-NPL-000275, Notes on the BOC Intra-LATA Networks, Bell

Communication Research Technical Reference, Chapter 6, 1986.


Page 700 of 906

NTAG26 XMFR card


The physical specifications required by the NTAG26 XMFR circuit card are

shown in Table 221.

Table 221


Dimensions

Faceplate LED

Power requirements

Environmental considerations

Height:12.5 in. (320 mm)

Depth:10.0 in. (255 mm)

Thickness:7/8 in. (22.25 mm)

Lit when the circuit card is disabled

1.1 Amps typical

Meets the environment of CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and

Meridian 1 systems

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

708

Page 701 of 906

NTAK02 SDI/DCH card

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701

NTAK02 SDI/DCH card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701

Introduction

The NTAK02 Serial Data Interface/D-channel (SDI/DCH) digital trunk card is supported in the Media Gateway only for the ISDN Signaling Link (ISL)

D-channel. The SDI is not supported in the MG 1000S.

You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the MG 1000S. It is not supported in the MG 1000S Expansion. Up to four NTAK02 SDI/DCH cards are supported in an MG 1000S.

NTAK02 SDI/DCH card

The optional SDI/DCH card provides up to four serial I/O ports, which are grouped into two pairs:

• port 0 and port 1

• port 2 and port 3


Page 702 of 906

NTAK02 SDI/DCH card

Ports 1 and 3 are configured as DCH. Ports 0 and 2 are configured as SDI

(not supported). See Table 222. Each pair is controlled by a switch, as shown in Table 223.

Table 222

Port configurations

Port 0

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

SDI (not supported)

DCH

SDI (not supported)

DCH

Table 223

Switch settings

Port 0

SDI (not supported)

SDI (not supported)

—

Port 1

DCH

DCH

ESDI

SW 1-1

OFF

OFF

ON

SW 1-2

OFF

ON

ON

Port 2

SDI (not supported)

SDI (not supported)

—

Port 3

DCH

DCH

ESDI

SW 1-3

OFF

OFF

ON

SW 1-4

OFF

ON

ON

Note: Digital Private Network Signaling System DPNSS can replace the

DCH function in the U.K.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NTAK02 SDI/DCH card

Page 703 of 906

Two ports offer the option for DTE/DCE configuration. This option is

selected from a jumper on the card. Table 224 shows the jumper settings.

Table 224

Jumper settings

Port

0

1

2

3

Jumper location

J5

J4

J3

J10

J7

J6

Strap for

DTE

C - B

C - B

C - B

C - B

C - B

C - B

Strap for

DCE

B - A

B - A

B - A

B - A

B - A

B - A

Jumper location

J9

J8

J2

J1

RS422

C - B

C - B

C - B

C - B

RS232

B - A

B - A

B - A

B - A


Pair

1T

1R

2T

2R

3T

3R

4T

4R

5T

5R

Page 704 of 906

NTAK02 SDI/DCH card

Connecting to the ports

External devices are connected to the SDI/DCH card by the following:

• the NTAK19FB four-port SDI cable. This cable does not have to be terminated at the cross connect terminal since it is equipped with connectors.

• the NE-A25-B cable. Terminate the NE-A25-B cable at the cross connect

terminal. Tables 225 through 228 give the pinouts for the SDI/DCH card.

Table 225

NTAK02 pinouts – Port 0 at the cross-connect terminal

RS232

Cable

Color

W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-G

G-W

W-BR

BR-W

W-S

S-W

DTE

0

DTR

DSR

DCD

RTS

CTS

RX

TX

—

SG

Signal

DCE

0

DCD

CH/CI

DTR

CTS

RTS

TX

RX

—

SG

Designations

I=Input O=Output

DTE

—

O

O

I

I

I

I

O

—

—

DCE

—

I

O

O

I

O

O

I

—

—

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NTAK02 SDI/DCH card

Page 705 of 906

Table 226

NTAK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal – Port 1

RS422 RS232

Pair

9T

9R

10T

10R

11T

11R

12T

12R

25T

25R

7T

7R

8T

8R

5T

5R

6T

6R

Cable Signal

Color

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

V-S

S-V

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

R-O

O-R

R-G

G-R

DCE

SCTEA

RXCA

SCTEB

RXCB

TXDA

RXDA

TXDB

RXDB

SG

—

SCTA

—

SCTB

DCD

CH/CI

DTR

CTS

RTS

DTE

SCRA

SCTA

SCRB

SCTB

RXDA

TXDA

RXDB

TXDB

SG

—

SCTEA

—

SCTEB

DTR

DSR

DCD

RTS

CTS

DTE

I

O

I

O

I

I

I

I

—

—

O

I

I

I

O

—

O

O

Designations

I=Input

O=Output

Designations

I=Input

O=Output

DCE

O

I

O

I

O

O

O

O

—

—

O

O

I

O

I

I

I

—

DTE

I

O

—

—

—

—

I

I

O

I

I

I

O

—

—

—

—

—

Signal

DCE DTE

O

I

—

—

O

O

—

—

—

—

O

O

I

O

I

—

—

—

SCR

SCT

—

—

RXD

TXD

—

—

SG

—

SCT

—

CH/CI

DTR

DSR

DCD

RTS

CTS

DCE

SCT

—

—

—

TXD

RXD

—

—

SG

—

SCT

—

—

DCD

CH/CI

DTR

CTS

RTS


Page 706 of 906

NTAK02 SDI/DCH card

Table 227


RS422

Pair

13T

13R

14T

14R

15T

15R

16T

16R

17T

17R

Cable

Color

BK-G

G-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

Y-O

O-Y

Signal

DTE DCE

Designations

I=Input

O=Output

DTE

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

O

—

DCE

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

I

—

Designations

I=Input

O=Output

DTE

O

I

I

O

I

I

—

O

O

—

DCE

I

O

O

I

—

I

O

O

I

—

RS232

Signal

DTE

—

DTR

DSR

DCD

RTS

CTS

RX

TX

—

SG

DCE

—

DCD

CH/CI

DTR

CTS

RTS

TXD

RXD

—

SG

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NTAK02 SDI/DCH card

Page 707 of 906

Table 228


RS422

Pair

Cable

Color

Signal

DTE DCE

Designations

I=Input

O=Output

DTE DCE

Designations

I=Input

O=Output

DTE DCE

RS232

Signal

DTE DCE

20T

20R

21T

21R

22T

22R

23T

23R

17T

17R

18T

18R

19T

19R

24T

24R

25T

25R

Y-S

S-Y

V-BL

BL-V

V-O

O-V

V-G

G-V

Y-O

O-Y

Y-G

G-Y

Y-BR

BR-Y

V-BR

BR-V

V-S

S-V

SCTA

—

SCTB

DCD

CH/CI

DTR

CTS

RTS

SCTEA

RXCA

SCTEB

RXCB

TXDA

RXDA

TXDB

RXDB

—

SG

SCTEA

—

SCTEB

DTR

DSR

DCD

RTS

CTS

SCRA

SCTA

SCRB

SCTB

RXDA

TXDA

RXDB

TXDB

—

SG

I

O

I

I

I

I

O

I

I

O

—

—

O

—

I

I

O

O

O

O

O

I

I

O

O

O

O

I

—

—

I

—

O

O

I

I

—

—

I

O

I

I

O

I

—

—

—

—

O

—

I

I

—

—

—

—

O

I

I

O

O

O

—

—

—

—

I

—

—

—

O

O

CTS

RTS

SCT

—

—

—

TXD

RXD

SCT

—

—

DCD

CH/CI

DTR

—

—

SG

—

RTS

CTS

SCR

SCT

—

—

RXD

TXD

SCT

—

CH/CI

DTR

DSR

DCD

—

—

SG

—


Page 708 of 906

NTAK02 SDI/DCH card

Characteristics of the low speed port

Ports 0 and 2 are asynchronous, low speed ports. They transfer data to and from the line one bit at a time.

The characteristics of the low speed port are as follows:

•

Baud rate: 300; 600; 1200; 2400; 4800; 9600; 19,200

Default = 1200

•

Parity: Odd, even, none

Default = none

•

Stop bits: 1, 1.5, 2

Default = 1

•

Flow control: XON/XOFF, CTS, non.

Default = none

•

Duplex: Full

•

Interface: RS-232-D

•

Data bits: 5, 6, 7, 8

Default = 8

Characteristics of the high speed port

Ports 1 and 3 are synchronous, high speed ports with the following characteristics:

•

Baud rate: 1200; 2400; 4800; 9600; 19,200; 56,000; 64,000

•

Data bit: Transparent (1)

•

Duplex: Full

•

Clock: Internal or external

•

Interface: RS-232-D, RS-422-A

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

720

Page 709 of 906

NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709



Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715

Introduction

The NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI digital trunk card is a standard-size IPE circuit card.

The NTAK09 provides 1.5Mb ISDN primary rate interface and digital trunk interface capability. The NTAK09 can be equipped with two daughterboards: the NTAK20 clock controller and the NTAK93/NTBK51 D-channel handler interface.

You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the MG 1000S. The card is not supported in the MG 1000S Expansion. Up to four digital trunk cards are supported in each MG 1000S.

In North America, the NTAK09 can be replaced by the NTRB21 – TMDI

(DTI/PRI/DCH) card, which is described in “NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card” on page 825 .

Contact your system supplier or your Nortel representative to verify that this card is supported in your area.


Page 710 of 906

NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card


The DTI/PRI card uses a 9.5" by 12.5" multilayer printed circuit board with buried power and ground layers. The clock controller and D-channel

daughterboards are fastened by standoffs and connectors. See Figure 164 on page 710

.

Figure 164

NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card

Stiffeners

LEDs

1.5 MB

DTI/PRI

DIS

ACT

RED

YEL

LBK

CC

DCH

Bantam

Jacks

RCV

XMT

NTAK09

1 2

3 4

ON

SW

Connector

Sockets

Switch

ON

SW

553-CSE8294

The NTAK09 DTI/PRI card has seven faceplate LEDs. The first five LEDs are associated with the NTAK09 card. The remaining two LEDs are associated with the clock controller and DCHI daughterboards.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 711 of 906

Table 229

NTAK09 LED states

The first five LEDs operate as follows:

• During system power up, the LEDs are on.

• When the self-test is in progress, the LEDs flash three times and then go

into their appropriate states, as shown in Table 229.


DIS

ACT

RED

YEL

LBK

On (Red)

Off

On (Green)

Off

On (Red)

Off

On (Yellow)

Off

On (Green)

Off

The NTAK09 circuit card is disabled.

The NTAK09 is not in a disabled state.

The NTAK09 circuit card is in an active state. No alarm states exist, the card is not disabled, nor is it in a loopback state.

An alarm state or loopback state exists, or the card has been disabled. See the other faceplate LEDs for more information.

A red-alarm state has been detected.

No red alarm.

A yellow alarm state has been detected.

No yellow alarm.

NTAK09 is in loop-back mode.

NTAK09 is not in loop-back mode.


Page 712 of 906


NTAK09 DTI/PRI power on self-test

When power is applied to the NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card, the card performs a self-test. The LEDs directly associated with the NTAK09 circuit card are DIS, ACT, RED, YEL, and LBK. The clock controller LED is also

included in the power on self-test. Table 230 provides the state of the

NTAK09 LEDs during the self-test procedure.

Table 230

NTAK09 LED states during self-test

Action

Power up system

Self-test in progress

LED State

Top five LEDs light for eleven seconds

Top five LEDs go out for one second

If the self-test passes, the top five LEDs flash on and off three times.

If the self-test detects a partial failure, the top five LEDs flash on and off five times

When the self-test is completed, the LEDs are set to their appropriate states

NTAK20 power on self-test

The clock controller daughterboard LED is the second LED from the bottom on the faceplate of the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card.

When power is applied to the NTAK20 clock controller, the LED is initially off for two seconds. If the self-test passes, the LED turns red and flashes on and off twice.

When the self-test is completed, the LED remains red until the clock controller is enabled. When enabled, the clock controller LED either turns green or flashes green.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 713 of 906

NTAK93 self-test

The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard LED is the bottom LED on the faceplate of the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card.

The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard does not perform a self-test when power is applied to it. When power is applied, it turns red and remain steadily lit, indicating the DCH is disabled. When the DCH is enabled, the LED turns green and remains steadily lit.

Self-tests of the NTAK93 daughterboard are invoked manually by commands in LD 96.

DTI/PRI local self-test

The local self-test, also called a local loopback test, checks speech path continuity, zero code suppression, remote alarm detection, and A & B bit signalling. This test is performed manually on a per-loop or per-channel basis.

The local loopback test performs a local logical loopback and does not require any external loopback of the T1 signal.

Restrictions and limitations

The DCHI and DTI/PRI must be disabled before performing the self-test on the entire DTI/PRI card. Individual channels must be disabled before performing a self test on a particular channel.


The DTI/PRI obtains its power from the backplane, and draws less than

2 amps on +5 V, 50 mA on +12 V and 50 mA on –12 V.


Lightning protectors must be installed between an external T1 carrier facility and the system. For public T1 facilities, this protection is provided by the local operating company. In a private T1 facility environment (a campus, for example), the NTAK92 protection assembly can be used.


Page 714 of 906


The NTAK09 circuit card conforms to safety and performance standards for foreign and surge voltage protection in an internal environment.


NTAK09 provides the following features and functions:

• configurable parameters, including A-Law and µ-Law operation, digital pads on a per channel basis, and Superframe or Extended Superframe formats

• AMI or B8ZS line coding

• 1.5 Mb Clock recovery and distribution of reference clocks

• DG2 or FDL yellow alarm methods

• card status and alarm indication with faceplate-mounted LEDs

• automatic alarm monitoring and handling

• Card-LAN for maintenance communication

• loopback capabilities for both near-end and far-end

• echo canceler interface

• integrated trunk access (both D-channel and in-band A/B signaling can be mixed on the same PRI)

• faceplate monitor jacks for T1 interface

• configurable D-channel data rate with 64 Kbps, 56 Kbps or

64 Kbps inverted.

• self-test

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 715 of 906

Architecture


The signaling interface performs an 8 Kbps signaling for all 24 channels and interfaces directly to the DS-30X link. Messages in both directions of transmission are three bytes long.

Interconnection

The interconnection to the carrier is by NTBK04 1.5 Mb carrier cable.

The NTBK04 is twenty feet long. The NT8D97AX, a fifty-foot extension, is also available.

Microprocessor

The NTAK09 is equipped with bit-slice microprocessors that handle the following major tasks:

• Task handler: also referred to as an executive, the task handler provides orderly per-channel task execution to maintain real-time task ordering constraints.

• Transmit voice: inserts digital pads, manipulates transmit AB bits for

DS1, and provides graceful entry into T-Link data mode when the data module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk is answering the call.

• Receive voice: inserts digital pads and provides graceful entry into

T-Link data mode when the data module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk is originating the call.

• T-Link data: a set of transmit and receive vectored subroutines which provides T-Link protocol conversion to/from the DM-DM protocol.

• Receive ABCD filtering: filters and debounces the receive ABCD bits and provides change of state information to the system.

• Diagnostics

• Self-test


Page 716 of 906


Digital pad

The digital pad is an EPROM whose address-input to data-output transfer function meets the characteristics of a digital attenuator. The digital pad accommodates both µ255-law and A-Law coding. There are 32 combinations each for µ255 to µ255, µ255 to A-Law, A-Law to µ255, and A-Law to A-Law.

These values are selected to meet the EIA loss and level plan. See Table 231.

Table 231

Digital pad values and offset allocations

Offset

D

E

B

C

F

9

A

7

8

5

6

3

4

0

1

2

PAD set 0

0dB

2dB

3dB

4dB

5dB

6.1dB

8dB

–1dB

–3dB

–4dB idle code, 7F unassigned code, FF

1dB

–2dB

–5db

–6db

PAD set 1

10db

11db

12db

3db

14db spare spare spare spare

–7db

–8db

–9db

–10db

0.6db

7db

9db

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 717 of 906

D-channel interface

The D-channel interface is a 64 Kbps maximum, full-duplex, serial bit-stream configured as a DCE device. The data signals include receive data output, transmit data input, receive clock output, and transmit clock output. The receive and transmit clocks can vary slightly from each other as determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks.

Feature selection through software configuration for the D-channel includes:

• 56 Kbps

• 64 Kbps clear

• 64 Kbps inverted (64 Kbps restricted)

DCHI can be enabled and disabled independent of the PRI card, as long as the

PRI card is inserted in its cabinet slot. The D-channel data link cannot be established however, unless the PRI loop is enabled.

On the NTAK09 use switch 1 and position 1 to select either the D-channel feature or the DPNSS feature, as follows:

• OFF = D-channel

• ON = DPNSS (U.K.)

DS-1 Carrier interface

Transmitter

The transmitter takes the binary data (dual unipolar) from the PCM transceiver and produces bipolar pulses for transmission to the external digital facility. The DS1 transmit equalizer enables the cabling distance to


Page 718 of 906

NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card extend from the card to the DSX-1 or LD-1. Equalizers are switch selectable

through dip-switches. The settings are shown in Table 232.

Table 232

NTAK09 switch settings

Switch Setting

Distance to Digital Cross-Connect

0 - 133 feet

133 - 266 feet

266 - 399 feet

399 - 533 feet

533 - 655 feet

1

DCH F/W

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

2

(LEN 0)

Off

On

Off

On

Off

3

(LEN 1)

Off

On

On

Off

Off

4

(LEN 2)

On

Off

Off

Off

Off

Receiver

The receiver extracts data and clock from an incoming data stream and outputs clock and synchronized data. At worst case DSX-1 signal levels, the line receiver will operate correctly with up to 655 feet of ABAM cable between the card and the external DS1 signal source.

Connector pinout

The connection to the external digital carrier is through a 15-position male

D-type connector. See Table 233.

Table 233

DS-1 line interface pinout for NTBK04 cable (Part 1 of 2)

From 50-pin MDF connector

pin 48 pin 23 pin 25

To DB-15

pin 1 pin 9 pin 2

Signal name

T

R

FGND

Description

transmit tip to network transmit ring to network frame ground

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 719 of 906

Table 233

DS-1 line interface pinout for NTBK04 cable (Part 2 of 2)

From 50-pin MDF connector

pin 49 pin 24

To DB-15

pin 3 pin 11

Signal name

T1

R1

Description

receive tip from network receive ring from network

Clock controller interface

The clock controller interface provides the recovered clock from the external digital facility to the clock controller daughterboard through the backplane.

Depending on the equipped state of the clock controller, the clock controller interface enables or disables the appropriate reference clock source, in conjunction with software.

IMPORTANT!

Each MG 1000S that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked to an external reference clock.

Note: Clocking slips can occur between MG 1000S systems that are clocked from different Central Offices (COs), if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality.

Clock rate converter

The 1.5 Mb clock is generated by a Phase-Locked Loop (PLL). The PLL synchronizes the 1.5 Mb DS1 clock to the 2.56 Mb system clock through the common multiple of 8 kHz by using the main frame synchronization signal.


Page 720 of 906


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

734

Page 721 of 906

NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721



Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724

Introduction

The NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card is a digital trunk card that provides an

IPE-compatible 2.0 Mb DTI interface. This circuit card includes an on-board clock controller that can be manually switched in or out of service.

You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the MG 1000S. The card is not supported in the MG 1000S Expansion. Up to four digital trunk cards are supported in each MG 1000S.

IMPORTANT!

Each MG 1000S that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked to an external reference clock.



Page 722 of 906

NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card


The 2 Mb DTI pack uses a standard 9.5" by 12.5", multi-layer printed circuit board. The faceplate is 7/8” wide and contains six LEDs.

The LEDs operate as follows:

• After the card is plugged in, the LEDs (a-e) are turned on by the power-up circuit. The clock controller LED is independently controlled by its own microprocessor.

• After initialization, the LEDs (a-e) flash three times (0.5 seconds on,

0.5 seconds off) and then individual LEDs will go into appropriate states,

as shown in Table 234.

Table 234

NTAK10 LED states (Part 1 of 2)

LED

DIS

OOS

NEA

FEA

LBK

CC

State

On (Red)

Off

On (Yellow)

Off

On (Yellow)

Off

On (Yellow)

Off

On (Yellow)

Off

On (Red)

On (Green)

Definition

The NTAK10 circuit card is disabled.

The NTAK10 is not in a disabled state.

The NTAK10 is in an out-of-service state.

The NTAK10 is not in an out-of-service state.

A near end alarm state has been detected.

No near end alarm.

A far end alarm state has been detected.

No far end alarm.

NTAK10 is in loop-back mode.

NTAK10 is not in loop-back mode.

The clock controller is switched on and disabled.

The clock controller is switched on and is either locked to a reference or is in free-run mode.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 723 of 906

Table 234

NTAK10 LED states (Part 2 of 2)

LED State

Flashing

(Green)

Off

Definition

The clock controller is switched on and locking onto the primary reference.

The clock controller is switched off.

Note: See “Clock controller interface” on page 729

in this chapter for more on tracking and free-run operation.


The 2MB DTI obtains its power from the backplane. It draws less than 2 A on +5 V, 50 mA on +15 V and 50 mA on –15 V.

Environment

The NTAK10 card meets all applicable Nortel operating specifications.


The NTAK10 provides the following features and functions:

• a clock controller that can be switched in as an option

• software-selectable A/µlaw operation

• software-selectable digital pads on a per channel basis

• frame alignment and multiframe alignment detection

• frame and multiframe pattern generation

• CRC-4 transmission and reception (software selectable)

• card status and alarm indication with faceplate-mounted LEDs

• Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) counting

• outpulsing of digits on any of the ABCD bits



Page 724 of 906


• per-channel and all-channel loopback capabilities for near-end and far-end

• self-test

• download of incoming ABCD validation times from software

• warm SYSLOAD (TS16 AS16 transmitted)

Applicability to France

Features specific to DTI requirements for France are implemented in firmware, and are switch-accessed. These are:

• transmission and reception of alarm indication signaling (AIS) in TS16 such as card disabled and warm SYSLOAD

• France-specific PPM counting

• decadic dialing

• France-specific alarm report and error handling

Architecture

The main functional blocks of the NTAK10 card architecture include:

• DS-30X interface

• signaling interface

• three microprocessors

• digital pad

• Card-LAN interface

• carrier interface

• clock controller interface


The NTAK10 card interfaces to one DS-30X bus which contains

32 byte-interleaved timeslots operating at 2.56 Mb. Each timeslot contains

10 bits in a 10 message format; eight are assigned to voice/data (64 Kbps), one to signaling (8 Kbps), and one is a data valid bit (8 Kbps).

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 725 of 906

Transmit data

To transmit data on the carrier, the incoming serial bit stream from the

NTAK02 circuit card is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes. The signaling bits are extracted by the signaling interface circuitry.

Digital Pad: The parallel data is presented to the pad PROM. The PROM

contains pad values, idle code, and A/µ-law conversion. They can be set independently for incoming and outgoing voice on a per channel basis. Four conversion formats are provided: A-law to A-law, A-law to µ-law, µ-law to

A-law, µ-law to µ-law.

Each of these four formats has up to 32 unique pad values. The NTAK10 card provides the pad values of -10, -9, -8, -7, -6,-5, -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 0.6, 1, 2, 3, 4,

5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14 dB (also idle and unassigned code). A negative pad is a positive gain.

The pad PROM output is converted from parallel to serial format and passed on to a multiplexer, which passes PCM/data, TS0, and TS16 information. The

FAS pattern is sent in even TS0s, while in odd TS0s alarm information is sent.

The multiplexer output is fed to the carrier interface which can forward it to the carrier or perform per channel loopback.

Receive data

To receive data, PCM/Data from the carrier interface is converted from serial to parallel, is buffered, and is fed to the pad prom. It then sent onto the

DS-30X interface, where signaling information from the signaling interface circuitry is multiplexed.

DS-30X microprocessor

The DS-30X is a utility processor, responsible for the following tasks:

• controlling the DS-30X interface

• receiving and decoding of messages and taking appropriate action

• transmitting TS16 messages to the TS16 microprocessor

• receiving TS16 messages from the TS16 microprocessor and passing these messages to the A07

• providing the 19.2 Kbps serial interface to the Card-LAN


Page 726 of 906


• controlling LEDs

• downloading Local Calling Areas (LCAs)

• monitoring errors and alarms

• detecting the change of state in TS0, and outputting TS0 data

• counting bipolar violations, slips, PLL alarms, frame-alignment errors, and CRC-4 errors

• monitoring the status of frame alignment and multiframe alignment

• detecting and reporting of alarm indication signals (AIS)

• updating of per channel loopback registers

• controlling the far-end loopback and digroup loopback functions


Interconnections

The external connection is through a 50-pin MDF connector with the

NTBK05 carrier cable A0394217.

CEPT interface

For the Conference of European Postal Communications (CEPT) interface, the connection to the external digital carrier is through the NT5K85 DTI cable assembly. It converts the 120 ohms D-connector to 75 ohms coaxial cable.

The impedance is switch set. The switch-settings table at the end of this

chapter describes the options. See Table 235.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 727 of 906

If a coaxial interface is required, use NT5K85 in conjunction with the

NTBK05.

Table 235

2 MB DTI switch options

Switch

S1-1

S1-2

S2-1

S2-2

S3-1

S3-2

Off

(Switch Open)

—

CC Enabled

120 ohms

75 ohms non-French Firmware

—

On

(Switch Closed)

—

CC Disabled

75 ohms

120 ohms

French Firmware

—

Channel associated signaling

Channel associated signaling means that each traffic carrying channel has its own signaling channel permanently associated with it. Timeslot 16 is used to transmit two types of signaling: supervisory and address.

Incoming signal

Functions of the NTAK10 with regard to incoming signaling include:

• recognizing valid changes

• determining which channels made the changes

• collecting PPM

• reporting changes to software

Outgoing supervisory signals

The desired ABCD bit pattern for a channel is output by the NTAK10, under the control of the system controller card. The bit pattern to be transmitted is held on the line for a minimum period of time. This time is specified in the same message and ensures that the signal is detected correctly at the far end.


Page 728 of 906


With the exception of the outpulsing signals and special signals, such as

Denmark's Flash signal and Sweden's Parking signal, the minimum duration of any signal state is 100 ms. Some signal states can have a minimum duration time that is longer than 100 ms.

Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM)

Periodic Pulse Monitoring (PPM) is used to collect toll charges on outgoing

CO trunk calls.

TS16 microprocessor

The functions of this microprocessor include:

• receiving signaling messages supplied by the DS-30X microprocessor, decoding these messages, and taking subsequent actions

• transmitting messages to the DS-30X microprocessor

• handling PPM

• updating the TS16 select RAM and TS16 data RAM

• providing outpulsing

• receive data from the change-of-state microprocessor

• transmitting AIS for CNET (France) application

Change-of-state microprocessor

The functions of this processor are:

• detecting valid change of state in TS16

• when a valid change has been found, passing the new abcd bits to the

TS16 microprocessor, along with five bits to indicate the associated channel

Carrier interface

Tx Direction

The HDB3 encoded multiplexer output is sent to the output selector, which selects the PCM/Data output or the looped around far end data. The HDB3 is

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 729 of 906

converted from digital to AMI and sent to the carrier. A transformer provides isolation and impedance matching (75 ohms or 120 ohms).

Rx Direction

The AMI data of the carrier is converted to digital and fed to the input selector as well as the output selector for far end loopback. Clock recovery circuitry within the receiving device extracts the 2.0 MHz clock. This clock generates the frame and multiframe count and sends them to the clock controller as a reference.


The recovered clock from the external digital facility is provided to the clock controller through the backplane-to-clock controller interface. Depending upon the state of the clock controller (switched on or off), the clock controller interface, in conjunction with software, enables or disables the appropriate reference clock source.

The clock-controller circuitry on NTAK10 is identical to that of the

NTAK20. While several DTI/PRI packs can exist in one system, only one clock controller can be activated. All other DTI/PRI clock controllers must be switched off.

IMPORTANT!



Clocking modes

The clock controller can operate in one of two modes: tracking or non-tracking (also known as free-run).


Page 730 of 906


Tracking mode

There are two stages to clock controller tracking:

• tracking a reference, and

• locked onto a reference.

When tracking a reference, the clock controller uses an algorithm to match its frequency to the frequency of the incoming clock. When the frequencies are very near to being matched, the clock controller is locked onto the reference.

The clock controller will make small adjustments to its own frequency until both the incoming and system frequencies correspond.

If the incoming clock reference is stable, the internal clock controller will track it, lock onto it, and match frequencies exactly. Occasionally, however, environmental circumstances will cause the external or internal clocks to drift. When this happens, the internal clock controller will briefly enter the tracking stage. The green LED will flash momentarily until the clock controller is locked onto the reference once again.

If the incoming reference is unstable, the internal clock controller will continuously be in the tracking stage, with the LED flashing green all the time. This condition does not present a problem, rather, it shows that the clock controller is continually attempting to lock onto the signal. If slips are occurring, however, it means that there is a problem with the clock controller or the incoming line.

Free-run (non-tracking)

In free-run mode, the clock controller does not synchronize on any source, it provides its own internal clock to the system. This mode can be used when the CS 1000S, Cabinet system are used as a master clock source for other systems in the network. Free-run mode is undesirable if the CS 1000S,

Cabinet system are intended to be a slave. It can occur, however, when both the primary and secondary clock sources are lost due to hardware faults or when invoked by using software commands.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 731 of 906

Clock controller functions and features

The NTAK10 2MB DTI clock controller functions and features include:

• phase-locking to a reference, generating the 10.24 Mhz system clock, and distributing it to the CPU through the backplane. Up to two references at a time can be accepted.

• providing primary to secondary switchover and auto-recovery

• preventing chatter

• providing error burst detection and correction, holdover, and free running capabilities

• complying with 2.0 Mb CCITT specifications

• communicating with software

• filtering jitter

• making use of an algorithm to aid in detecting crystal aging and to qualify clocking information

Reference switchover

Switchover may occur in the case of reference degradation or reference failure. When performance of the reference degrades to a point where the system clock is no longer allowed to follow the timing signal, then the reference will be said to be out of specification. If the reference being used is out of specification and the other reference is still within specification, an automatic switchover is initiated without software intervention. If both references are out of specification, the clock controller provides holdover.

Autorecovery and chatter

If the software command “track to primary” is given, the clock controller tracks to the primary reference and continuously monitors the quality of both primary and secondary references. If the primary becomes out of specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to secondary provided that it is within specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors both references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that recovers first. If the secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the


Page 732 of 906

NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card secondary, but switches over to the primary whenever the primary recovers.

If the primary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the primary.

If the software command “track to secondary” is given, the clock controller tracks to the secondary reference and continuously monitors the quality of both primary and secondary references. If the secondary becomes out of specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to primary provided that it is within specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors both references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that recovers first. If the primary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the primary, but switches over to the secondary whenever the secondary recovers. If the secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the secondary.

A time-out mechanism prevents chatter due to repeated automatic switching between primary and secondary reference sources.

Reference clock selection through software

The 2MB DTI card has the necessary hardware for routing its reference to the appropriate line on the backplane.

Software is responsible for the distribution of the secondary references and ensures that no contention is present on the REFCLK1 backplane line.

Software designates the 2MB DTI card as a primary reference source to the clock controller. The secondary reference is obtained from another 2 Mbps

DTI card, which is designated by a craft person. No other clocks originating from other 2MB DTI packs are used.

The clock controller provides an external timing interface and is capable of accepting two signals as timing references. In this case, an external reference refers to an auxiliary timing source which is bridged from a traffic carrying signal. This is not intended to be a dedicated non-traffic bearing timing signal.

The clock controller uses either the two external/auxiliary references or the

2MB DTI references.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 733 of 906

Reference clock interface

The recovered clock derived from the facility is available on the MDF connector. The signals at these connectors conform to the electrical characteristics of the EIA RS-422 standard.

Switch settings

Various 2MB DTI switch options exist on the NTAK10. These are shown in

Table 236.

Table 236

2 MB DTI switch options

Switch

S1-1

S1-2

S2-1

S2-2

S3-1

S3-2

Off

(Switch Open)

—

CC Enabled

120 ohms

75 ohms non-French Firmware

—

On

(Switch Closed)

—

CC Disabled

75 ohms

120 ohms

French Firmware

—

Note: The ON position for all the switches is toward the bottom of the card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board next to the bottom left corner of each individual switch.


Page 734 of 906


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

744

Page 735 of 906

NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735



Introduction

Digital trunking requires synchronized clocking so that a shift in one clock source results in an equivalent shift in all parts of the network.

Synchronization is accomplished with an NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard in each MG 1000S that contains a digital trunk card.

The NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard mounts directly on the following cards:

• NTAK09 1.5Mb DTI/PRI

• NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI

• NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI

• NTBK22 MISP

• NT6D70 SILC

• NT6D71 UILC


Page 736 of 906

NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard

Note: The card is restricted to slots 1 through 3 in EMC- type cabinets

(such as NAK11Dx and NTAK11Fx cabinets). It will not work in slots 4 through 10 in these cabinets.

The NTAK20 clock controller card can support 1.5 Mb, 2.0 Mb, and 2.56 Mb clock recovery rates.

IMPORTANT!


If an IP Expansion multi-cabinet system is equipped with digital trunk cards, it is mandatory that at least one trunk card is placed in the Main cabinet.

Note: Clocking slips can occur between MG 1000S systems that are clocked from different COs, if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality.

The clock controller circuitry synchronizes the system to an external reference clock and generates and distributes the clock to the system. The system can function either as a slave to an external clock or as a clocking master. The NTAK20AD version of the clock controller meets the AT&T

Stratum 3 and Bell Canada Node Category D specifications. The

NTAK20BD version meets CCITT Stratum 4 specifications.

The NTAK20 card performs the following functions:

• phase lock to a reference, generation of the 10.24 Mhz system clock, and distribution of the clock to the CPU through the backplane

• accept one primary and one secondary reference

• primary-to-secondary switchover and auto-recovery

• chatter prevention due to repeated switching

• error-burst detection and correction, holdover, and free running capabilities

• communication with software

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 737 of 906

• jitter filtering

• use of an algorithm to detect crystal aging and qualify clocking information

Clocking modes

The clock controller can operate in one of two modes: tracking or non-tracking (also known as free-run).

Tracking mode

In tracking mode, one or more DTI/PRI cards supply a clock reference to the

NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard. When operating in tracking mode, one DTI/PRI card is defined as the Primary Reference Source (PREF) for clock synchronization. The other DTI/PRI card is defined as the Secondary

Reference Source (SREF). PREF and SREF are defined in LD 73.


• tracking a reference

• locking on to a reference

When tracking a reference, the clock controller uses an algorithm to match its frequency to the frequency of the incoming clock. When the frequencies are almost matched, the clock controller locks on to the reference. The clock controller makes small adjustments to its own frequency until both the incoming and system frequencies correspond.

If the incoming clock reference is stable, the internal clock controller tracks it, locks on to it, and matches frequencies exactly. Occasionally, environmental circumstances cause the external or internal clocks to vary.

When this happens, the internal clock controller briefly enters the tracking stage. The green LED flashes until the clock controller is locked on to the reference again.

If the incoming reference is unstable, the internal clock controller continuously tracks, and the LED continuously flashes green. This condition does not present a problem. It shows that the clock controller is continually attempting to lock onto the signal. If slips occur, there is a problem with the clock controller or the incoming line.


Page 738 of 906


Free-run (non-tracking)

In free-run mode, the clock controller does not synchronize on any outside source. Instead, it provides its own internal clock to the system. This mode can be used when the system acts as a master clock source for other systems in the network. Free-run mode is undesirable if the system is intended to be a slave to an external network clock. Free-run mode can occur when both the primary and secondary clock sources are lost due to hardware faults or invoked using software commands.


Faceplate LEDs

Each motherboard has five DTI/PRI LEDs and one clock controller LED. The clock controller LED is dual-color (red and green). The clock controller LED

states are described in Table 237.

Table 237

Faceplate LEDs

State

On (Red)

On (Green)

Flashing

(Green)

Off

Definition

NTAK20 is equipped and disabled.

NTAK20 is equipped, enabled, and is either locked to a reference or is in free run mode.

NTAK20 is equipped and is attempting to lock (tracking mode) to a reference. If the LED flashes continuously over an extended period of time, check the CC STAT in LD 60.

If the CC is tracking this may be an acceptable state.

Check for slips and related clock controller error conditions. If none exist, then this state is acceptable, and the flashing is identifying jitter on the reference.

NTAK20 is not equipped.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 739 of 906


The main functional blocks of the NTAK20 architecture include:

• phase difference detector circuit

• digital Phase Locked Loop (PLL)

• clock detection circuit

• digital-to-analog converter

• CPU MUX bus interface

• signal conditioning drivers and buffers

• sanity timer

• microprocessor

• CPU interface

• external timing interface

Phase difference detector circuit

This circuit, under firmware control, enables a phase difference measurement to be taken between the reference entering the PLL and the system clock.

The phase difference is used for making frequency measurements and evaluating input jitter and PLL performance.

Digital phase lock loops

The main digital PLL enables the clock controller to provide a system clock to the CPU. This clock is both phase and frequency locked to a known incoming reference.

The hardware has a locking range of + 4.6 ppm for Stratum 3 and + 50 ppm for Stratum 4 (CCITT).

A second PLL on the clock controller provides the means for monitoring another reference. Note that the error signal of this PLL is routed to the phase difference detector circuit so the microprocessor can process it.


Page 740 of 906


System clock specification and characteristics

Since the accuracy requirements for CCITT and EIA Stratum 3 are different, it is necessary to have two TCVCXOs which feature different values of

frequency tuning sensitivity. See Table 238.

Table 238

System clock specification and characteristics

Specifications

Base Frequency

Accuracy

Operating Temperature

Drift Rate (Aging)

Tuning Range (minimum)

Input Voltage Range

CCITT

20.48 MHz

+ 3 ppm

0 to 70 C + 1 ppm

+ 1 ppm per year

+ 60 ppm min.

+ 90 ppm max.

0 to 10 volts, 5V center

EIA

20.48 MHz

+ 1 ppm

0 to 70 C + 1 ppm

+ 4 ppm in 20 years

+ 10 ppm min.

+ 15 ppm max.

0 to 10 volts, 5V center

EIA/CCITT compliance

The clock controller complies with 1.5 Mb EIA Stratum 3ND, 2.0 Mb CCITT or 2.56 Mb basic rate. The differences between these requirements mainly affect PLL pull in range. Stratum 4 conforms to international markets

(2.0 Mb) while Stratum 3 conforms to North American markets (1.5 Mb).

Monitoring references

The primary and secondary synchronization references are continuously monitored in order to provide autorecovery.


Switchover occurs in the case of reference degradation or loss of signal.

When performance of the reference degrades to a point where the system clock is no longer allowed to follow the timing signal, then the reference is out of specification. If the reference is out of specification and the other reference is still within specification, an automatic switchover is initiated

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 741 of 906

without software intervention. If both references are out of specification, the clock controller provides holdover.


If the command “track to primary” is given, the clock controller tracks to the primary reference and continuously monitors the quality of both primary and secondary references. If the primary goes out of specification, the clock controller will automatically “track to secondary” if the secondary is within specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors both references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that recovers first. If the secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the secondary, then switches over to the primary when the primary recovers. If the primary recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the primary and continues to do so even if the secondary recovers.

If the command “track to secondary” is given, the clock controller tracks to the secondary reference and continuously monitors the quality of both primary and secondary references. If the secondary goes out of specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to primary provided that is within specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors both references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that recovers first. If the primary recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the primary, but switches over to the secondary when the secondary recovers. If the secondary recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the secondary even if the primary recovers.

To prevent chatter due to repeated automatic switching between primary and secondary reference sources, a time-out mechanism of at least 10 seconds is implemented.

Digital to analog converter

The Digital to Analog Converter (DAC) enables the microprocessor to track, hold, and modify the error signal generated in the digital PLL.

The firmware uses the available memory on the clock controller to provide error-burst detection and correction. Temporary holdover occurs in the momentary absence of the reference clock.


Page 742 of 906


Holdover and free-run

In the temporary absence of a synchronization reference signal, or when sudden changes occur on the incoming reference due to error bursts, the clock controller provides a stable holdover. Free-run mode is initiated when the clock controller has no record of the quality of the incoming reference clock.

If the command “free run” is given, the clock controller enters the free-run mode and remains there until a new command is received. Free-run automatically initiates after the clock controller has been enabled.

CPU-MUX bus interface

A parallel I/O port on the clock controller provides a communication channel between the clock controller and the CPU.

Signal conditioning

Drivers and buffers are provided for all outgoing and incoming lines.

Sanity timer

The sanity timer resets the microprocessor in the event of system hang-up.

Microprocessor

The microprocessor does the following:

• communicates with software

• monitors two references

• provides a self-test during initialization

• minimizes the propagation of impairments on the system clock due to errors on the primary or secondary reference clocks

Reference Clock Selection

The DTI/PRI card routes its reference to the appropriate line on the backplane. The clock controller distributes the primary and secondary references and ensures that no contention is present on the REFCLK1

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 743 of 906

backplane line. It designates the DTI/PRI motherboard as a primary reference source. The secondary reference is obtained from another DTI/PRI card, which is designated by a technician. No other clock sources are used.

External timing interface

The clock controller provides an external timing interface and accepts two signals as timing references. An external reference is an auxiliary timing clock which is bridged from a traffic carrying signal and is not intended to be a dedicated non-traffic-bearing timing signal. The clock controller uses either the external/auxiliary references or the DTI/PRI references.

Hardware integrity and regulatory environment

The clock controller complies with the following hardware integrity and regulatory specifications:

Item

EMI

ESD

Temperature

Humidity

Vibration/Shock

Specification

FCC part 15 sub- part J

CSA C108.8

CISPR publication 22

IEC 801-2

IEC 68-2-1

IEC 68-2-2

IEC 68-2-14

IEC 68-2-3

IEC 68-2-6

IEC 68-2-7

IEC 68-2-29

IEC 68-2-31

IEC 68-2-32


Page 744 of 906


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

762

Page 745 of 906

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745



Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752

Introduction

The NTAK79 2.0 Mb Primary Rate Interface (PRI) card provides a 2.0 Mb interface and an onboard D-channel handler (DCH). The NTAK79 card also includes an onboard clock controller (equivalent to the NTAK20

Clock Controller) that can be manually switched into or out of service.

The NTAK79 card does not support the NTBK51 downloadable D-channel handler daughterboard.

You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the MG 1000S. The card is not supported in the MG 1000S Expansion.

Note: Up to three four trunk cards are supported in each MG 1000S.


Page 746 of 906

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card

IMPORTANT!


Note: Clocking slips can occur between MG 1000S systems that are clocked from different Central Offices (COs) if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality.


The NTAK79 uses a standard 9.5" by 12.5" multi-layer printed circuit board.

The faceplate is 7/8” wide. The NTAK79 circuit card has a total of seven faceplate LEDs. Five of the LEDs are directly associated with the operation of the Primary Rate interface (PRI). The remaining two LEDs are associated with the on-board Clock Controller and the on-board D-channel interface

(DCHI). The LEDs are described in Table 239.

Table 239

NTAK79 LEDs (Part 1 of 3)

LED

OOS

ACT

State

On (Red)

Off

On (Green)

Off

Definition

The NTAK79 2 MB PRI circuit card is disabled or out-of-service.

The NTAK79 2 MB PRI is not in a disabled state.

The NTAK79 2 MB PRI circuit card is in an active state.

The NTAK79 2 MB PRI is in a disabled state. The

OOS LED will be red.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 747 of 906

Table 239


LED

RED

YEL

LBK

CC

State

On (Red)

Off

On (Yellow)

Off

On (Green)

Off

On (Red)

On (Green)

Flashing (Green)

Definition

A red alarm state has been detected. This represents a local alarm state of:

Loss of Carrier (LOS)

Loss of Frame (LFAS), or

Loss of CRC Multiframe (LMAS).

No red (local) alarm.

A yellow alarm state has been detected. This represents a remote alarm indication from the far end. The alarm can be either Alarm Indication (AIS) or Remote Alarm (RAI).

No yellow (remote) alarm.

2 MB PRI is in loop-back mode.

2 MB PRI is not in loop-back mode.

The clock controller is switched on and has been disabled by the software.

The clock controller is switched on and is either locked to a reference or in free run mode.

The clock controller is switched on and attempting to lock on to a reference (tracking mode). If the LED flashes continuously over an extended period of time, check the CC STAT in LD 60. If the CC is tracking this can be an acceptable state. Check for slips and related clock controller error conditions. If none exist, then this state is acceptable, and the flashing is identifying jitter on the reference.


Page 748 of 906


Table 239


LED

DCH

State

On (Red)

On (Green)

Off

Definition

DCH is switched on and disabled.

DCH is switched on and enabled, but not necessarily established.

DCH is switched off.

NTAK79 switches

The NTAK79 card incorporates four on-board dip switches. The tables that follow provide information on the various settings and related functions of these switches.

Note: The ON position for all the switches is towards the bottom of the card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board adjacent to the bottom left corner of each individual switch.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Figure 165

NTAK79 card with switch locations

Faceplate

LEDs


Page 749 of 906

NTAK79

Switch 3

1 2

Switch 1

1 2

Jack

Switch 2 Switch 4

1 2 1 2

553-7869.EPS


Page 750 of 906


Switch SW1 – DCHI Configuration

This switch enables/disables the on-board DCHI and sets the operating mode of the DCHI. DPNSS1 mode is not supported at this time. For all other countries that do not use DPNSS, use Q.931 mode.

Table 240

Switch SW1

Switch

SW 1-1

SW 1-2

Down (On)

enable DCHI

DPNSS1/DASS2

Up (Off)

disable DCHI

Q.931

Switch SW2 – Carrier Impedance Configuration

This switch sets the carrier impedance to either 120 ohms or 75 ohms.

Twisted pair cable is usually associated with 120 ohms. Coaxial cable is usually associated with the 75 ohms setting.

Table 241

Switch SW2

Cable Type

75 ohms

120 ohms

SW 2-1

Up (Off)

Down (On)

SW 2-2

Down (On)

Up (Off)

Switch SW3 – Clock Controller Configuration

This switch enables/disables (H/W) the on-board Clock Controller. Disable the SW 3-2 if the on-board clock controller is not in use.

Table 242

Switch SW3

Switch

SW 3-1

SW 3-2

Down (On)

—

Disabled

Up (Off)

—

Enabled

Note

Spare

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 751 of 906

Switch SW4 – Carrier Shield Grounding

This switch enables for the selective grounding of the Tx / Rx pairs of the carrier cable. Closing the switch (down position) applies Frame Ground

(FGND) to the coaxial carrier cable shield, creating a 75 ohms unbalanced configuration. This applies only to the NTBK05CA cable.

Table 243

Switch SW4

Switch

SW 4-1

SW 4-2

Down (On)

Rx – FGND

Tx – FGND

Up (Off)

Rx – OPEN

Tx – OPEN

Note: The usual method is to ground the outer conductor of the receive coaxial signal.


The NTAK79 obtains its power from the backplane, drawing maximums of

2 A on +5 V, 50 mA on +12 V and 50 mA on –12 V.

Environment

The NTAK79 meets all applicable Nortel Network’s operating specifications.


The NTAK79 card provides the following features and functions:

• recovery of the 2.048 kbps data by the CEPT receiver, at signal levels which have been attenuated by up 10 dB

• control of CEPT line density using HDB3 which provides 64 kbps clear channel

• performance monitoring of the receive carrier by means of Bipolar

Violations (BPV), Slips, CRC-4 (CRC), and Frame Bit Errors (FBER)


Page 752 of 906


• monitoring of receive carrier alarms including AIS, LOS, and RAI

• transmission of remote alarm when instructed

• slip-buffering receive messages

• supporting National and International bits in time slot 0

• on-board clock controller

• onboard D-channel interface

• 32 software-selectable Tx & Rx Pad values

• conversion of PCM commanding Laws (A-A, u-u, A-u, u-A)


Architecture

The main functional blocks of the NTAK79 architecture include:


• A07 signaling interface

• digital pad


• CEPT transceiver

• SLIP control

• D-channel support interface

• 8031 microcontroller

• Card-LAN / echo / test port interface


The NTAK79 interfaces to one DS-30X bus which contains 32 byte-interleaved timeslots operating at 2.56 Mb. Each timeslot contains

10 bits in A10 message format; eight are assigned to voice/data (64 kbps), one to signaling (8 kbps), and one is a data valid bit (8 kbps).

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 753 of 906

The incoming serial bit stream is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes to be directed to padding control.

The signaling bits are extracted and inserted by the A07 signaling interface circuitry. The DS-30X timeslot number is mapped to the PCM-30 channel number. Timeslots 0 and 16 are currently unused for PCM.

Digital PAD

Software selects A-Law or Mu-Law and one of 32 possible PAD values for each channel. These values are provided in a PROM through which the data is routed. The idle code for A-Law is 54H and for Mu-Law is 7FH. The unequipped code is FFH for both A-Law and Mu-Law. As the idle code and unequipped code can be country dependent, the software instructs the

NTAK79 to use different codes for each direction. The 32 digital pads

available are listed in Table 244. The values shown are attenuation levels;

1.0 dB is 1 dB of loss and –1.0 dB is 1 dB of gain.

Table 244

Digital pad values and offset allocations (Part 1 of 2)

PAD SET 0 PAD SET 1

Offset

5

6

3

4

0

1

2

7

8

9

PAD

0.6 dB

1.0 dB

2.0 dB

3.0 dB

4.0 dB

5.0 dB

6.1 dB

7.0 dB

8.0 dB

9.0 dB

Offset

5

6

3

4

0

1

2

7

8

9

PAD

0.0 dB

–1.0 dB

–2.0 dB

–3.0 dB

–4.0 dB

–5.0 dB

–6.0 dB

–7.0 dB

–8.0 dB

–9.0 dB


Page 754 of 906


Table 244

Digital pad values and offset allocations (Part 2 of 2)

PAD SET 0

Offset

13

14

15

10

11

12

PAD

10.0 dB

11.0 dB

12.0 dB

13.0 dB

14.0 dB spare

Offset

13

14

15

10

11

12

PAD SET 1

PAD

–10.0 dB spare spare spare

Idle Code

Unassigned Code


The signaling interface consists of the A07 DS-30X signaling controller. This interface provides an 8 Kbps signaling link through the DS-30X timeslot zero data bit zero. Messages are 3 bytes in length.


The E1 interface connection to the external digital carrier is provided by the line interface chip. This chip provides accurate pulse shaping to meet the

CCITT pulse mask requirements. It provides clock recovery functions on the receive side as well as tolerance to jitter and wander in the received bit stream.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 755 of 906

Impedance matching

The line interface provides for the use of either 75 ohms coaxial or 120 ohms twisted pair cable. The impedance is selected by a switch, as shown in

Table 245.

Table 245

Impedance matching switch selection

Cable

75 ohms

120 ohms

On

S2

S1

Off

S1

S2

Note: The ON position for all the switches is towards the bottom of the card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board next to the bottom left corner of each individual switch.

Carrier grounding

The NTAK79 card provides the capability of selectively grounding the shield of the Tx and/or Rx pairs of the carrier. Closing (down) the on-board switch applies FGND to the appropriate carrier cable shield. The switch settings are

shown in Table 246.

Table 246

Carrier shield grounding switch settings

Switch

S4-1

S4-2

Carrier Pair

Rx shield

Tx shield

On

Open

Open

Off

GND

GND

Receiver functions

The receiver extracts data and clock from an AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion) coded signal and outputs clock and synchronized data. The receiver is sensitive to signals over the entire range of cable lengths and requires no equalization. The clock and data recovery meets or exceeds the jitter specifications of the CCITT recommendation G.823, and the jitter attenuation


Page 756 of 906

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card requirements of the CCITT recommendation G.742. This provides jitter attenuation increasing from 0 dB to 60 dB over the frequency range from about 6 Hz to 6 KHz.

Transmitter functions

The transmitter takes the binary (dual unipolar) data from the PCM transceiver and produces bipolar pulses which conform to the CCITT recommendation G.703 pulse shape.

Loopbacks

The remote loopback function causes the device to transmit the same data that it receives, using the jitter attenuated receive clock. The data is also available at the receive data outputs. Local loopback causes the transmit data and clock to appear at the receive clock and data outputs. This data is also transmitted on the line unless transmit AIS is selected.

CEPT transceiver

The transmitter and receiver functions are used for synchronization, channel, and signal extraction. The functions meet applicable specifications of the

CCITT recommendation G.703 and G.732.

The transceiver provides transmit framing based on the 2.048 MHz clock derived from the DS-30X system clock and 1 KHz framing pulse.

Slip control

Slip control provides organized recovery of PCM when the clock recovered from the external facility is at a different frequency than the local clock.

D-channel support interface

The D-channel support interface is a 64 Kbps, full-duplex serial bit stream configured as a DCE device. The data signals include:

• Receive data output

• transmit data input

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 757 of 906

• receive clock output

• transmit clock output

The receive and transmit clocks have slightly different bit rates from each other, as determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks.

The NTAK79 has an onboard D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI). It is the equivalent to a single port of an NTAK02 SDI/DCH pack. This enables for a completely operational ISDN PRA link with clock synchronization and

D-channel on a single circuit card.

The onboard D-channel has one status LED on the NTAK79 faceplate to

indicate enabled/disabled states. See Table 239 on page 746 .

The on-board DCHI can be operated in two separate modes as defined by an on-board dip switch. It can operate in a standard DCHI mode common to most ISDN standard countries. The U.K. specific mode that uses the DPNSS format is not supported at this time.

Table 247

Settings for the DCHI dip switch (SW1)

Switch

S1-1

S1-2

Function

En/Dis

F/W Mode

On

Enabled

DPNSS (not supported at this time)

Off

Disabled

DCHI

DCHI special applications connection

The connection between the PRI2 and the on-board D-channel Handler

Interface card is also available at the MDF connector. Connections are made to these pins for normal on-board DCHI operation. They can also be used for future or special applications.

The signals conform to the EIA RS-422 standard.


Page 758 of 906


Card-LAN interface

A Dual Port UART handles the functions of the serial ports for the Card-LAN serial link and the echo canceller/test port interface. The echo/test interface is an asynchronous 4800 bps 8-bit connected to port A of the UART. The

Card-LAN interface is an asynchronous 19.2 kbps 9 bit start/stop connected to port B of the UART.

The connection to the echo canceler/test port is available at the backplane/

MDF connector. The signals at this port conform to the EIA RS-232C standard.


The clock controller circuitry on the NTAK79 is identical to that of the

NTAK20 clock controller.

Though several DTI/PRI packs can exist in one system, only one clock controller may be activated. All other DTI/PRI clock controllers must be switched off.

Clocking modes

The clock controller can operate in one of two modes:

• tracking

• non-tracking (also known as free-run)

Tracking mode


• tracking a reference, and

• locked onto a reference.

When tracking a reference, the clock controller uses an algorithm to match its frequency to the frequency of the incoming clock. When the frequencies are very near to being matched, the clock controller is locked onto the reference.

The clock controller will make small adjustments to its own frequency until both the incoming and system frequencies correspond.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 759 of 906

If the incoming clock reference is stable, the internal clock controller will track it, lock onto it, and match frequencies exactly. Occasionally, however, environmental circumstances will cause the external or internal clocks to drift. When this happens, the internal clock controller will briefly enter the tracking stage. The green LED will flash momentarily until the clock controller is locked onto the reference once again.

If the incoming reference is unstable, the internal clock controller will continuously be in the tracking stage, with the LED flashing green all the time. This condition does not present a problem, rather, it shows that the clock controller is continually attempting to lock onto the signal. If slips are occurring, however, it means that there is a problem with the clock controller or the incoming line.

Free-run (non-tracking)

In free-run mode, the clock controller does not synchronize on any source, it provides its own internal clock to the system. This mode can be used when the CS 1000S, CS 1000M Cabinet, and Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet are used as a master clock source for other systems in the network. Free-run mode is undesirable if the CS 1000S, CS 1000M Cabinet, and Meridian 1 PBX 11C

Cabinet are intended to be a slave. It can occur, however, when both the primary and secondary clock sources are lost due to hardware faults or when invoked by using software commands.

Clock controller functions and features

The NTAK79 clock controller functions and features include:

• phase lock to a reference, generate the 10.24 MHz system clock, and distribute it to the CPU through the backplane. Up to two references at a time are accepted

• primary to secondary switchover (auto-recovery is provided)

• prevent chatter

• error burst detection and correction, holdover, and free running capabilities

• compliance with 2.0Mb CCITT specifications

• software communication


Page 760 of 906


• jitter filtering

• use of an algorithm to detect crystal aging and to qualify clocking information


Switchover may occur in the case of reference degradation or reference failure. When performance of the reference degrades to a point where the system clock is no longer allowed to follow the timing signal, then the reference will be said to be out of specification. If the reference being used is out of specification and the other reference is still within specification, an automatic switchover is initiated without software intervention. If both references are out of specification, the clock controller provides holdover.


If the software command “track to primary” is given, the clock controller tracks to the primary reference and continuously monitors the quality of both primary and secondary references. If the primary becomes out of specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to secondary provided that it is within specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors both references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that recovers first. If the secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the secondary, but switches over to the primary when the primary recovers. If the primary recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the primary.

If the software command “track to secondary” is given, the clock controller tracks to the secondary reference and continuously monitors the quality of both primary and secondary references. If the secondary becomes out of specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to primary provided that it is within specifications. On failure (both out of spec.), the clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors both references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that recovers first. If the primary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the primary, but switches over to the secondary whenever the secondary recovers. If the secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the secondary.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 761 of 906

A time-out mechanism prevents chatter due to repeated automatic switching between primary and secondary reference sources.

Holdover and free-run

In the temporary absence of a synchronization reference signal, or when sudden changes occur on the incoming reference due to error bursts, the clock controller provides a stable holdover. The free-run mode is initiated when the clock controller has no record of the quality of the incoming reference clock.

If the software command “free run” is given, the clock controller enters the free-run mode and remains there until a new command is received. Note that the free-run mode of operation is automatically initiated after the clock controller is enabled.

Reference clock selection through software

The NTAK79 has the necessary hardware for routing its reference to the appropriate line on the backplane.

The software is responsible for the distribution of the secondary references and ensures that no contention is present on the REFCLK1 backplane line.

The software designates the NTAK79 as the primary reference source to the clock controller. The secondary reference is obtained from another NTAK79 card, which is designated by a technician. No other clocks originating from other NTAK79 circuit cards are used.

The clock controller provides an external timing interface and is capable of accepting two signals as timing references. In this case, an external reference refers to an auxiliary timing source which is bridged from a traffic carrying signal. This is not intended to be a dedicated non-traffic bearing timing signal.

The clock controller uses either the two external/auxiliary references or the

NTAK79 references.


Page 762 of 906


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

768

Page 763 of 906

NTAK93 D-channel Handler

Interface daughterboard

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763



Introduction

The NTAK93 provides the D-channel handler interfaces required by the

ISDN PRI trunk.

The DCHI performs D-channel Layer 2 message processing and transfers

Layer 3 signaling information between two adjacent network switches. It is mounted on the NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card or the NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card (installed in the MG 1000S) using standoff reference pins and connectors. The NTAK93 daughterboard, when mounted on the NTBK50

PRI digital trunk card, is addressed in the same slot as the NTBK50. The

NTAK93 daughterboard can use SDI I/O addresses 1 to 15 and port 1.

The NTAK93 provides the following features and functions:

• D-channel interface or DPNSS interface

• Special features included for LAPD implementation at DCH:


Page 764 of 906

NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard

— system parameters are service changeable (system parameters are downloaded from software)

— incoming Layer 3 message validation procedures are implemented in the D-PORT firmware

— supported message units and information elements can be service changed

— translation of the CCITT message types information elements into a proprietary coding scheme for faster CPU operation

— convention of IA5-encoded digits to BCD-encoded digits for incoming layer 3 messages for faster CPU operation

— self-test

— loopback


The DCH function can be installed in the main and IP expansion cabinets.

The DTI/PRI card which carries a DCH daughterboard resides in the main and IP expansion cabinets.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 765 of 906

Faceplate LEDs

NTAK09 1.5 Mb PRI and NTBK50 2.0 MB PRI cards

LEDs are located on the faceplate of the NTAK09 and NTBK50 cards. The

DCHI LED is dual-color (red and green). The LEDs are described in

Table 248.

Table 248

Faceplate LEDs

State

On (Red)

On (Green)

Off

Definition

NTAK93 is equipped and disabled.

NTAK93 is equipped and enabled, but not necessarily established.

NTAK93 is not equipped.


Power consumption is +5 V at 750 mA; +12 V at 5 mA; and –12 V at 5 mA.


The main functional blocks of the NTAK93 architecture include the following.

Microprocessors

One microprocessor does the following:

• handles data transfer between each pair of serial ports and software

• reports the status of each port

• takes commands from software to control the activities of the ports

The microprocessors also handle some D-channel data processing in DCHI mode.


Page 766 of 906


DMA controller

A Z80A-DMA chip controls the data transfer between local RAM memory and communication ports. The DMA channels are only used in the receive direction (from line to SSC), not in the transmit direction.

Random Access Memory (RAM)

A total of 32 KBytes of RAM space for each pair of ports is used as the communication buffer and for firmware data storage.

Read Only Memory (ROM)

A total of 32K bytes of ROM space for each pair of ports is reserved as a code section of the DCH-PORT firmware.

LAPD data link/asynchronous controller

One chip controls each pair of independent communication ports. It performs the functions of serial-to-parallel and parallel-to-serial conversions, error detection, and frame recognition (in HDLC). The parameters of these functions are supplied by the DCH-PORT firmware.

Counter/timer controller

Two chips are used as real-time timers and baud-rate generators for each pair of communication ports.

Software interface circuit

This portion of the circuit handles address/data bus multiplexing, the interchange of data, commands, and status between the on board processors and software. It includes transmit buffer, receive buffer, command register, and status register for each communication channel.

DPNSS/DCHI Port

The mode of operation of the DCH-PORT is controlled by a switch setting on the NTAK09/NTBK50. For DPNSS the switch is ON; for DCHI it is OFF.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 767 of 906

The port will operate at:

Data Rate

Duplex

Clock

Interface

56kbps, 64kbps

Full

Internal / External

RS422

The address of ports is selected by hardwired backplane card address. Port characteristics and LAPD parameters are downloaded from software.

D-Port — SDTI/PRI interface

Below is a brief description of signals. When connected to SDTI/PRI,

DCHI-PORT is considered Data Terminal Equipment (DTE):

• SDA, SDB: Transmit Clock provided by SDTI/PRI

• RTA, RTB: Receive Clock provided by SDTI/PRI

• RR, CS: SPDC ready signal provided by DCHI-PORT

• TR: D-PORT ready signal provided by DCHI-PORT

• RDA, RDB: Incoming serial data bit stream, driven by SDTI/PRI

• SDA, SDB: Transmit serial data bit stream driven by DCHI-PORT


Page 768 of 906


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

772

Page 769 of 906

NTBK22 MISP card

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769



Introduction

The NTBK22 Multi-Purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP) card is a microprocessor-controlled signaling processor that performs Data Link

(Layer 2) and Network (Layer 3) processing associated with ISDN BRI and the OSI protocol.


The MISP occupies one slot in the MG 1000S. It uses one of the network loops to interface with SILCs and UILCs and to provide 32 timeslots for

D-channel signaling and packet data transmission. The other loop address is used to communicate with the Call Server.


Note: When configuring BRI trunks, the MISP (NTBK22) card must be co-located in the same MG 1000S as the SILC (NT6D70) and UILC

(NT6D71) cards the MISP is supporting.


Page 770 of 906

NTBK22 MISP card

Refer to ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Installation and Configuration

(553-3001-218) and ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Features (553-3001-380) for additional information.


Each MISP can support 4 line cards (UILC or SILC or any combination of the two). Each line card supports 8 DSLs, therefore each MISP supports 32

DSLs. Since each DSL uses two B-channels and one D-channel the MISP supports 64 B-channels and 32 D-channels. If the MISP is carrying packet data, it must dedicate one of its D-channels to communicate with the external packet handler. In this case the MISP supports only 31 DSLs.

The main functions of the MISP are:

• communicate with the Call Server CPU to report ISDN BRI status and receive downloaded application software and configuration parameters

• manage Layer 2 and Layer 3 signaling that controls call connection and terminal identification

• control terminal initialization and addressing

• assign B-channels for switched voice and data transmission by communicating with the BRI terminal over the D-channel and allocating to it an idle B-channel with appropriate bearer capabilities

• separate D-channel data from signaling information and route the data to the packet handler

• send call control messages to ISDN BRI terminals over the D-channel

Micro Processing Unit (MPU)

The MPU coordinates and controls data transfer and addressing of the peripheral devices and communicates with the CPU using a message channel on the CPU bus. The tasks that the MPU performs depend on the interrupts it receives. The interrupts are prioritized by the importance of the tasks they control.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NTBK22 MISP card

Page 771 of 906

High-Level Data Link Controller (HDLC)

The HDLC is a format converter that supports up to 32 serial channels that communicate at speeds up to 64 kbps. The HDLC converts messages into the following two message formats:

• a serially transmitted, zero-inserted, CRC protected message that has a starting and an ending flag

• a data structure

CPU to MISP bus interface

Information exchange between the CPU and the MISP is performed with packetized messages transmitted over the CPU bus. This interface has a

16-bit data bus, an 18-bit address bus, and interrupt and read/write control lines.

This interface uses shared Static Random Access Memory (SRAM) as a communication exchange center between the CPU and the MPU. Both the

CPU and the MPU can access this memory over the transmit and receive channels on the bus.

MISP network bus interface

The network bus interface:

• converts bit interleaved serial data received from the network bus into byte interleaved data for transmission over the 32 time slots used by the

HDLC controller

• accepts byte interleaved data transmitted from the HDLC controller and converts it into a bit interleaved data stream for transmission over the network bus


Power consumption is +5V at 2 A; +15V at 50 mA; and -15V at 50 mA.


Page 772 of 906

NTBK22 MISP card

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

784

Page 773 of 906

NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773



Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778

Introduction

The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card provides a 2.0 Mb PRI interface. It supports the NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard and either the NTAK93

D-channel interface or the NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel handler. The

NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard provides identical performance to the on-board NTAK79 DCHI. The NTBK51 DDCH daughterboard provides support for protocols based on the MSDL platform.


Page 774 of 906

NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card


IMPORTANT!




The NTBK50 uses a standard 9.5" by 12.5" multi-layer printed circuit board.

The faceplate is 7/8” wide and contains seven LEDs. See Figure 166 on page 775

.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Figure 166

NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card with daughterboards


Page 775 of 906

Stiffeners

LEDs

DIS

ACT

RED

YEL

LBK

CC

DCH

Bantam

Jacks

RCV

SW1

On

Off

1 2

1 2

SW4

On

Off

1 2

SW2

On

Off

XMT

NTAK20

Clock

Controller

Connector Sockets

NTAK93 or

NTBK51

D-Channel

Interface

553-7872

Standoffs

553-CSE7872


Page 776 of 906


The LEDs are described in Table 249.

Table 249

NTBK50 faceplate LEDs (Part 1 of 2)

LED

OOS

ACT

RED

YEL

LBK

CC

State

On (Red)

Off

On (Green)

Off

On (Red)

Off

On (Yellow)

Off

On (Green)

Off

On (Red)

On (Green)

Definition

The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI circuit card is disabled or out-of-service. Also, the state of the card after power-up, completion of self test, and exiting remote loopback.

The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI is not in a disabled state.

The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI circuit card is in an active state.

The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI is in a disabled state. The OOS

LED is red.

A red alarm state has been detected. This represents a local alarm state of Loss of Carrier (LOS), Loss of Frame

(LFAS), or Loss of CRC Multiframe (LMAS).

No red (local) alarm.

A yellow alarm state has been detected. This represents a remote alarm indication from the far end. The alarm may be either Alarm Indication (AIS) or Remote Alarm

(RAI).

No yellow (remote) alarm.

2.0 Mb PRI is in loop-back mode.

2.0 Mb PRI is not in loop-back mode.

The clock controller is software disabled.

The clock controller is enabled and is either locked to a reference or is in free run mode.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 777 of 906

Table 249

NTBK50 faceplate LEDs (Part 2 of 2)

LED State

Flashing

(Green)

DCH

Off

On (Red)

On (Green)

Off

Definition

NTAK20 is equipped and is attempting to lock (tracking mode) to a reference. If the LED flashes continuously over an extended period of time, check the CC STAT in

LD 60. If the CC is tracking this can be an acceptable state. Check for slips and related clock controller error conditions. If none exist, then this state is acceptable, and the flashing is identifying jitter on the reference.

The clock controller is not equipped.

DCH is disabled.

DCH is enabled, but not necessarily established.

DCH is not equipped.


The NTBK50 obtains its power from the backplane, drawing up to 2 A on +5

V, 35 mA on +15 V and 20 mA on –15 V.

Environment

The NTBK50 meets all applicable Nortel operating specifications.


NTBK50 provides the following features and components:

• recovery of the 2.048 kbps data by the CEPT receiver, at signal levels which have been attenuated by up to 10 dB

• control of CEPT line density using HDB3 which provides 64 kbps clear channel

• performance monitoring of the receive carrier by means of Bipolar

Violations (BPV), Slips, CRC-4 (CRC), and Frame Bit Errors (FBER)


Page 778 of 906


• monitoring of receive carrier alarms including AIS, LOS, and RAI

• transmission of remote alarm when instructed

• slip-buffering receive messages

• support of National and International bits in timeslot 0

• clock controller daughterboard

• D-channel interface daughterboard

• downloadable D-channel handler daughterboard

• 32 software-selectable Tx and Rx Pad values

• conversion of PCM commanding Laws (A-A, u-u, A-u, u-A)


Architecture

The main functional blocks of the NTBK50 architecture are:


• A07 signaling interface

• digital pad


• CEPT transceiver

• SLIP control

• D-channel support interface

• clock controller interface

• Card-LAN / echo / test port interface

• 80C51FA Microcontroller


NTBK50 interfaces to one DS-30X bus which contains 32-byte interleaved timeslots operating at 2.56 Mb. Each timeslot contains 10 bits in A10

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 779 of 906

message format; eight are assigned to voice/data (64 Kbps), one to signaling

(8 Kbps), and one is a data valid bit (8 Kbps).

The incoming serial bit stream is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes to be directed to padding control. The signaling bits are extracted and inserted by the A07 signaling interface circuitry. Timeslots 0 and 16 are currently unused for PCM.

Digital PAD

The software selects A-Law or µ-Law and one of 32 possible PAD values for each channel. These values are provided in a PROM through which the data is routed. The idle code for A-Law is 54H and for µ-Law is 7FH. The unequipped code is FFH for both A-Law and µ-Law.

As the idle code and unequipped code can be country dependent, the software instructs the NTBK50 to use different codes for each direction. The 32 digital

pads available are illustrated in Table 250 on page 779 . The values shown are

attenuation levels (1.0dB is 1 dB of loss and –1.0 dB is 1 dB of gain.

Table 250

Digital Pad - values and offset allocations (Part 1 of 2)

PAD SET 0 PAD SET 1

Offset

5

6

3

4

7

8

0

1

2

PAD

0.6 dB

1.0 dB

2.0 dB

3.0 dB

4.0 dB

5.0 dB

6.1 dB

7.0 dB

8.0 dB

Offset

5

6

3

4

7

8

0

1

2

PAD

0.0 dB

-1.0 dB

-2.0 dB

-3.0 dB

-4.0 dB

-5.0 dB

-6.0 dB

-7.0 dB

-8.0 dB


Page 780 of 906


Table 250

Digital Pad - values and offset allocations (Part 2 of 2)

PAD SET 0

Offset

12

13

14

15

9

10

11

PAD

9.0 dB

10.0 dB

11.0 dB

12.0 dB

13.0 dB

14.0 dB spare

Offset

12

13

14

15

9

10

11

PAD SET 1

PAD

-9.0 dB

-10.0 dB spare spare spare

Idle Code

Unassigned Code


The signaling interface consists of the A07 DS-30X signaling controller. This interface provides an 8 Kbps signaling link via the DS-30X timeslot zero data bit zero. Messages are 3 bytes in length.


For the E1 interface, the connection to the external digital carrier is provided by the line interface chip. This device provides accurate pulse shaping to meet the CCITT pulse mask requirements. It provides clock recovery functions on the receive side, as well as tolerance to jitter and wander in the received bit stream.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 781 of 906

Impedance matching (Switch SW2)

The line interface provides for the use of either 75 ohms coaxial or 120 ohms

twisted pair cable. The impedance is selected by SW2, as shown in Table 251.

Table 251

Impedance matching switch settings

Cable Type

75 ohms

120 ohms

SW 2-1

Down (On)

Up (Off)

Note: The ON position for all the switches is toward the bottom of the card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board next to the bottom left corner of each individual switch.

Carrier grounding

NTBK50 enables the shield of the Tx and/or Rx pairs of the carrier to be selectively grounded. Closing (down position) the on-board switch applies

FGND to the appropriate carrier cable shield. The switch settings are shown

in Table 252.

Table 252

Carrier Shield grounding switch settings

Switch

SW 4 – 1

SW 4 – 2

Down (On)

Rx – FGND

Tx – FGND

Up (Off)

Rx – OPEN

Tx – OPEN


Page 782 of 906


Carrier Shield grounding (Switch SW4)

Table 253 lists the Carrier Shield ground switch settings.

Table 253

Carrier Shield grounding switch settings

Switch

SW 4 – 1

SW 4 – 2

Down (On)

Rx – FGND

Tx – FGND

Up (Off)

Rx – OPEN

Tx – OPEN

Note: The usual method is to ground the outer conductor of the receive coax signal.

Receiver functions

The receiver extracts data and clock from an AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion) coded signal and outputs clock and synchronized data. The receiver is sensitive to signals over the entire range of cable lengths and requires no equalization. The clock and data recovery meets or exceeds the jitter specifications of the CCITT recommendation G.823 and the jitter attenuation requirements of the CCITT recommendation G.742. This provides jitter attenuation increasing from 0 dB to 60 dB over the frequency range from about 6 Hz to 6 KHz.

Transmitter functions

The transmitter takes the binary (dual unipolar) data from the PCM transceiver and produces bipolar pulses. This conforms to CCITT recommendation G.703 pulse shape.

Loopbacks

The remote loopback function causes the far-end device to transmit the same data that it receives, using the jitter attenuated receive clock. The data is additionally available at the far-end receive data outputs. Local loopback causes the transmit data and clock to appear at the near-end clock and receive data outputs. This data is also transmitted on the line unless an Alarm

Indication Signal (AIS) is transmitted instead.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 783 of 906

CEPT transceiver

The transmitter and receiver functions are used for synchronization, channel, and signal extraction. The functions meet applicable specifications of the

CCITT recommendation G.703 and G.732.

The transceiver provides transmit framing based on the 2.048 MHz clock derived from the DS-30X system clock and 1 KHz framing pulse.

Slip control

Slip control provides organized recovery of PCM when the clock recovered from the external facility is at a different frequency with respect to the local clock.

D-channel support interface

The D-channel support interface is a 64 Kbps, full-duplex serial bit stream configured as a DCE device. The data signals include:

• receive data output




The receive and transmit clocks can be of slightly different bit rates from each other as determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks.

The NTBK50 supports a D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI) daughterboard. It is equivalent to a single port of an NTAK02 SDI/DCH card.

The NTBK50 also supports a Downloadable D-Channel Handler interface

(DDCH) daughterboard. The DDCH brings MSDL D-channel capability to the system.

DCHI Configuration for NTAK93 only (SW1)

The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard can be operated in two separate modes defined by an on-board dip switch. It can operate in a standard DCHI mode common to most ISDN standard countries. It can also operate in a DPNSS


Page 784 of 906

NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card mode, which is not supported at this time. The DDCH supports only a single

port which directly interfaces to the PRI motherboard. See Table 254.

Table 254

Settings for the DCHI dip switch (SW1)

Switch

S1-1

S1-2

Function

—

F/W Mode

On

—

DPNSS

Off

—

DCHI

Card-LAN interface

A Dual Port UART handles the functions of the serial ports for the Card-LAN serial link test port interface. The test interface is an asynchronous 4800 bps

8 bit connected to port A of the UART. The card-LAN interface is an asynchronous 19.2 kbps 9 bit start/stop connected to port B of the UART.

The connection to the test port is available at the backplane/MDF connector.

The signals at this port conform to the EIA RS-232C standard.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

790

NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel

Handler daughterboard

Page 785 of 906

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785



Download operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789

Introduction

The NTBK51 daughterboard provides Downloadable D-channel Handler

(DDCH) interfaces based on the Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL). The

DDCH provides a single purpose full-duplex serial port capable of downloading the D-channel application and base software into the card.

The NTBK51 provides the following features and functions:

• ISDN D-channel related protocol

• Selftest

• Loopback

• D-channel loadware including:

— management and maintenance

— LAPD- software for data link layer processing


Page 786 of 906

NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard

— DCH interface

— layer 3 preprocessor

— traffic reporting including link capacity


The NTBK51 daughterboard interfaces with the system CPU and is mounted on either the NTAK09 1.5 DTI/PRI card or the NTBK50 2 Mb PRI digital trunk card.

You can install this card in:

• slots 1 through 9 in the main cabinet or slots 11-19, 21-29, 31-39, or

41-49 in the expansion cabinets

• slots 1 through 4 in the MG 1000S. The card is not supported in the

MG 1000S Expansion

The NTBK51 daughterboard, when installed on the NTAK09 digital trunk card, is addressed in the same slot as the NTAK09.

One NTBK51 daughterboard is required for each PRI link.

LEDs are located on the faceplate of the NTAK09/NTBK50 card. The DCHI

LED is a dual-color (red/green). The LED is described in Table 255.

Table 255

Faceplate LED

State

On (Red)

On (Green)

Off

Definition

NTBK51 is disabled.

NTBK51 is enabled, but not necessarily established.

NTBK51 is not equipped.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 787 of 906


The main functional blocks of the NTBK51 architecture include the following:

• Microprocessors

• Main memory

• Shared memory

• EPROM memory

• Flash EPROM memory

• EEPROM memory

• Serial communication controller

• Sanity timer

• Bus timer

Microprocessors

One microprocessor handles data transfer between each serial interface and software, reports the status of each port and takes commands from the software to control the activities of the ports. A high performance MPU supports the D-channel from the PRI card and other software applications running simultaneously on other ports of the DDCH card.

The microprocessor performs the following functions:

• sanity check and self tests

• message handling between the CS 1000S, CS 1000M Cabinet, and

Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet and the card

• four port serial communication controller handling with Direct Memory

Access (DMA)

• program download from the Small System Controller


Page 788 of 906


Main memory

The main 68EC020 system memory is comprised of 1 Mbyte of SRAM and is accessible in 8 or 16 bits. The software, base code and application reside in main RAM and is downloaded from the software through the shared memory.

Shared memory

The shared memory is the interface between the CPU and the 68EC020 MPU.

This memory is a 16 Kbyte RAM, expandable to 64 kbytes and accessible in

8 or 16 bits.

EPROM memory

The Bootstrap code resides in this 27C1000 EPROM and is executed on power up or reset.

Flash EPROM memory

Flash EPROM provides non-volatile storage for the DDCH loadware which minimizes the impact to sysload. The Flash EPROM provides an increase in system service with a reduced delay after a brown-out, and faster testing of a hardware pack after it is plugged in.

EEPROM memory

The DDCH uses a 1024 bit serial EEPROM for storing the Nortel product code and a revision level. This information can be queried by the software.

Serial communication controller

The serial controller is the Zilog Z16C35 and is referenced as the Integrated

Controller (ISCC). The ISCC includes a flexible Bus Interface Unit (BIU) and four Direct Memory Access (DMA) channels, one for each receive and transmit. The DMA core of the ISCC controls the data transfer between local

RAM and the communication ports.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 789 of 906

Sanity timer

A sanity timer is incorporated on the DDCH to prevent the MPU from getting tied-up as the result of a hardware or software fault. If the MPU encounters a hardware or software fault and enters a continuous loop, the sanity timer enables the DDCH to reset itself.

Bus timer

The bus timer presents an error signal to the MPU if an attempt to access a device did not receive acknowledgment within the bus time-out period of

120 ms.

Download operation

Downloading is performed in either of two modes: background mode or maintenance mode. Before a download takes place, a D-channel link must be configured. The following situations lead to software downloading:

• during initialization when new software is installed

• when enabling the card or application

• during card reset (due to loss of software or corruption)

• during a background audit

System initialization

When new base or application software is installed on a CS 1000S,

CS 1000M Cabinet, and Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet, the download decision is made during system initialization. The actual MSDL base software download is done in background mode and can take several minutes to complete, depending on switch traffic and the size of the MSDL base software.

Card enabling or application enabling

If a normal download enable command is executed, the MSDL base code and application is conditionally downloaded to the DDCH card. This conditional


Page 790 of 906

NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard download depends on the result of the check made by the CPU on the MSDL base code and application software.

If a forced download enable command is executed in LD 96, the MSDL base code and application are forced down to the DDCH card, even if the base and application software is already resident on the DDCH card. In order to complete a forced download, the following conditions must be met:

• the DDCH card must be enabled

• the D-channel port must be disabled

Card reset

After a card reset, the MSDL base code and the D-channel application software are validated by the CPU. The software is stored in flash EPROM on the DDCH card and does not have to be downloaded. But if the software is missing due to new installation, corruption, or loadware version mismatch, the CPU automatically downloads the base/application into the DDCH card.

Background audit

If a background audit of the card and associated applications finds that a download is required, the card is queued in the PSDL tree. Downloading is performed in background mode based on the entries in the PSDL tree.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

810

Page 791 of 906

NTCK16 Generic Central Office

Trunk cards

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791



Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794



Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807

Introduction

The NTCK16 generic Central Office trunk cards support up to eight analog

Central Office trunks. They can be installed in any IPE slot.

The cards are available with or without the Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) feature. The cards are also available in numerous countries. Country specific information is provided in this chapter.


Page 792 of 906

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards

The cards are identified by a two-letter suffix to the product code called the vintage. The card vintage is based on whether PPM is equipped or not, and the individual countries where the card is being installed.

The cards listed below are minimum vintage required to support the following countries:

• NTCK16AA generic Central Office trunk card with PPM

— Ireland

• NTCK16BC generic Central Office trunk card without PPM.

— Brazil

— Ireland

— Mexico

— Tortolla

— Singapore

• NTCK16AD generic Central Office trunk card with PPM

— Turkey

• NTCK16BD generic Central Office trunk card without PPM.

— Argentina

— Turkey

— Brazil

— Chile

— Indonesia

— Korea

— Venezuela

Throughout this chapter, cards with PPM will be identified by the vintage

AX. Cards without PPM will be referenced by the vintage BX.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 793 of 906


The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards have eight units. Each unit connects to the shelf backplane through an 80-pin connector. The backplane is cabled to the I/O panel which is then cabled to the cross-connect terminal. At the cross-connect terminal, each unit connects to external apparatus by Tip and Ring leads.

Switch settings

There are no option switches on the NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic

Central Office trunk cards. All settings are configured in software.

Self-test

When the NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX trunk cards are installed and power is applied to them, a self-test is performed on each card. The red LED on the faceplate flashes three times, then remains continuously lit until the card is enabled in software. If the self-test fails, the LED remains lit.


The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards support up to eight analog Central Office trunks. They can be installed in any

IPE slot.

Both cards are exactly the same except for the Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) feature. The NTCK16AX card supports internal 12/16 kHz PPM but the

NTCK16BX card does not.

Common features

The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards:

• support the North American loss plan

• support loop start signalling

• support busy tone detection and supervision on a per unit basis.

• support battery reversal detection


Page 794 of 906


• provide 4 dB dynamic attenuation pads on a per call basis

• allow individual units or the entire board to be disabled by software

• provide software selectable A-law or µ-law companding

• indicate self-test status during an automatic or manual self-test

• provide card-identification for auto configuration, and for determining the serial number and firmware level of the card

• convert transmission signals from analog-to-digital and from digital-to-analog

• provide termination and trans-hybrid balance impedance to match

600

Ω.

Operation

Each NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk card supports the following:

• Loop start operation

• Battery reversal detection

• Busy tone detection and supervision

• Loss Switching

• Trunk-to-Trunk connections

• Call Disconnect

In addition, the NTCK16AX circuit card supports internal 12/16 kHz PPM detection.

Loop start operation

Loop start operation is configured in software and is implemented in the card through software download messages.

Idle state

In the idle state, the ringing detector is connected across the tip and ring wires, providing a high impedance loop toward the Central Office.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 795 of 906

Call placed by Central Office

The Central Office initiates a call by applying ringing between the tip and ring wires. If the call is answered, the ringing detector on the trunk card is switched out and a low resistance dc loop is placed between the tip and ring leads.

On trunks configured for battery supervision, the battery detector records the polarity of the tip and ring wires and sends an answer acknowledge signal to software.

Call placed by CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1

To initiate a call, the CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 switches out the ringing detector and places a low resistance loop across the tip and ring leads.

On trunks configured for battery supervision, the trunk card sends a seize acknowledge signal to software.

The system sends digits in the form of Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) tones or pulse digits. When the far-end answers, the Central Office reverses polarity. If the trunk is configured for battery supervision, it sends a polarity reversal message to software.

Central Office disconnect

There are two ways the Central Office can disconnect the call:

• by applying busy tone toward the CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1.

If the trunk card is configured to detect busy tone, it will send a disconnect message to software.

• by reversing battery. If the trunk card is configured to detect battery reversal, it will send a disconnect message to software. When the unit on the trunk card has been idled, the trunk card sends a release confirm message to software.

CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 disconnect

The CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 disconnects the call by removing the loop between the tip and ring leads and replacing the ringing detector.

Trunks configured for battery supervision send a release confirm message to software.


Page 796 of 906




Table 256 shows the power requirements for the NTCK16AX and

NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards.

Table 256

NTCK16 circuit card power requirements

Idle Current

170 ma

Active current

330 ma

Voltage

+15.0 V dc

(See 1)

-15.0 V dc

(See 1)

+8.5 V dc

(See 2)

+5.0 V dc

170 ma

101 ma

160 ma

249 ma

100 ma

322 ma

Note 1: Analog circuitry is powered with +/-12 V generated from

+/-15 V. The maximum current imbalance between the +/-15 V rails is

100 ma per circuit pack.

Note 2: 8.5V is regulated to give 5 V.


Table 257 lists the environmental specifications of the NTCK16AX and


Table 257

NTCK16 circuit card environmental specifications (Part 1 of 2)

Parameter


Operating humidity

Specifications

10 to 45 degrees C


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 797 of 906

Table 257

NTCK16 circuit card environmental specifications (Part 2 of 2)

Parameter

Storage temperature

Storage humidity

Specifications

–20 to +60 degrees C

5 to 95% Relative Humidity

Pad switching

The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards support the North American loss plan. Software configuration allows the selection of 4 dB loss pads on a per unit basis.

Table 258

NTCK16 pad switching

Loss

PAD out

PAD in

Analog-to-Digital

0 dB

+4 dB

Digital-to-Analog

–3 dB

+1 dB

Note: The tolerance for the above nominal values is +0.3 dB, -0.7 dB.


Cross connections


, Figure 168 on page 799

, and Figure 169 on page 800

provide cross connect information for the NTCK16AX and


Configuration

The trunk type for each unit on the card is selected by software service change entries at the system terminal.


Page 798 of 906


Figure 167

NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connectors A, E, K, R


COT

T0

R0

T1

R1

T2

R2

T3

R3

T4

R4

T5

R5

T6

R6

T7

R7

39

14

40

15

41

16

37

12

38

13

32

7

33

8

30

5

31

6

34

9

35

10

36

11

28

3

29

4

26

1

27

2

P i n s P a i r

C o l o r

I / O P a n e l C o n n e c t o r U n i t

N u m b e r

A E K R

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

R-O

O-R

R-G

G-R

W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-G

G-W

W-BR

BR-W

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

BK-G

G-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

S

L

O

T

0

S

L

O

T

4

S

L

O

T

8

S

L

O

T

12

Unit

0

Unit

1

Unit

2

Unit

3

Unit

4

Unit

5

Unit

6

Unit

7

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


COT

T0

R0

T1

R1

T4

R4

T5

R5

T2

R2

T3

R3

T6

R6

T1

R1

T2

R2

T7

R7

T0

R0

T3

R3


Page 799 of 906

Figure 168

NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connectors B, F, L, S

P i n s P a i r

C o l o r

47

22

48

23

45

20

46

21

49

24

42

17

43

18

44

19

37

12

38

13

39

14

40

15

41

16

32

7

33

8

34

9

35

10

36

11

26

1

27

2

28

3

29

4

30

5

31

6

W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-G

G-W

W-BR

BR-W

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

Y-S

S-Y

V-BL

BL-V

V-O

O-V

V-G

G-V

V-BR

BR-V

Y-O

O-Y

Y-G

G-Y

Y-BR

BR-Y

BK-O

O-BK

BK-G

G-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

R-O

O-R

R-G

G-R

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK


N u m b e r

B F L S

Unit

0

S

L

O

T

1

S

L

O

T

2

S

L

O

T

5

S

L

O

T

6

S

L

O

T

9

S

L

O

T

10

S

L

O

T

13

S

L

O

T

14

Unit

1

Unit

2

Unit

3

Unit

4

Unit

5

Unit

6

Unit

7

Unit

0

Unit

1

Unit

2

Unit

3


Page 800 of 906


Figure 169

NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connectors C, G, M, T


COT

T4

R4

T5

R5

T6

R6

T7

R7

T0

R0

T1

R1

T2

R2

T3

R3

T4

R4

T5

R5

T6

R6

T7

R7

37

12

38

13

35

10

36

11

39

14

40

15

41

16

32

7

33

8

30

5

31

6

34

9

26

1

27

2

28

3

29

4

47

22

48

23

49

24

44

19

45

20

42

17

43

18

46

21

P i n s P a i r

C o l o r


N u m b e r

C G M T

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

BK-G

G-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

R-O

O-R

R-G

G-R

R-BR

BR-R

W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-G

G-W

W-BR

BR-W

V-O

O-V

V-G

G-V

V-BR

BR-V

Y-O

O-Y

Y-G

G-Y

Y-BR

BR-Y

Y-S

S-Y

V-BL

BL-V

S

L

O

T

2

S

L

O

T

3

S

L

O

T

6

S

L

O

T

7

S

L

O

T

10

S

L

O

T

11

S

L

O

T

14

S

L

O

T

15

Unit

4

Unit

5

Unit

6

Unit

7

Unit

0

Unit

1

Unit

2

Unit

3

Unit

4

Unit

5

Unit

6

Unit

7

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 801 of 906

NTCK16AX Central Office trunk card

Route Data Block

Respond to the prompts in LD 16 as shown.

LD 16 – Route Data Block for NTCK16AX.

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

ROUT

Response

NEW

COT xx

TKTP

ICOG

CNTL

TIMER

MR

0-511

0-127

COT

IAO

YES

RGV 256

(NO) PPM XLD

Description

Define a new unit

Define a new Route Data Block

Customer number as defined in LD 15.

Route number

Range for Large System, Call Server 1000E, and Media Gateway 1000E

Range for Small System, CS 1000S system,

Media Gateway 1000B, and

Media Gateway 1000T

Define trunk type as Central Office

Incoming and Outgoing trunk

Change a trunk timer

Set Ring Validation Timer to 128 ms.

PPM is off, buffered, or unbuffered on this route.


Page 802 of 906


Trunk Data Block

Respond to the prompts in LD 14 as shown:

LD 14 – Trunk Data Block for NTCK16AX. (Part 1 of 2)


REQ:

TYPE:

TN

NEW

COT l s c u

XCOT

Define a new trunk unit

Central Office Trunk

Terminal Number

Format for Large System, Call Server 1000E, and Media Gateway 1000E, where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit

Type is IPE COT XTRK

(See note on

page 803 .)

CDEN

SIGL

PPID

(See

page 803 .)

BTID

(See

page 803 .)

SUPN

STYP

(8D)

LOP

Xx

Xx

(NO) YES

BTS

Card density is 8D (default)

Loop start signaling

04 Ireland/Turkey 12 KHz

03 Turkey 16 KHz

Enter the country busy tone ID:

Tortola, Brazil = 10

Mexico = 10 or 08 (depending on CO)

Singapore = 11

Ireland = 3 or 9 (depending on CO) Chile,

Venezuela, Thailand, Korea = 06. Argentina =

12 or 07, Turkey = 14

Supervision yes (no)

Busy tone supervision enabled

Loop break supervision enabled

BAT

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 803 of 906

LD 14 – Trunk Data Block for NTCK16AX. (Part 2 of 2)


CLS (LOL) SHL

DTN, (DIP)

P20, P12, (P10)

Attenuation Pads In, (Out)

Digitone signaling, (digipulse)

Make-break ratio for pulse dialing speed.

Note: These prompts are required only for the first unit defined on each

NTCK16AX card.

PPIDFreqMin pulse detection

03 16Kz>70ms

04 12Kz>70ms

CountryBTIDCadence

Brazil, Tortola10250 ms +/- 50 ms on/off

Mexico10250 ms +/- 50 ms on/off

Mexico 8375 ms on/off

Singapore11750 ms on/off

Ireland 3500 +/- 50 ms on/off

Ireland 9375 - 750 ms on/off

Kuwait, Chile 6500 +/- 50 ms on/off

Venezuela, Indonesia12300 ms on, 200 ms off

Thailand, Korea12300 ms on, 200 ms off

Argentina12300 ms on, 200 ms off

Argentina07250 - 500 ms on/off

Turkey1410 seconds of Tone 1:

200 ms off, 200 ms on; 200 ms off,

200 ms on; 200 ms off, 200 ms on;

200 ms off, 600 ms on; followed by

Tone 2: 200 ms off, 200 ms on.


Page 804 of 906


NTCK16BX Central Office trunk card

Route Data Block


LD 16 – Route Data Block for NTCK16BX.

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

ROUT

TKTP

ICOG

CNTL

TIMER

MR

Response

NEW

COT xx

0-511

0-127

COT

IAO

YES

RGV 256

(NO)

Description

Define a new unit.

Define a new Route Data Block.

Customer number as defined in LD 15.

Route number

Range for Large System, Call Server 1000E, and

Media Gateway 1000E

Range for Small System, CS 1000S system,

Media Gateway 1000B, and Media Gateway 1000T

Define trunk type as Central Office.

Incoming and Outgoing trunk

Change a trunk timer.

Set Ring Validation Timer to 128 ms.

PPM is off on this route.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

REQ:

TYPE:

TN l s c u

XCOT


Page 805 of 906

Trunk Data Block


LD 14 – Trunk Data Block for NTCK16BX. (Part 1 of 2)


NEW

COT

Define a new trunk unit.

Central Office Trunk

Terminal Number

Format for Large System, Call Server 1000E, and Media Gateway 1000E, where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit

Type is IPE COT XTRK

(See note 1 on page 806 .)

CDEN

SIGL

BTID

(See

page 807 .)

SUPN

STYP

(8D)

LOP

Xx

(NO) YES

BTS

Card density is 8D (default).

Loop start signaling

Enter the country busy tone ID:

Tortola, Brazil = 10

Mexico = 10 or 08 (depending on CO)

Singapore = 11

Ireland = 3 or 9 (depending on CO) Kuwait,

Chile, Venezuela, Indonesia, Thailand,

Korea = 06. Argentina = 12 or 07, Turkey = 14

Supervision yes (no)

Busy tone supervision enabled

Loop break supervision enabled

CLS

BAT

(LOL) SHL Attenuation Pads In, (Out)


Page 806 of 906


LD 14 – Trunk Data Block for NTCK16BX. (Part 2 of 2)


(DIP) DTN

(P10) P12 P20

Digitone signaling, (digipulse)

Make-break ratio for pulse dialing speed.

Note 1: These prompts are required only for the first unit defined on each NTCK16BX card.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 807 of 906

BTID values by country

Country BTIDCadence

Brazil Tortola10250 ms +/- 50 ms on/off

Mexico 10 250 ms +/- 50 ms on/off

Mexico 8 375 ms on/off

Singapore11 750 ms on/off

Ireland 3 500 +/- 50 ms on/off

Ireland 9 375 - 750 ms on/off

Kuwait, Chile 6500 +/- 50 ms on/off

Venezuela, Indonesia12300 ms on, 200 ms off

Thailand, Korea12300 ms on, 200 ms off

Argentina12 300 ms on, 200 ms off

Argentina07 250 - 500 ms on/off

Turkey 14 10 seconds of Tone 1:

200 ms off, 200 ms on; 200 ms off,

200 ms on; 200 ms off, 200 ms on;

200 ms off, 600 ms on; followed by

Tone 2: 200 ms off, 200 ms on.

Applications

Periodic Pulse Metering

All trunk units on the NTCK16AX trunk card can be individually configured to support the Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) feature.

Note: PPM is available on the NTCK16AX trunk card. It is not supported on the NTCK16BX trunk card.

PPM allows the user of a telephone to keep an accurate record of Central

Office calls for billing or administration purposes.


Page 808 of 906


Detection limits

Pulses detected by the NTCK16AX circuit card must be within the following limits:

Frequency

Level

Pulse length

11 880 to 12 120 Hz

105 to 1100 mVrms

Note: The pack should not be used to detect levels of 1100 mVrms or greater a Tip and Ring, as this may result in noise.

Dependent on PPID – see LD 14

Busy tone detect

Busy tone is sent by the Central Office to indicate the release of an established call.

Detection limits

The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards can detect busy tone within the following limits:

Frequency

Level

Cadence

400 to 620 Hz

–30 to 0 dBm

See on page 803

.

Loss switching

The Generic XFCOT is based on the XFCOT design, which is using a static pad download algorithm by default for its loss plan.

The generic XFCOT has to be set explicitly to a Dynamic Pad Switching mode to make it compliant with the standard North American Dynamic Pad

Switching mode.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 809 of 906

Therefore the following steps must be followed when the Generic XFCOT is installed:

1

Define Loss Switching mode. Respond to the prompts in LD 97 as shown.

LD 97 – Defining Loss Switching mode.


REQ:

TYPE:

...

NATP

CHG

SYSP

YES

IPE system parameters configuration

Select North American transmission plan .

Note: The default to the NATP prompt is NO, and therefore this prompt must always be checked during installation.

2

Define Loss Switching Class Of Service. Respond to the prompts in LD 14 as shown.

LD 14 – Defining Loss Switching Class Of Service.


REQ:

TYPE:

XTRK

SIGL

...

CLS

CHG

COT

XCOT

LOP

LOL

LOL= Long Line

Note: The XFCOT uses the CLS Long Line (LOL) and

Short Line (SHL) for Loss Switching purposes and that the card and trunk type is different from the XUT.


Page 810 of 906


Equivalencies

The following equivalencies do apply:

• XFCOT COT SHL is equivalent with XUT COT TRC

• XFCOT COT LOL is equivalent with XUT COT NTC.

The entries TRC and NTC will no longer be allowed for the Generic XFCOT.

Trunk to Trunk connection

When any disconnect supervision is configured (CLS = BAT, BTS) the Loop

Start Trunk of the Generic XFCOT will be marked as having disconnect supervision and will therefore follow the same rules as a Ground Start Trunk.

There is no configuration involved for this operation.

Call disconnect

When any disconnect supervision is configured (CLS = BAT, BTS) the Loop

Start Trunk will be released when the disconnect signal is received. This will apply also in call states such as ringing, camp-on, DISA, and Meridian Mail.

There is no configuration involved for this operation.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

824

Page 811 of 906

NTDK20 Small System

Controller card

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811

Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814

100BaseT IP daughterboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815

PC card interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818

Security device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819

SDI ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820

Conferencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820

MG 1000S/Expansion card slot assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821

Introduction

This chapter introduces the NTDK20GA Small System Controller (SSC)

Card used in the Call Server, MG 1000S, and Media Gateway 1000B

(MG 1000B). It controls call processing, stores system and customer data, and provides various 100BaseT IP interfaces.

You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the MG 1000S or slots 7 through 10 in the MG 1000S Expansion

The NTDK20FA SSC card is the minimum vintage of SSC that can be used

in the Call Server and MG 1000S. See Figure 170 on page 813 .


Page 812 of 906

NTDK20 Small System Controller card

The NTDK20GA SSC card has the following components and features:

• NTTK25 daughterboard Flash memory, NTAK19 SIMM module

(16 MB) DRAM, and Backup memory

Note: The NTTK13 daughterboard is still supported.

• up to two 100BaseT IP daughterboards

• two PCMCIA sockets

• three Serial Data Interface (SDI) ports

• 32 channels of Conferencing (64 if one dual-port 100BaseT IP daughterboard is present, or 96 if two dual-port 100BaseT IP daughterboards are present)

• one 10BaseT port

• 30 channels of Tone and Digit Switch (TDS) and a combination of eight

Digitone Receivers (DTR) or Extended Tone Detectors (XTD)

• additional tone service ports (four units of MFC/MFE/MFK5/MFK6/

MFR or eight DTR/XTD units)

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 813 of 906

Figure 170

NTDK20 SSC card and expansion daughterboard in the Call Server

Flash ROM Drive

Security Device

PCMCIA Drive

100BaseT daughterboard

Ports 1 & 3 for

MG 1000S systems 1 and 3

Connector for 2nd

100BaseT daughterboard.

Ports 2 and 4 for Media

Gateways 2 and 4


Page 814 of 906


Memory

The majority of system and customer configured data is both controlled and stored on the NTDK20 SSC card’s Flash ROM. An active and backup copy of customer data is also kept on the Flash ROM.

In the event of data loss, the NTDK20 SSC card also retains a copy of customer files in an area called the Backup flash drive. The NTDK20 SSC card is equipped with 8MB of temporary memory space called DRAM.

DRAM functions much like RAM on a computer system. It stores and processes temporary automated routines and user-programmed commands while the system is running. The DRAM on the SSC card stores operating system files, user files, overlay data, patch codes, and the active copy of the customer database.

The NTDK20 SSC card’s Flash daughterboard is the NTTK25. It performs most of the system software storage and data processing.

NTTK25 daughterboard

The NTTK25 is a 48 MB daughterboard comprised of Flash ROM and

Primary Flash drive. It is required in the Call Server and MG 1000S.

The Flash ROM holds 32 MB of ROM memory, comprising operating system data and overlay programs. Flash ROM is expandable using an expansion flash daughterboard.

The Primary Flash drive contains 16 MB of storage space. Most of the data storage is allocated to the Primary Flash drive – the main storage area of customer configured data.

Other system data such as the Secure Storage Area (SSA) also resides in the

Flash drive. The SSA holds data that must survive power interruptions.

The Boot ROM is a 2 MB storage device located on the NTDK20 SSC card.

The Boot ROM contains the boot code, system data, patch data, and the backup copy of the Primary Flash drive’s customer database.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 815 of 906

100BaseT IP daughterboards

A 100BaseT IP Daughterboard mounted on the NTDK20 SSC card enables

the connection of the Call Server to a MG 1000S. See Figure 170 on page 813

.

Each daughterboard increases the number of conference channels by 32. The

maximum number of conference ports is 96. Table 259 on page 817 provides

the ports, cables, and connection data on the IP daughterboards.

The NTDK83 (dual-port) 100BaseT IP daughterboard mounts on the

NTDK20 SSC card in the Call Server. It provides connectivity to two

MG 1000S systems and their associated MG 1000S Expansions.

Note: With a point-to-point connection, the MG 1000S must be within

100 meters of the Call Server.

An optional second NTDK83 daughterboard can be mounted on the NTDK20

SSC card in the Call Server. Adding the second NTDK83 daughterboard

provides support for up to four MG 1000S systems. See Figure 171 on page 816

.

The NTDK99AA (single-port) daughterboard is mounted on the NTDK20

SSC card in the MG 1000S to provide connectivity to the Call Server. See


Note: Third party media conversion devices can be used to extend the range of MG 1000S systems from the Call Server. The IMC Networks

Ethernet Compatible Media Converter with a McLIM Tx/Fx-SM/Plus module was tested by Nortel. It provided acceptable transmission between the Call Server and the MG 1000S located up to 40 kms apart.


Page 816 of 906


Figure 171

NTDK83AA dual-port 100BaseT IP daughterboard

Figure 172

NTDK99A single-port 100BaseT IP daughterboard

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 817 of 906

Table 259

Expansion daughterboards

Daughterboard

NTDK99 (used in

MG 1000S)

NTDK83 (used in

Call Server

Number of ports

one two

Cable type

Max. distance between Call

Server and MG 1000S systems

Use the supplied

NTTK34AA UTP CAT 5

RJ-45 2 m cross-over cable to connect the

Call Server and

MG 1000S using the

100BaseT daughterboards.

The NTTK34AA cross-over cable must be used if connecting point-to-point.

MG 1000S systems can be located up to 100 m (328 ft.) from the Call Server if connected point-to-point, or up to 40 km (24 miles) from the Call Server if a third party converter is used to convert to fiber.

Note: If not connecting point-to-point, connect the Call Server and

MG 1000S using a straight-through Ethernet UTP Cat 5 cable.

Call Servers can be connected to MG 1000S systems in the following ways:

• Use 100BaseT to connect to the LAN for voice distribution over a data network.

• Use 100BaseT cable if connected point-to-point (directly) to the

MG 1000S. The NTTK34AA crossover cable must be used. MG 1000S systems can be located up to 100 meters from the Call Server.

• Use Media Conversion devices (third party converters) to convert

100BaseT to fiber for distances from 100 m to 40 km.

See Figure 173 on page 818 .


Page 818 of 906


Figure 173

Call Server connection to Media Gateway 1000S systems

Call Server

Call Server connection to Media Gateway 1000S

Media Gateway 1000S

Software

Daughterboard

Software

Daughterboard

Dual Port

100BaseT

Daughterboard

Dual Port

100BaseT

Daughterboard

Single Port

100BaseT

Daughterboard

LAN

• The Call Server connects to the LAN via dual port daughterboards.

• One 100BaseT connection is required for each Media Gateway 1000.

• Each Media Gateway 1000 contains an SSC with a single port IP

daughterboard and a software daughterboard.

• The single port IP daughterboard conncets to the LAN via 100BaseT.

553-AAA1990

For further information or installation instructions, refer to the

Communication Server 1000S: Installation and Configuration

(553-3031-210).

PC card interface

The NTDK20 SSC card has a PC card interface through a socket located on its faceplate. The PC card socket can accommodate a Software Delivery card used for software upgrading and as backup media.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 819 of 906

Security device

The NTDK20 SSC card in each MG 1000S must contain a NTDK57DA

Security device, a remote dongle (NT_Rem) which is keyed to match the

NTDK57AA Security device on the Call Server and a standard dongle

(NT_STD). This maintains the requirement of a single keycode for each

system. Refer to Figure 170 on page 813 for the location of the device.

This security scheme provides the following:

• enables the system to operate as a single system when all links are up.

• enables the MG 1000S to continue operating with its existing configuration in the event of a failure of the Call Server, or the failure of the link to the Call Server from the MG 1000S.

• prevents users from configuring or using unauthorized TNs or features.

The MG 1000S security device provides the following capabilities for the

MG 1000S:

• System software can be installed but no calls can be processed or features activated until communication with the Call Server has been established and a match between the security ID of the Call Server and the

MG 1000S has been confirmed.

• System software can be upgraded.

Note: Local data dump, LD 43 commands, and LD 143 commands are not permitted.


Page 820 of 906


SDI ports

The NTDK20 SSC card in both the Call Server and the MG 1000S systems contains three SDI ports used to connect on-site terminals or remote terminals

through a modem. Table 260 shows the port default settings.

Table 260

Default SDI port settings on the NTDK20 SSC card

TTY Port

0

1

2

Baud rate

Set by a DIP switch

1200

1200

Data bits

8

8

8

Stop bits

1

1

1

Parity

None

None

None

Use

MTC/SCH/

BUG

MTC/SCH/

BUG

MTC/SCH/

BUG

Conferencing

Thirty-two conference channels are provided by the NTDK20 SSC card’s conference devices. Conference capability can be increased by mounting expansion daughterboards on the NTDK20 SSC card. Each dual IP daughterboard increases the total number of conference channels by 32. The maximum number of conference ports is 96.

Each conference device provides 32 ports of conferencing capabilities (one conference participant for each port). A conference call can have three to six participants. For example, there could be six 5-party conferences on each device, or four 6-party conferences plus two 3-party conferences. It is not possible to conference between conference devices.

10BaseT port

The Call Server provides one 10BaseT connection to a Local Area Network

(LAN) to interface with Management software applications such as OTM and

CallPilot. The MG 1000S SSC 10BaseT port, Port 1, is disabled by default.

To use the 10BaseT port, the port must be assigned a unique IP address and the port must be enabled from the Call Server.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 821 of 906

The MG 1000S 10BaseT port can run in Normal mode or Survival mode. In

Normal mode, the MG 1000S does not provide access to maintenance or alarm management.

External connections to the 10BaseT port are provided by a 15-pin connector located on the backplanes of the Call Server and MG 1000S systems.

MG 1000S/Expansion card slot assignment

The MG 1000S and MG 1000S Expansion contain physical card slots,

numbered 1 to 10. See Figure 174 on page 823

and Figure 175 on page 824 .

When configuring the system, the physical card slot numbers must be transposed to “logical” card slot numbers. For example, to configure a card physically located in Slot 2 of the first MG 1000S, use logical Slot 12. To configure a card physically located in Slot 2 of the second MG 1000S, use

logical Slot 22. See Table 261 on page 822 .


Page 822 of 906


Table 261

MG 1000S and MG 1000S Expansion slot assignments

MG 1000S/MG 1000S Expansion

First

MG 1000S

MG 1000S/

Expansion

Physical card slot

6

7

4

5

1

2

3

8

9

10

Legend

* Not supported.

Second

Logical card slot

14

*

*

17

11

12

13

18

19

20


6

7

4

5

1

2

3

8

9

10

Third



24

*

*

27

21

22

23

28

29

30

6

7

4

5

1

2

3

8

9

10

Fourth



34

*

*

37

31

32

33

38

39

40

6

7

4

5

1

2

3

8

9

10


44

*

*

47

41

42

43

48

49

50

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Figure 174

MG 1000S slots


Page 823 of 906

Media Gateway 1000

553-AAA1991


Page 824 of 906


Figure 175

MG 1000S Expansion slots

Media Gateway 1000 and Media Gateway 1000 Chassis Expansion

553-AAA1992

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

838

Page 825 of 906

NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825



Software description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831

Hardware description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831

Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831

Introduction

The NTRB21 (DTI/PRI/DCH) TMDI digital trunk card is a 1.5 Mb DTI or

PRI interface to the CS 1000S, CS 1000M Cabinet, and Meridian 1 PBX 11C

Cabinet. The NTRB21 card has a built-in downloadable D-channel.

The TMDI feature supports the software changes required for CS 1000S,

CS 1000M Cabinet, and Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet to use the new TDMI pack. The software changes include:

• a new prompt to replace a function that was handled by a dip switch on the NTAK09

• an extra loadware application to handle Layer 1

• a change to the existing loadware files into 32 bit format from the original 16 bit format


Page 826 of 906

NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card

To provide CEMUX communication with the card, changes are also required to create an I/O entry for the card.

You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the MG 1000S. The card is not supported in the MG 1000S Expansion. Up to four digital trunks are supported in each MG 1000S.

Note 1: For CISPR B group cabinets, the active Clock Controller

(NTAK20) can only occupy slots 1-3. For FCC and/or CISPR A group cabinets, this limitation does not exist - the Clock Controller can occupy any available slot 1-9.

Note 2: On non-ECM system cabinets, the NTAK20 may be placed in slots 1-9. On cabinets NTAK11Dx and NTAK11Fx, the active NTAK20 must be placed in slots 1-3 (slots 4-10 may not be used).

IMPORTANT!



The NTRB21 card uses a standard 9.5" by 12.5" multi-layer printed circuit board with buried power and ground layers.The clock controller daughterboard is fastened by standoffs and connectors.

The NTRB21 card has seven faceplate LEDs. The first five LEDs are associated with the NTRB21 card. The remaining two LEDs are associated

with the clock controller and DCHI daughterboards. See Figure 176.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Figure 176

NTRB21 TMDI card with clock controller


Page 827 of 906

Connector Socket

1 2 3 4

ON

SW

Stiffeners

Connector Pins

LEDs

TMDI

OOS

AC

T

RED

YEL

LBK

CC

DCH

Bantam

Jacks

RCV

XMT

NTRB21

NTAK93/51

Clock

Controller

Mounting Holes

Standoffs

553-CSE9024


Page 828 of 906


Table 262

NTRB21 LED states

In general, the first five LEDs operate as follows:

• During system power up, the LEDs are on.

• When the self-test is in progress, the LEDs flash on and off three times,

then go into their appropriate states, as shown in Table 262.


DIS

ACT

RED

YEL

LBK

On (Red)

Off

On (Green)

Off

On (Red)

Off

On (Yellow)

Off

On (Green)

Off

The NTRB21 circuit card is disabled.

The NTRB21 is not in a disabled state.

The NTRB21 circuit card is in an active state. No alarm states exist, the card is not disabled, nor is it in a loopback state.

An alarm state or loopback state exists, or the card has been disabled. See the other faceplate LEDs for more information.

A red-alarm state has been detected.

No red alarm.

A yellow alarm state has been detected.

No yellow alarm.

NTRB21 is in loop-back mode.

NTRB21 is not in loop-back mode.

Figure 177 on page 829 shows the faceplate of the NTRB21 TMDI card.


The DTI/PRI obtains its power from the backplane, and draws less than

2 amps on +5 V, 50 mA on +12 V, and 50 mA on –12 V.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 829 of 906

Figure 177

NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate

TMDI

OOS

ACT

RED

YEL

LBK

CC

DCH

MAINT

Monitor Port

RS232

Rx

Tx

553-CSE0007


Page 830 of 906



Lightning protectors must be installed between an external T1 carrier facility and the system. For public T1 facilities, this protection is provided by the local operating company. In a private T1 facility environment (a campus, for example), the NTAK92 protection assembly can be used.

The NTRB21 circuit card conforms to safety and performance standards for foreign and surge voltage protection in an internal environment.


NTRB21 provides the following features and functions:

• configurable parameters, including A-Law and µ-Law operation, digital pads on a per channel basis, and Superframe or Extended Superframe formats

• AMI or B8ZS line coding

• 1.5 Mb Digital Trunk Interface and 1.5 Mb Primary Rate Interface

• 1.5 Mb Clock recovery and distribution of reference clocks

• DG2 or FDL yellow alarm methods

• card status and alarm indication with faceplate-mounted LED

• automatic alarm monitoring and handling


• loopback capabilities for both near-end and far-end

• echo canceler interface

• integrated trunk access (both D-channel and in-band A/B signaling can be mixed on the same PRI)

• faceplate monitor jacks for T1 interface

• configurable D-channel data rate with 64 kbps, 56 kbps or

64 kbps inverted

• self-test

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 831 of 906

Software description

Changes from the NTAK09 are required for the new trunk card and License parameters are n service change and maintenance overlays. There is a change to CardLAN to introduce a new CardLAN ID. The download of PSDL data is also changed to handle a 32 bit download as well as existing 16 bit.

Hardware description

NTRB21 TMDI card

The NTRB21 TMDI card provides 1.5 MBits Digital Trunk Interface or

Primary Rate Interface functionality. It also has a built-in downloadable

D-channel.

The NTRB21 can be used with the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card (with the

NTBK51 downloadable D-channel daughterboard).

Figure 178 on page 832 shows a faceplate of the NTRB21 TMDI card.

Architecture


The signaling interface performs an 8 Kbps signaling for all 24 channels and interfaces directly to the DS-30X link. Messages transmitted in both directions are three bytes long.

Interconnection

The interconnection to the carrier is by NTBK04, a 1.5 Mb 20 ft. carrier cable.

The NT8D97AX, a fifty-foot extension cable, is also available.


Page 832 of 906


Figure 178

NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate

RS232 Monitor Port

MAINT

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

Rx

Tx

TMDI

OOS

ACT

RED

YEL

LBK

CC

DCH

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 833 of 906

Microprocessor

The NTRB21 is equipped with bit-slice microprocessors that handle the following major tasks:

• Task handler: also referred to as an executive. The task handler provides orderly per-channel task execution to maintain real-time task ordering constraints.

• Transmit voice: inserts digital pads, manipulates transmit AB bits for

DS1, and provides graceful entry into T-Link data mode when the data module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk is answering the call.

• Receive voice: inserts digital pads and provides graceful entry into

T-Link data mode when the data module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk is originating the call.

• T-Link data: a set of transmit and receive vectored subroutines which provides T-Link protocol conversion to and from the DM-DM protocol.

• Receive ABCD filtering: filters and debounces the receive ABCD bits and provides change of state information to the system.

• Diagnostics

• Self-test

Digital pad

The digital pad is an EPROM whose address-input to data-output transfer function meets the characteristics of a digital attenuator. The digital pad accommodates both µ255-Law and A-Law coding. There are 32 combinations each for µ255 to µ255, µ255 to A-Law, A-Law to µ255, and

A-Law to A-Law. These values are selected to meet the EIA loss and level plan.


Page 834 of 906


Table 263

Digital pad values and offset allocations

Offset

E

F

C

D

A

B

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

PAD set 0

5dB

6.1dB

8dB

–1dB

0dB

2dB

3dB

4dB

–3dB

–4dB idle code, 7F unassigned code, FF

1dB

–2dB

–5db

–6db

PAD set 1

11db

12db

3db

14db spare spare spare spare

–7db

–8db

–9db

–10db

0.6db

7db

9db

10db

D-channel interface

The D-channel interface is a 64 kbps, full-duplex, serial bit-stream configured as a Data Circuit-terminating Equipment (DCE) device. The data signals include:

• receive data output


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 835 of 906



The bit rate of the receive and transmit clocks can vary slightly from each other. This is determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks.

Feature selection through software configuration for the D-channel includes:

• 56 kbps

• 64 kbps clear

• 64 kbps inverted (64 Kbps restricted)

DCHI can be enabled and disabled independent of the PRI card, as long as the

PRI card is inserted in its cabinet slot. The D-channel data link cannot be established unless the PRI loop is enabled.

On the NTRB21 use switch 1, position 1 to select either the D-channel feature or the DPNSS feature, as follows:

OFF = D-channel

The ON setting for DPNSS (U.K.) is not supported at this time.

DS-1 Carrier interface

Transmitter

The transmitter takes the binary data (dual unipolar) from the PCM transceiver and produces bipolar pulses for transmission to the external digital facility. The Digital Signal – Level 1 (DS-1) transmit equalizer enables the cabling distance to be extended from the card to the Digital Signal


Page 836 of 906


Cross-connect – Level 1 (DSX-1), or LD-1. Equalizers are switch selectable

through dip-switches. The settings are shown in Table 264.

Table 264

NTRB21 switch settings

Switch Setting

Distance to Digital

Cross-Connect

0 - 133 feet

133 - 266 feet

266 - 399 feet

399 - 533 feet

533 - 655 feet

1

DCH F/W

2

(LEN 0)

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

On

Off

On

Off

3

(LEN 1)

4

(LEN 2)

Off

On

On

Off

Off

On

Off

Off

Off

Off

Receiver

The receiver extracts data and clock from an incoming data stream and outputs clock and synchronized data. At worst case DSX-1 signal levels, the line receiver operates correctly with up to 655 feet of ABAM cable between the card and the external DS-1 signal source.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 837 of 906

Connector pinout

The connection to the external digital carrier is through a 15 position Male

D-type connector.

Table 265

DS-1 line interface pinout for NTBK04 cable

From 50-pin

MDF connector

pin 48

To DB-15

pin 1

Signal name

T pin 23 pin 25 pin 49 pin 24 pin 9 pin 2 pin 3 pin 11

R

FGND

T1

R1

Description

transmit tip to network transmit ring to network frame ground receive tip from network receive ring from network

NTAK20 Clock Controller (CC) daughterboard

Digital Trunking requires synchronized clocking so that a shift in one clock source results in an equivalent shift of the same size and direction in all parts of the network.

The NTAK20 clock controller circuitry synchronizes the CS 1000S,

CS 1000M Cabinet, and Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet to an external reference clock and generates and distributes the clock to the system. The

CS 1000S, CS 1000M Cabinet, and Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet can function either as a slave to an external clock or as a clocking master to the network.

The NTAK20AD and NTAK20AA versions of the clock controller meet

AT&T Stratum 3 and Bell Canada Node Category D specifications. The

NTAK20BD and NTAK20BA versions meet CCITT stratum 4

specifications. See “NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard” on page 735 .


Page 838 of 906


IMPORTANT!


If an IP Expansion multi-cabinet system is equipped with digital trunk cards, it is mandatory that at least one trunk card is placed in the Main

Option 11C cabinet. A cabinet that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller.

Note: Clocking slips can occur between MG 1000S systems that are clocked from different COs, if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality.

Clock rate converter

The 1.5 Mb clock is generated by a Phase-Locked Loop (PLL). The PLL synchronizes the 1.5 Mb DS1 clock to the 2.56 Mb system clock through the common multiple of 8 kHz by using the main frame synchronization signal.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

844

Page 839 of 906

NTVQ01xx Media Card

Contents



Hardware architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841


Survivability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843


The Media Card replaces the ITG Pentium card and is available as an 8-port or 32-port card.

You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the MG 1000S or slots 7 through 10 in the MG 1000S Expansion.

Note: Up to four Media Cards can be installed in each MG 1000S. Up to four Media Cards can be installed in each MG 1000S Expansion.

An NTVQ01xx Media Card is shown in Figure 179.


Page 840 of 906

NTVQ01xx Media Card

Figure 179

NTVQ01xx Media Card

The NTVQ01xx Media Card provides faceplate and backplane interfaces, which are used to connect external LANs. This section provides information on the faceplate connectors and indicators.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NTVQ01xx Media Card

Page 841 of 906

Hardware architecture

The Media Card comes in two versions: 8-port and 32-port.

Faceplate connectors and indicators

Figure 180 on page 842 shows the NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate.

Reset switch

The reset switch on the faceplate manually resets the Media Card.

Status LED

The NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate red LED indicates the following:

• the enabled/disabled status of the card

• the self-testing result during power up or card insertion into an operational system

PC card slot

This slot accepts standard PC card flash cards, including ATA Flash cards

(3 Mbit/s to 170 Mbit/s). Nortel supply PCM card adaptors which enable compact flash cards to be used in this slot. This slot is used for NTVQ01xx

Media Card software upgrades, backing up announcements, and additional storage.

Ethernet activity LEDs

The NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate contains Ethernet activity LEDs for each network.

Maintenance hex display

This is a four-digit LED-based hexadecimal display that provides the status of the NTVQ01xx Media Card at all times. The hex display provides an indication of fault conditions and the progress of PC card-based software upgrades or backups. It also indicates the progress of the internal self-test in the form of T:xx.


Page 842 of 906

NTVQ01xx Media Card

Figure 180

NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate

Reset

MC

Reset Button

Enable LED

PCMCIA Slot

A:

E T

100

10

A

NTVQ01AA

J2

Ethernet Activity LEDs

HEX Display

Maintenance Port

Lock Latches

553-MIRAN0001

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

NTVQ01xx Media Card

Page 843 of 906

RS-232 Asynchronous Maintenance Port

An 8-pin mini-DIN socket on the NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate provides access to the RS-232 port. This faceplate port can provide access to the Media

Card for OA&M purposes. The maintenance port is also available through a female DB9 connector on the 50-pin I/O Adaptor. This should be used to make a permanent terminal connection.


Media Cards have different types of firmware pre-installed, depending on the application being supported. The Voice Gateway application enables Digital

Signal Processors (DSPs) for either line or trunk applications. When the

Voice Gateway application is installed on the Media Card, the card is called the Voice Gateway Media card. Other examples of applications on a Media

Card include IP Line 3.0 and Integrated Recorded Announcer.

The NTVQ01xx Media Card connects an IP and circuit-switched device. The

DSPs perform media transcoding between IP voice packets and circuit-switched devices. The Media Card also provides echo cancellation and compression/decompression of voice streams.

Survivability

Refer to Communication Server 1000S: Installation and Configuration

(553-3031-210) for instructions on configuring the card for survivability.


Page 844 of 906

NTVQ01xx Media Card

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

850

Page 845 of 906

NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card

Contents





The NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium (ITG-P) card supports IP Phones by providing a communication gateway for the IP Phone between the IP data network and the system. The IP Phone uses the IP data network to communicate with the ITG-P card.

You can install this card in any two consecutive IPE slots.

Note: Each MG 1000S supports up to two ITG-P cards. Each

MG 1000S Expansion supports up to two ITG-P cards. Each ITG-P card occupies two slots.

ITG-P cards have an ELAN management 10BaseT port and a TLAN VoIP port (10/100BaseT) on the I/O panel. There is an RS-232 Maintenance port connection on the ITG-P card faceplate and an alternative connection to the same serial port on the I/O backplane.

Note: Do not connect maintenance terminals to the faceplate and I/O panel serial maintenance port connections at the same time.


Page 846 of 906

NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card


Figure 181 on page 847 shows the ITG-P card faceplate components. The

information in this section describes the components.

Faceplate components

NWK

The faceplate connector labeled NWK is a 9-pin, sub-miniature D-type connector. The connector is not used for the ITG-P application.

WARNING

The NWK connector looks like a 9-pin serial connector.

Do not connect a serial cable or any other cable to it. If a cable is installed to the NWK connector, the TLAN interface card is disabled.

ITG-P LED (Card Status)

The red status faceplate LED indicates the enabled/disabled status of the

24-card ports. The LED is on (red) during the power-up or reset sequence.

The LED remains lit until the card is enabled. If the LED remains on, this indicates the self-test failed, the card is disabled, or the card rebooted.

Reset switch

Press the Reset switch to reset the card without having to cycle power to the card. This switch is normally used after a software upgrade to the card, or to clear a fault condition.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Figure 181

NTVQ55AA ITG-P card faceplate


Page 847 of 906

ITG-P LED (card status)

Reset Switch

NWK

ITG-P

Reset

NWK

Status

Ethernet Voice Port

NWK LEDs (Ethernet)

Type III PCMCIA slot

(ATA Drive A:)

A:

RS-232

Maintenance Port

NTVQ55AA

Maint

Port

Four-character LED-based

Matrix Maintenance Display

Inboard:

- Type III PCMCIA slot (ATA Drive B:)

- Onboard Flash Drive C:

553-CSE9150

Note: There are no Ethernet status LEDs for the ELAN management interface.


Page 848 of 906


NWK Status LED

NWK Status LEDs display the TLAN interface card Ethernet activity:

• Green – on if the carrier (link pulse) is received from the TLAN interface card Ethernet hub.

• Yellow – flashes when there is TLAN interface card data activity. During heavy traffic, yellow can stay continuously lit.

Note: There are no Ethernet status LEDs for the ELAN management interface.

PC card slots

The ITG-P card has one faceplate PC card slot, designated drive A. The PC card slot is used for optional maintenance (backup and restore). The ITG-P card also has one unused inboard slot, designated drive B. The PC card slots support PC-based hard disks (ATA interface) or high-capacity PC flash memory cards.

Maintenance Display

A four character, LED-based, dot matrix display shows the maintenance status fault codes and other card state information.

RS-232 Maintenance Port

The ITG-P card faceplate provides a female DIN-8 serial maintenance port connection (labeled Maint Port). An alternative connection to the faceplate serial maintenance port exists on the NTMF94EA I/O panel breakout cable.

Do not connect maintenance terminals or modems to the faceplate and I/O panel DB-9 male serial maintenance port at the same time.

Backplane interfaces

The backplane connector provides connection to the following:

• ELAN interface card

• TLAN interface card

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 849 of 906

• alternate connection to the serial maintenance port DS-30X

• Card LAN interfaces

DS-30X voice/signaling

DS-30X carries Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) voice and proprietary signaling on the backplane between the ITG-P card and the SSC.

Card LAN

Card LAN carries card polling and initialization messages on the backplane between the ITG-P card and the SSC.

Assembly description

The ITG-P card assembly consists of a two-slot motherboard/daughterboard combination. A PCI interconnect board connects the ITG-P motherboard and the DSP daughterboard.


Page 850 of 906


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

868

Page 851 of 906

QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data

Interface card

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851




Configuring the ESDI card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867

Introduction

The QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface (ESDI) card gives the

CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 switch two fully synchronous high-speed serial ports.

These high-speed synchronous ports are used to connect the processor to synchronous communication peripherals such as Meridian Mail or to a host computer (for example, DEC or Tandem) using Meridian Link. This card cannot be used as an asynchronous port or to connect to an administrative and maintenance terminal. Use either the NT8D41 SDI paddle board or the

QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card to connect the switch to an asynchronous serial peripheral.


Page 852 of 906


Each system can accommodate up to eight ESDI cards, for a total of 16 synchronous ports per system. The ESDI cards can be housed in the network slots of any of the following modules:

• NT5D21 Core/Network module (slots 0 through 7)

• NT6D39 CPU/Network module (slots 1 through 9 and 13)

• NT6D60 Core module (slots 0 through 5)

• NT8D35 Network module (slots 5 through 13)


Note: When as ESDI card is installed in an NT6D60 Core module, an

NT8D34 CPU module, or slot 13 of an NT6D39 CPU/Network module in a dual-CPU system, any I/O device connected to the card does not function when the CPU in that module is inactive.


The ESDI card circuitry is contained on a 31.75 by 25.40 cm (12.5 by 10 in.) printed circuit board. The front panel of the card is 2.54 cm (1 in.) wide. See

Figure 182 on page 853 . The front panel is equipped with an Enable/Disable

(ENB/DIS) switch and a red LED. The LED lights when the following occurs:

• the ENB/DIS switch is set to DIS

• both ports are disabled in software

• none of the card’s ports have been configured in software

• the switch settings on the card do not match the settings programmed in software

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 853 of 906

Figure 182

CPC513 ESDI card front panel

Card lock latch

CSL/

ESDI

Q

P

C

5

1

3

ENB

DIS

LED


ESDI port 1 connector

J1

ESDI port 2 connector

Card lock latch

J2

553-5981


Page 854 of 906



The QPC513 ESDI card is an intelligent, two-port synchronous serial data

interface card. See Figure 183. The two serial input/output data ports

terminate on DB-25 connectors on the front panel of the card.

Each port operates independently in synchronous mode, in half or full duplex, at speeds of up to 64 kbps. Each port can be connected to either Data Terminal

Equipment (DTE) or Data Communications Equipment (DCE).

The electrical interface for the ESDI card may be either EIA RS-232-C or a proprietary high-speed interface. The high-speed interface combines features of RS-422-A for data and timing signals with features of RS-232-C for control signals.

Figure 183

ESDI card block diagram

System processor bus

Address bus

Data bus

Control bus

Local bus

System bus interface

ESDI card local processor

DMA channel

1

DMA channel

2

EPROM

System and cache

RAM

Baud rate generator

1

Synchronous serial channel

1

Synchronous serial channel

2

Baud rate generator

2

553-AAA1159

1

Line interface

Port 1

(J1)

2

Line interface

Port 2

(J2)

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 855 of 906

The QPC513 ESDI card is an intelligent controller. The local micro-processor performs all of the overhead associated with synchronous data transfer. The system processor passes data to the ESDI card processor a byte at a time using conventional memory reads and writes. The ESDI card processor stores the data in a RAM cache on the ESDI card, and passes it to the synchronous communication chip in blocks using Direct Memory Access

(DMA) techniques.

Synchronous communication

The ESDI cards supports LAPB, a subset of the HDLC synchronous protocol.

A description of the LAPB protocol is shown in Appendix A, LAPB data link

protocol on page 901 .

The HDLC data link is a bit-oriented protocol. The information data bits are transmitted transparently across the link in packets. The maximum length of the information field for these packets is 128 octets, where an octet consists of 8 bits.

The characteristics of the synchronous communication ports are shown in

Table 266.

Table 266

Characteristics of synchronous ports (Part 1 of 2)

Characteristics Description

Duplex mode

Data rate (bps) half, (full)

1200, 2400, (4800), 9600,

19200, 48000, 56000, 64000

(internal), external Clock

Data Link Level LAPB protocol

SL-1 address

(1), 3

Note 1: * See the Configuration Record (LD 17) in Software Input/Output:

Administration (553-3001-311) to modify the link control system parameters and performance thresholds.

Note 2: The values in parentheses are the default.


Page 856 of 906


Table 266

Characteristics of synchronous ports (Part 2 of 2)

Characteristics Description

Data Link Level LAPB protocol remote host address

(3), 1

Modify link control system parameters* yes, (no)

Modify link performance thresholds

(Note 1) yes, (no)

Note 1: * See the Configuration Record (LD 17) in Software Input/Output:

Administration (553-3001-311) to modify the link control system parameters and performance thresholds.

Note 2: The values in parentheses are the default.

Clock timing option

The ESDI card offers two timing options:

• Internal: The ESDI card uses an internal timing source to synchronize data transfers to the external device.

• External: The ESDI card accepts a timing source from the high-speed interface connector to synchronize data transfers to the external device.

Test and maintenance features

The ESDI card has these built-in testing and maintenance capabilities:

Self-test

The ESDI card performs a self-test of its major components immediately after power-up. The self-test can also be initiated through the Link Diagnostic program LD 48. The self-test tests all ESDI functions up to, but not including, the ESDI line drivers and receivers.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 857 of 906

Fault detection

Firmware on the ESDI card detects hardware faults on the card and link level

LAPB protocol faults. It reports the faults to the CPU when predetermined thresholds (downloaded at initialization) have been exceeded.

Fault isolation

The ESDI/Command and Status Link (CSL) maintenance software takes the

ESDI card out of service when the out-of-service thresholds are exceeded for the following:

• LAPB error conditions (for example, retransmission, Cyclic Redundancy

Check (CRC) errors, overrun/underrun errors)

• Physical or link errors

• Detected hardware errors

Connection characteristics

The two DB-25 connectors on the front panel of the ESDI card provide connections to each of the two I/O ports. The electrical interface of these connectors is a modified version of the RS-422-A standard designed to drive

high-speed data over long cable lengths (up to 100 ft). Table 267 shows the

interconnection specifications for these ports.

Table 267

QPC513 interconnection specifications

Distance

<15.24 m (<50 ft)

>15.24 m and <30.48 m

(>50 ft and <100 ft)

>30.48 m (>100 ft)

Interconnection

Regular 25-conductor cable

Twisted pair for balanced circuits

Network interface devices such as stand-alone modems or DS-1 facilities using

Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module

(ASIM) and Data Line card (DLC)


Page 858 of 906


Electrical interface options

Interface options are selected by inserting jumper plugs into the appropriate sockets on the card:

• RS-232-C interface: The EIA RS-232-C interface can be used for speeds up to 19.2 kbps and distances of less than 15.24 m (50 ft). The ESDI card

supports a subset of the RS-232-C signals. See Table 268 on page 859 .

• High-speed interface: The high-speed interface combines features of the

RS-422-A standard for the data and timing signals with standard

RS-232-C control signals. It is used when the signal rate is greater than

19.2 kbps and/or when the distance between the system and host is greater than 15.24 m (50 ft). No modems are needed if the distance is less than 30.48 m (100 ft).

The high-speed interface uses a proprietary pin assignment, rather than the standard 37-pin RS-449 arrangement. This pin arrangement is

compatible with the Spectron Cable #75-025 for V.35 use. See Table 269

on

page 860 .

The data and timing signals on the high-speed interface use RS-422-A type differential line drivers and receivers in a balanced configuration.

These drivers and receivers are able to drive higher data rate signals over longer distances than standard RS-232-C drivers and receivers. A typical

connection using these drivers and receivers is shown in Figure 184.

Figure 184

Typical high-speed interface line driver and receiver

Driver

Lead A

Lead A

System cable

Lead B

Front panel connector

Lead B

Front panel connector

Receiver

553-5943

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 859 of 906


Table 268 shows the pin assignments for J1 and J2 when the port is

configured for RS-232-C interface, and Table 269 on page 860

shows the pin assignments for J1 and J2 when the port is configured for the high-speed interface.

Table 268

Connector J1 and J2 pin assignments – RS-232-C interface (Part 1 of 2)

Pin number Signal functions

Ground and common return

1

7

Data

2

3

Shielded

Signal ground (SG)

Transmitted data (TX)

Received data (RX)

Control

4

5

6

8

20

Request to send (RTS)

Clear to send (CTS)

Data set ready (DSR)

Carrier detect (CD)

Data terminal ready (DTR)

Timing

15 Transmitter signal element timing (DCE)

Note: Pins not used are 9 to 14, 16, 18, 19, 21, 22, 25.

Signal source

To DCE From DCE

EIA circuit

n/a n/a

3

—

3

—

—

—

3

— n/a n/a

—

3

—

3

3

3

—

3

AB

BA

BB

DB

CA

CB

CC

CF

CD


Page 860 of 906


Table 268

Connector J1 and J2 pin assignments – RS-232-C interface (Part 2 of 2)

Pin number Signal functions

17 Receiver signal element timing (DCE)

24 Transmitter signal element timing (DTE)

Note: Pins not used are 9 to 14, 16, 18, 19, 21, 22, 25.

Signal source

To DCE From DCE

EIA circuit

—

3

3

—

DD

DA

Table 269

Connector J1 and J2 pin assignments – high-speed interface (Part 1 of 2)

Signal source

To DCE

From

DCE Pin number Signal functions

Ground and common return

1

7

Data

2

3

13

16

Shield

Signal ground (SG)

Transmitted data – lead A

Received data – lead A

Transmitted data – lead B

Received data – lead B

Control

4

5

6

8

20

Request to send (RTS)

Clear to send (CTS)

Data set ready (DSR)

Carrier detect (CD)

Data terminal ready (DTR)

Note: Pins not used are 9, 10, 11, 18, 19, 21, 22, 25.

n/a n/a

3

—

3

—

3

—

—

—

3 n/a n/a

—

3

—

3

—

3

3

3

EIA circuit

(lead)

AB

BA (A)

BB (A)

BA (B)

BB (B)

CA

CB

CC

CF

CD

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 861 of 906

Table 269

Connector J1 and J2 pin assignments – high-speed interface (Part 2 of 2)

Signal source

To DCE

From

DCE

EIA circuit

(lead) Pin number Signal functions

Timing

12

14

15

Transmitter signal element timing (DTE) – lead B

Transmitter signal element timing (DCE) – lead B

Transmitter signal element timing (DCE) – lead A

17

23

Transmitter signal element timing (DTE) – lead A

Receiver signal element timing

(DCE) – lead A

24 Receiver signal element timing

(DCE) – lead B

Note: Pins not used are 9, 10, 11, 18, 19, 21, 22, 25.

—

—

—

—

3

3

3

3

3

3

—

—

DD (B)

DB (B)

DB (A)

DD (A)

DA (A)

DA (B)


Page 862 of 906


Configuring the ESDI card

Configuring the ESDI card consists of setting the port addresses using the address selection switch and setting the port interface options using the jumper blocks. The system software must then be configured to recognize the

ESDI card. Figure 185 on page 864 shows the location of all option switches

and jumper sockets on the ESDI card.

Address switch settings

The two ESDI ports on the card are addressed in pairs such as 0 and 1, 2 and

3, and so on). The address is set using switch S2. The switch settings used to select the address vary depending on whether the card is Style A or Style B.

The “Style” can be read on the printed circuit board silk screen. The address of the card is set to match the device address defined in software.

Synchronous port address space is the same as asynchronous port address space. When selecting an address for the ESDI card, make sure that it will not conflict with an address currently being used by an asynchronous card.

Table 270 shows the ESDI card address switch settings.

Table 270

ESDI card address switch settings (Part 1 of 2)

Device Number

Switch S2 style A

Switch S2 style B

Port 1 Port 2 1 2 3 4 1

0

2

4

1

3

5 off on off off off on off off off on on on

6

8

7

9 on off on off off on on on off on

10 11 on off on on

* Switch S2, position 4 is not used on style B cards.

on off off off

2

on off off off off on

3

on off on off on off

*

*

*

*

*

*

4

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 863 of 906

Table 270

ESDI card address switch settings (Part 2 of 2)

Device Number

Switch S2 style A

Port 1 Port 2 1 2 3 4 1

12 13 off on on on on

14 15 on on on on

* Switch S2, position 4 is not used on style B cards.

on

Switch S2 style B

2

on on

3

off on

*

*

4

DTE/DCE mode jumper settings

The interface for each ESDI port is configured independently. Ports must be configured both for electrical interface (RS-232-C or high-speed) and mode

(DTE or DCE). With the proper options set:

• An ESDI port configured as DTE appears as a terminal to the user equipment.

• An ESDI port configured as DCE appears as a modem to the user equipment.

Interface options are set by installing option jumper plugs into the sockets

indicated in Table 271 on page 865 and Table 272 on page 865

.


Page 864 of 906


Figure 185

ESDI card option switch locations

STYLE

Address selection

O

N

1 2 3 4

Jumper plug installed in socket

Port no. 1 jumpers

Empty jumper socket

Port no. 2 jumpers

Note: Ports 1 and 2 shown with jumper plugs installed for DCE and RS-232-C operation.

553-5983

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 865 of 906

Table 271

ESDI card DTE/DCE mode jumper settings

Mode

Data communication equipment (DTE)

Data terminal equipment (DCE)

Data communication equipment (DTE)

Data terminal equipment (DCE)

Port

2

2

1

1

Jumper socket designations

UA10

UA9

UA17

UA16

UA12

UA11

UA19

UA18

Table 272

ESDI card RS-232-C/high-speed interface jumper settings

Mode

RS-232-C interface

High-speed interface

RS-232-C interface

High-speed interface

Port

1

1

2

2

Jumper socket designations

UB9

UB10

UB16

UB17

UB11

UB12

UB18

UB19


All of the other ESDI port operating parameters are defined in software and

downloaded to the assigned ESDI port. See Table 266 on page 855 . These

changes are made using the Configuration Record program (LD 17).

Instructions for the Configuration Record program are found in the Software

Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311).


Record program (LD 17) are shown in LD 17 – Serial port configuration


Page 866 of 906


parameters. These parameters must be set for each ports if both ports are

being used.



REQ:

TYPE:

IOTB

ADAN

CDNO

DENS

USER

XSM

CHG

CFN

YES

NEW TTY x

NEW PRT x

1-16

DDEN xxx

(NO) YES

Change configuration.

Configuration type.

Change input/output devices.


Use the ESDI card number to keep track of all ports.

Double density SDI paddle board.




553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 867 of 906

Applications

The QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card is used any time that a high-speed, fully synchronous serial data communication channel is needed.

The ESDI card is typically used to connect to the following:

• Meridian Mail

• A host computer using Meridian Link

• An auxiliary processor

The system processor transfers data to the ESDI card in blocks consisting of

1 to 128 eight-bit octets. Each block is processed in accordance with the

LAPB subset of the HDLC protocol and is transmitted serially to the output port.

In receive mode, the EDSI card receives data serially from the input port packages in LAPB information frames. After determining that the block is error-free, the ESDI card supplies the data to the system processor as a block.

The ESDI card serial ports terminate on the card front panel. Figure 186 on page 868

shows the typical ESDI card connections in a system.


Page 868 of 906


Figure 186

QPC513 ESDI card cabling

Filter adapters (Note 2)

Meridian Link

Port 2

Cables to peripherals

Meridian Mail

Port 1

I/O panel

Backplane

Card front panel

Q

P

C

5

1

3

J1

J2

Module front

NT8D95 cables (Note 1)

NT8D82 cables

Note 1: This cable available in different lengths with various

: male/female connector combinations.

Note 2: Supplied with NT8D82 cable.

553-5984

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

884

Page 869 of 906

QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869




Configuring the QSDI card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882

Introduction

The QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface (QSDI) card provides four

RS-232-C serial ports between the system and external devices. The QSDI card plugs into a slot in the common equipment area of any system.

The Quad Serial Data Interface card is normally used to connect the system to its administration and maintenance terminal. It is also used to connect the system to a background terminal (used in the Hotel/Motel environment), a modem, or the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) and Call Detail Recording

(CDR) features.

The QSDI card is compatible with all existing system software. It does not support 20 mA current loop interface.


Page 870 of 906

QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card

QSDI cards are housed in the following modules:


• NT6D39 CPU/Network module (slots 1 through 9, and 13)

• NT6D60 Core module (slots 0 through 5)

• NT8D35 Network module (slots 5 through 13)


Note: When a QSDI card is installed in an NT6D60 Core module, an

NT8D34 CPU module, or slot 13 of an NT6D39 CPU/Network module in a dual-CPU system, any input/output I/O device connected to the card does not function when the CPU in that module is inactive.


The QPC841 QSDI card is a printed circuit board measuring 31.75 cm by

25.4 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.). The front panel is 2.54 cm (1 in.) thick. See


Up to four QSDI boards can be used in a system, allowing a total of sixteen asynchronous serial ports. The four serial ports on each card are addressed as two pairs of consecutive addresses (0 and 1, 2 and 3, and so on up to 14 and

15). The pairs need not be consecutive. For example: pairs 0 and 1, and 4 and

5 could be used.

The card front panel has two connectors, J1 and J2. Connector J1 is used for port 1 while connector J2 is used for ports 2, 3, and 4. It also has an Enable/

Disable (ENB/DIS) switch and a red LED. The LED indicates that the card has been disabled. It is lit when the following occurs:

• the ENB/DIS switch is set to DIS

• all of the ports on the card are disabled in software

• none of the card ports are configured in software

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 871 of 906

Figure 187

QPC841 QSDI card front panel

Card lock latch

QPC841

QSDI

ENB

DIS

J1

LED


Port 1 connector

(RS-232C)

J2

Ports 2, 3, and 4 connector

(non-standard)

Card lock latch

553-5985


Page 872 of 906



The QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card contains all the logic for four asynchronous serial ports, including the baud rate generators. These serial ports are directly accessed by the system processor using memory reads and writes.

The QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card contains four universal asynchronous receiver/transmitters (UARTs) and the logic necessary to

connect the UARTs to the system processor bus. See Figure 188 on page 873 .

The other logic on the card consists of four baud rate generators, four

RS-232-C driver/receiver pairs, and the jumpers and logic needed to configure the UARTs.

The address select switches and logic on the card always address the UARTs using two pairs of addresses: 0 and 1, and 2 and 3 through 15 and 16. The pairs do not need to be consecutive. Other switches on the board determine the baud rate for each individual port and whether the port is configured to talk to a terminal (DTE equipment) or a modem (DCE equipment).

Instructions for setting the jumpers are given later in this section.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Figure 188

QPC841 QSDI card block diagram


Page 873 of 906

UARTs


UART no. 1

UART no. 2

UART no. 3

UART no. 4

TD

RD

Port 1

TD

RD

Port 2

TD

RD

Port 3

TD

RD

Port 4

J1

J2



Processor bus

553-5986


Page 874 of 906



Connector J1 is connected to port one, and uses the RS-232-C standard

DB-25 pinout. Connector J2 is connected to ports two, three, and four, and is a non-standard pinout that requires an adapter cable. An adapter cable

(NT8D96) splits the J2 signals out to three standard RS-232-C connectors.

Port 2 is connected to connector A, Port 3 is connected to connector B, and

Port 4 is connected to connector C.

Table 273 shows the pinouts for connector J1, and Table 274 on page 875

shows the pinouts for connector J2.

Table 273

Connector J1 pin assignments

Pin number Signal Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode

6

7

4

5

1

2

3

FGD

TD

RD

RTS

CTS

DSR

GND

Frame ground

Received data

Transmitted data

Request to send (not used)

Clear to send (Note 1)


Ground

Frame ground

Transmitted data

Received data


Clear to send

Data set ready

Ground

8

20

CD

DTR


Data terminal ready

Carrier detect (not used)


Note 1: In DTE mode, the signals CD, DSR, and CTS are tied to +12 volts (through a resistor) to indicate that the QSDI port is always ready to transmit and receive data.

Note 2: In DCE mode, the signals DTR, and RTS are tied to +12 volts (through a resistor) to indicate that the QSDI port is always ready to transmit and receive data.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 875 of 906

Table 274

Connector J2 pin assignments (Part 1 of 2)

CTS

DSR

GND

CD

DTR

TD

RD

RTS

FGD

TD

RD

RTS

CTS

DSR

GND

CD

DTR

TD

RD

RTS

CTS

DSR

Pin

Number Port Signal Purpose in DTE mode

12

13

25

24

20

9

10

11

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

23

14

15

16

17

18

2

3

4

Frame ground

Transmitted data

Received data




Ground


Data terminal ready

Transmitted data

Received data




Ground


Data terminal ready

Transmitted data

Received data





Frame ground

Transmitted data

Received data


Clear to send

Data set ready

Ground

Carrier detect (not Used)

Data terminal ready (Note 2))

Transmitted data

Received data

Request to send (Note 2))

Clear to send

Data set ready

Ground


Data terminal ready (Note 2))

Transmitted data

Received data

Request to send (Note 2))

Clear to send

Data set ready


Page 876 of 906


Table 274

Connector J2 pin assignments (Part 2 of 2)

Pin

Number Port Signal Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode

19

21

GND

CD

Ground

Carrier detect (Note 1

Ground


22 DTR Data terminal ready Data terminal ready (Note 2))

Note 1: In DTE mode, the signals CD, DSR, and CTS are tied to +12 volts (through a resistor) to indicate that the QSDI port is always ready to transmit and receive data.

Note 2: In DCE mode, the signals DTR and RTS are tied to +12 volts (through a resistor) to indicate that the QSDI port is always ready to transmit and receive data.

Configuring the QSDI card

Configuring the QSDI card consists of setting these option switches for each serial port:

• Port address

• Baud rate

• DTE/DCE mode

Figure 189 on page 880 shows the location of the option switches on the

QSDI card. Instructions for setting these switches are in the section that follows.

Address switch settings

Table 275 on page 877 lists the address switch settings for the QPC841 Quad

Serial Data Interface card. The address select jumpers and logic on the card address the UARTs using two pairs of addresses: 0 and 1, 2 and 3, through 15 and 16. The pairs do not need to be consecutive. Switch SW14 is used to

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 877 of 906

select the addresses for ports 1 and 2. Switch SW15 is used to select the addresses for ports 3 and 4.

Table 275

QSDI card address switch settings


SW15 Port 3 Port 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Device pair addresses

10

12

6

8

0

2

4

1

3

5

7

9

11

13 off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off on on on on off off off on on off off on on off

14 15 off off off off off off off


Note 2: To avoid address conflicts, SW14 and SW15 can never have identical settings.

Note 3: To disable ports 1 and 2, set SW14 position 1 to ON. To disable ports 3 and 4, set

SW15 position 1 to ON.



Page 878 of 906


Baud rate switch settings

Table 276 lists the switch settings necessary to set the baud rate.

Table 276

QSDI card baud rate switch settings

Port 1 – SW10 Port 2 – SW11 Port 3 – SW12 Port 4 – SW13

Baud rate

150

300

600

1200

2400

4800

9600

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

off off on on off off on on off off on on off off on on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off off off on off off off on off off off on off off off on off on on off off on on off off on on off off on on off off off on off off off on off off off on off off off on off off on off off off on off off off on off off off on off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 879 of 906

DTE/DCE mode switch settings

Table 277 shows the DTE/DCE mode selection switches for the four serial

ports.

Table 277

QSDI card DTE/DCE mode switch settings

Port 1 – SW8 Port1 – SW9

6

off on

Mode 1 2 3

DTE (Terminal) on on on

DCE (Modem) off off off

4

on off

Port 2 – SW6

5

on off

Mode 1 2 3



4

on off

Port 3 – SW4

5

on off

Mode 1 2 3



4

on off

Port 4 – SW2

5

on off

Mode 1 2 3



4 5

on on off off

6 1 2

on off off off on on

3 4 5

off off off on on on

Port 2 – SW7

6 1 2


3 4 5


Port 3 – SW5

6 1 2


3 4 5


Port 4 – SW3

6 1 2


3 4 5


6

off on

6

off on

6

off on

Test switch setting

Switch SW16 is only used for factory testing; all of its switches must be set to OFF for proper operation.


Page 880 of 906


Figure 189

QSDI card option switch locations

O

N

1 2 3 4 O

N

1 2 3 4 O

N

1 2 3 4 O

N

1 2 3 4

Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4

Baud rate selection

O

N

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Ports

1 and 2

O

N

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Ports

3 and 4

O

N

1 2 3 4

Address selection

O

N

1 2 3 4 5 6

DCE

DTE

O

N

1 2 3 4 5 6

DTE

DCE

O

N

1 2 3 4 5 6

DCE

DTE

O

N

1 2 3 4 5 6

DTE

DCE

O

N

1 2 3 4 5 6

DCE

DTE

O 1 2 3 4

N

5 6

DTE

DCE

O

N

1 2 3 4 5 6

DCE

DTE

O

N

1 2 3 4 5 6

DTE

DCE

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Port 4

DTE / DCE mode selection

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

553-5987


Page 881 of 906


Once the QPC841 QSDI card has been installed in the system, the system software needs to be configured to recognize it. This is done using the

Configuration Record program LD 17. Instructions for running the

Configuration Record program are found in Software Input/Output:



Record program LD 17 are shown in LD 17 – Serial port configuration parameters. These parameters must be set for each port that is being used.


Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

IOTB

ADAN

CDNO

DENS

USER

XSM

Response

CHG

CFN

YES

NEW TTY x

NEW PRT x

1-16

DDEN xxx

NO YES

Description

Change configuration.

Configuration type.

Change input/output devices.


Use the QSDI card number to keep track of all ports.

Double density SDI paddle board.

Enter the user of port x. The values that can be entered depend on the software being used. See Software Input/




Page 882 of 906


Applications

The QPD841 Quad Serial Data Interface (QSDI) card is used to connect the switch to a variety of communication devices and peripherals. Any RS-232-C compatible device can be connected to any of the four serial ports.

The standard application for the QSDI card is to connect the switch to the system console. This can be either a direct connection if the console is located near the switch, or through a modem for remote maintenance.

Bell 103/212 compatible dumb modems are recommended to connect a remote data terminal. If a smart modem (such as a Hayes modem) is used, select the dumb mode of operation (Command Recognition OFF, Command

Echo OFF) before connecting the modem to the asynchronous port.

Serial data interface connector J1 is a standard RS-232-C DB-25 connector that connects port 1 of the QSDI card to outside peripherals. Connector J2 is non-standard in that it contains the connections for the three remaining serial ports (ports 2, 3, and 4), on a single DB-25 connector. An adapter cable must be used to connect to standard RS-232-C peripherals. Cables that are applicable to the QSDI card are:

• SDI male-to-female flat cables (internal module use only)

— NT8D82

— QCAD290

Note: This cable is available in different lengths. Refer to the Equipment

Identification (553-3001-154) for more information

— QCAD42

• SDI male-to-male round cables (external use only)

— NT8D95

• SDI to I/O cables (system options use only)

— NT8D82

Note: This cable is available in different lengths. Refer to Equipment


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 883 of 906

• SDI multiple-port cable (internal system options use only)

— NT8D90

• SDI I/O to DTE/DCE cables (system options use only)

— NT8D95

Note: This cable is available in different lengths. Refer to Equipment


• SID Multiple-port cable (system options use only)

— NT8D96

Figure 190 shows the QPC841 card and the cables listed above in a standard

configuration.

Figure 190

QPC841 QSDI card cabling

To terminal equipment

Port 1

Port 2

NT8D95 cable

I/O panel

Filter adapters

(Note)

Port 3

Port 4

Backplane

Q

P

C

8

4

1

J1

J2

Card faceplate

Module front

NT8D95 cables

NT8D96 cable

NT8D90 cable

Note: Supplied with NT8D82 cable.

NT8D82 cables

553-2034


Page 884 of 906


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

900

Page 885 of 906

The TDS/DTR card

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886

Introduction

The TDS/DTR card function was incorporated into the NTDK20 SSC.

However, it is still supported on the system.

The TDS/DTR functionality is also incorporated into the NTDK97 MSC card used with Chassis system. The TDS/DTR is not required in a 2 chassis

Chassis system.

You can install this card in slots 1 through 9 in the main cabinet. The card is not supported in the expansion cabinets.

it must be manually programmed in LD 13 (for DTR) and LD 17 (for TDS and TTY).

The TDS/DTR card provides:

• 30 channels of Tone and Digit Switch

• Two Serial Data Interface ports

• 8 tone detection circuits configured as Digitone Receivers


Page 886 of 906

The TDS/DTR card

Features

Tone transmitter

The TDS/DTR tone transmitter provides 30 channels of tone transmission.

Up to 256 tones are available as u-Law or A-Law and up to 256 bursts and cadences are downloaded from the CPU.

The TDS/DTR card does not provide the Music on Hold feature as do other

TDS cards. The music source must come from a standard trunk card.

Tone detector

The TDS/DTR card provides eight channels of DTMF (Dual Tone

Multi-Frequency) detection in A-Law or µ-Law.

In North America, pre-programmed data is configured for µ-Law tone detection.

SDI function

The TDS/DTR card provides two SDI (Serial Data Interface) ports.

Refer to “SDI ports” in Installation planning (553-3001-120) for more information.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Tones and cadences

The following tables give the tones and cadences provided by the NTAK03

TDS/DTR card.

Table 278

NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 µ-Law tones and cadence (Part 1 of 6)

Tone #

12

13

14

15

10

11

8

9

16

17

18

6

7

4

5

1

2

3

Frequency

(Hz)

350/440

(533 + 666) x 10

440

350/440

440/480

480

480/620

1020

600

600

440/480

350/480

440/620

940/1630

700/1210

700/1340

700/1480

770/1210

dB below overload

-16

-23

-16

-22/-22

-23/-23

-24/-24

-12/-10

-12/-10

-23/-23

-23/-23

-23

-19/-19

-25/-25

-23

-30/-30

-12/-10

-12/-10

-12/-10

The TDS/DTR card

Page 887 of 906

Precision

Ringing

Tones

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

DTMF

Digits

2

3

P

1

4

MF Digits


Page 888 of 906

The TDS/DTR card

Table 278


Tone #

31

32

33

34

27

28

29

30

23

24

25

26

19

20

21

22

35

36

37

38

Frequency

(Hz)

770/1340

770/1480

850/1210

850/1340

850/1480

940/1340

940/1210

940/1480

700/1630

770/1630

850/1630 reserved reserved reserved

400

[400 x

(120@85%)]

940/1630

700/1210

700/1340

700/1480


-12/-10

-12/-10

-12/-10

-12/-10

-12/-10

-12/-10

-12/-10

-12/-10

-12/-10

-12/-10

-12/-10

-19

-19

-17/-15

-17/-15

-17/-15

-17/-15

Precision

Ringing

Tones

÷

÷

DTMF

Digits

*

#

9

0

7

8

5

6

Fo

F

I

2

3

P

1

MF Digits

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

The TDS/DTR card

Page 889 of 906

Table 278


Tone #

51

52

53

54

47

48

49

50

55

56

57

58

59

43

44

45

46

39

40

41

42

Frequency

(Hz)

770/1210

770/1340

770/1480

850/1210

850/1340

850/1480

940/1340

940/1210

940/1480

700/1630

770/1630

850/1630 reserved reserved

1300/1500

700/900

700/1100

900/1100

700/1300

900/1300

1100/1300


-17/-15

-17/-15

-17/-15

-17/-15

-17/-15

-17/-15

-17/-15

-17/-15

-17/-15

-17/-15

-17/-15

-17/-15

-13/-13

-13/-13

-13/-13

-13/-13

-13/-13

-13/-13

-13/-13

Precision

Ringing

Tones

DTMF

Digits

0

*

8

9

6

7

4

5

F

I

#

Fo

MF Digits

0

1

2/CC

3

4

5

6


76

77

78

79

72

73

74

75

68

69

70

71

64

65

66

67

Page 890 of 906

The TDS/DTR card

Table 278


Precision

Ringing

Tones

DTMF

Digits Tone #

60

61

62

63

Frequency

(Hz)

700/1500

900/1500

1100/1500

700/1700


-13/-13

-13/-13

-13/-13

-13/-13

900/1700

1100/1700

1300/1700

1500/1700

400

400

400 x 50

(533 + 666) x 20 reserved

350/440

480/620

440/480

400

400/450

480/620

440/480

-13/-13

-13/-13

-13/-13

-13/-13

-11

-14

-14

-23/-23

-15/-15

-15/-15

-15/-15

-25

-14/-14

-19/-19

-19/-19

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

MF Digits

7

8

9

ST3P/RB/

C11

STP/C12

KP/CR/KP1

ST2P/KP2

ST/CC

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

The TDS/DTR card

Page 891 of 906

Table 278


Tone #

92

93

94

95

88

89

90

91

96

97

98

99

100

84

85

86

87

80

81

82

83

Frequency

(Hz)

950

1400

1800

470

940

1300

1500

1880

480

420

440 reserved

350/440

400/450

400

1400

350/440

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD


-19

-9

-29

-17/-17

-17/-17

-17

-26

-12

-12

-12

0

0

0

0

0

-10/-10

Precision

Ringing

Tones

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

DTMF

Digits MF Digits


Page 892 of 906

The TDS/DTR card

Table 278


Tone #

101

102

103

104

Frequency

(Hz)

600

800

1400

820


-19

-19

-23

-7

Precision

Ringing

Tones

÷

÷

÷

DTMF

Digits MF Digits

Note: Tones #1 - 16 (inclusive) and #234 - 249 (inclusive) are included for Norwegian and Malaysian specifications.

Table 279

NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences (Part 1 of 9)

Precision

Ringing

Tones MF Digits Tone #

6

7

4

5

1

2

3

10

11

8

9

Frequency (Hz)

940 X 1630

700 X 1210

700 X 1340

700 X 1480

770 X 1210

770 X 1340

770 X 1480

850 X 1210

850 X 1340

850 X 1480

940 X 1340


-14/-13

-14/-13

-14/-13

-14/-13

-14/-13

-14/-13

-14/-13

-14/-13

-14/-13

-14/-13

-14/-13

DTMF

Digits

5

6

3

4

P

1

2

9

0

7

8

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

The TDS/DTR card

Page 893 of 906

Table 279


Tone #

95

96

97

98

91

92

93

94

99

100

101

102

103

16

17

89

90

12

13

14

15

Frequency (Hz)

700/1340

700/1480

770/1210

770/1340

770/1480

850/1210

850/1340

850/1480

940 X 1210

940 X 1480

700 X 1630

770 X 1630

850 X 1630

1400

940/1630

700/1210

940/1210

940/1340

940/1480

700/1630

770/1630


-13/-12

-13/-12

-13/-12

-13/-12

-13/-12

-13/-12

-13/-12

-13/-12

-14/-13

-14/-13

-14/-13

-14/-13

-14/-13

-37

-13/-12

-13/-12

-13/-12

-13/-12

-13/-12

-13/-12

-13/-12

Precision

Ringing

Tones

DTMF

Digits

F0

F

*

#

I

#

F0

F0

0

*

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

P

1

MF Digits


Page 894 of 906

The TDS/DTR card

Table 279


Tone # Frequency (Hz)

1800

940/1630

700/1210

700/1340

700/1480

770/1210

770/1340

770/1480

850/1630

350/440

400/450

1400

440

420

950

1400

850/1210

850/1340

850/1480

940/1340

940/1210

116

117

118

119

112

113

114

115

120

121

122

123

124

108

109

110

111

104

105

106

107


-13/-12

-17/-17

-17/-17

-26

-23

-9

-12

-12

-12

-12/-10

-12/-10

-12/-10

-12/-10

-12/-10

-12/-10

-12/-10

-12/-10

-12/-10

-12/-10

-12/-10

-12/-10

Precision

Ringing

Tones

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

DTMF

Digits

I

5

6

3

4

P

1

2

9

0

7

8

*

MF Digits

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

The TDS/DTR card

Page 895 of 906

Table 279


Tone #

137

138

139

140

133

134

135

136

141

142

143

144

145

129

130

131

132

125

126

127

128

Frequency (Hz)

1400

950

1400

1800

420

940/1630

700/1210

700/1340

940/1480

700/1630

770/1630

850/1630

350/440

400

400

400/450

700/1480

770/1210

770/1340

770/1480

850/1210


-15

-19

-20

-20

-19

-18/-17

-18/-17

-18/-17

-12/-10

-12/-10

-12/-10

-12/-10

-22/-22

-19

-25

-22/-22

-18/-17

-18/-17

-18/-17

-18/-17

-18/-17

Precision

Ringing

Tones

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

DTMF

Digits

F

I

#

F0

5

6

3

4

7

P

1

2

MF Digits


Page 896 of 906

The TDS/DTR card

Table 279


Tone #

158

159

160

161

154

155

156

157

162

163

164

165

166

150

151

152

153

146

147

148

149

Frequency (Hz)

850/1340

850/1480

940/1340

940/1210

940/1480

700/1630

770/1630

850/1630

(533 + 666) X 10

(533 + 666) X 20

400

820

420

420

420 X 25

(553 + 666) X 10

(553 + 666) X 20

420

480

330

330/440


-18/-17

-18/-17

-18/-17

-18/-17

-18/-17

-18/-17

-18/-17

-18/-17

-12

-25

-12

-23

-23

-23

-12

-14

-23

-22

-22

-11

-11/-14

Precision

Ringing

Tones

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

DTMF

Digits

F

I

#

F0

0

*

8

9

MF Digits

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

The TDS/DTR card

Page 897 of 906

Table 279


Tone #

179

180

181

182

175

176

177

178

183

184

185

186

187

171

172

173

174

167

168

169

170

Frequency (Hz)

420

420

1020

1800

1400

950

1400

1800

1700

440

380

1400

820

850

420 reserved

950

470

940

1880

400


-7

-8

-32

-19

-14

-8

-32

-6

-2

-13

-17

-23

-29

-29

-29

-22

0

0

0

-22

Precision

Ringing

Tones

÷

÷

÷

÷

DTMF

Digits

F

I

#

F0

0

*

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

P

1

MF Digits


Page 898 of 906

The TDS/DTR card

Table 279


Precision

Ringing

Tones

DTMF

Digits Tone #

200

201

202

203

196

197

198

199

204

205

206

207

208

192

193

194

195

188

189

190

191

Frequency (Hz)

770/1340

770/1480

850/1210

850/1340

850/1480

940/1340

940/1210

940/1480

420 X 25

950

950

940/1630

700/1210

700/1340

700/1480

770/1210

700/1630

770/1630

850/1630

420

420


-9/-7

-9/-7

-9/-7

-9/-7

-9/-7

-9/-7

-9/-7

-9/-7

-9/-7

-9/-7

-9/-7

-10

-8

-9/-7

-9/-7

-9/-7

-9/-7

-17

-16

-25

-9/-7

MF Digits

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

The TDS/DTR card

Page 899 of 906

Table 279


Precision

Ringing

Tones

DTMF

Digits Tone #

221

222

223

224

217

218

219

220

225

226

227

228

229

213

214

215

216

209

210

211

212

Frequency (Hz)

350/420

940/1630

700/1210

700/1340

700/1480

770/1210

770/1340

770/1480

420

1400

1400

350/420

420

450

450

820

850/1210

850/1340

850/1480

940/1340

940/1210


-14/-14

-14/-12

-14/-12

-14/-12

-14/-12

-14/-12

-14/-12

-14/-12

-14/-12

-14/-12

-14/-12

-14/-12

-14/-12

-14

-12

-22

-16

-4

-18

-9

-9/-9

MF Digits


Page 900 of 906

The TDS/DTR card

Table 279


Precision

Ringing

Tones

DTMF

Digits Tone #

234

235

236

237

230

231

232

233

238

239

240

241

Frequency (Hz)

940/1480

700/1630

770/1630

850/1630

940 X 1630

700 X 1210

700 X 1340

700 X 1480

770 X 1210

770 X 1340

770 X 1480

850 X 1210


-14/-12

-14/-12

-14/-12

-14/-12

-17/-15

-17/-15

-17/-15

-17/-15

-17/-15

-17/-15

-17/-15

-17/-15

6

7

4

5

2

3 p

1

MF Digits

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

906

Page 901 of 906

Appendix A: LAPB Data Link Control protocol

Contents


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901

Frame structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902

LAPB balanced class of procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903

Commands and responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904

Description of procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905

Introduction

This chapter describes the LAPB Data Link Control protocol used with the

QPC513 ESDI card. The protocol is a subset of the HDLC procedures which are described in International Organization for Standardization procedures

ISO 3309-1979 (E), ISO 4335-1979 (E) and appendices 1 and 2, and ISO

6256-1981 (E). Refer to these procedures for complete LAPB details.

Applications which use an ESDI port in synchronous mode must conform to the following requirements.

Operation

Circuit Switch Equipment transfers data to the QPC513 in blocks consisting of 1 to 128 eight-bit octets. Each block is processed in accordance with the


Page 902 of 906

Appendix A: LAPB Data Link Control protocol

LAPB subset of the HDLC protocol and transmitted serially to the line at a rate determined by the downloaded parameters.

The QPC513 card receives data serially from the line, packaged in LAPB information frames. After determining that a block is error free the data is supplied to the Circuit Switch Equipment as a block.

Frame structure

All transmissions are in frames and each frame conforms to the format shown

in Table 280 on page 903 . In particular, frame elements for applications using

a port on the QPC513 follow these LAPB conventions:

• Zero information field is permitted.

• Inter-frame time fill is accomplished by transmitting contiguous flags.

This is compatible with AT&T Technical Requirement BX.25 and

ADCCP standards.

• Extensions for the address field or the control field are not permitted.

This requirement imposes constraints to satellite operations.

• Individual station addresses are assigned in service change for balanced configuration. The default ESDI address is 10000000. The far-end default address is 11000000.

• The LAPB basic control field (modules 8) format is implemented.

• Frame check sequence is implemented in accordance with LAPB procedures.

553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 903 of 906

Table 280

LAPB frame structure

Flag Address Control Information FCS Flag

01111110 8 bits 8 bits unspecified

(no. of bits)

16 bits 01111110

Legend:

Flag: Flag sequence – All frames start and end with the flag sequence. (A single flag is used as both the closing flag for one frame and the opening flag for the next frame.)

Address: Station address field – In command frames, the address identifies the station for whom the command is intended. In response frames, the address identifies the station from which the response originated.

Control: Control field – This field contains commands or responses and sequence numbers.

Information: Information field – Information may be any sequence of bits, usually related to a convenient character structure such as an octet, but may be an unspecified number (from 1 to 128) of bits unrelated to a character structure.

FCS: Frame check sequence.

LAPB balanced class of procedure

Applications which use ports on the QPC513 are automatically designated as

BAC, 2, 8 (for example, balanced operation, asynchronous balanced mode class of procedure with optional functions 2 and 8 implemented).

Balanced configuration

A balanced configuration is one in which two combined stations have identical responsibilities for exchanging data and control information and for

initiating error recovery functions, as shown in Figure 191 on page 904 .

Combined station

A combined station has balanced link control capability and transmits both commands and responses to, and receives both commands and responses from the other combined station.


Page 904 of 906


Figure 191

Balanced configuration

Commands

Combined station

Responses

Combined station

553-3741

Asynchronous Balanced Mode

Asynchronous Balanced Mode (ABM) is a balanced, configured operational mode in which either combined station may send commands at any time and may initiate certain response frame transmissions without receiving permission from the other combined station.

Commands and responses

The elements of procedure are described in terms of actions which take place when a command is received. The classes of procedures are a combination of the frame structure and the set of elements that satisfy the requirements of a specific application. The LAPB Balanced Asynchronous Class of Procedure

(BAC, 2, 8) is implemented. This is compatible with both BX.25 and ADCCP specifications. The basic set of commands and responses is listed in


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005


Page 905 of 906

Table 281

Commands and responses

Command Response Option

I

RR

RNR

REJ

RR

RNR

REJ or FRMR

8

2

SABM

DISC

UA

DM

Legend:

I: Information

RR: Receive ready

RNR: Receive not ready

REJ: Reject

SABM: Set asynchronous balanced mode

DISC: Disconnect

RSET: Reset

FRMR: Frame reject

UA: Unnumbered acknowledge

DM: Disconnect mode

Option 2: Provides ability for more timely reporting of I frame sequence errors

Option 8: Limits the procedure to allow I frames to be commands only

Description of procedure

The basic LAPB procedures must be implemented to satisfy the following:

• standard use of the poll/final bit (for more information, see

ISO-4375-1979-[E])

• exception condition reporting and recovery implemented in accordance with BX.25 and ADCCP specifications

• link set-up and disconnect implemented according to BX.25 specifications


Page 906 of 906


553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005

Family Product Manual Contacts Copyright FCC notice Trademarks Document number Product release Document release Date Publish

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card

Description and Installation

Copyright © Nortel Networks Limited 2005

All Rights Reserved

Information is subject to change without notice.

Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes in design or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant.

Nortel, Nortel (Logo), the Globemark, This is the Way, This is

Nortel (Design mark), SL-1, Meridian 1, and Succession are trademarks of Nortel Networks.

Publication number: 553-3001-211

Document release: Standard 3.00

Date: August 2005

Produced in Canada

Nortel Networks | User manual | Circuit Card Description and Installation

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card

Description and Installation

Revision history

Contents

LIst of procedures

About this document

Note on legacy products and releases

Technical Documentation link under Support & Training on the Nortel

System migration

Terminology

NTPs

Online

CD-ROM

Overview

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

NT5D11 lineside T1 interface card

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface card

NT8D02 digital line card

NT8D09 analog message waiting line card

Installation

Operation

Host interface bus

Intelligent Peripheral Equipment

Analog line interface units

Coder/Decoder circuit

Variable gain filters

Balancing network

Line interface and foreign voltage protection

Digital line interface units

TCM loop interfaces

Signaling

Analog line call operation

Incoming calls

Outgoing calls

Message waiting

Analog line supervision

Digital line call operation

Lineside T1 call operation

Loop Start Mode

Ground Start Mode

Ground Start Restrictions

Voice frequency audio level

Off-premise line protection

Line protectors

Line protection grounding

Line and telephone components

Telephones

Line cards

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk card

1

2

3

4

5

6

Host interface bus

Intelligent Peripheral Equipment

Trunk interface unit

Uses

Features

Specifications

Power consumption

Environmental

Electrostatic discharge

Electromagnetic interference

Reliability

Installation

Configuring the system software

Maintenance

Circuit card installation

WARNING

WARNING

DANGER

CAUTION

Acceptance tests

Option settings